CHRONOLOGY OF DENUDATION IN THE SOUTHERN FLINDERS

RANGES, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY C. R. TWIDALE*

Summary

The topography of the Southern Flinders Ranges is largely a reflection of structure. Great

thicknesses of rock have been eroded over a long period of geological time. Structures involving

sandstones tend to stand out in the topograph and have been so deeply excavated that inversion of

relief has occurred on a large scale. Erosion has taken place in three distinct phases. The most

ancient landform elements (Mt. Brown, Kanyaka, surfaces) represented in the present landscape are

remnants of a deeply weathered pre-upper Eocene landsurface, which suffered warping and which

is best preserved beneath the sediments underlying the Willochra plain. These deposits are of upper

Eocene age and derive from the dissection of the earlier surface. By the middle-late Tertiary

considerable intermontane plains and extensive valley floors (Proby surface) had again been

developed and the renewed dissection of these resulted in the modern valley floors and piedmont

plains (Willochra surface). The coming of the European has seen an acceleration of erosion and

deposition.

The trellis drainage pattern is basically old (at least middle Tertiary in age) but is still developing.

The pattern comprises long subsequents joined by the development of resequent or obsequent

tributaries, which have affected capture. However, superimposition of a special type has occurred

locally. The pattern of relief is also ancient; the distribution of ridge and vale is fundamentally the

same now as it was in early Tertiary times. Because (chemical) weathering is most marked beneath

valley floors, relief amplitude has probably increased rather than diminished. Slopes have been

steepened b lower slope rotting and the etching out of the scarp foot zone. On plains and valley

floors mantles of coarse quartzitic debris, which have a significant protective role, have

accumulated.

The area has suffered both climatic and tectonic instability. No phase of erosion (save possibly in

the pre-upper Eocene) has continued uninterrupted for sufficient duration for the area to be reduced

wholly to low relief. During the Cainozoic there have been no cycles. only distinct phases of

erosion.

CHRONOLOGY OF DENUDATION IN THE

SOUTHERN FLINDERS RANGES, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

by C. R. Twinare’

[Read 14 April 1966]

SUMMARY

The topography of the Southern Flinders Ranges is largely a reflection of

structure, Great thicknesses of rock have heen eroded over a long period of

geological time. Strnctures invulving sandstones tend to stand out in the topo-

graphy and haye been so deeply excavated that inversion of relief has oveurred

on 2 large scale. Erosion has taken place in three distinet phases. The most

ancient landform elements (Mt. Brown, Kanyaka. surfaces) represented in the

present landscape are remnants of a deeply weathered pre-upper Eocene land

surlace, which suffered warping and which is best preserved beneath the sedi-

ments underlying the Willochra plain. These deposits are of upper Eocene age

and derive frum the dissection of the earlier surface, By the mid Jetate Tertiary

considerable intermontane plains and extensive valley floms (Proby surface)

had again been developed and the renewed dissection of these resulted in the

modern valley floors and piedmont plains (Willochra surface). The coming of

the Européan has seen an acceleration of erosion and denusition.

The trellis drainage pattern’ is basically old (at least middle Tertiary in

age) but is still developing, The patie comprises lune subsequents joined

by the development of resequent or obsequent tributaries which. have effected

capture, However, superimposition of a special type has ageurred locally. The

pattern of telief is also ancient: the distribution of ridge and valé is funda-

mentally the same now us it was in carly Tertiary times. Because (chemical)

weathering is most marked beneath valley floors. relief amplitade has probably

increased rather than diminished, Slopes have been steepened by lower slape

rotting and the etching out of the scarp foot zone. On plains and valley floors

mantles of coarse quartzitic debris. which have a sigmficant protective role,

have accumulated.

The area has suffered both climatic and tectonic instability, No phase of

erosion (save possibly in the pre-upper Eocene) has continued uninterrupted

for sufficient duration for the area to be ceduced wholly to low relief, During

the Cainovoie there have been no eycles. only distinct phases of erosion.

INTRODUCTION

On 10th March, 1802, Robert Brown, the distinguished botanist, left

Matthew Flinders’ Investigator, then anchored near the head of Spencer Gulf,

aad with several companions marehed eastward across the arid coastal plains

to the “chain of rugged mountains” that Jay beyond. Late in the afternoon of

the same day some of the smull party ascended the highest peak of the range.

From the summit that was later named after him, and which is almost 975 m.

above sea-level, Brown viewed the country beyond this westernmost ridge

of the southern Flinders Ranges, In his journal he noted that “the country on

the opposite” (i.e, the eastern) “side of the chain of momntains is quite Hat”

(Cooper, 1955, p. 78). This is the first recorded description of the Willochra

sf Department of Geography. University of Adelaide.

‘Trans. Roy. Soc. §. Aust. (1966), Vol. 90.

4 Cc, R, TWIDALE

plain, which is the largest of several intermontane plains in the southern

Flinders Ranges.

Flinders, as commander of the expedition, summarised Brown's observa-

tions and experiences, and in his rough log for that day in 1802 described the

Willochra plain as “dead, uninteresting, Hat, country” (ibid., p. 80), Dead it

often appears to be, particularly at the height of a simmering scorching summer's

day, and its Hatness is undeniable; but its lack of interest is at most superficial,

for the landscape of the plain and the adjacent parts of the southern Flinders

Ranges (Fig. 1), is the product of a long history, the unravelling of which is

the purpose of this article.

fog =

Py aL

he i

2. é

2 a

5 &

Ge ~e.

SaAtTS

2 ¥. 4

5 sP o

5 ae t

. i=] ' tT

2 ELE

3 a = TET.

. r = | (2)

s t o-?

te | =a =

9 i i: 2

te t |

{ &

\ Le =

n tS

South Australia ae ~ r 7 3

re ee aL vials ‘ 4 — os —

Vigtona { NSW, : =

? fs

Fig. J. Location diagram.

STRUCTURE AND SURFACE

An analysis of the topography and underlying bedrock of the study area

mi ig. 2) reveals four important facts, The major features of the topography are

irectly related to the structure of the Ascot bet rocks, The etching out of

(he present land surface has involved the removal of a considcrable thickness

of rocks. Prominent landscape features transgressing structure owe their origin

to erosion, And there are aggradational plains of significant extent.

The Adelaide Geosyncline

During Proterozoic and early Palaeozoic times a thick sequence of sediments

was deposited in the Adelaide Geosyncline, a huge trough located offshore from

Hie great Westralian Shicld continent. The Geosyncline extended from the

Southern Ocean to the far north and north-west of South Australia and inta

adjacent States. The sediments deposited in it buried an eroded Archaean

landscape. To the east of the Willochra plain at least 8,850 rn. of sediments

accumulated though to the west, between the Willochra and Lake Torrens

plains, the sequence was thinner because this area was at the margin of the

DENUDATION IN TIE SOUTHERN FPLINDEHS RANGES. S.A. 5

sulsiding depositional basin. The sedimentary sequence includes mudlstone,

shale, siltstone, tillite (or “glacigenc” beds), limestone and sandstone, Deposi-

tion continued at least into the Cambrian for the strata include limestones with

abundant Atchaeoryatha as well as occasional trilobites (Shepherd and Thatcher,

IA8),

Following the Cambrian and prior to the Permian, probably during the early

or middle Palaeozoic, the Adelaide Geosyneline suffcred orogenesis, The

Archaean basement moved differentially under compressive forces folding the

Proterozoic and carly Palaeozoic sediments in a series of gentle domes and

hasins with broad regional tectonic lows and highs (Webb, 1958). Fanlting

also occurred; in particular there was major overthrusting at the margins of

the orogenic belts, for instance in the great Norwest and Paralana faults in the

northern Flinders and jn the Wilkatana and Outalpa regions of the southern

Flinders and Olary areas (Webb, loc. eit., Sprigy, 1962). Although the prin-

cipal orogenic. movements oveurred in the Palaeozaic, lacustrine sediments of

Triassic age in the Copley and Willochra (Springfleld and Boolcunda Basins)

ureas display dips up to 70°, which is far steeper than any possible initial dip

and is indicative of deformation (Parkin, 1953; | hepherd and Thatcher, op, cit:

Jubnson, 1960), showing that Mesozote or later compression has occurred, The

former Adelaide Ceosyncline was subject to recurrent faulting, largely following

zones delineated during the Palaeozoic, and numerous earth tremors and

occasional curthqnakes indicate that dislocation continues,

Lithological Influences

Included within the Proterozoic-Cambrian sequence ate three sandstone

fermations of great geomorphological significance, They are, in ascending

stratigraphic order, the Emeroo Sandstone, A.B.C. Range Quartzite, and Pornd

Quartzite. The Pound Quartzite directly underlies the Archaeocyatha lime-

stune and in the Ediacara region of the north Flinders contains fossils (Sprigg,

IS47, 1949; Glaessner and Daily, 1959), Each of the sandstone formations

includes lenses am! thin beds of shale, All are arkosic, but eacl is essentially

a single formation of resistant sandstone, Wherever they outcrop they form

Prominent, even spectacular, ridges, ranges and bluffs: the structures in which

they are involved are clearky delineated in the relief: and with few exceptions

they form the high points of the relief (Fig, 2). Each of the sandstone esearp-

meuts rises about 500 m. above the nearby valley or plain. Mount Arden?®,

however, with an elevation of 847 m. (896 on some maps), tops all hut Mt,

Brown, yet is not quartzitic, It is eroded from tillite which. though relatively

resistant, does not match the sandstone formations in this respect, To the

east of the Willochra plain, for instance, the tillite forms soft and rounded

hills which do not compare either in boldness or elevation with the escarpments

of the nearby A.B.C, Quartzite in the Horseshoe Range. Mount Arden is high

becuase it is buttressed against erosion by the Emeroo Sandstone un the west

and the A,B,C. Range Quartzite to the cast,

Limestone, too, where it is sufficiently thick, forms promineut bhiffs, but

where, as is must commonly the case, it is thin it forms only low ridges standing

°'Thit is not the Mount Arden depicted in the magnificent panoramic sketch executed hy

Flinders’ artist, Robert Westall (see Cooper. 1953, p- 109), The Mount Arden shown anil

named there is now known as the Dutchman's Stern, an account of its resemblance when

viewed fron cast or west to the stern of Dutch siiling vessels of the mid-nineteenth century;

E, ]. Eyre named the present Mount Arden on a journey northward over the Luke ‘Tarrens

plains, with incursions mto the adjacent Flinders Ranges, in 1840,

6 C, R. TWIDALE

ane" ) ra .

P \ / /

* NY \

| Lake TORRENS 7 yy a

ea { } EU

Ni 1

LE \

q NN

LA : ,

io a

-%\ r J .

ay eS Ey

Sp held T Bo f x 8

* ringheld Triossic Sogn f Roope 3

w Bacltinds . ” F a ok von HIRE

VOM! Arden ia nancuaros yf

7 Wyotsa Bult ‘ he sovenhar”

4 Dutchmans herr * >

4 Devils Pesan + a

SM! Brown '

& Big Ben H

7 The Bluff q

5 Mi Ragiess 1

@ Hut Hi 1

-i

Watts Sugariset

Lrannaa Bill

td) Helen f ca EN

s 5

HMnveheg Inwer |! Sst

QUARIZITE PIDGES

Feogonal Wiis Ss,

ASD PLAIHE EN

on-5

fa-4=

aprroseew ey

LAL LAL Pe diese Ny) H

, t

a { -

SF MAUVIAL FANS 4 5,

a H

fs te

; nuwes ee we oO OM

sau ae

yduees ~ iN

¥ Folio Axe iN

y, 4

\ armine Aho bie fon

fos

_ fe

RLY oom [

dy a *

> >, 444 insta 5

, /—=F}

Fig, 2. Principal topographic and structural features of the southern Flinders Ranges.

The S-nile bar-scale equals 6 kan.

above the easily eroded argillaccous members of the sedimentary sequence.

The latter underlie the valleys and the few extensive plains.

The disposition, as well as the resistance, of the strata is reflected in the

form of the land surface, Steeply dipping sandstones form hogback ridges

displaying prominent bluffs on both slopes, e.g. adjacent to Buckaringa Gorge,

while gently dipping strata give rise to cuestas, the dissected dip-slopes of which

form fatirons,

Structural Regions

The region adjacent to and including the Willochra plain is in broad view

a denuded NNE-SSW trending anticline, flanked on both east and west by

complex synclinoria containing numerous plunging and faulted anticlines and

synclines.

The synelinorium between the Willochra and Lake Torrens plains includes

all three major sandstone formations, The western escarpment of the ranges is

here formed by the eastward dipping Emeroo Sandstone. The A.B.C. Quartzite

is preserved in synclincs in the Richman’s Valley, Dutchman’s Stern, The Blut

DENUDATION IN THE SOUTHERN FLINDERS RANGES, S.A, 7

and the Horseshoe Range, the Pound Quartzite in Big Ben and the associated

W-shaped vutcrops associated with plhmging folds of the Ragless Range area, in

the anticlinal structure of Hut Hill, and the plunging folds of the Z-shaped

outcrops south and west of Hawker. In addition, both A.B.C. and Pound

Formations form long ridges associated with the limbs of folds, for instance

on the western side of the Mt. Arden Creek Valley, and in the Black Jack

Range. Faulting is evident in the displacement of the Pound Quartzite of

Ragless Range immediately to the north of Mt Ragless, in the truncation of

the A.B.C. Quartzite in Wyaceca Blull, in the abrupt termination of the Pound

Range west of Tfut Hill and in the truncation of the eastern end of The Bluff.

To the east of the latter faulting is demonstrated by the presence of fault breccia

and debris with abundant slickensides, and though the fault plane cannot be

observed, this, plus the topographic evidence already cited and the marked

rectilinearity of the streams in the area, strongly suggests that faulting is respon-

sible for the local landforms (Fig. 3),

Yarragh Vale

Sandstone outereps

a Faull

0 2

“A Dip & Strike of Beds ————e

lem.

Fig, 3. Structure amd drainage in the Big Ben aren. Big Ben is underlain

by the Pound Quartzitc, the Bluff by the A,B.C. Range Quartzite,

8 C, B, TWIDALE

To the east of the Willochra plain the structural arrangement in broad

outline is simple. In two major basins arranged en echelon, the A.B.C. Range

Quartzite stands out strongly, The southern basin is the aptly named Horseshoe

Range, the eastern limb of which is surmounted by two steep-sided castellated

tors in sandstone, one called the Moockra Tower, the other uunarned. Both

synelinal structures are deranged at their southern ends by faults which cause

the displacement of the ridges and their abrupt termination. Neither the

Nmeroo Sandstone nor the Pound Quartzite crops out in this region,

North of the Willochra plain the Pound Quartzite is prominent, but neither

of the other sandstone formations appears. The whole area is a tectonic low,

in which only the upper members of the Adelaide Ceosyncline sediments

appear; and in the Kanyaka valley Archacocyatha limestone crops out in the

synelinal core. Moreover, the disposition and distribution of strata to east and

west of the Willochra plain show that the zone is essentially anticlinal in nature:

the beds dip away from the plain on both sides and the strata appear in reverse

order on opposed flanks of the structure. The Sturt Tillite, for example, occurs

immediately to the west of the Willochra plain, in the neighbourhood of Quorn,

where it dips west; it re-appears, more extensively, to the cast, where it dips

vast. The Willochra plain is thus an ¢roded anticlinal valley. The area is

commonly termed the Willochra Basin, but this refers to the topographic form

and disposition of the unconsolidated Cainuzoic strata deposited in it, not the

strneture of the underlying Proterozoic rocks.

Climute and Process

The various local and regional structures have been etched out and brought

into relief by weathering and erosion, plunging anticlines and synclines, for

example, give rise to convergent and divergent ridges and ranges, the basins

ail synclines ta topographic basins or amphitheatres called pounds (referring

to an enclosure or place of confinement). The weathered and croded matoria

has heen transported and some of it deposited upon lowlands within the ranges,

Much, however, has been carried to the plains adjacent to the Ranges, and in

particular to the Lake Torrens plain, which is underlain by over 30) m. of fresh-

water Cuainozoic sediments.

The climate of the southern Flinders is characteristic of a semi-arid upland.

Century heat is common in summer as are ground frosts in winter. Rainfall is

low to moderate in amount, but is variable and unreliable, The average annual

total is, however, higher within than outside the ranges and in general decreases

northward and eastward in the area (Table 1). Despite the low average

TABLE 1,

Arial Recorded was iii Reeordect mintouis

: ayyerage (with yest) (with yer)

Arietiors om, mehes em. inches cio, = TAhehes

Wilminetan v4 L7 74-44 26°31 (1889) 21-02 K-28 ( T94tt)

nom 3 13 65-46 25-77 (1884) 11-99 4-72 (1929)

Hawker at) {2 67:69 26-Gh (1920), Be4dh She (1940)

Hammered | 28 It BR-B7 21-13 (L21) 10/01 3°94 [LHSH)

Port Auguela 24 9-5 fs-08 20-90 (104) AGL 2-27 (1865)

i nn

rainfall and geuersl high temperatures, water is the most important single agent

of weathering, crosion and deposition, Many exposures show that the hydra-

lio and hydrolysis of minerals is a common form of weathering especially

DENUDATION IN THE SOUTHERN FIINDERS RANGES, S.A. 4

under valley floors and other low points of the relicf. For instance, clays

are commonly kaolinised in these situations, though on upper slopes shales

and similar rocks do not display alteration but crumble to form. a discuntinuwus

yencer of finely comminuted fragments. ‘The agency or agencies responsible

are not certainly known but wefting and drying and unbuttressing may be

important,

Soil and debris creep, and debris slides and avalanches are all in evidence

in the study area. Many are known to have occurred during periods of very

heavy local rains. in narrow valleys in the Pichi Richi Pass, south-west of

Quorn, up to & m. of slope debris is revealed in road and railway cuttings,

in one exposure displaying clear testimony of storm accumulations, There is

a suggestion in the southern and central Flinders Ranges, for example, near

Upalinna H.S., 8 km, northayest of Wilpena, that during its downhill move-

ment slope debris may smooth the surface of the weathered country ruck

bencath.

Rivers run intermittenthy, but the rare floods accomplish much. Summer

fluods are especially effective for then the land surface is most susceptible to

erosion. Large yolumes of weathered and unconsolidated debris are picked

np und transported by wish and rills and carried into trunk streams, Rim-ott

is not heavy, but is rapid owing to the intensity of rainfall, the sparseness of

vegetation, the hardened nature of the arid land surface and the common pre-

sence of impermeable crusts and pans. Trees are uprooted and hurled down-

stveam on the flood, During one such flood on the Hookina Creek caised Dy

heavy tains in the late summer of 1955 the waters reached Lake Torrens (an

event which ovcurs only every five years or so), destroyed the Hookina railway

bridge, initiated many gullies and deposited extensive areas of alluvium,

At Hawker, the nearest official recording station, 2 cm, of rain fell on

the 9th February, but this was followed by 10:4 em. on the 10th. Local informa-

tion is that much heavier falls were received in the ranges (Hawker is located

on an intermontane plain) including one recording of 28 em. in 24 hours on the

10th February.

Aeolian erosion is not so spectacular and obvious as that caused by running

water, but is perhaps quantitatively more important than is generally admitted.

In summer, the plais are scoured by dust devils or willy-willies which transport

a considerable volume of dust and fine sand, and even at night katabatie winds

continue this work adjacent to and within the ranges.

Anthropogenic Influences

The early explorers and settlers gave their names ty many features of the

landscape, such as Mt. Brown, Watts Sugarlouf and Mt. Ragless.

The settlers also left their imprint on the landscape for by clearing wood-

laud, by overgrazing the land, by using agricultural machinery and building

rouds and tracks, and through the introduction of new species of plants and

animals they rendered the land surfuce more than ever susceptible to wind and

water erusion. The overgrazed areas of the Willochra plain and of the Kanyaka

villey provide spectacular examples of accelerated wind und water erosion,

thinigh the effects of gullying are almost cverywhere apparent.

Retief Inversion

The present topographic situation of various structural elements saggests

that much erosion has taken place through geological time, It has been pointed

out that the Willochra plain occupies an anticlinal structure: a considerable

on] CG. KR. TWIDALE

thickness of sediments, conservatively estimated at 6,000 m., has been removed

and what was initially a high point of the relief is now a lowland-relief inversion,

Similarly, Dutchman's Stern (Fig, 2) is a synclinal structure. which now stands

well above the level of the adjacent plains. In detail, of course, there has been

strong differential erosion guided by structure and a relief amplitude of 3(X) m.

is commonplace; at the southern end of the Willochra plain, near the town of

Melrose (351 m.), the elevational difterenice between the plain and the summit

of the nearby Mt, Remarkable (960 m,) is some 600 m.

The etching out of the various structures, the differential erosion of uplands

and valleys, has been accomplished not in a single but in several distinct phases

of erosion,

DENUDATION CHRONOLOGY

Plains of Evosion and Deposition Related to Present Baselevel

The most extensive lowland in the stndy area is the uguradational Willoulist

plain, which is some 96 kn. long from north te south, averages some 16 km,

in width. is underlain by up to 168 m. of unconsolidated sediments, and falls

in elevation from about 335 m, in the south to about {95 m. in the north.

It is clrained by the Willochra Creek and its several tributaries. The Willochin

itself rises some distance south of Melrose, runs the entire length of the pfuin

and then flows through high ranges to emerge at Warrakimbo ILS, on the Lake

Torrens plain, whence it finally drains. to the southern extremity of the Lake

Torrens salina, It is the baselevel toward which all other streams in the study

area erode. Tt is fed by many tributuries, the Kanyaka, Wirreanda, Boolennda,

Papoodua and Coonatto creeks draining areas to the north and cast, and the

Mt. Arden, Castle, Pichi Richi, Capowie and Mt. Brown crecks draining tlic

western areas, which are uplands enjoying cormparatively high rainfall. The

Booleunda is the longest of the Willochra tributarics, tising some 58 km.

from its: junction with the main stream. Lt is also one of the few eastern tribu-

tavies directly to join the main waterways; most of the others morcly spill their

waters and debris on to the edge of the plains, and, spreading out in distri-

butaries and sheets, are dissipated long before the trunk stream is reached.

Above its junetion with the Booleinda the Willachra is merely a series af narrow,

winding, interconnected channels flowing through a rather {ll-drained area, but

below it, consists of a single deep and gnite broad channel.

In broad view the plain is flat but in detail the surface. which falls aorth-

wards at about 1 in 700, displays cousiderable local relief. Adjacent to the

Willochra Creek abundant loose sand and clay deposited by the river has

been blown into the branches of the bush Nitraria schoberi (the nitre bush,

the presence of which is a sure sign af overgrazing) where it has accumulated

to form fixed dunes up to 2 m. high, though some of the elevation is due to

wind and water erosion of the areas between the vegetution, More important,

the old plain surface in the neighbourheod of the Willochra Creek, and the

lower reaches of tributary valleys, is undergoing crosion by gullying: a new

plain is being eroded and aggraded,

The Willochra plain has been built wp of dehris carried to the «anticlinal

lowland eroded by the predecessors of the Willochra drainage system, Though

DENUDATION IN THE SOUTITERN FLEINDERS RANGES, S.A, 1

it is undergoing erosion, landscape revival is restricted to the lower seaches

and immediate environs of the main water courses; the greater part of the

constructional plain remains intact.

Similar though smaller depositional plains ocear throughout the southern

Flinders. Some, like the Orroroo and Mawker basins are true intermontane plains,

but many are merely areas of allyviation ovcurring in narrow valleys. All arc

heing eroded by both water and wind, though at their margins they continue to

receive debris,

Erosional plains related to present regional baselevel are widely distributed

throughout the southern Flinders Ranges, but are of limited extent in the western

region, where they accur as narrow valley floors and piedmont plains carrying

au veneer Of unstratified debris. In the region immediately to the east of the

Willochra Basin erosional plains associated with present regional basclevel are

sa limited as to: be negligible.

In contrast with the alluvial plains the superficial cover docs not significantly

modify the surface expression of the bedrock plain, They are smooth and

characteristically rectilincar or slightly concave in transverse section, They

possess few lines of concentrated debris, are incliried 2-3° to the horizontal and

slope gently away from the backing escarpments which they join in narrow

areas of sleep curvature. The bedrock plains display litle relief save in the

vicinity of gullies or narrow stroam channels. Their lower sections are commonly

buried beneath allavial deposits.

In view of its extensive development in the Willochra plain, this surface

at and near present baselevel and due to both crosion and deposition, is hence-

lorth called the Willochra surface.

Older Valley Floars and Piedmont Plains

Throughout the Flinders Ranges remnants of former valley floors and pied-

mont plains stand ahove the present plains (Pl. 1, Fig. 1}. West of the Willovhra

plain low plateaux and mesas, generally intricately dissected, stand between 9

and 30 m. above the level of the surrounding valleys, They are bounded by steep

scarps, commonly separated from the backing uplands (though in some few

places the junction is preserved) and are flat-topped, the upper surface sloping:

gently toward the stream or basin at angles ranging between | and 4°, though at

Aryvadells in the Mt. Arden Creek valley the inclination of the upper surface of

the remnant is 7°. Many arc capped by mantles of coarse, angular, quartzitic

debris which is alien to the areas where it is now found for the bedrock beneath

the remmants is commonly folded, intensely weathered and argillaceous; nowhere

are they underlain by massive quartzite. Indeed in the Hut Hill area there is

gevpsum underlying the quuartzitic debris. West of the Dutchman's Sterm und

Richman’s Valley synclines however. the mantle of debris and the weathered

bedrock are absent and fresh rock is exposed on the surface of the flat-topped

spurs,

‘To the east of the Willochra plain erosional areas of low relief are very

extensive, and indeed, with the exception of a few sandstowe ridges, rounded

hills and certain other residuals, oceupy the entire eastern side of, ancl! extend

heyond the bounds of, the area tnvestigated. They are of a similar nature to

12 C. BR, TWIDALE

those described for the western region, thongh they commonly display super-

ficial ferruginous induration, and the debris on them, though still angular, js

smaller than to the west, They rise gradually to the east, from elevations of almost

240 m. at the eastern edge of the depositional basin to 460 m. at the eastern

margin of the stucly area. Together they form a broadly rolling plain surmounted

y a few isolated bills and ridges and drained by water courses which have

excavated deep narrow channels and valleys adjacent to the Willochra, but which

net commonly are only shallowly incised below the level of the surrounding

plains,

Thus the area west of the Willochra plain is crosionally more advanced

than that to the east. The reason for the contrast may be found either in the

higher rainfall of the western region, or the lower local baselevel to which it is

related,

The remnants of this system of valley Hoors and picdmont plains is character-

istically developed in the Proby's Grave area west of the Ragless Range, and so

is termed the Praby surface. It is erosional but commonly bears a mantle of

debris which in many places is silicificd and also displays ferruginisation in some

localitics. In some areas previously noted a slightly lower level, from which

weathered rock and debris mantle have been stripped, oveurs beneath the Proby

surface proper, but still distinctly above the aiodert plains aud valley floors. As

little further reference is made to this lower surface, it is not here accorded a

separate designation,

High Plains

At an elevation of several hundreds of feet ahoye the former and present

valley floors stand remnants of what was evidently a surface of low relief eroded

across bedrock, Such residuals accur in the Mt. Brown, Dutchman’s Stern, and

Horseshoe Range districts in the study area but to the north, in the Wilpena area,

ay throughont the central and northern Flinders, this high surface is the master

surface.

In each locality the high plain is eroded across argillacecous sediments in

toticlinal cores ( Pl. 1, Fig. 2; 2, Fig. 1). In the Mt, Brown area deep and intense

weathering occurs overlain by a massive accumulation of coarse quartzitic debris,

but in the other localities these features are absent, Sandstone ridges stand

4-120)m. above the level of this ancient surface of low relief,

Evidence from the Dutchman's Stem area shows that this high surface was

initiated during a phase of erosion which preceded both the Willochra and

Preby surfaces. North and east of the Stern, reninants of three surfaces of low

relief eroded across the local bedrock (primarily siltstones and other argillaceous

sediments, but including thin limestone and quartzite) have been mapped ( Fig.

4). The present valley floor (Willochra surface), in places alluyiated, is narrow;

standing 15-30 m. above it is a yery prominent though dissected platform

(Proby surface) which in a very few places carries a capping of angular quurt-

zitic debris, and beneath which there is intense weathering in some localities;

and seme 150-180 m. higher than the platform, in the core of an anticline

between Dutchman's Stern and The Bluff, is another area of low relief, of limited

extent but quite distinct. The important feature of the area is that both the

platform and high plain level occur on the same strike: the strata in plan curve

DENUDATION IN THE SOUTHERN FLINDERS RANGES, S.A. 13

Dissaited vld volley

Hoor h piedmont

loins

High suelacen

Stern

Fig, 4, Structure and erosional

benches in the Dutchman's Stern area.

into the anticline and thus, both the Proby and the higher surfaces have devel-

oped on the same strata, any possibility of lithological control of elevation is

ruled ont.

The high plains thus take two forms, the one underlain by weathered

bedrock and capped by coarse debris, the other underlain by essentially unal-

tered bedrock and usually though not everywhere lacking the debris mantle.

The former will be trad the Mt. Brown surface, the latter, which is by far the

more common, the Dutchman surface.

Buried Surface beneath the Willochra Plain

The Willochra Basin is an anticlinal structure but as explained previously

has been eroded to form a topographic basin, In this basin up to 168 m. of

Cainozoic sediments have been deposited, though over most of the basin the

thickness is much less, and is as little as 60 m. maximum east of Quorn where

there is a hedrock ridge (O*Driscoll, 1956). That the subdebris floor falls away

steeply on the western side of the depositional area is shown by the rapid thicken-

ing of the sediments from the basin margin eastwards. The borclog data is not

abundant but indicates that the Precambrian bedrock beneath the unconsvlidated

sediments is deeply weathcred and of reasonably low relief, though there are

loval ridges such as that just mentioned. It is not known whether the weathering

of the subdebris surface occurred before, during or after the deposition of the

basin sediments, This buried surface croded across Precambrian and Cumbrian

strata has been partly re-exposed in the lower Kanyaka valley and hence is

known as the Kanyake surface.

dd CR. TWIDALE

Nature of the Plains

The present plains of the piedmonts and valley Hoors are called pediments

in this paper largely by virtue of their abrupt junction with their backing

escarpments, and the available evidence suggests that the earlier valley floors

and picdimont plains were morphologically similar, and warrant the use of the

term pediment also. However in several areas present plains or plain remnants

are surmounted by residuals of weathered bedrock and capped with coarse

debris; the level of the weathering front (Mabbutt, 1961) is in many localities

similar to the elevation of the adjacent plains, and thus the latter may well be

etch plains. Near Mt. Brown East for instance mesas of weathered bedrock stand

above the general level af the high plain remnants and the weathering front is

elevationally coincident with the level of the spur crests (Fig. 5), Similarly

near Rawnsley Bluff, at the southeastern corner of Wilpena Pound, residuals of

the old yalley floor surface, underlain by weathered bedrock, stand above the

general plain level and again the level of the weathering front approximates to

that of the present plains.

East of Dutchman's Stern and the Richman valley syncline the Proby

surface displays two levels. The higher, which is representative of the Flinders

Ranges us a whole, carries a debris mantle and is underlain by intensely

weathered bedrock, but these have evidently been stripped fromm much of the

local area and the old weathering front is now reyealed as an etch plain, exposed

during the Willochra surface phase of erosion.

Sediments of the Willochra Basin

The Willochra Basin is an erosional feature in an intermontane situation

in which Cainozoic terrestial deposits have accumulated (see Table 2), The

sediments have derived from the surrounding ranges and plains und imay there-

fore reflect the conditions obtaining at the time of their erosion.

TABLE 2.

Cainozvie sediments of the Willochra Basin-

TUnoamed Clay, sand, gravel and boulder of outwash fans, Modern

flood plains and creek beds

Bruce Formation | Clay and sand of the Willochra Basin und adjacent Lato

river valleys, in and adjacent to former stream Ploiatocene

coaracs ag well as in mudern chamnels massive — Rereent

ealenreous cementation has oveuarred—the

Coonatie Menber

Langwarren Ferruginixed and siliceous conplomeratc, gravel, Early (Upper

Formation. sand sine clay deposited at the margin of and Tooene)

presmmplively, mt the Willochra Basin, wad Tertiary

i part at Ieast. in lacusteyon rouditions

— —

1. Surface Exposures of the Plain

‘The surface exposures comprise mainly red clay displayed on the bare

surface of the plain and in ereck cuttings, and are called the Bruce Formation

(Op-of the Willochra Sheet, S.A. Geological Atlas 1 mile series). In the banks

of the Willochra Creek for instance al the Quorn-Ilawker road crossing, mottled,

unconsolidated, predominantly fine sand aud clay, commonly containing abun-

dant lime nodules occurs in exposures up to § m. thick. Ul probably extends

over one nndred feet helow the surface in Stratigraphic Test Bore No. 1

DENUDATION IN THE SOUTHERN FLINDERS RANGES, S.A. 15

—. Limb of Richmans

Valley synctine

ii td ridge standing above surtace 1

y —Mantle of quartzite blocks in cement ot quartz & clay

an oO; monn entered siltstones

ft tj LLL ei QO BRUCE formation

UARTZIT = e nT

ABC Oo ‘ZITE LLEEE ——

LLP FTTH

(5)

Vig, 5. Erosional benches east of the Richman’s Valley syncline. LANGWARREN formation

BRUCE formolion J 4D

= —.

Fig. 6. Section through Se _ 4

south bank of Boolceunda LANGWAAREN formation o 12m,

Creek 1-6 km. west of ps =

Langwarren HS. SS

MODERN river boulders a

/// 41/7 If

Jack Re,

5 Fig. 7. Section of cast

rd TANGWARREN Fornotionsy side of Kanyaka valley.

s BRUCE p

Formation

COONATTO Member

Exhumed pre~Langwarrean

Formation sucaca

BRUCE

formation [S—EmI

Fig. 8 Section of right

bank of Willochra Creek

1-9 kn, NNW of site of

Simmonston,

LANGWARREN

formation 18-10 m)

PRECAMBRIAN

le c, A. TWIDALE

(O'Driseoll, ap, cit p. 28), Toward the edge of the basin the elay and sand is

intermixed with angular gravels which torm outwash fans around the margin,

particularly near major stream courses, The fans are now suffering dissection.

At Booleunda Creek, about 1-6 km, west of Langwarren H.S. about 6 m.

of such oulwash gravel and clay overlie silicified and ferruginised crossbedded

sand and gravel and mottled clay of early Tertiary age (the Langwarren Forma-

tion—sce helow and PI, 2, Fig. 2) which in burn rest uncontormahly npon the Pre-

cambrian (Fig. 6). In the outwash deposits part of the jawbone and teeth of

Nototherium, dated by the Cl4 method (Geochron Vabs,, Cambridge, Mass.,

Sample No. GXOL05) as 14,000 + 225 years old, have been found, The sediments

are thus of late Pleistocene age and compare with similar sediments in the

adjacent Orroroo basin, where Piprotodon remains taken from the red clay

have been dated as of 11,000 + 130 years old (Daily, 1960), and with the

Klemzig Sand of the lower Torrens valley in the Adelaide region which has been

dated as of essentially late Pleistocene-early Recent age.

2. Marginal Sediments

Where major tributaries of the Willochra Creek enter the plains other types

ol sediments are exposed, The Langwarren Formation (T on the Willochra

Sheet) comprises eross-bedded sandstone and gravel (mainly rounded and

quartzitic) which are silicified and indurated with iron oxides, and interbedded

with mottled clay (PL 2, Fig, 2), These beds are overlain by cemented calcaremus

quartz sand and gravel with occasional clay Jenses—the Coonatto Member. Both

units yest with strong unconformity upon the Precambrian and Cambrian strata.

The Langwarren Formation contains fragmentary plant fossils which are unfor-

limately not identifiable. The Formation has however suffered duricrusting, 2

process assigned to the Miocene in northern South Australia, (Wopfner, 1960,

1963) and thus the Langwarren Formation is pre-Miocene in age (on horélog

evidence early Tertiary (Eocenc)—see below). The Coonatlo Member has a

considerable uge range. 3:2 km. east of Hammond (Blackburn and Baker,

1953) and 5 km. north-west of Willochra B.S. it is overlain by clay and gravel

nf the Bruce Formation, indicating a middle or early Pleistocene age for the

Coonatto Member, But in the bank of the Willochra Creek 5 km. north-west

of Willochra B.S, the calcareous conglomerate rests upon a greenish clay from

which fragments of foraminifera have been obtained. The fossils are of Plio-

Pleistocene age, and though there is doubt whether they were im site or derived,

the gonglomerate must be of Quaternary age (Webb and Von der Borch, in

press.) Near Langwarren HS. the calcareous conglomerate both over and under

lies Bruce sediments; it rests upon Langwarren Formation; and here, in the

Wirreanda Creek und in Coonatto Creek, it Is forming in the river bed at

present, Calerete and travertine ore undoubtedly still developing in the area,

and the Coonatto type sediments may he considered to hive developed st

various times through the Quaternary, including the present.

In the southern Kanvaka valley up to 6 m. of silicified conglomerates and

sandstones of the Langwarren Formation rest upon steeply dipping Precambrian-

Cambrian basement rocks, and are restricted to the lower areas of the valley

Hoor. They have heen silicihed and were formerly more extensive for the presence

of isolated remnants of the silicificd sediments quite distant from the main out-

crop shows that the upper und marginal areas have been eroded. Tndeed the

surface eroded across Cambrian strata and upon which the horizontally disposed

siliveons sediments were deposited has been lovally re-exposed as a Tertinry

exhumed suiface (Fig. 7). The sandstones and conglomerates. are in places

DENUDATION IN TIE SOUTITERN FLINDERS KANCELS, 5,A. Ww

averlain hy red ¢lay and gravel which contain calerete, and in the bed of Kanyukia

Creek, which is incised through the Tertiary strata, the Coonatto Member occtrs.

The Langwarren Formation is exposed in Wirreanda Creek, where cross-

betliled sand and mottled fine sand and clay containing unidentified leaf

impressions are exposed. The sequence of marginal sediments of Boolcunda

Creek, 13 km, tu the south and on to the eastern side of the basin, has already

been described: the sediments and their stratigraphic relations are similar to

those in the Kanyuka-Wirreanda area.

West of the Ragless Range, thin silicified sandstone similar to that uf the

areas previously deseribed rests unconforimably upan the local Precambrian

anal Cambrian bedrock. The outcrops are thin and discontinuous but widesprend.,

In the yalley the beds are located at elevations of about 245 m., but at the

northern tip of the Ragless Range they occur at over 275 m, ubove sea-level.

Coincident with the marked topographic break between the Tertiary outcrops

is ai keult truncating the Cambrian and Precambrian strata, suggesting Elat

since their deposition the Tertiary beds have been displaced by some JQ m.,

the downthrow being to the north,

In the hanks vf Willochra Creek between its junction with the Booleunda

und its junction with the Kanyaka Creek there are several expusures of both the

siliceous and culeareous groups of essentially horizontal sediments. Immediately

west of Mt. Ragless and 1-9 km, north-west of the site of Simmonston, siliuified,

ferruginised, and kaolinised clays rest upon the intenscly weathered Precambrian

(Miles, 1954; Shepherd, 1954) and are in turn overlain by red clays and gravels

cortuining calerete (Fig. 8, Pl. 3, Fig. 1).

The Langwarren Formation sediments appear to have been deposited in

a lake which occupied the northern part of the present Willochra Basin in early

‘Tertiary times. The marginal basin sediments exposed at Boolecunda, Wirreanda,

Kanyaka, east of Mt. Ragless and near Simmonston, are themselves strongly

suggestive of deposition in still water, The ferruginous and siliceous secliments

display cross-bedding, cut and fill features and carry fragmentary plant fossils.

They appear to have been deposited by and in water, The deposits lie at eleva-

tions between 220 and 234 m. above sea level, though, as mentioned, east of

Proby’s Grave, in an area disturbed by late or post Tertiary faulting, the

Tertiary lake beds occur at higher elevations.

Massive crystalline gypsum occurs in several places on and adjacent to the

northern part of the Willochra plain, South of Hut Hill it is found in two small

mesas as lenses between the Precambrian below and a mantle of course. angular

lime-induruted quartzitic debris above. In the northern mesa the gypsum lies

hetween 286 and 292 m. In both exposures the gypsum is topographically

higher and therefore older than the red clay of the Willochra plain. A similar

thongh less well exposed deposit of zypsum is known from the eastern side of

the Hut Hill range, in the Kanyaka valley, at an approximate elevation of 262

m. A 3m, thick lens of mussive crystalline gypsum forming part of the

presunted early-mid Tertiary sequence of basal and marginal basin secliments,

and stratigraphically Jower than the red clays and gravels with calerete, overs

some 1-9 km. north-west of Simmonston, in the right bank of Willochra Creek.

Such massive gvpsiumt must hiave formed during the desiccation of a Jake. Its age

or ages is problematic, the only direct evidence being ils assaciation, in the

Simmonsturr area, with the Tertiary rocks. However, there may be gypsum of

more than one age.

18 ©, BR. TWIDALE

3. Borelog Data

Although a considerable number of bores have been sunk iu the Willochra

Basin, very few pass through the Cainozoic sequence into the Precambrian-

Palaeozoic rocks beneath, IJowever, three stratigraphic test bores put down

by the South Australian Mines Department (O'Driscoll, op. cit.) penetrate the

whole sequence, and from these and other borelog data a generalised picture

can be reconstructed, The bedrock floor is weathered and rather irregular. It

is overlain by lignitic sands locally and generally by brown and white clayey

sands and silts, The sequence is thicker in the south than in the north, It

compares lithologically with the exposures of the Langwarren Formation de-

seribed from the Simmonston area. Moreover. hefore the 60-90 m. of red

ve Ste ae

Quartzite ndges at Alluvial plains [Wollochrs Surfose!

Etetional ploins wh anguiar

debeis mantle +co-) Middle Tertiary depasits

O.d valley fleors & pledmont « Spot height ( metres)

plains With rounded gravel mantle

| Proby Surface)

Fig, 9. Sediments and Proby surface azar Gordon. (Adapted from a field map prepared by

D. Tulloch and W. Anderson.)

clay of the Bruce Formation whieh comprise the main body of the basin sedi-

ments, were deposited, this earliest sequence was weathered and im places

ferruginised, As this weathering may correspond to the silicification and ferru-

ginisation® seen in the marginal sediments, and as both the latter and the deep

* On the other lund. it has to be borne in uiinel that an irou-rich horivin is note! helow

the Bruce Formation in Strativraphic Vest Bore No. 1 (O'Driscoll, ap. cit.)

DENUDATION IN THE SOUTHERN FLINDERS RANGES, S.A, 19

sequence are directly overlain by red beds or gravels set in a matrix of red clays,

the two are tentatively correlated and regarded as different facies of the same

early Tertiary Langwarren Formation deposited in a shallow luke basin.

The lignitic beds include pollen grains of Nothofagus which suggest that

the basal beds are of post-Eocene but pre-Pliocene, i.e. mid-Tertiary, age (ibid.,

Shepherd and Thatcher, op. cit.). But other pollen and spores from depths of

24-27 m. and 29:5-31 m. below the surface in Stratigraphic Test Bore No. 2

are indicative of a middle-upper Eocene age (Tlarris, 1966) and are taken here

as upper Eocene,

_—-ip—|

SECTION

ey Tertiary Sandstone

Peobys Grove

Dissected Plateau

with lag—

(Proby Surface)

0 2

Fig. 10. Sediments and Proby surface near Proby's Graye.

Correlation of Surfaces and Sediments

There is direct evidence of the age or age-range of earliest and the most

recent phases of erosion. The latter reached the Langwarren area and caused

the dissection of the outwash fans less than 14,000 ycars ago, The former pre-

dates the upper Eocene on the basis of relation to present Jocal and regional

baseleyels, relation to the quartzite crest remnants and degree and type of

weathering on the surfaces, the plain surfaces of the study region can be cor-

related and their relative and stratigraphic ages deduced.

20 C. R, TWIDALE

The relationship between the Willochra Basin sediments and the erosional

surtaces can be clarified by reference to the region north and east of Mt. Brown.

Structurally, the urea is underlain by the eastern limb of the Richman’s Valley

syncline, which plunges to the north. In the east the plain is underlain by the

Willochra Basin sediments which thin rapidly toward the margin and which

are succeeded westward by a plain eroded across the folded Precambrian strata.

The valleys tongue westward into the low hills which front a prominent ridge

coincident with the outcrop of the A.B.C. Quartzite and rising in elevation from

330-360 m. in the north to over 900 m. in Mt. Brown itself.

Belween the Willochra Basin and the quartzite remnants of four planate

surfaces truncate the underlying folded strata (Table 3, Fig. 5), The lowest,

und presumably therefore the youngest, is the Willechra surface which is con-

tiguous with the depositional surface of the Willochra plain; it is narrow, bunt

tongues up valleys, which are in their lower reaches alluviated. About 6-4 m.

TABLE 3.

Surtaces in the Southern flinders Ranges,

Surface | Type Distribution anc description Age range

Witlochra, Krosional, Willochra plain, pisdimont plains Lale Pleistocene

ardradational and present vidlley Aoors Recent

and etch plain :

Proby Mrosional with Diasectod valley floor and Middlo-Late

coarse debris pitdmont plait remnants { Tertiary antl

mantle: but scattered thronghout and larly

eteh plain in | adjacent tu the Flinders Quaternary

somu few ureys Ranges

Lutehman | Lrosional (etch) . Lsolatod high plains of vary

plain limited extent in the Southern

FPiinders but widespread in the

ventral and northern, Ranges

Mt. Brown | Erosional plain Isolated mesaa of weathered

with coarse hedrock near Mt, Brown

dobris muntle

Kanyaka Erostonal plain Buried plain beneath the | Pra-Uipper

Willoehra plain; exhumed io Kovenss

the Kanyaka area

The Mi. Brown and Kanyska sutiaces are interprered na equivalent. Dutchman and

Mt. Brown surfaces are related in that the Dutehman surface is the weathering front of the

Mt, Brown eyole. Prohy and Dutchman are related in that the weathered mantle of the Mb. Brown

surface was stripped during Lhe Peoby cresional phase, thas oxpysing the weathering front

Dutchman surface, During the Willochra phase weathered rock was similarly stripped from the

Proby surface.

higher, at 300-330 m. elevation are extensive remnants of the Proby sur-

face which tongue westward up valleys and which to the wesl give way io

a yet higher surface, Dutchman, which occurs as prominent, long, eyen-crested

spurs (Pl. 3, Fig. 2), The Dutchman surface stands 30-60 m. higher than the

Proby and like the others rises from north to south and east to west. Except

for limited areas close to the margin of the depositional plain the strata under-

lying these surfaces are remarkably fresh. In the south of the region, however,

and two miles ENE of Mt, Brown, mesas of the Mt. Brown surface project about

DENUDATION IN THE SOUTHERN FLINDERS RANGES, §.A. 21

30 m, above the Dutchman level (Pl 4, Fig. 1), ‘They have a 3-4 m. thick

capping of coarse and angular quartvitic debris set in 2 matrix of seconclarily

silicilied sands and clays. The Precambrian siltstones beneath the capping are

intensely weathered to a depth of about 30 m. so that the weathering front

is of the same elevation as the level of the spur crest surface and there is thus

strong suggestion that the Dutchman surface is in part at least an etch plain.

The weathered bedrock is being gutlied and the capping thereby undermined,

The eroded surface of Precambrian strata beneath the Willochra plain

sediments, the Kanyaka surface, is of pre-upper Eocene age. It is apparent

even from Ute limited borelog information available that there is a marked dis-

continuity between the sub-basin surface and the erosional parts of the Willochra

surlace and that the former must be related to a phase of erosion previos to

that active at present. Which, if any, of the older surfaces represented in the

Mt, Brown area can be correlated with the basin floor, cannot be stated fram

the evidence available there, but relevant evidence concerning the correlation

of the surfaces exists in the Wirreanda and Proby’s Grave areas, at the northern

margin of the plain (Figs. 9 and 10).

In the Wirrennda-Kanyaka urea the Kanyaka surface is exposed where the

marginal sediments have been stripped from the underlying Precambrian strata.

Still standing high ahove this anciewl surface are the Hut Lill and Black Jack

Ranges, showing that a considerable structural relief existed formerly, as now,

Renmants of the Proby surface bearing roumded as well as angular debris alsa

exist in the area, eroded across both Precambrian and early Tertiary rocks

(Fig. 9), showing that it post-dates the marginal sediments and is therefore

of middle Tertiary age. Similarly in the Proby’s Grave area the same surface

Meee nee Preeambrian-Cambrian rocks and the early Tertiary quartvites

| Fig. 10).

Jn the Langwarren area, similar evidence for the post-early Tertiary age

vf the Proby surface ts exposed, but in addition the presence of Nototherttum

dated at 14,000 odd years in gravels which overlie the Proby surface and which

have been dissected, shows that the Proby surface had been eroded befnse the

late Pleistocene, If silicification pcuurred here contemporaneously with silerete

development in the north of South Australia, then the Proby surface nwst have

been in existence by the late-middle Tettiary. On the basis of these dedne-

tions, it can be suggested that in the Mt. Brown area;

(a) The Mt. Brown level was developed and the Dutchman initiated earlier than

the Proby surface, that is, prior to the middle Tertiury;

(bh) if the Kanvaka surface below the Cainoxzvic sediments of the Willochra

Basin is represented here, its equivalent is the Mt. Brown surface: the Praby

surface is of Jate and middle Tertiary age and the Willochra surface late

Pleistocene-Recent;

(ce) if this inference is correct, then the Mt. Browr-Kanyaka surface has suffered

warping and/or feaulting: The occurrence of deep weathering below the

Brown surface mesas, beneath the basin sediments, and marginal to the

basin is in accord with this concept (Fiy, 5);

(cl) the Dutchman surface is an etch plain excavated contemporancously with

the Proby, though its preparation, by weathering, ocenrred during the

development of the Mt. Brown surfuce,

ff this interpretation is correct, then the “hedrock” floor af the Willochra

Basin is the subsurface continuation uf the Mt Brown surface, and the Lang-

Warten Formation results from the destruction of this earliest landscape following

22 Cc. R. TWIDALE

warping or faulting. Such earth movements would explain the blocking uf

Willochra Creek valley and the accumulation of sediments in the basin. The

siltcibvation and general intense chemical weathering of the Proby surface «ar

the old valley floor level, may be represented by the lateritic horizon recorded

in bores between the presumed Langwarren aud Bruce Formation sediments

within the Cainozoic sequence, As stated earlier, another ferruginous horizon

is reearded below the Bruce Formation, but there is no intense weathering

ussociated with it and thus the climatic conditions suitable For fermiginisaliou

possibly continued after the disruption of the Proby surface, Alternatively, the

laterite may be secondary and derived from the weathered old valley Moor

satlace. Not all the Prohy remnants are silivified, however. This may be

interpreted either as a function of drainage, with silicihication being most marked

on the lower areas (cf. Lake Eyre Basin>), or asa function of time — the

Prohv surface is diachronic and climate may have changed during development,

The disruption and dissection of the old valley floor or Proby surface has

contributed the bulk of the Bruce Formation,

Thus there appear to he only three surfaces (Table 3) which occur through-

out the south Flinders Ranges but also over a much wider area, These three

are consistent in their relationship to basclevel, to the marginal deposits, ancl

to the recent unconsolidated, lime-indurated Ml of the Willochra Basin aud

valley floors,

DRAINAGE DEVELOPMENT

The evolution of the drainage pattern is closely related to the evolution

vf the surfaces of crosion, Indeed, logically, a consideration of drainage ue-

velopment should precede any oe pa of landform assemblages, for it is

primarily streams which have moulded and are moulding the Jand surface. For

purposes of exposition, however, it is more econorical to discuss certain aspects

of the drainage pattern now, when the broad outlines of landscape development

have heen established,

Some clements of the landscape of the Willochra plain and adjacent areas

are Of great antiquity, and the drainage pattern must have been initiated and

established lony ago. The earliest drainage mmst have been consequent upon

the still developing folds of the early mid-Palaeozoic Jandseape. Once the

anticlinal ridges were breached and rocks of contrasted resistance to weather-

ing and erosion exposed long strike streams, and a trellis pattern, must have

developed. The trellis pattern would not have been simple, not anly because of

the complexities of the fold pattern, but also on account of the capriciousness

of river capture. The general fineness of sediments in the soveral Triassic basins uf

the northern and southern Flinders suggests that the contibutary areas were

of subdued relicf; it is likely that hy the Triassic or thereabouts a first cycle

of evasion had been run through and the broad outlines of the drainage pattern

estahlished. The Mt. Brown surface of the Willochra area could have been

formed during this phase anil it is likely that the foundations of the relief inver-

sion now manifest in the landscape were laid in this remote period.

Successive phases of landscape development have seen the persistence of

the major drainage pattern: there has been a consistent close adjustment ty the

structural framework, and where the structure has changed in depth so has the

stream pattern, At present the drainage displays a modified trellis pattern.

Long subsequent streams How in valleys eroded in the softer argillaceous

members of the sedimentary sequence. The valleys are separated by ridges,

DENUDATION CN 'EIE SOUTHERN FLINDERS RANGES. SA. 23

many, and certainly the most prominent, of which are underlain hy quartzite.

The ridges are breached by obsequent or resequent streams which have

excavated narrow gorges. Judged on present tendencies, the pattern has

evolved through structural adjustment (the strike elements) and eapture (the

shorter connecting elements), The many abrupt changes of course testify to

the beheading or truncation of strike streams by tributaries from adjacent

valleys which have through regressive erosion picrced the intervening ridge

and entered the neighbouring valley at a lower level, thus enabling caplare

t occur, Capture is especially clear in the area west of the Willochra plain

where there is an intricate alternation of hard and soft strata, To the east

nf the plain the texture of drainage is coarser, but the same broad pattern exists

though here it tends to be more rectangular due to the presence of longer

Tesequent and obsequent elements connecting and subsequent streams.

It has been stated that the principal features of the present relief (and

henee drainage) pattern had evolved long ago. Evidence for this assertion

comes from the Kanyaka valley, which has been described earlier, andl the

Warrens Gorge area, where a narrow defile has been eroded through a ridge

of A.B.C, Quartzite, Through it fuws a tributary of the Mt. Arden Creek

(Fig. 3) which has headed back into the subsequent valley located west of

the ridge and captured some of the drainage. The gorge displays a distinct

valley-in-valley form, and the shoulder between the upper, more open, V and

the narrower defile below is ut the same elevation as the flat top of a mesa,

one of several remnants of the Proby surface, and which occurs immediately

tu the east of the gorge. Thus it may reasonably be suggested that this part

of the drainage pattern had taken shape during or before the Proby stage:

similar evidence for the considerable antiquity of the major pattern occurs not

ory in the southem Flinders Ranges, but alsa further north, ie instance in the

Brachina and Talowie Gorge regions, where a similar sequence of landscape

stages and of drainage pattern exists.

The pattern continues to evolve, Just north of Buckaringa Gorge small

clefts have been and continuc to be excavated in the wall formed by the A,B.C.

Qnartzite. They have been eroded hy small streamlets draining the ares of the

ridge, debris carried out through and from the elefts is deposited in a cone of

coarse dehris at the base of the clefts and bluff. This represents the earliest

stage in the development of a breached ridge, A later stage is scen at Yarrah

Gorge where an easterly-flowing stream has worked back westward through the

ridge of synclinally folded Pound Quartzite and has only to penctrate a Further

few individual hard strata before reaching the argillaceous heds which underlie

Yarrah Vale (Fig. 3); once this position has been attained the castward drain-

age, at x lower baselevel, will dowhbtless rapidly exploit the softer strata and

disturb the present drainage.

A very recent capture has ocew'red through the extension of Skelerou

Gurge, just north of Big Ben (lig. 3), The distribution of high and law land

is here directly related to the outcrop of strata, Skelerog Creek joins Mt. Arden

Creek from the east at an elevation of about 293 m, To the cast of the tieht

syitelinal [ole southward flowing streams have eroded a plain in softer strata

which are part of an anticline, and the surface of this plain formerly sloped

southward to the Mt. Arden Creek valley, which it meets at au elevation af

some 354.m. Skeleroo Creek has, however, disturbed the earlier situation

by eroding headwards into the Pound Quartvite ridge, capturing the tiny sub-

seyuent streams draining the ridge. especially in the siltstone bands, and

eventually breaching the entire upland te emerge in the valley to the east.

4 Cc. R, TWIDALE

Despite Howing acruss a broad outcrop of resistant rocks Skeleroo Creek flows

to a haselevel virtually 60. m, lower than the initial drainage of the eastern

vale, and in consequence it has been able to capture the streams of the northern

part of the anticlinal valley, and to erode a new plain at a lower level than

the other. The two plains, old and new, meet in an irregular but distinct

escarpment some 12 m, high,

Thus the development of prominent subsequent strearns and river capture

can explain most of the major features of the drainage pattem.

However, as streams cut down their valley floors they may, if thev excavate

deep enough, encounter structures different to those in which they initially

developed, There is evidence of relief inversion on a grand scale, which implies

the removal of considerable thicknesses of rock and the breaching, of major

sbuctures. In such circumstances that structures change not only laterally and

in time, but also vertically, is significant in understanding drainage development,

An example is provided by the drainage pattern of the Willochra and Kanyaka

Creeks 5 kin. NNW of the site of Simmonston (Fig. 11), Here the two major

river courses separately breach the A.B.C, Range Quartzite ridge within one

mile of each other converping during their passage and joining immediately

they leave the resistant outcrop on the north-western side (Fig, lla). This

surely is anomalous: if cbsequent drainage heading south-eastwards from the

suhseqnent section of the lower Willochra Creek penetrated the ridge on the

Fig, 11. Suggested evolution of anomalous drainage pattern through ridge of A,B,C, Quartzile

at northern outlet of Willochra plain.

north-western side, it is reasonable to suppose that one stream, presumably the

onc proceeding by the shortest and most direct route through the ridge, would

make the breach and thus capture the drainage of the lowlands on the other

side, and unlikely in the extreme that two such regressive streams would

penetrate through the ridge at exactly the same time. There are two possible

explanations of this curious pattern, the first involving a rather unusual type of

DENUDATION IN THE SOUTHEAN FLINDERS Ranges. 3.A. 2

superimposition, the other taking account of possible overflow from a lake in

the northern part of the Willochra plain.

The A.B.C, Quartzile in the locality dips south-eastward at approximately

30°. Thus it is possible to visualise an evalntion of the present situation in

terms of superimposition (Fig. Jb). The ancestors of the two rivers earlier

Howed over plains at a higher level than the modern lowlands. They joined

betore Howing through the harrier of the quartzite ridge (Fig, He). How-

ever, as the two rivers ent down they encountered the hitherto buried part of

the quartzitic formation and were gradually superimposed upon it (Fig. 11d), If

this hypothesis is valid then something over 900 m. of rocks have been re-

moved during the superimposition, a thickness not inconsistent with the known

erosion in the region, The ridge is not high and the topography gives no indi-

cation of the elevation of the plain from which superimpnsition occurred, ahd

thus there is no. hint of its possible relations with the known older surfaces

and cycles of the region.

The second hypothesis is based upon the evidence for the cxistenee of a

Willochra Lake during carly or middle Tertiary times, Such a lake could have

avertlowed over two low cals to the north-west. Again, however, it is required

that there he available two Jow saddles over the quartzite ridge at exactly the

same elevation, and for this reuson the writer is inelined toward the first

hypothesis of superimposition, But the two hypotheses are not mutually

exclusive.

LANDSCAPE DEVELOPMENT

Importance of Differential Weathering

Landscape development in the study area has heen discussed elsewhere

(Twidale, 1966) so that only a summary of salient features is required here,

The escarpments which so dominate the landscape are primarily structural

Jeatures, heing either wholly built of hard rock or possessing a resistant capping,

Quurtzites are associated with the most spectacular escarpments of the region.

The bluffs are undermined by and recede on account of gullying extending

headwurds on the more gently inclined debris slope below the bluff, and partly

because of cavernous weathering at the base of the bluff. In this way the bluff

is maintained,

As scarps recede diachronic plain surfaces, sloping gently ta the local

baselevel of erosion or deposition, are left below. They are covered, smoothed

and protected by a mantle of angular, primarily quartzitic, debris, some of

which derives from the backing escarpment, some is lag and some is the coarse

traction of alluvial accumulations deposited at the base of esearpments by

streams. These debris mantles have a strong stabilising effect on the land sur-

tace for as the coarse fraction becomes more and more concentruted due to the

removal, by wind and water, of the fines, it becomes more and more intractable

and untouchable, a veritable carapace unaffected by any storms and destruc-

tible only by undermining following lowering of baselevel.

An important feature of landscape development not only in the southern

Flinders but i the northern areas, too, is the difterential weathering and erosion

of the scarp-foot zone. Wash from the escarpments rons down the debris

slopes but gradually permeates into the soil and subsoil, especially where there

is a veneer of detritus. The bedrock of the lower debris slope heeomes deeply

and intensely weathered, and hence is especially susceptible to erasiun. Streams

af the plains heading back toward the scarp and wash from the esearpments

together dissect the scarp foot area: subsequent streams readily develop here,

26 C. BR. TWLIDALE

with two important ellects, First, the remnants of the plain surface, protected

by their veneer of debris, become isolated from the backing escarpment. Second,

the svarp itself is regraded to » new steeper invlination, and recedes. [Tt main-

tains the maximum inclination commensurate with stability, a mark frequently

thouzh ephemerally overstepped. Scarp fuct weathering and erosion are

together a significant factor in the development of the sharp break of slope —

the piedmont angle—between plain and npland in this region (cf. Twidale,

1962). Tt may well be significant in other climatically similar regions also, for

in an area as aril as Mt, Conner, with a present average annual rainfull of

abont 18 cm, per annum (see Ollier and Tuddenham, 1961, pp. 257-8), a

similar mechanism of slope regradation and stecpening, accompanying and

eansed hy scarp-foot rotting and the development of a distinct piedmont angle,

appears to have operated.

Similar soil-level weathering (or water table weathering, see Hills, 1954) has

been invoked in explanation of steepened basal slopes (Twidale, loc. cit. 1962)

im! of cavernous forms (Twidale, 1964), and may well explain also the extreme

smoothness of hedrock surfaces in this and other arid/semi-arid lands, Erosion

by rills and streams tends to exploit weaknesses and differences and results in

wosiderable micro-relief. But burial by debris allows time for subsurface

weathering to operate and possibly reduce the irregularities.

Persistence of Relief

The main outlines of the relief have not changed since pre-Tertiary times

af least. The early Tertiary lacustrine strata were laid down in th: Willochra

Lake which oecupied valleys which remain valleys today. The former lake was

nverlonked by the samy ridves as border the valleys at the present time, The

Kanyaka and Mt, Arden valleys existed in early Tertiary times, as did the Black

Jack and Rugless Ranges. The weathering, principally by moisture of the argil-

levous rocks of the yalley Heors, has led to their continued erosion and to {heir

renewed weathering. There has not necessarily been a diminution of relict

with the passing of time, but more likely the increased emplhiusis of the struc.

turally controlled contrast between ridge and vale.

Influence of Climatie Change and Teetonism

Both the landscape and Cainogoic sediments of the southern Flinders

contain suggestions that climate has changed and that faulting and warping

have occurred during the long period of earth history represented in the present

lane sarface,

The presence of Nototherium on the Willochra plain some 14.000 years ago,

ind of Diprotudon in the adjacent Orroroo area just over 11,000 years acu.

surely indicates a climate wetter or cooler (more effective rainfall through

lowered evaporation) — or both —in the area during the late Pleistocene, Such

large herbivores could surcly not have survived even along water courses in

existing conditions, As in northern Africu, however, it is necessary to temper

the argument with the recognition that hunting by man may have vontributed

to the elimination of these large marsupials: near Port Augusta a site has been

discovered with aboriginal remains and Dipretodon bones in association.

A geologically recent desiceation is also suggested by the formation of

calerete on and in surfaces and sediments thecutict the region and indeed

virtually the whole of South Australia, Even river bed deposits suffer calcareous

cementation during the lengthy drought periods. Further possible support for a

DENUDATION IN ‘THE SOUTHERN FLINDERS RANCES, S.A. 27

revent phayial, comes from the Cotabena area of the Lake Torrens basin. Lake

Torrens is a salina but between the old and the new Cotabena Homesteads, where

the Hookina river Hows through « defile in a quartzite ridge, there are exposed

in the river bluff some 6 m. of fincly laminated greenish shales (resting upon

what appears to be a remnant of dune sand), overlain by typical Muviatile red

clay and gravel sediments, upon the surface of which dunes are developed.

These laminated shales have not so far been dated but it has been reported

thut they contain remnants of diprotodonts and matropodids (B. Daily, personal

communication ),

The strata in which Nototherinm remains were found was related to the

old valley floor surface which in several places can be shown to transect the

Tangwarren Formation, which suffered silicifeation and ferniginisation as did

other strata exposed in the plain surfaces of the times, This chemical weather-

ing may indicate a moister climate and the dating of the surface as middletate

Tertiary is in accord with findings in nearby and related regions. Thus in

eastern Eyre Peninsula remnants of a lateritised surface high in the present

relict have been disrupted by faulting. Near Whyalla marine Pliveene deposits

were laid down directly on the fuult scarps, suggesting that the faulting occurred

in the late Tertiary and that the surface of Jow relief and the deep chemical

weathering associated with it are of mid-late Tertiary age. In the Ml, Lofty

Ranges, south of the Flinders and part of the same tectonic unit, there is cvi-

dence of late Tertiary and Quaternary faulting. And in the northern

Flinders Ranges there are two prominent surfaces disrupted by faulting. There

is first a pre-Cretaccous surface af erosion, the surface upon which the Creta-

ceous strata of the margin of the Great Artesian Basin were deposited, but now

exhumed through the erosion of the Cretaceaus beds: and second, there is a

post-Cretaceous, probably early Tertiary, surface, eroded across Cretaceous

strata and subjected to deep weathering in the Miocene which has in places

resulted in the development of silerete or billy, Whether those two surfaces

merge to the south cannot at present be demonstrated, though it is likely that

they do. These surfaces have been disrupted by recurrent step faulting, and

silicified Cretaceous beds can be found stranded at varions levels between the

plateau where the surface is undisturbed and the plains below, depending en

the Heats of the particular fault block or splinter with which the outcrop is

relates

The faulting which so obviously disturbed the middle and late Tertiary

surfaces of erosion in Eyre Peninsula and the Mt. Lofty Ranges could be

responsible, possibly effectively delayed by the intermontane situation. for the

break between the Willochra and the Proby phases of landscape development.

The Simmonston fault north of Mt, Ragless demonstrates post-early Tertiary

dislocation within the study area. On the other hand, the evidence of chemical

weathering, and possibly from Nothofawus pollen which occurs in the presumed

Langwarren Formation within the Willochra Basin and which is generally

assoriated with conditions far more humid than thase obtaining at present. are

both suggestive nf a moister climate, so that climatic change could also have

cuntributed. :

Tu the north of the Wéllochra plain the Proby surface remnants sre

apparently graded to a level approximating to that of the old lake, and the

rob cg of the latter could have caused the inception of the newest cycle and

strrrace.

On the other hand, both the development and the draining of the Willochra

Lake are equally well explicable in terms of tectonism as of climatic change,

28 C BR. TWIDALE

though in reality the disruption of the Mt, Brown surtace and the inception of the

Proby surtace, which led to the deposition of sediments in the now blocked

Willochra valley. was tectonic. Equally, the draining of the lake could be

explained in terms of drainaye development following tectunism. The Inocal

evidence is vet relevant upon this point.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

This paper bas benefited from critical readings by Mr. Bruce P. Webb,

formerly of the South Australian Geological Survey, and by Dr. Brian Daily

of the Department of Geology, University of Adelaide. To both, and to Mr.

Max Foale, who is responsible for the figures, the sinecre thanks of the writer

are due.

REFERENCES

Brackuunsx, G., and Baxea, R, M., 1953. Sojls of Part of the Southern Flinders Ranges.

South Australia. Soil Publ. 3, C.S.L8.0., Melbourne, 56 pp, :

Cooper, H. M.. 1953. The Unknowm Coust. Adelaide. 73 pp.

Gooven, H, M.. 1955, The Unknown Coast. A Supplement. Adelside, 92 pp.

Baie, 33 ae P, 12. in Heport of the Musewn Board, July 1, 1958, to June 30, 1959.

Adekide,

Granssnex, M. F. and Damy, B.. 1959, Ceology and lute Pre-Cambrian Pama of the

Fidiacara Fossil Reserve. Rec. 8. Aust. Mus., 13, pp. 369-401,

Geanocicar, ATLAS of Sourm AvusrRauta; WitLocmma. Geol. Surv, S.A. Adelaide.

Harnis, W,, 1966, Stratigraphic Palynology of Lower Tertiary Sediments, Soutbern Australia.

MSc. Thesis, University of Adelaide.

Hmais, F. §., 1954. Underground Water as 5 Factor in Geologi¢val Processes. Proc. Ankara

Sympusium on Arid Zone Hydrology. U.N.E.S.C.0., 270 pp.

Jonnson, W., 1960. Tixploration for Coal, Springheld Basin. Rept. Inyvesl, Geol. Surv. S.A.

16, 62 pp. :

Marnurr, J. A.. 1961. “Basal Surface” or “Weathering Front”. Pras. Geal, Assov. London.

72, pp. 357-358,

Mines, en 1956, Clay Deposit at Simmenston. S.A. Dept. Mines. Mining Review 100,

pp. 34-35,

O'Drscort, E. P. D. 1956, The Hydrology of the Willochra Busin. Rept. Invest. Cenl-

Slope at lfromm’s Landing, Sowth Australia, Zeitschr, £, Geomorph, Supp, 3, pp. L77 191.

Twipdce, C. R,, 1966, On the Evolution of Hillslopes and Pediments in the Flinders Ranges,

in Australian Geomurpholovical Eysays. (Edited J. N, Jennings and |. A. Mabbutt)

A.N.U. Press, Canberra.

Wen, BP. 1958. Sumuuary of Tectonics god Sedimentetion, Ch, XT, pp, 136-143, fa

Ceology of Sonth Australia. (Iidited M, PF. Glaessner and LL. W. Parkin.). Adelaide,

163 pp

Woprnrn, ah. 1960. On Some Structural Developments in the Central Part of the Crent

Australian Artesian Basiv, Trans, Royal Sov. S. Autst., 83, pp, 179-193;

Woyrrxun, H., 1963. Post-Winton Sediments of Probuble Upper Cretaceous Age in the

Centr] Grest Artesian Basin, Trans. Royal Soc, $, Aust, 86, pp, 247-253,

Rosert Epwarps PLate 1

Roserr Enwarps

ee -

‘Ft 7. As

C. R. Twipare PLATE 1

Fig. 1. Throughout the Flinders Ranges. residuals of former valley floors stand above ihe

present plains. Here, east of Rawnsley Bluff, at the south-eastern extremity of Wilpena

Pound, two such mesa remnants are illustrated. The upper surface slopes gently away from

the adjacent escarpment, and the quartzitic debris mantle which caps the residuals is under-

lain by intensively weathered (kaolinised) argillaceous bedrock.

Fig. 2, View of Dutchman's Stern and high plains remnants from the east. The synclinal

structure in quartzite dips south, and the residuals are underlain by the same argillaceous

sediments which can be traced southward and which underlie the plains between the camera

and the quartzite ridge.

C. BR, Twipare PLATE 2

; aby, i-

Fig. 1. High plains remnants occur particularly in anticlinal cores. Here a few miles north

and west of Quorn the Precambrian A.B.C, Range Quartzite occurs in the Dutchman’s Stern

(left distance) and in the Bluff (right distance). In the Stern the quartzite dip south (left

in the picture), in the Bluff, north, and in the high plains remnants occur between, in the core

of the anticline.

Fig. 2. At the margins of the northern Willochra Basin deposits of cross bedded ferruginous

and siliceous gravels, sands and clays of probably Middle Tertiary age are common. Here,

on the south bank of Boolcunda Creek, one mile west of Langwarren H.S., some 20-25 feet

of such sediments overlie Precambrian strata and are in turn overlain by some 2() feet of

unconsolidated reddish clays and gravels of the late Pleistocene Bruce Formation.

C. R. Twipate Pate 3

Fig. 1. One and one-quarter miles north-west of the site of Simmonston, some 10 feet of the

Middle Tertiary basin deposits occur between the deeply and intensively weathered Pre-

cambrian strata and the Bruce Formation.

Fig. 2. East of the Richman’s Valley syncline remnants of several erosional benches occur.

Immediately adjacent to the quartzite ridge are many even-crested spurs of the Dutchman

surface which are interpreted as etch-plain remnants related in preparation to the Mt. Brown

cycle of erosion and weathering and in time of exposure to the Proby phase. At the foot

of the escarpment the spur crests are slightly lower than a quarter-mile to the east (the

view is to the north); the depression js likely due to the deeper weathering at the scarp

foot, where more water percolates into the rocks.

C. R. Twipate PLATE 4

Fig. 1. Above the level of the Dutchman surface and of the Richman’s Valley syncline

stand a few remnants of the Mt, Brown level, which are capped by massive mantles of

quartzitic debris and which are underlain by a few score feet of kaolinised siltstones, seen

here exposed in gully heads. The level of the base of weathering (weathering iront)

approximates to that of the Dutchman surface.

COMPARATIVE STUDY OF ROCK ENGRAVINGS IN

SOUTH AND CENTRAL AUSTRALIA

BY ROBERT EDWARDS *

Summary

A preliminary study has been made of rock engravings at five sites four in the north-east of

South Australia and one, some 800 miles distant, in western Central Australia. Comparative

percentages of the various designs are given and their significance discussed.

The occurrence of a Central Australian engraving site used by the Western Desert people as a

totemic ceremonial lace is recorded and its bearing on the antiquity of rock engravings considered.

The degree of weathering of the rocks, the constant portrayal of plan aspects and other similarities

between the five sites are indicated.

COMPARATIVE STUDY OF ROCK ENGRAVINGS IN

SOUTH AND CENTRAL AUSTRALIA

by Hosert Epwarvs®

[Read 14 April 1966]

SUMMARY

_ A preliminary study has heen made of rock engravings at five sites—

four in the north-east of South Australia and one. some 800 miles distant, in

western Central Australia. Comparative perceutages. of the various designs are

given and their significance discussed.

‘The vecurrence ef a Central Australian engraving site used by the Western

Desert people as a totemic veremynial pice is recorded and its bearing on the

antiquity of rock engravings considered.

The degrer of weathering of the rocks, the constant portrayal of plan

aspects and other similarities between the five sites are indicated.

INTRODUCTION

The preliminary results of counts made of the numerical occurrences of

specific designs at a number of typical sites have been examined with a view to

ascertaining whether statistical comparisons would reveal any significant in-

formation, ‘he data considered in the present study include four sites in the

north-east of South Australia, in the Manunda-Yunta Creek drainage area (Tig.

1) on which 8,000 observations were recorded. These provide an interesting

compavison with 3,00() similar records from a group 800 miles away aut Tukulnga

Rockhole in western Central Australia, examined in 1965 during a photographic

survey of aboriginal art sites for the Australian Institute of Aboriginal Studies,

DATA AND STUDY METHODS

Extensive work on rock engraving sites has enabled ready recognition and

appreciation of the kinds and variety of designs occurring, on typical areas and

from this experience a tentative scheme of classificalion has been devised for

the collection of quantitative data, To expedite this method of study, only

the main area of each site—with its concentration of engravings — was sub-

jected to detailed recording, Similar designs often occur on scattered, minor

rock outerops at most sites. “these sporadic occurrences are not included and

would not significantly affect the value of the percentage results from the mass

of data obtained from the main areas, Other sites have been located on the

pastoral propertics examined, but these have not yet been subjected to this

method of study, Accurate recording is difficult because details of many

engravings haye heen obliterated or badly damaged hy weathering of the rock

surfaces or natural disinlegration of the outcrops, In some places marked super-

imposition of designs adds to the difficulty of reliable recognition and recording.

To assist with the analysis a series of arbitrary divisions have been ereated

and designated as follows, “crescents” for all boomerang-shaped engravings;

“Curator of Anthropology, South Anstralian Museum.

Trans, Roy, Soc. S. Aust, (1966), Vol. 90.

R. EDWARDS

O-¢ = fi 3 66k “ysny [erqua;)

0-2 ro £°€ ' &F 0-€€ TUM A,

&-F 8: Q-€ ¥ 82 7 WOPIAT,

GS-1 FG | z-9 8-86 aoyuereUueg

8-1 B-£ BE 0-96 = wULOLY

qooq _ syuoosor | 870(] syed,

weuiny{ | ~ nui osu ;

SUDV LNG aLIs

SULIOJ UDTSop Jo sosequeosed earyvavduiog

I ATavVo

ROCK ENGRAVINGS IN SOUTH AND CENTRAL AUSTRALIA 35

“star-like” for designs with lines radiating from a central point; “dots” for small,

round pecked-out areas. Other designs obviously represent natural objects and

what may be termed geometric outlines. Certain rare and sometimes more

complex designs have been recorded as “others” as they are either quite inde-

finite or “abstract”. For present considerations, the fange of dimensions of

designs in the various groups is not included.

The figures given in Table 1 indicate the total observations made at the

ive sites and the frequencies of the various kinds of designs. It will be seen

that animal and bird tracks together with simple circular designs predominate

(see Plates 1 and 2 for typical examples). All other motifs form but a small

MANUNOS -YUNTA SERIES f

SCALE IN MILES

Fig. 1. Map showing the location of rock engraviny sites.

percentage of the total. The quantity of these less numerous designs at any

parlicular site is small and variations are probably dune to chance rather than

significant style changes, Most designs are represented at all sites, although

their numbers yary both within and between the groups of engravings. There

is no significant difference between the designs at the sites located 800 miles

from each other.

If the percentages of the various animal tracks are added together they form

an average of 62-3% of the total number of designs at the South Australian sites

and 71-3% of those in Central Australia, The other dominant design group is

circles which often represent the “home” or camp of a totemic ancestor in

Central Australian art (Tindale, 1932; Strchlow, 1964). These comprise an

average of aboul 25% of the designs at all sites. Although some of the figures

frum individual sites show different proportions of tracks and circles the fotals

of the hwo are similar and give an average of 87-3% in the Manunda-Yunta

Creek series compared with 95-+7% at the one Centra} Australian site. These pre-

liminary figures emphasise the high percentage of tracks and circles at all these

wa R. EDWARDS

sites and highlight the extreme simplicity of the art. The unusual engravings

often altract greater attention at first casual observation, but they are by cum-

parison numerically insignificant.

An interesting feature of the rock engravings of the north-east of South

Australia and the Central Australian site, is that they consistently depict plan

aspects of the subjects portrayed, whereas Uiose at some Flinders Range sites

( Baserlow, 1914), in western New South Wales (McCarthy, 1963), the north of

Western Australia (MeCarthy, 1961, 1962; Crawford, 1964; Mounttord, 1965}

and some ather areas, have more advanced and complex designs including cleva-

tions of both human beings and animals. The sites considered in this paper

form a sharp contrast to such areas as Port Medland (Pig. 1) where, although

animal tracks are still the dominant basic design, a wide range of more elaborate

figures also occur {MecCarthy, 1962),

One of the interesting design compositions common to these sites is the

grouping of tracks in a series to illustrate the passage of an animal across the

country. A series of kangaroo tracks and human foot printy is Ulusteated from

Panaramitee Station (Mountford and Edwards, 1963); similar groups are

recorded from Port Hedland (McCarthy, 1962); they also occur at Tukuluga

Rockhole. These compositions may be a more advanced stage of development

beyond the mere recording of individual tracks. They appear to represest

hunting scenes in a simple but cifective manner,

An interesting facet of the observations made during the exarmination of the

Tukulnga site was the evidence that it is one of the kelaiatjukurupa or emu

“dreamiug” sites belonging to same of the Western Desert people. The engray-

ings are located on Souk surfaces adjacent to three distinctive, evlindricul-

shaped rockholes, The largest of these contained some five fest of rain-water

in spite of a prolonged drought| The associated creeks join tu form a “Y"-

shaped gorge and it is here the main sile is located. The engravings also exten

to rock surfaces both up and down the watercourses and adjehing area, A

tull deseription of the range of designs will be published in a lurther paper.

Tukulnga Roeckhole, being a tutemic place, has been the site of ceremonivs

up to Lhe present time. The three aboriginal informants who took us there

performed, quite spontaneously, some of the gestures of the traditional ceremony

associated with the emu “dreaming”. One of the large rounded boulders

symbolizes an emu egg. The engraved emu tracks on its surface indicate where

the young emus came out of the egg and walked across the rock. Independeit

and repeated questioning ef the three informants, two of them, Kuminintjarre

and Migenteri, old men of considerable importance in their tribe, brought the

same response to questions about the origin of the engravings. They consider

these to be a part of the “dreaming” site and claim they were made when the

site was “ereated”, Any suggestion of the living people of present or immediate

past generations having made the engravings was met with surprise ind in

credulity, The aboriginals denied any knuwledge of the living people having

woything af all to do with making the engravings and insisted that they forniexl

an intevfral part of the ceremonial site and “have always been there”.

A few hadly weathered ochre paintings were found ot vertical rock faves

a little down-stream from the rockhules, Ochre-stained grindstoncs, small Hakes,

and fire hearths indicate where the aborfgzinals had prepared for ceremonies,

A flat, sandy area at the entrance to the muin gorge was strewn with Jaree

grindstunvs and was obviously a convenient camping area during oceasinns

when ceremonies were carried oul.

ROCK ENGRAVINGS IN SOUTH AND CENTRAL AUSTRALIA 37

The association of a rock engraying site with present day aboriginal cere-

monial provides interesting evidence not available for most South Australian

sites, ere is nothing to indicate that living people were associated with or

made use of the sites in the north-east of South Australia in recent times

(Edwards, 19@3a). The aboriginals of the Flinders Ranges were neither aware

of the existence of some cngrayings nor recognised them as the product of

their race (Mountford and Edwards, 1964), For those rock engraving areas

where the local aboriginals have become extinct without any record being made

mf their life and ceremonial activities, information on the significance of the

engravings must remain a matter of speculation. It is therefore important and

urgent that intensive investigations be undertaken in Central Australia where

opportnnitics are still available to secure positive evidence of the association

of rock engravings with persisting present day aboriginal ritual.

DISCUSSION

Considerable antiquity has been suggested for rock engravings in the

Manunda-Yunta Creek drainage area (Edwards, 1965b), This is indicated hy

the degree of weathering of the new surfaves produced when the engravings

were made, These haye the same appearance as lhe adjacent non-cengrayed

areas. The general advanced state of disintegration of many of the racks is

a further indication of great age. These are consistent features in the twa

areas considered in this paper. Many rock pavements are breaking up; designs

are sometimes hidden by rock falls; broken ard disjointed rocks bear only

portions of designs; other eugraved pieces lie about lonsely on the ground, Some

engravings occur on rocks near the flood-line of the creek, Even in this arid,

low raintall area the action of running water and water-borne sand Jas removed

the weathered surface of the rocks and with ft many portions of engravings.

Some have probably been completely obliterated from the rocks in the bed of

the creek, All these processes Involve an appreciable period of time.

Definite engravings of dingo tracks are absent at this Central Australian

site, as In the Manunda-Yunta drainage area.

The sites and engravings considered are shawn tn have tnany feabures in

common, The percentage figures given indicate the possibility of a basic simple

rock engraving culture having prevailed over a wide area of the Australian

Continent. More advanced designs in the north of Western Australian could

have been the result of a later development in style influenced by cultural

contact or infusion. Certainly the fresh appearance of many engravings there

suggests a more recent origin than those where weathering is more advanced.

The preponderance of animal tracks may relate to important food items and

the sites of rock engravings be the appropriate places where food increase

ceremonies were carried out in long past times (Edwards, 1965a). Many of

the other designs, including lizards and human fool prints, could also be asso-

ciated with hunting or food yathering, The close proximity of sites ta sources

of water, the other basic necessity for daily subsistence, is a further supporting

feature and links engravings still closer to food supplies.

The similarity im the percentages of the various engraving designs at the

five sites considered provides new evidence of a relationship between widely

separated sites. Additional data will have to be prepared for analysis beforu

the significance of variations can he determined and the geographical distri-

bution of this style of engraving clarified. Further studies may provide some

evidetiog concerning the age and importance of these interesting relies of

the past.

38 R. FDWARDS

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

This research was made possible by a grant from the Australian Institute of

Aboriginal Studies. The support and encouragement of the Principal, Mr. F. D.

McCarthy, is appreciated. The study of rock engravings by comparative per-

centages has been assisted by Dr. T. D, Campbell, whose practical help has

been invaluable. Ron and Andrew Bailey and Michael Hindmarsh aided with

the investigation of the Central Australian site.

REFERENCES

Basrpow, H., 1914, Aboriginal Rock Carvings of Great Antiquity in South Australia. J.B.

Anthrop. Inst., Loudoun, 44, pp. 195-211.

Crawrorp, 1. M., 1964. The Engrayings of Depuch Island. Spec. Publ. W. Aust. Mus.,

Perth, 2. pp. 23-63,

Epwanns, R., 1964. Rock Engravings and Stone Implements of Piteairn Station, North-

eastern South Australia, Rec. S. Aust. Mus, Adelaide, 14 (4), pp, 643-662.

Epwanos, R., 1965a, Rock Engravings and Aboriginal Occupation at Nackara Springs in

the North-east of South Australia, Ree. S. Aust. Mus., Adelaide, 15 (1), pp. 9-28,

Epwarps, R., 1965b.. Rock Engravings and Incised Stones; Tiverton Station, North-east South

Australia, Mankind, Sydney, 6 (3), pp. 223-231.

McCantay, F. D., 1961. The Rock Engravings of Depuch Island, North-west Australia.

Rec, Aust. Mus., Sydney, 25 (8), pp. 121-148.

McCanrny, F. D., 1962. The Rock Engravings at Port Hedland, North-western Australia.

Pap, Krocher anthrop. Soc., Berkeley, 26, pp. 1-73.

McCanimmy, F. D., and Macrnrosa, N. W. C., 1962, The Archaeology of Mootwingee,

Western New South Wales. Rec. Aust. Mus., Sydney, 25 (13). pp, 249-298,

Movuncrorp, GC. P., 1929. Aboriginal Rock Carvings in South Australia, Rep. Australas. Ass.

Adymt, Sci., Hobart, 19, pp. 337-366.

Mountrorp, C. P., and Epwanbs, B,, 1962, Aboriginal Rock Engravings of Extinct Creatures

in South Australia, Man, London, 62, pp. 97-99,

Mowuntrorp, ©, P., and Enwanns, R,, 1963. Rock Engravings of Panaramitee Station, North-

castern South Australia. Trans. R, Soc; S. Aust., Adelaide, 86, pp. 131-146.

Mounirorp, C, P,, and Enwarns, R., 1964. Rock Engravings in the Red Gorge. Deception

Creek, Northern South Australig, Anthropos, St. Augustin, 59, pp. 849-859.

Sreentow, T, G. H., 1964, The Art of Circle, Line, and Square, Australian Aboriginal Art.

Sydney, Chp. 4, pp. 44-59.

‘TinpALe, N, B., 1939: Primitive Art of the Australian Aborigines, Manusoripts, Geelong. 3,

pp, 38-42.

EXPLANATION OF PLa‘res

PLate

Typical examples of rock engravings at Panaramitee Station in the Mauunda-Yanta Creek

drainage area,

PLaTF 2

Engravings. at Tukulnga Rockhole in western: Ceatral Australia. ‘Seales in inches and centi-

metres.

Roperr Epwarps Puate 1

ite of

per-

» has

PLATE

RoBERT EDWARDS

SOME ASPECTS OF THE DYNAMICS OF VEGETATION IN

THE PORT AUGUSTA-IRON KNOB AREA, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY R. L. CORRELL* AND R. T. LANGE*

Summary

The extremely slow rate of change in arid vegetation is demonstrated by means of photographs

taken over a 23-year time period. A life span of 250 years for Acacia sowdenii is suggested by an

indirect method.

SOME ASPECTS OF THE DYNAMICS OF VEGETATION IN

THE PORT AUGUSTA-IRON KNOB AREA, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

by R. L, CorrenL® ann BR. T, LAncr*

[Read 14 April 1966]

SUMMARY

The extremely slow rate of change in arid vegetation is demonstrated by

means of photographs taken over a 23-year time period. A life span of 250

years for Acacia sowdenii is suggested by an indirect method.

Ata conterence held at the Mortlock Research Station, Yudnapinna, ou 7th

May, 1941, Mr. C. Ff. Goode, a member of the Pastoral Board, was commissioned

to report on firewood cutting operations in the Port Augusta, Iron Knob, Iron

Baron and Whyalla localities. On 8th July of the same year, Mr. Goode tabled

his report —a comprehensive 33-page manuscript, including many small but

detailed maps of the relevant paddocks, and illustrated by some 40) photographs.

A file containing the report formed the basis for this investigation.

The area under consideration has a rainfall of 7-4 inches per annum, evenly

spread over the year, but more dependable in winter. he average temperature

is 64° F., with an average daily maximum in suinmer of 90° F, The vegetation

of the area is largely Acacia sowdenii (myall) woodland, or a shrub steppe

dominated by either Kochia sedifolia (bluebush) or Atriplex vesicaria (salt-

bush). Tt has been described by Murray (1931), Wood (1937), Crocker and

Skewes (1941), and Jackson (1958), and will not be discussed in detail in this

paper. The area has been grazed by sheep and the vegetation within three

miles of the watering points is at a disclimax, e.g. where K. secdifolia has been

overgrazed, it has heen replaced by K. erioelada (black bluebush). The re-

mainder of the vegetation, apart from the removal of some dead trees. approxi-

mates well to the virgin condition.

An examination of the photographs and location plans in the Goode report

enabled the photopoints to be located approximately; in three cases the exact

position was determined. Sometimes, however, difficulties were encountered

because fences, roads, pipelines, tanks and even hills have been altered since

the original photographs were taken. Where the areas were accurately located,

photographs were taken from the same positions as used by Goode in 1941.

(See Plates 1, 2 and 3.)

The opportunities for obtaining matched photographs showing details of

the changes in the vegetation, particularly arid vegetation, over a long time

period are very rare, a notable exception being the records kept of the Koona-

more Vegetation Reserve, The photographs presented here enable the change,

or lack of change, over a period of 23 years to be studied, :

Perhaps the most striking feature of these comparisons is the extremely slow

rate of change of the arid vegetation. In Plate 1, apart from some possible

* Departmioent of Botany, University of Adelaide,

Trans. Roy, Soc. 8, Aust. (1966), Vol. 90.

42 RK, L, CORRELL ann R. T. LANGE

defoliation, which may only be temporary, there has heen no apparent change

in the trees. Plate 2 shows a myall that has lost only a few terminal twigs,

The same is trne of the dead myalls on the right and left of Plate 3, while the

central dead myall, which had been reduced to a skeleton in the original photo-

graph, had disappeared by 1964,

A similar slow change of arid vegetation was also noticeable in photographs

taken at Koonamore Vegetation Reserve (Hall, Specht and Eardley, 1964). This

in the living myalls invites questions as to the age of these trees, especially as

some have a circumicrence of over two and a half metres at 10-centimetre heieht.

In the absence of any estimate of their life-span, an argument arriving at a

provisional age may be developed along the following lines. The myalls, unlike

the mulgas (Acacia aneura), are uot in contemporaneous stands, but appareutly

grow more or less asynchronously. This is reflected by the trunk cireumference-

frequency data presented in Fig, 1, which is consistent with the view that all

ih)

fa)

re)

[Fi [| |

10) 20 640 66 80 100 120 40 160 180 700 220 2740 260 280

TRUNK CIRCUMFERENCE (ormsd

Mig. 1,

the trees can be regarded as independently proceeding from germination as

seedlings to mature trees, followed by death and disintegration. Assuming a

steady state, the ratio of live to dead trees would then be the same as the ratio

of the time it takes for a seedling to develop into a mature tree and die, as

compared to the time it would take a dead tree to disintegrate, This is the

same rationale as was used by Howard and Pele (1952) in cytology.

The ratio of live to dead trees was calculated by a modification of the point-

centre quarter method (Cottam and Curtis, 1956), Fifty points were located

over a distance of 20 miles by restricted randomization in the myall woodland

community near Hesso Railway Station. Particular care was taken to avoid

areas that had been used for firewood cutting operations or showed any sign of

recent fire. The scores for the different points were classified on the basis of

the number of live trees in the sample (see Table 1). To test the data for

homogencity, it was compared to the expected binomial by means of a Chi-

squared test, As the deviation was not significant, the data were considered

DYNAMICS OF VECETATION. PORT AUGUSTA-IRON KNOB, S.A, 43

as being consistent with a ratio of live to dead trees of 0:72: 0-28. This ratio

is suggested as equivalent to the ratio of the length of the time periods required

tor the growth and disintegration of a myall tree.

From the photographs presented here, 50 years would be a conseryative

estimate of the disintegration time of a newly-dead myall; a 100 years would

be a more realistic figure. (This estimate is given support by an examination

TABLE 1.

Number of live trees Frequency observed Frequency expected

i) 1 “31

! 2} 14 3-16 } 15-66

z ' lt | 12-19

3 24 20-90

4 12 13-44

Total 50 50-00

X* = 0-78 (probability 0+30-0-50).

of the photographs of Quadrat 100, at the Koonamore Vegetation Reserve (Hall,

Specht and Eardley, 1964).) As the sandalwood trees (Myoporum platy-

carpum) that died between 1931 and 1936 were still standing in 1962, their

disintegration time must be longer than 30 years. Based on the conservative

estimate, a life-span of a myall would be:

2 i

35 % 50 = 130 years.

Based on the 100 year disintegration period, the life span of a myall would

be over 250 years.

As stated above, this estimate is only provisional. It does show, however,

that myall trees can be very old— possibly old enough to be measured by

carbon dating.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

The authors wish to acknowledge the co-operation of the Pastoral Board

during this investigation. Professor R. N. Robertson read the manuscript and

offered some valuable suggestions.

REFERENCES

Corram, G., and Cunris, J. T., 1956. The Use of Distance Measures in Phytosociological

Sanipling. Ecology, 37, pp. 451-460,

Crocker, R, L.. and Skewes, H. KR. 1941, The Principal Soil and Vegetation Relationships

on Yudnapinna Station, North-west South Australia. Trans, Roy, Soc, S. Aust., 65,

pp. 44-60.

Hau, E. A. A., Specur, R. L,, and Earpuey, C. M., 1964. Regeneration of the Vegetation

on Koonamore Vegetation Reserve, 1926-62, Aust. J. Bot., 12, pp. 205-264,

Howanp, A., and Perc, S. R., 1952. Synthesis of Desoxyribonucleic Acid in Normal and

lrradiated Cells and its Relation to Chromosome Breakage. Heredity, 8 (Suppl.), pp.

261-273.

Jackson, E, A., 1958. A Study of the Soils and Some Aspects of the Hydrology at Yudna-

pinna, C,S,LR.0.. Aust. Diy. of Soils, Soils and Land Use.. Ser, 24,

Murray, B. J., 1931. A Study of the Vegetation of the Lake Torrens Plateau, South Aus-

tralia. Trans. Roy. Soc. $. Aust., 55, pp. 91-112,

Woon, J. G.. 1937. The Vegetation of South Australia. Government Printer, Adelaide,

R. L. Corre. Ann R. T. LANGE Puare |

Vig, 1. (Corresponding to 25 in the report.) Looking east toward the entrance fluming of

East Bannon’s Dam.

Fig, 2. (Corresponding to 26 in the report.) Taken from the south bank of East Bannon’s Dam,

Fig. 3. (Corresponding to 35 in the report.) Taken from the southern boundary of Corunna

Station, looking west towards Iron Knob.

PLATE

R. T. LANGE

FEATURES OF PALAEOZOIC TECTONISM IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY B. G. FORBES*

Summary

Evidence on Palaeozoic tectonism in South Australia is restricted both in time and space; most of

the areas mentioned here are from the Mt. Lofty- Flinders Ranges, locus of the Adelaide

Geosyncline.

The Indulkana area on the south-east edge of the Musgrave Block suggests a pre-Ordovician folding

of the Upper Proterozoic sequence related to a fault in the crystalline basement. In the Great

Artesian Basin, subsurface information shows a long history of uplift of the Gidgealpa anticline and

a deformation between the Ordovician and Permian.

In the Central Flinders Ranges the Blinman diapir was rising in the Upper Proterozoic; sinking of a

graben associated with the Oraparinna diapir ceased before Middle Cambrian time. From fossil

evidence, the main Palaeozoic orogeny in this area must have begun no earlier than Middle

Cambrian. In the Mount Lofty Ranges there is stratigraphic evidence for mild tectonism in late

Precambrian and early Cambrian time, as exemplified by unconformities in the Truro area and the

White Point Conglomerate on Kangaroo Island. Using a K-Ar age of the Encounter Bay granite

(457 x 10° years) the main orogeny in the south may be placed between Middle Cambrian and

Middle Ordovician; there were at least two phases of folding.

Tectonism produced varying effects such as gentler, more open folds accompanied by diapirism in

the central Flinders Ranges and steeper, more crowded folds accompanied by basement folding and

thrusting in the south and Olary regions. Deformation is generally more intense in anticlinal areas.

FEATURES OF PALAEOZOIC TECTONISM IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA

by B. G, Fornrs®

[Read 12 May 1966]

SUMMARY

Evidence on Palaeozoic teclovism in South Australia is restricted both. in

time and space; most af the ureas mentioned here are from the Mt. Lofty-

Flinders Ranges. locus of the Adelaide Geosyneline.

The Indulkana area on the south-east edge of the Musgrave Block suggests

a pre-Ordevician folding of the Upper Proterozoic sequence related to a fault

in the erystalline basenient, In the Creat Artesian Basin, subsurface information

shaws u long history of uplift of the Gidgealpa anticliné and a deformation

between the Ordovician and Permian,

In the Central Flinders Ranges the Blinman cliapir was rising in the

Upper Proterozoic; sinking of a graben associated with the Oraparinna diapir

ceased before Middle Cambrian time. From fossil evidence, the main Palaeozoic

orogeny in this area must have begun no earlier than Middle Cambrian. In the

Mount Lofty Ranges there is stratigraphic evidence for mild tectonism in late

Precambrian and early Cambrian tinie, as exemplified by unconformities in the

Truro area and the White Point Conglomerate on Kangaroo Island, Using a

K-Ar age of the Encounter Bay granite (457 x 10° years) the main orogeny in

the south may be placed between Middle Cambria and Middle Ordovician;

there were at least two phases of folding.

Tectonism produced varying effects such.as gentler, more open falds jecom-

panied hy diapirism im the central Flinders Ranges and steeper, more crowded

folds accompanied by basemont folding aud thrusting in the south and Olary

regions, Deformation is generally more intense in anticlinal areas,

INTRODUCTION

This review has been prepared as a South Australian contribulion to a

symposium on Palacozoic tectonism in Australia; the writer has acted mainly

as an assembler of information, much of it previously published.

The major orogeny in South Australia has long been attributed to the

lower Palaeozoic, The effects of this orogeny, seen mainly in the Mt. Lofty

and Flinders Ranges, have been described by such earlier workers as Howchin

(e.g. 1926), but an overall appreciation of this orogeny, exemplified in the 1960

Tectonic Map of Australia, has been dependant upon the progress. of regional

geological mapping in South Australia. Hence, the structural analyses of Cam-

pana (1955; 1958 in Glaessner and Parkin) of the Mt. Lofty and Flinders

Ranges result from mapping by the Geological Survey in these regions; current

mapping by the Surycy and research at the University of Adelaide should make

a future study most fruitful,

Such an analysis is not attempted in this paper, which presents instead the

results of work from certain selected areas,

i Geological Survey of South Australia.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. (1966), Vol. 90.

46 B. G. FORBES

TECTONIC FRAMEWORK

Although some of the tectonic subdivisions of South Australia are more

recent than the Palaeozoic, it is convenient to see where the particular areas

under discussion fall in relation to the whole tectonic framework of South Aus-

tralia. ‘The names used in Fig. I are mainly those of Hills (1965) with modi-

fication based partly on Thomson (1965) who has presented a more detailed

tectonic subdivision, and Dickinson and Sprigg (1953).

eee NT ek.

paisesareie GREAT

ARTESIAN

Officer

Basin

Kanmantoo

Trough

Fig. 1. Map of South Australia showing main tectonic units (after

Thomson, 1965, and others). Preeambrian crystalline basement: shown

hy crosses, as in (he Gawler Platform and Musgrave Block. Upper Pro-

terozoic and lower Palaeozoic setlimentary rocks: dots. Lower Palaeozoic

sedimentary rocks of the Kanmantoo Group: as in the Kanmantoo

Trough. Linecaments appcar as heavy lines; the Torrens Lineament is

shown passing through Lake Torrens on the eastern edge of the Stuart

Shelf ancl runing south along the eastern coast of Yorke Peninsnila to-

ward Kangaroo Island. Numbered localities are as follows; 1, Tndulkana

Range; 2, north-east of Boorthanna; 3, Pandiehurra No. 1 Well; 4. Cid-

gealpa anticline; 5, Dullingari No, 1 Well; 6, Blinmian-Hawker region;

7, Clare area; 8, Weekeroo area; 9. Truro area,

FEATURES OF PALAEOZOIC TECTONISM IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA 47

The largest areas of older Precambrian crystalline basement are exposed

in the Musgrave Block and Gawler Platform, Proterozoic and Cambrian sedi-

mentary rocks are known in the Adclaide Geodsyncline, where they are thickest

and moderately to strongly folded, and on the Stuart Shelf, where they are flat-

lying. The Adelaide Geosyncline, termed a miogeosyncline by Sprigg (1952).

may have extended well to the narth-west of the Flinders Ranges. In the murth-

east, Palaeozic rocks are known to underlie Mesozoic sediments of the Great

Artesian Basin, The Officer Basin is suspected to contain a significant thickness

of Palaeozoic sedimentary rocks, but this remains to be tested. The Murray

and Bucla Basins ave areas of Tertiary sedimentation: the Murray Basin is

nuuderlain by rocks similar to those of the Kanmantoo Trough.

Palaeozoic rocks have a limited surface extent in South Australia. As may be

seen in Fig, 1, the areas invulved are mainly in or near the Mt. Lofty-Flinders

Ranges where the results of the early Palaeozoie orogeny are well displayed.

A welcome and interesting exceplian is the bore-hole information available from

the Gidgealpa arca in the Great Artesian Basin.

NORTH-WESTERN REGION

The Musgrave Block (Hills, 1965) is flanked to. its south-west hy gently

inclined basal conglomerate and quartzite thought to be uppermast Proterozoic

in age (Johnson, 1963). These sediments, which Thotnson (1965) refers to hes

Giles Shelf, are conceivably co-extensive with the sedimentary content of the

Olficer Basin, which was possibly a subsiding area in the Upper Proterozoic

und Palaeozoic. Gravity surveys (Mumme, 1965, p. 122) suggest that the deeper

pare of the Officer Basin lies between latitudes of about 27.5 and 29 degrees

south.

A little more evidence on the age and nature of tectonism in the north-west

is provided on the south-eastern edge of the Musgrave Block in the Alberga

area, described by R. P. Coats (1963), In the Indulkana Range (Fig, 2) in the

south-eastern corner of the Alberga 1:250,000 map area, the gently-folded Mt.

Chandler Sandstone unconformahly overlies more strongly folded Upper Pro-

terozoic sedimentary rocks of the Adelaide System. The Mt, Chandler Sandstone

contains Scolithes and Cruzigna, which, together with lithological similarity to

the Pacoota-Stairway sequence of the Amadeus Basin, are suggestive of an

Ordovician age (WH. Wopfner, personal poraerumieation | The uppermost beds

of the Adelaide System, which includes the Chambers Bluff Tillite, are not older

than Sturtian and may be Marinoan, hence there must have been a period af

strong tolling between Upper Proterozoic and the time of deposition of the

Mt, Chandler Sandstone.

The intensity of folding of the Proterozoic beds increases markedly near 2

faulted contact with the older Precambrian near the north-western edge al the

indulkana Range. As can he seen im Tig. 2, more open folding south-east of

the Kange is replaced by steep isoclinal overturned folding near the fault. The

folding of the Adelaide System is thus at least partly influenced by the faulted

edge of the crystalline basement, Axes of the gentle post-2Ordovician folds are

also iligned sub-parallel to this edge. The final phase of wlense faulting rejuven-

ated established fractures in the older Precambrian rocks and gave tise to

extensive crush zones containing pseudotachylite. .

48 B. G, FORBES

PEAKE AND DENISON REGION

The Peake and Denison Ranges form a series of Precambrian inliers in the

western part of the Great Artesian Basin. Stratigraphically and structurally they

resemble the Flinders Runges, and trend in a north-north-westerly direction

parallel to fold axes in quartzites and slates of the Adelaide System. Folding

van. be dated only between the broad limits of Upper Proterozoic and Permian.

As indicated by Reyner (1955, p, 12) folds in the Adelaide System rocks

are fairly open with dips of the order of 20 to 50 degrees, but there are zones

covering smaller areas where folds are locally steep and are ususlly accompanied

Fig. 2 (rete). Geological sketch-map of

the Indulkang Range area, based on

Coats. 1963, Q: Quaternary deposits:

O; Mi, Chandler Sandstone: Pu: Upper

Proterezvie sedimentary rocks. Crosses:

orystalline basement; F; fault

Bl Sy ae: Fig, 3 (below). Geological sketch-map

Chambers Blutr of an area north-east of Boorthanna,

Sere PS Se Se afler Réeyner, 1955, and Thomson, 1964.

Ph, Pe: Upper Proterozoic sedimentary

rocks of the Burra Group and Callanna

Beds. Crosses: crvstallme basement.

F; fault,

FEATURES OF PALAEOZOIC TECTONISM IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA 44

by faults. Fig. 3, which is based partly on unpublished work by Coats and

Thomson (Thomson, 1984, Fig. 3) and the Boorthanna and Cadlareena |-mile

geological maps, shows a broad basin flanked by fwulted, steeply-dipping anti-

élinal areas, Movement with the yreatest relative vertical component is com

centrated hi these faulted, anticlinal areas,

CREAT ARTESIAN BASIN

The Gidgealpa anticline, one of a series of structures in the Great Aus-

trafian Artesian Basin in the north-east of Sonth Australia, has been outlined

by seismic surveys of the United Geophysical Corporation tor Santos Ltd. and

Delhi Australian Petroleum Ltd. Drilling of seven wells, five of which produce

commercial quantities of gas, has shown that the structure has had a complex

tectonic history. This history has been outlined principally by J. Harrison and

W. J. Grecr of Delhi Australian Petroleum Ltd,, to which company I am in-

dcbted for permission to use confidential reports-

Gidgealpa No. 1 well, shown in the structure contour plan, Fig. 4, and

section, Fig. 5, is located on the more gently-dipping eastern limb of the anti-

cline and has penetrated in its deepest part fosstliferous Cambrian rocks. Within

the Cambrian beds at a depth of 10,000 feet there is a suspected thrust fault.

Dipmeter values indicate a slight angular uncontormity between a Cambrian

Limestone and overlymg sandstone of probable Permo-Carboniferous age.

Pollen and spore analysis hy W, K. Harris in 1965 (unpublished) of correlative

beds in Merrimelia No. I demonstrates a post-lower Carboniferous age for these

rocks. Hence, in the lower part of Gidgealpa No. 1 well there is evidenre for

Upper and Middle Cambrian volcanism and thrusting followed by uplift and

erasion between early Upper Cambrian and Permian,

The dating of younger movements may be made with reference to Fig. 5,

The Gidgealpa anticline was active in postlower Carboniferous time as evi-

denced by the absence of the PPermo-Carboniferous sandstone from Gidgealpa

Nos. 2, 3, 4 and 6 and the presence ot « widespread erosional break at the hase

of the Permian. There is a marked thinning of the Permian and Triassic over

the structure which suggests a continuation of movement through the Permian,

In Gidgealpa No. 1 the Permian is 1,000 fect thick and contains about 15%

thickness of coal beds, but in Gidyealpa No. 2 near the crest of the anticline the

Permian has thinned ta 88 feet-and contains 10% coal beds.

Relevant information is also provided trom the Delhi-Santos Pandicburra

No, | and Dullingari No. | wells (respectively north-west and south-east af

Gidyealpa). Between 6,970 feet and total depth of 7,253 feet, Pandicburra No,

i penetrated stceply-dipping quartzite and shale of palaeontologically-determined

Lower Ordovician age. These beds are overlain unconformably by flat-lying

Triassic sandstone; Permian is ahsent. In Dullingari No. 1, Middle to Upper

Ordovician beds dipping at 45 to 60 degrees are at a depth of 9,050 feet aver-

lain with angular unconformity by Permian boulder clay. Thus, both these

well; demonstrate a post-Lower Ordoyician Palaeozoic tectonism,.

ADELAIDE GEOSYNCLINE

The eyerall pattern of folding and faulting in the Adelaide Geosyncline has

already been described by several authors, notably Sprigg (1946), Campana and

Webb i) Glaessner and Parkin (1955), Coats (1964), and Thomson (1985). and

is featured in the Tectonic Map of Australia of 1960, It is proposed here to

select only a few small areas for comment.

a0 B. G, FORBES

Blinman Region

The Blinman 1:63,360 geological map (Dalgarno, Johnson and Coats, 1965)

covers an area of fairly open folding in the Flinders Ranges at the northern

end of what Campana terms the Blinman axial culmination. Most of the northern

Flinders Ranges are characterized by relatively broad structures with moderate

dips except near local disturbances such as diapiric structures and major faults,

Fig. 4. Structure contour plan of the

Gidgealpa anticline, after Delhi Austra-

lian Petroleum Ltd,, showing positions

of wells. Contours are depths of the top

of the Permian below sea-level. Maxi-

mun dip of the north-west flank of the

anticline is about 12 degrees.

Fig. 5. Diagrammatic

geological cross-section

of the Gidgealpa anti-

Fact cline, after Delhi Aus-

tralian Petroleum Ltr,

SOOIVERT

BeUD

Palaeozoic

oo s

ono” ndstone

Cambrian

Limestone

To ToIOssy TA TD Alte!

FEATURES OF PALAEOZOIC TECTONISM IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA 31

Features of interest in the Blinoman area (Fig. 6) are the steep up-turning

of rocks of the Umberatana Group around the Blinman diapir, the presence

of a system of ecross-fuults apparently related at least in part to the diapir, and

certain sedimentary tcatures suggestive of relatively upward movement during

the Lower Cambrian. ‘The sedimentary features are pebble beds in the Wilku-

willina Limestone near the Wirrealpa diapir, thinning of certain units and the

preserice of disconformities. As suggested by Dalgarno (1964, p. 139), there

appears to be a widespread diseonformity at the base of the Billy Creek Forma-

tion (Upper Lower to Middle Cambrian) which transgresses from Oraparinna

shale down tu Wilkawillina Limestone in the Blinman 1;63,360 area.

Vig, 6. Geologteal sketeh-map af tho

| Buinman—_ He ’ | Blinman area, based on the Blinman

cds ee Vet! 1:63,360. geological map, Black arens:

iS ‘ . a disturbed rocks of the Callunuy Beds in

diapirs. Pu, Pw: sedimentary mocks at

the Umberatana and Wilpena Groups of

the Adelaide System. Dashed ores:

Cambrian sedimentary — rocks. :

Quatemary deposits. Teavy lines: faults.

Lincs will triangular projections indi-

cate disconformities:

Coats (1964) indicates some of the evidence for the age of diapirism, The

Blinman diapir provided some of the detritus in sediments of the Umberatana

Group and the youngest movement of the Wirrealpa diapir post-dated the Lower

Carbrian Oraparinna Shale.

South-east of the Blinman area Dalgarno (196+) has described a graben

related to the Oraparimma diapw. The graben was subsiding during deposition

of the Lower Cambrian Hawker Group. Thickness of the Group within the

graben is 4,100 feet compared with only 200 to 1,500 feet outside. A hiostrome

was controlled by active movement of one of the faults during the Lower

Cambrian. Thickness of the Middle Cambrian Wirrcalpa Limestone is not

obviously affected. This area also gives palaeontologically a lower time-limit

of Middle Cambrian for the main period of folding.

Burra-Ouorn Region

The open and dis-oriented folding of the Blinman-Oraparinna region is

replaced near Hawker by steeper north-easterly trending folds which extend

south into the Quorn area. ‘The first sharp structure south-east of Wilpena Pound

is shown in Tig. 7 and is a faulted syneline invelying the Pound Quartzite and

overlying Cambrian beds,

A furlher example of faulting associated with steeper folding is provided

i the Burra region. In the western part of the Clare 1:63,960 area (Forbes,

196), just west of Clare, is a narrow zone of tightly folded and Faulted rocks

of the lower part of the Adelaide System, This disturbed zone extends north

ant! south; near Spalding it contains small intrusive bodies of dolerite,

52 B. G, FORBES

ast of this zone is a contrastingly broader and more open syncline, pitching

gently north, which is succeeded to the east by further more open parallel anti-

clines and synclines,

Olary Region

Structural relationships between older Precambrian crystalline basemeut

and the Adelaide System in the Olary region have been ontlined hy Campana

(Campana and King, 1958), who concludes that folding of the crystalline base-

munt was the active agent in diastrophism.

__ Structures in the Adelaide System are fairly open away from the migmatite

inliers but are frequently steep or overturned close to them. The main direction

Fig. 7, Geological sketch-

map of an area south-east

of Wilpena Pound, based an

part of the Parachiina

1:250.000 geological map

(Dalgarno, 1966), Pe; dis-

turbed rocks of the Callunna

Beds in diapirs. Pw: Wil-

LAST = aig td

ly << SHANELOCR oe. pena Grup, ABC: ABC

7, z é < Range Quartzite.

of schistosity is north-easterly in both older and younger Precambrian. [lowever,

a prominent zone of averthrust through McDonald Hill (about 7 miles north-

east of Olary) is oriented in a north-westerly direction. A recent re-examination

of the Ploumbago-Weekeroo area by Talbot (personal communication, Dr. J. L,

Talbot, University of Adelaide, 1965; see Fig, 8) indicates that folding of the

crystalline basement was accompanied by stecp east-dipping thrusts which

extend some way into the Upper Proterozoic sedimentary rocks. Talbot notes

that where the basal conglomerate of the Adclaide System overlies basement

schist it is much more severely folded than where it overlies basement gneisses.

Southern Region

In the southern Mount Lofty Ranges the structures resulting from Palacozoic

tectonism have been outlined in the course of regional geological mapping. ‘The

older Precambrian crystalline basement appears as anticlinal cores which are

overthrust ta the west within strongly folded Upper Proterozoic and Cambrian

racks.

The youngest fossiliferous pre-Permian rocks in this southern area are

Lower Cambrian in age (Daily, 1956, 1963; Abele and McGowran, 1959), Thus

the main Palaeozoic orogeny oveurred between Lower Cambrian and Permian

Other relevant published dating evidence is provided by Evernden and Richards

(1962), who give 4 potassium-argon age of 457 x 10° years (Middle Ordovician )

for the Encounter Bay granite, This would indicate a Middle Ordovician or

earlicr age for the orogeny, since field evidence suggests the granite to be

largely post-tectonic (ez. Bowes, 1954, p. 212).

FEATURES OF PALALOZOIC TECTONISM IN SOUTIL AUSTHALIA 53

There is evidence, particularly strong in the ‘l'ruro area, for local movement

prior to deposition of the Cambrian. North of Truro, Coats (1959) has mapped

an unconformity at the base of a sequence of Cambrian trachytic lavas, schist

and marble. Coats shows that in places the base of the Cambrian truncates

beds within the underlying upper Proterozoic. The Cambrian voleanics were

in (urn eroded and the detritus incorporated in the overlying basal beds of the

Kanmantoo Group. Marked thinning of the trachyte immediately south of a

fault is sugyestive of movement prior to deposition of the Kanmanteo Group.

Movement on a hinge-line during deposition of the Kanmantoo Group is also

proposed by Horwitz, Thomson and Webb (1959). The hinge-line is related

to a thrust and results in an increase in thickness from 3,000 to 20,000 feet of

the Inman Hill Formation near Ashbourne.

iv. 8 Geological sketch-map

af the Werkeroo arca based on

a anap wf J. Lb Talbot. 'Fhis

area demanstrates folding and

fault (shown by heavy

lines) af the crystalline base-

ment,

CRYSTALLINE

BASEMENT PROTEROZOIC

fe) Schist 44] Glacial

47] Mainly gneiss [*."} Pre—glacial

Horwitz, Thomson and Wehh (1959, PI. 1) show evidence for trincation

of the Upper Proterozoic by basal Kanmantou Group greywacke near Mt.

Charles, A similar truncation by Lower Cambrian beds appears on the Barker

4-mile geological map north-west of Macclesfield (Thomson and Horwitz, 1982),

Daily (1956, pp, 124-128) infers uplift and erosion of the lower Cambrian

Archeocyatha limestone and older rocks on Kangaroo Island during the Lower

Cambrian. The White Poimt Conglomerate contains boulders of Archeocyatha

limestone, quartzite, and igneous and metamorphic rocks. This conglomerate

is overlain conformably hy fossiliferous sedimentary rocks extending into upper

Lower Cambrian. The upper unfossiliferous part of the succession may be of

Middle Cambrian age.

Structural petrological studies by Talbot (1964), Ofler (1963) and K. J.

Mills (1964) in the Mount Lofty Ranges indicate at least two phases of deforma-

tion of Adelaide System and Kanmantoo Group rocks, In the Torrens Gorge area

a4 B. C. FORBES

(Talbot) and north of Palmer (Mills) the: carlier deformation characterize] by

slity cleavage was succeeded by later folding which produced crenulation

cleavage.

Mills has been able to date thrust-wrench faults north of Palmer as qust-

metamorphism and folding, in view of the fact that they displace metamorphic

facies boundaries. He correlates these faults with thrusts, described by Sprigg,

associated with overturned anticlinal cores in the western part of the Mf,

Lofty Ranges.

YORKE PENINSULA

In the central part of Yorke Peninsula there are gently folded Upper Pro-

terozoic and Lower to Middle Cambrian rocks with dips of 15 degrees resting on

older Precambrian gneisses and schists (Crawford, 1965, p. 57). There is a

mantle of Permian boulder ull, This slightly mobile shelf area (Spencer Shelf

of Sprigg, 1952) is bounded on the north-cast by the Yararoo overthnust, which

is associated with tight, overturned folds (Horwitz, 1961, p, 7), If one var

assume that the gentle folding of the shelf accompanied the steeper folding

of the weosynclinal environment then the main period of folding was post-

Middle Cambrian and pre-Permian, The Lower und Middle Cambrian shelf

sediments show no evidence of contemporaneous orogeny.

CONCLUSIONS

The preceding sketches of selected areas provide local data on Palaeoaaic

tectonism and examples of the kind of deformation resulting from it, This int-

formation may thus be summarized on a time basis and on a structural basis.

Among the examples chosen, the earliest closely-daled Palaeozoic muve-

ments are those of diapirs which were active from late Precambrian until Jate

Lower Cambrian, In the eastern Mt. Lofty Kanges minor folding of the Ade-

laide System occurred probably in uppermost Preeambrian, when the Kan-

mantoo Trough began to develop. In the Lower Cambrian there was subsidence

of the Oraparinna grahen, local uplift east of Blinman and on Kangaroo Island,

and possibly the Truro volcanism. The Kanmantoo Trough continued to develop,

wecompanied by local differential moyement in the eastern Mt. Totty Ranges

In Middle to Upper Cambrian time, the bestdated events were the vol-

canism and thrust-faulting at Gidgealpa; up-arching of this structure also occnrresl

int the pre-Permian and Permian. Remaining Palaeozoi¢ movements listed in

this paper are known only within a wide time range. Using the evidence of

the Encounter Bay granite and the Yorke Peninsula Middle Cambrian, the main

lewer Palacozoie orogeny in the Mount Lofty Ranges would appear to: have

occurred between Middle Cambrian and Middle Ordovician. Information from

the Dullingari and Pandieburra wells is signifivanl because it indicates a second

(post-Ordovician ) Palaeozoic deformation in the north-east of South Australia.

The effects of Palaeozoic tectonism in South Australia ure most obvious

east of the Stuart Shelf; the castern edge of this relatively stable area is prob-

ably the largest observable external feature which may be claimed to have

influenced Palacozoic deformation. Its castern margin, if carried around the

eastern coast of Yorke Peninsula, is roughly paralleled by the fold axes of the

Mt, Lofty and Flinders Ranges.

FEATURES OF PALAEOZOTIC TRCTONISM IN SCHUTTT ATISTRALIA a]

In the Olary region there is good evidence that during folding, which was

accompanied by faulting, the crystalline basement and immediately-overlying

Adelaide System behaved as a single unit, Another feature of the Olary area

is the steepening of dips of Adelaide System rocks adjacent to the crystalline

cores, Similarly, in the Burra area anticlines are frequently narrower and steeper

than synclines. In the Blimman region and north, dips. are locally steep near

discontinuities, such as diapirs, faults and crystalline basement. Thus, at least

locally, movements with a largo yertical component were important during the

Palaeozoic orogeny.

_ On the basis of the Tectonic Map, one may crudely subdivide the Adclaide

Geosyncline into a central area of relatively close parallel folds and a northern

area typified by less frequent and more gentle folds and the proliferation of

diapirs. This subdivision requires explanation, as also does the frequency and

parallelism of folds in the central area. In spite of the evidence for local vertical

movements, it seems to be necessary to invoke some horizontal eompression to

explain folding and thrusting in the Adelaide Geosyncline.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

Im the preparation of this paper T am grateful for the kind assistance and

advice of colleagues in the Department of Ccology of the University of Adclaide,

the Petroleum and Regional Mapping Sections of the South Australian Depart-

ment of Mines and Delhi Australian Petroleum Ltd. This paper is. published

with the permission of the Director of Mines. Figures were prepared by the

Drafting Branch, Department of Mines,

REFER RENCES

Atrne, C.. and MeGowsan, B., 1959. The geology of the Cambrian south of Adelaide

(Sellick Hill to Yankalilla). Trans. Roy. Soc. 8, Aust,, 82, pp, 301-330,

Bowes, D. RB. 1954. ‘The metamorphic and igneous history of Rosetti Head, South) Avis

tralia, Trans. Roy. Soc. 5. Aust,, 77, pp, 189-214.

Campana, By. 1955. The structure of the eastern South Australian ranges: the Mt. Lofty

Olary arc. J. Geol. Soe, Aust, 2, pp, 47-61.

Campana, B. and Kixe, D., 1958, Regional geology and mimeral yesources of the Olary

Province. Bull. Geol. Surv. S, Aust,, 84.

Con, R. P.. 1959, Geological Atlas of South Australia, Sheet Tria. 1 inch/| mile,

(1,63.360). Geol. Surv. S. Aust.

Coats, R. P.. 1963. The Geology of the Alberga 4-mile military sheet, Rep. Invest. Cuol.

Surv. $. Aust,, 22,

Coats, Ry P.. 1964, The geology and mineralisation of the Bnman Domne diapir. Rep. Invest,

Geol, Sury. S. Anst., 26.

Crawroun, A. R.. 1965. The geology of Yorke Peninsula, Bull Geol, Surv; $. Aust. 39.

Dar, B., 1956, The Cambrian in South Australia. Rép. Tnteraat, Geol, Congr, 20th,

Daiwwy, B. 1963, The fossiliterans Cantbrian succession on Flenrien Paninsula, South

Australia, Ree. S, Aust. Museum, 14, pp. 579-801,

Darcarno, C. R., 1964. Lower Cambrian stratigraphy of the Flinders Ranges, “l'rans, Roy,

Soe. S, Atst., 88, pp, 129-144,

Dascarno, C. R., 1966. Geologicul Atlas of Sonth Australia, Sheet Parachilna 1-950,000,

Geol, Surv, S; Aust

Datcanna, C. KR. Jounson, J. B., and Coars, R. PL, 1965. Geological Atlas of South Aus-

tyalia, Sheet Blinman, | inch/1 mile (1:63,360). Geol, Surv. 8. Aust.

Dickinson, S. B.. and Serice, R. C.. 1953. Ceoloyical stricture of South Australia in sola

tian to niineralization. Fitth Empire Min. and Met, Congress, Vol. 1; Geology of Aus-

tralian ore deposits; pp, 426-448,

36 B. G. FORBES

EVERNDEN, J. F., and Kicuanps, J. R., 1962. Potassium-argon ages in Eastern Australia. J.

Geol. Sac, Aust., 9, pp, 1-50,

Foxrses, B. C,, 1964. Geological Atlas of Sonth Australia, Sheet Clare. 1 inch/L jile

(1:63,360). Geol. Surv, S. Aust,

GLAEssNER, M, F,, and Parxin, L. W. (editors), 1958. The geology of South Australia. J.

Geol. Soc. Aust., 5, pt. 2.

Hints, E. S., 1965. Tectonic setting of Australian. ore deposits. Eighth Commonwealth Min.

und Met. Congress, Vol. 1. Geology of Australian ore deposits; pp. 3-12.

Horwirz, R, c. 1961. The geology of the Wakefield military sheet. Rep. Invest. Geol. Surv.

S. Aust.. 18.

Horwrrz, R. C.. Taomson, B, P., and Were, B, P,, 1959. The Cambrian-Precambrian bound-

ary in the eastern Mt. Lofty Ranges region, South Australia, Trans. Roy. Soc. 5. Aust.,

82, pp. 205-218.

Howcuix, W,, 1926. The geology of the Barossa Ranges and neighbourhood in relation to

the geological axis of the country. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 50, pp. 1-16.

Jornnson, J, E,, 1963. Basal sediments of the north side of the Officer Basin, Quart, Geol,

Notes Geol. Surv. S. Aust., 7.

Mius, K. J,. 1964. The structural petrology of an area east of Springton. South Australia.

Unpublished Ph.D. thesis, University of Adelaide.

MummgE, I. A., 1963. Geophysical survey of the Officer Basin, South Australia, Trans, Roy.

Soc. §. Aust., 87, pp. 119-192.

Orrtier, R., 1963, Structural geology of the Strathalbyn anticline. Trans. Roy. Sac. S. Aust,

87, pp. 199-208.

HAYEER, M. L., 1955. The geology of the Peake and Denison region. Rep. Invest. Geol. Surv.

» Aust. 6.

Serica, R. C., 1946. Reconnaissance geological survey of portion of the western esearpment

of the Mt. Lofty Ranges, Trans. Roy. Soc, 8. Aust., 70, pp. 313-347.

Spruce, R. C.. 1952. Sedimentation in the Adclaide Geosyncline and the formation of the

continental terrace. Sir Douglas Mawson Anniv. Vol., pp. 153-159. Univ. of Adelaide,

Taueort, J. L.. 1964. The structural geometry of rocks of the Torrens Group near Adelaide,

South Australia. J. Geol. Soc. Anst., 11, pp. 33-48,

Tuomsox, B. P., 1965. Geology and mineralization of South Australia. Fighth Common-

wealth Min, and Met. Congress, vol. 1. Geology of Australian ore cleposits, pp. 270-284.

THomson, B. P., and Honwirz, R. C., 1962. Geological Atlas of South Australia, Shect Barker.

4 miles/1 inch (1:250,000), Geol. Surv. S. Aust.

VEGETATION IN THE MUSGRAVE RANGES,

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY R. T. LANGE*

Summary

An account is given of a traverse through ungrazed vegetation within the Reserve for Aborigines in

the far north-west of South Australia, visited in 1963 after rains and in 1965 during drought. A map

of the traverse is presented together with general information on the landscape and soils, and details

of the plant cover, its floristics and organization. Particular attention is given to features of

vegetation, which outside the Reserve might be attributed to the effect of cattle grazing.

Catastrophic destruction of mulga woodland is found to be a periodic happening under natural

conditions.

VEGETATION IN THE MUSGRAVE RANGES,

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

by R, T. Lance*®

[Read 12 May 1966]

SUMMARY

An account is given of a traverse through wngrazed vegetation within the

Reserve for Aborigines in the far north-west of South Ausiralia, visited in 1963

after rains and in 1965 during drought. A map of the traverse is presented

together with general information on the landscape and soils, and details of

the plant cover, its flomstics and organization. Particular attention is given to

features of vegetation which outside the Reserve might be attributed to the

effect of cattle grazing. Catastrophic destruction af mulga woodland is fonnd to

be a periodic happening wmder natural conditions.

THE LOCALITY

The area observed was the belt of country east of Mount Caroline between

Musgrave Park Station in the north and Mount Harrict in the south (Fig. 1).

Precambrian high-grade metamorphic bedrock protrudes through the mantle

in the north as the rugged Musgrave Ranges, and to the south as spectacular

inselbergs separated by deep alluvium covered with various desert soils and

superficial dunes. A characteristic feature of the locality is the abrupt way the

inselbergs and ranges rise from the plains. The southern inselhergs border on

vast dunefields, and to some extent long dunes flow about them in a north-west,

south-east orientation, Attention was confined to vegetation on the alluvial and

acolian soils, since the inselbergs and their vegetation are largely inaccessible

to cattle. Recently comprehensive geological, geomorphological and soil studies

have heen published on areas abutting the study area, but not in it. The

South Australian Geological Survey has published the Mann 4-mile sheet, while

the C.S.1.R.0, Land Research and Regional Survey Division has produced Land

Research Series No, 6, incorporating land form, vegetation and soil maps south

to the Northern Territory-South Australian border just north of the study area.

Useful bibliographies of early work in the area are provided by Wilson (1947)

and Mirams (1964).

Relative altitudes were measured with an aneroid barometer at distances

checked against a vehicle odometer reading in tenths of a mile and the follow-

ing features are evident:

(1) There is a tota) altitudinal variation of about 250 feet in the 32-mile

(51-5 km,) traverse.

(2) There is an overall trend for loss of altitude with progress southwards.

(3) Superimposed on this trend is a second one for local increase in altitude

in the vicinity of protruding bedrock,

The local pattern is for slopes down from the bases of inselbergs out to

intervening plains. Soils on the immediate slopes are typically very coarse

z Depattinent of Botany, University of Adelaide, South Australia.

Trans. Roy. Soc. 8, Aust. (1966), Vol. 90.

‘pULTPOOM UA[NUL ond asuap = JX ‘sawojos pur saaois oyloadsouour payepost pue purppeom

pexTlu paseywos-Naginds “puyjgqmays xoeyturds jo smose (TAN pueyssers Youu wmuormd xasruids = ¢ ‘sarae[vo

PUB seAoIg omoadsouow payEjost snd ‘pueppoom paxitu parayRos ppyqzroz pue ppayqrzoy = J “jeay wi qyBley vanes

jO Av saINBW] 'sAreq[asuy puy sadurs Uasaidas searw poyoPE] “OSIIAvI], JOWIVEL JAMOJY-yawg OAVIBSUYL SLL “T “HT

Mi } 1a'YSVH LN

:. IONAN Id

NTLIAWAHSD

(WaNnliGNOAN

R. T, LANGE

vanriiawnHoey|

Cone

WaVd SAVESSNIW

VECETATION IN THE MUSGRAVE RANGES, 5.A. 59

outwash gravels while those of the plains are deep sands and sandy loams-

Some of the northern soil profiles under scattered Hakea tors woodland are

alkaline throughout, up to pH 5-5 but most are neutral to acid throughout the

profile, ranging from pH 7 down to pH 5:5 under dense Acacia aneura wuud-

lund. Many of the profiles, particularly in the south, show a shift in huc

towards red with depth, a typical case having a Munsell notation of 5YR 4/6

at 1 foot (30 om.) and 2-5 YR 3/6 at 3 feet (91 cm.) depths. Drainage

channels do not persist far beyond the ranges where they originate. but deposit

their load as alluvium on flaod plains at the foot of the slope, The larger water-

courses exhibit braided channel patterns. Long red dunes are superimposed

on this landscape, particularly in the south. Some are mobile in patches, but

most are stabilized and parallel at intervals of about a quarter mile. Occasional

gypscous pans occur, surfaced with cracking clay,

Rainfall records have been taken at Musgrave Park Station sinée 1962.

Some monthly totals are shown in Table L.

THE VEGETATION

About 40 species of perennial plants oc¢ur along the Musgrave Park-Mount

Harriet traverse. Thirty-three of the common ones are listed in Tubls 2 with

a tecord of their incidence in successive l-mile (1:6 km.) intervals along the

traverse. There is nothing very zonal about this pattern of species. incidence

except perhaps the restriction of T'rlodia basedowti lo the south. However.

species densities vary enormously along the traverse in such a way as lo produce

a variety of structurally and floristically distinct kinds of vegetation. Struc-

lurally, the big differences are between (1) the forbfields and forbfield-sparse

mixed woodlands; (2) the spinifex perennial hummock grasslands, spinifex-

shrnblands and spinitex-scattered mixed woodlands; (3) the dense monospecific

mulga belt woodlands, and (4) the dense monospecific local groves and colonies

scattered throughout (1) and (2).

Forbfields occupy the northernmost 10 miles of the traverse. During

droughts they are bare, windswept plains, the surface of which is wind-

sculptured ahout the persistent bases of dead ephemerals. After heavy rains,

the appearance of these areas is transformed by the growth of u dense and

colourful stratum of forbs from a few centimetres to about 30 cr. high. hn

terms of species composition and spacial patterns of association, this forbield is

much too complicated te summarize simply and warrants detailed study. It is

not misleading, however, to report as common densities of about 20 to 30 plants

per square metre and as typical plants species of Erodium, [elichrysum, Helin-

terum, Brachyscome, Calovephalus and Cualotis,

Much of the forbfield has a seatter of such species as Eucalyplus terminalis,

Hekea suberea, Hakea ivoryi, Acacia estrophiolata and Pittosporum pliylliragoiies.

The most characteristic feature of this meagre cover is an oecasional concentta-

tion into an open corkbark woodland of Hakea icvoryl.

The mulga belts, in contrast, occur in the southern 20 tiles of the traverse,

They only octupy situations sloping north to sonth and do not occur on equive-

lent south lo north slopes in the study area, for no clear reason. The belts are

pure Acacia aneura und nu ather plants except forbs and grass occur within

them. The tvees form a dense woodland of forest-like aspect, almost impenc-

iL Ty TP Ir = te ee Se He ow Ge <b a a oe _ - Jaz gemopasng mp0V4 J;

— a ~ + sorgw + = — or TEU WnpwjOeUD] wunjpouDy

7 a a - Ory

Cag) wnpu2zunon winpopung

= 1 at + + ++ bt — — — “DCL soproaneap hyd wndodsong

7° = = - WA Cusp)

THYMUS MmYAVUAYaN AL

-- al — + -- WA DD saudoj6 vonapppeTy

: - : + ~— +- # 4 _ susiayy vyoauapynue -ffo-ds noyo pT

: a { + b 4E -E <b or a + QLOOT "ft BawIgGnNs DaYn FT

+ Bopp bf on ste sete th + 4 doped thoar payn yy

-|- =a - ‘WA' A DAWoqouszs vappaas

ate eo TA vpyplydoppmasay napyjaiad)

: = Igy srapends sodunaoa py

= + 7 ~ Fe UBpIByy

SopopudurqUVorsuDaz srgadhpoon sy

= t 4- ~|> ; Alayeg, wegiuchivo wngdAyoon

} - * — "WA A propydoworyoep snydhppon ay

f a 43 t f+ -]- WC A YT Sappuaneseg sng hppon a

- q == a — “Yuya Sevag pyouns snydhqoansy

= | ~ Waa

(4g ' oF) B2pofebu0) nyrydowarey

$ “dED Y weoqeuo, Dua fiyour

wor 2 ot — ‘wsOIst. DaDUOPO(T

+ =a = ‘WA

(‘Jeec]) sngjofturjoo sndunaovapog

— ~ oa = Gt ad ‘Gyueg a Wad (WA a)

unIAnLDgIU UinepodoUsy?)

fo ‘WA A tupeusinaan nutonsDd

+ a t = Wf onfiydouchnwa pivvap

aoe ae *]PUY'T Wu20NVS DiI pr

+ “UPUS 921407002 DIOP

R, T. LANGE

tS “WAY wuvediuay manap

qe ae “WAY Dimjoiydosss many

+ + “Glueg¢as Pray Duneun Dion FR

rot > + + Upuag aa WUND “y wenn by mova

4 L : =

ef Ie OF 6G 82 Le 96 OF FS ES BS IZ OS GL ST LT OT OT PT ET TIT OL G6 8 LO 8 F EE

ee ee SE EE OE ee SF

‘JOLIET JUNOT] 03 ToNBig yweg anwsAsny

CIOTY GVLOABT] OY] WO SpVATOFUT (“WAY [9- [) D[I-T aArssooons FE UL aauaproUl Jo su1474ud atHy} pure seweds yueyd [etuared sasyy-Aqauyy,

+4 + — +

Heh a sce casei a

Uae oe Sa : +— ++ +

+} {

+ |

tit

é€ GATAVL

O-ZeT Q-L 6 SQ 8-06 §-¢ — | £6 9-9 L+Le a L-Cé FO6T

&-LLT 6-68 —_ [+L R- = 8-1 I-86 £-6F 1-6 9-9 = 9°Fe €96T

8-6 §-5 6-L¢ ~ Sie §-9T

— GET - aN UN | UN | 961

3 13301 aq] | AON | 290 “qdeg ‘any Ame | ane ARIAT udy BTL | “q8q | “uBy

nn a Se, eh | NN Ss A A A (

FIST Fequesaq-Z9GT Judy ‘uoNMy ye] eABITEN 4B sorjauTTMH wr Sfpesuver APYQTATE

T QTd VL

VEGETATION IN THE MUSGRAVE HANGES, 5.A. él

trable to motor vehicles, and the canopies are of eyen height (about 8-10 metres }

and very regular. The margins of these belts are typically very sharp.

_ ‘The average density of trees is about 20 per square chain (es sq. m,)- The

frequency distribution of butt girth shows an absence of seedlings, with mst

hutts about I to 2 Feet (30-60 em.) and an occasional big, 4-5 ft. (80 om. ), brit.

The trunks that are close together are the smaller ones, but small trunks are

also as widely spaced as big ones,

Distinctly different growth habits and phyllode forms are exhibited_in the

mulga populations, The growth habits range from clean-holed tree through

parachute-shaped semi-tree to straggly shrub. The phyllodes on any one plant

are either acicular, or are flattened and expanded. Their ratio in 42 caigdenly

chosen trees was 22 acicular : 20 expanded, and there was no apparent correla-

tion between growth habit and phyllode form.

Perennial spinifex hummock grassland also occurs in the southern 20 miles

(32 km.) of the traverse, hetween the mulga belts. These grasslands are Triedia

hasedowiit hummocks at a density sufficient to give 85% true ground caver when

estimated by random point quadrants. The intervening spaces of ground typic-

ally support parakeelya {Calandrinia) species for periods after rains. A common

variation on these grasslands is spinifex shrubland, as in the case where Haken

multilineeta forms a stratum above the hummocks. Like the forbfield, spinifex

grassland often supports a sparse woodland, cften of Acacia estrophioluta or

Acacia ligtdata.

The occurrence of relatively small, very dense monospecific groves of

varivus species is an outstanding and characteristic feature of all vegetation

outside the mulga belts, Here and there, in striking contrast to their surround-

ings, will be found closely aggregated colonies of such species as Acacia

kempiana, A, estrophiolata, A, ligulata, A. «anetira, Eremophila longifolia,

Grevillea nematophylla, Pittosporum phylliraeoides, Eucalyptus oxymitra, E,

transcontinentalis, and Dodonaea viscosa, Densities of Dodenaga viscose and

Hakee sp. alt. multilineata in colonies averaged about 1 per 75 sq, metres and 1

per 50 sq. metres respectively. In many cases such a grove will be spacially de-

imited by a topogriphic site, such as the spine of a dune, or the rim of a pan, but

there is little consisteney of species-site relationships, except for E. camaldutensis

om the major watercourses of the north. On the plains the colonial oceurrenurs

of species such as Eremophila longifolia seem haphazard.

Overall inspeetion of these various undisturbed yegctation types permitted

a number of interesting conclusions, The first is that, in the complete absence

of cattle, periodic catastrophic destruction appears to be a natural happening

in this vegetation. ,

At sharp fronts within the mulga belts live trees give way to standing dead

timber, and the transition across the front is complete in a distance of 20 m.

On the one side the canopy is continuous and on the other, gone completely.

The terminal cflects of drought seem the most likely reason for this wholesale

destruction, but the fronts do not follow the contour of the land. Further, there

is no good evidence that fire was responsible, although fires ovcur in the area,

since there is no trace of fire scars on the aerial photographs corresponding to

the fronts. Fire sears occur elsewhere and are obvious,

Progress in the denudation of these devastaled areas can be traced in

examples along the traverse, through stages where all the timber has fallen, to

a tinal stage of windblown sand and fragments of ald wood. What is nat to

be found along the traverse is an canta of regeneration in one of these areis,

in fact, seedling mulgas are a rarity, which leads to a second conclusion, :

62 R, IT. LANGE

The mulga woodlands. on the traverse do not contain trees of all heights

and girths from seedlings through saplings to mature. trees. All the individuals

in a section of mulga woodland carry their canopies at the same height, and

although there is considerable variation in butt girth (10 em, from the ground),

there is an overall absence of very slender trees and a complete absence of

secdlings, on the traverse. In a search for seedlings, areas beyond the traverse

were inspected, and eventually seedlings were found west of the area on the

Mt. Davies road. There were many of them, in a citenlar clamp, and all were

about 1 metre high, Individuals of other heights were absent.

FREQUENCY

0 1 2 3 4 5

BUTT GIRTH IN FEET

Fig. 2. A frequency distribution of butt victh: (at 10 em. from the ground}

in a mula belt:

These observations are consistent with the view that phenologically the

mulga woodlands are made up of groups of contemporaries, rather than mixtures

of individuals at all ages. A comparison of Fig. 2 with Fig, 1-2 in Smith (1962)

amplifies this point. The mulga woodlands on the traverse would then be

regarded as mature and stable, with evidence of destroyed sevtions bul not, as

yet, any new groups starting off, or any half-grown stands.

None of the mulga on the traverse is organized into the grove-inter-grove

pattern referred to hy Slatyer (1962). The nearest such mulga is about 30

miles south-east of Mount Harrict.

The possible importance of vegetative clonal reproduction in. some perennial

species is indicated by the marked colonial ahd of some species along the

traverse, for example, Eremophila longifolia, Some clumps of Hekea ivoryi

trees are obvionsly clonal, since it is possible to observe stages from suckers

about a decaying trunk through to a hollow ring of well-separated trunks.

The number of woody species per unil arca along the traverse is very low,

due partly to the very open natire of much of the vegetation but also to the

fact that these species are typically grouped in florislically and structurally

simple vegetation types usually of 1 to 3 species only, Of 26 samples cach 1

aere (0-4 Hectarc) m area at mile (1-61 km.) intervals, 1 had uo perennial

species, 8 had 1, 7 had 2, 6 had 3, 3 had 4, and 1 had 5,

VEGETATION IN THE MUSGRAVE RANGES, 5,4, 63

General comparisons between this undisturbed vegetation and its apparent

equivalents on the nearest cattle station, Mulga Park, showed that contrary to

expectations, mulga woodlands on the station supported secdling mulga among

the established trees, m distinct contrast to the traverse woodlands. After the

heavy rains in 1963, the ephemera) forbfield was much sparser on the station

than on the traverse. Lastly, the soil surface on the station was pulycrised and

worked up into a loose state deyoid of litter and soft grasses in contrast to

equivalent surfaces on the traverse, where fragmentary litter masked the red

soil to a noticeable extent, and soft grasses were still apparent.

In order to evaluate the grazing impact of the cattle indusiry il is neces-

sary to know the vegetation in the virgin state, in order to recognize and evalu-

ate the extent of its change under grazing§ On most stations the chance to

gain a satisfactory picture has passed, since there simply are no ungrazed

control plots left to inspect, and the observer is left with hearsay and inference

from which to attempt a reconstruction. It is therefore important to remember

this large tract of ungrazed vegetation within the Reserve for Aborigines, which

includes much that would already be exploited as cattle-country were it not

for the Act which sets it apart. This vegetation can neyer substitute for control

areas wilhin the station-lease country, but does at least afford the opportunity

to sce what sume natural Central Australian vegetation looks like, Unfortun-

ately, its further protection from cattle is uncertain — its Administrators intro-

duced 120 in 1964 — but for some time to come much should remain undamaged.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

Dr, Hj. Eichler advised on the plant taxonomy and kindly provided a

portable herbarium of duplicates collected in the area, for use during field work,

The ready co-operation and help extended by the South Australian Department

of Aboriginal Affairs was much appreciated.

REFERENCES

Mirams, R. C., 1964. The Geology of the Maun 4-mile Sheet, Dept. of Mines, S.A. Rep. of

Investigations, 25.

Suatyer, R. O,, 1962. Methodology of a Water Balance Study Conducted on 4 Desert

Woodland (Acacia aneura F, Muell) Community in Central Australia, pp. 15-26. In

Arid Zone Research—XVI. 352 pp. U.N.E,S.C1O.

Santi, D. M., 1962. The Practice of Silviculture. J. Wiley & Sons, N.Y, 578 pp.

Wirson, A, F., 1947. The Charnockitio and Associated Rocks of North-western Sonth Aus-

tralia. Part 1, The Musgrave Ranges—An Introductory Account, Trans, Roy, Soc. 8.A.,

71, pp. 195-211.

64 R. T. LANCE

EXPLANATION OF PLATES

PLaTE 1

(a) A dense pure woodland of Acacia aneura. (b) Ephemeral forbfield. (c) Forbfield with

a scatter of perennials. (d) A perennial hummock grassland of Triodia basedowii.

PLATE 2

Example of stages in the decimation of mulga woodlands. Trees dic and lose all foliage.

then some fall entirely while others remain upright, progressively losing more twigs and

Eventually only a few of the larger trunks remain standing. The last stage is a

limbs.

windswept area strewn with small fragments of wood.

PLATE 2

LANGE

THE SOUTH AUSTRALIAN EARTHQUAKE OF

AUGUST 28, 1965

BY D. J. SUTTON* AND R. E. WHITE*

Summary

A least-squares procedure for the determination of epicentres of Australian earthquakes, based on

readings of the initial P phase from Australian seismograph stations, is applied to the South

Australian earthquakes occurring on August 28, 1965. The epicentre of best fit for the main shock is

32.32°S, 138.25°E; that for the aftershock is 32.25°S, 138.27°E. Both epicentres agree well with the

epicentre determinations obtained from the readings for all P and S phases recorded at the three

South Australian stations and using the travel-times given by Doyle and Everingham (1964).

An isoseismal map for the main shock is presented. The Richter magnitutes for the main shock and

the aftershock are estimated to be 5-2 and 4-6 respectively.

THE SOUTH AUSTRALIAN EARTHQUAKE OF

AUGUST 28, 1965

by D. J, Surron* ann R, E, Waite’

[Read 12 May 1966]

SUMMARY

A least-squares procedure for the determination of epiventres of Australian

earthquakes, based on readings of the initial P phase from Australian seistuo-

graph stations, is applied to the South Australian earthquakes occurring on

August 28, 1965. The epicentre of bust fit for the main shock is 32.32°S,

138.25°E; that for the aftershock is 32,25°S, 138.27°R. Toth epicentres agree

well with the epicentre detenninations obtained from the readings for all P

yod S phases recorded at the three South Australian stations and using the

iravel-times. given by Doyle and Everingham (1964). An isoseismal map for

the main shock is presented, ‘he Richter magnitutes for the main shock and the

aftershock ure estimated to be 5-2 and 4-6 reypectively.

INTRODUCTION

On August 28, 1965, an earthquake occurred near Quorm in South Aus-

tralia which was heard or felt over approximately 20,000 square miles of South

Australia, This was followed 20 minutes later by an aftershock which was

considerably smaller. The main shock was well recorded at most of the

Australian Seismograph Stations and at a number of stations overseas. Because

the earthquake was experienced over a relatively large area, questionnaires

were sent out in an attempt to determine the variation in intensity over the

area, and a relatively detailed study was made of the earthquake and its after-

shock.

DETERMINATION OF EPICENTRE

The only definitely reported body phases for earthquakes occurring on the

Australian continent are the direct wayes P; and S; and those refracted along

the Mohorovicice discontinuity at the hase of the crust, P, and §,. The travel-

times for these waves are known tentatively for a number of regions (Bolt,

Doyle and Sutton, 1958; Doyle, Everingham and Hogan, 1959; Doyle and Ever-

ingham, 1964); they are linear out to about 15° and differ from the Jeffreys-

Bullen tables, in common with times for other continental regions, The distance

from an observing station to the epicentre (if the focal depth is known) can

then he given in terms of the S-P interval, For example, using the times of

Bolt et al. for the phases $; and P, (assuming a surface focus), the distance A

in miles is given by

A =3-876 (tf + 7-24),

where t is the S)-P, interval measured in seconds. It is possible therefore to

locate the epicentre if identified S-P intervals are available from three stations.

In practice for the larger Australian earthquakes a provisional epicentre

is obtained cither m this way or from the preliminary delerminations of epi-

centres, published by the U.S.C.G.S. data centre in Washington, U.S.A. An

accurate epicentre is obtained as follows (Sutton and White, 1966): azimuths

(Az), distances and hence P travel times from the provisional epicentre are

* Physics Department, University of Adelaide.

Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust. (1966), Vol. 90.

68 D. J. SUTTON ano BR. E. WHITE

calculated for the major Australian stations. Residuals (observed minus caleu-

lated time of arrival) are then fitted using the method of least squares to:

et at

het

dA is the slope of the travel-time curve.

(x cos Az + y sin Az)

where

This gives corrections x°N, —

cos 6

seconds to the origin time. ( is the latitude of the epicentre.) These opera-

tions arc carricd out with the aid of a CDC 3200 computer which also prints

out standard errors and revised residuals,

°E to the epicentre and an increase of +

TABLE 1-

Distances and residuals for main shock. using travel-times of Bolt ef al. (Li58)

Main Shock; August 28 00. 26 40.1

Epicentre; Geugraphiec latitude 32.3278

Longitude 136.25°H

Aflershock: August 28 00 45 38.5

Epicentre; Geographic latitude 32.25°5

Longitude 138,.27°E

Arrival (imes Residual | Arrival times | Residual

Station {Main shoei) AS sec, (Aftershouk) tnd Bee,

Mt, Bonython () 27 28-0 2-672 O-1 OO 46 22-7 2-738 —U-1

Hallett OO 27 Bel 1-246 Oo OO 46 2-8 1-296 Od

Cleve 00 27 14-0 2-013 0-0 0 40 13-8 2-070 0-0

Canberra OU 28 54-6 9rd31 Or 00 47 5465 )-438 Q-9*

Charters'Towers| 00 29 58 14-130 —O+1

Darwin 00 31 22 20-977 —1-5

Toolangi OU 25 34-9 7) 924 —0-3 OO 47 33-5 7-955 Q-0

Mundaring 00 30 54-2 18-670 —H-U*

Mt, Nebo,

Brisbane 00 89 HLA 13-524 1-6 |

Kalgoortic OW 29 5K: 14-403 —o-fi*

eee

* Readings not used in final solution.

The standard procedure described aboye was applied to the earthquake of

August 28 using arrival times trom the stations shown in Table 1. This was

carried out using the P travel-times of Bolt ef al. (1958) and, for comparison,

the Jeffreys-Bullen times, ‘The solution using the Doyle and Everingham (1964)

limes was obtained using readings from the South Australian stations only.

Various focal depths were used and the best sulution was obtained for a focal

depth of 20 kim, using the times of Doyle and Everingham and for a surface

focus using Bolt et al. Sotne of the solutions ave shown in Table 2, An intercst-

ing feature of the Bult et al. solution is that lurge negative residuals are obtained

for Mundaring (W.A,) and Kalgoorlie (Table 1), if readinys from these stations

are not used in the calculations. This could mean a higher P, velocity in

Western Australia. The epicentre determined by the U,S,C.G.5. is also viven

in Table 2 for comparison. The depth is shown as “normal” which means in

this case that during the computation, the depth became negative (above the

mean sphere) and was automatically restricted to the 33 km. level, this. being

the depth to the bottom of the crust for the model used in the Jeftreys-Bullen

tables which are used by the U.S.C.G.S. in its vomputations.

SOUTH AUSTRALIAN EARTHQUAKE, AUCUST 2#th, 1965 69

The aftershock, which occurred approximately 20 minutes after the main

shock, was recorded at Toolanyi ( Vie.) and Canberra as well us at the South

Australian stations, Solutions based on readings from these five stations are

also given in Table 2. It is apparent from the figures shown that the epicentres

of the two earthquakes were very close to one another. They occurred, howeder,

at significantly different depths as is shown by very clear P, and P, arrivals

from hoth earthquakes at Mt. Bonython. The P,-P, interval for the main shack

was 4-5 seconds and for the aftershock 5-8 seconds which indicates that the

aftershock was deeper than the main shock by approximately 12 km.

TABLE 2

Solutions for main shoek (8) and aftershock (b} using different travel-times and depths. Tha

last column gives the standard error of the residuals.

(a) Main Shock

Depth | §.E, of

Travel Times km. Geog,. Lat. Long. Origin HKesidual

Bult ¢ al i) 32-11-10 188-14 4-07 in) 26 34°72-9 1:27

Bolt, et al* i 32°32 4-01 138 -25+ +01 j} OO 26 40-14-] 0-18

Bolt et al. nt 32-18 | -10 138-09 i -D6 00 26 38:01+7 | mao

J-B ot) 31-76 4-10 138-32+ -06 OO 236 20°9-+--9 16

J-B WO | 31-77-10 138-32 — +06 OO 26 32-34.-9 1-15

D and Ht 20 32-28 138-26 00 26 40-0 0:6 (6)

U.8.C.G,8, Normal] 32-3 | 138-1 00 26 38-1 17

(b) Aftershock

Bolt et al, 3) 82-25—-02 0 | 138-874-01 00 45 34-8292 | 11

Bolt et al. 20 | B2-85=-08 | 198-274-038 00 45 41-7—-! 0-34

J-B » 25 198-44--019 00 45 82-4=238-0, 1-09

Je 200 1-73 2-29 138-460-009 00 45 B2-H2R-6) 1-02

D and Bt 20 32-28 138-26 00 45 39-B 0-6 (10)

* net tising roadings from Mundaring and Kalgoorlie.

* Doyle and Kveringham. (8.E. Residual quoted is the mean residual for all phases

recorded at local stations. Figure in brackets ia totel mumber of phases recorded).

INTENSITY

Considerable confusion exists in the minds of the general public concerning

the magnitude and intensity of earthquakes. Intensity “refers to the degree of

shaking at a specified place. This is not based on measurement but is a rating

assigned by an experienced observer on a descriptive scale” (Richter, 1958),

One commonly used scale is the modified Mercalli (MM) scale, one version of

which (the “1956 version”) is given by Richter (1958), p. 137. For example,

MM V is described as follows;

“Felt outdoors; direction estimated. Sleepers awakened. Liquids disturbed,

some spilled. Small unstable objects displaced or upset. Doors swing, close,

open, Shutters, pictures muve. Pendulum clocks stop, start, change rate.”

If an earthquake is large enough and its effects are experienced in an area

with a sufficiently dense population, it is sometimes possible to combine obser-

vations of felt effects and divide the area into regions of equal intensity by

drawing isoseismals. Few South Australian earthquakes satisfy the above con-

ditions and only rarely can such a study be carried out. A notable exception

was the Adelaide earthquake of March 1, 1954, which was investivated by

Kerr Grant (1956).

70 D, J, SUTTON ann R. E. WHITE

In spite of the fact that the macroseismic effects produced by the main

shock under investigation were relatively small, an attempt was made to collect

information on felt effects. Eighty questionnaires (Fig. 2) were sent out, of

which 67 were returned. Approximate isoseismal regions determined on this

basis are shown on Fig. 1. There were reports of minor damage at Quorn,

Port Augusta and Wilmington, Part of a chimney fell at Quorn and older

residents said that it was the most severe earthquake in their memory. Reports

seem to indicate that this earthquake was felt at greater distances to the south

than the north. However, this may be an apparent effect, due to the sudden

decrease in the density of the population to the north of Quorn.

MAGNITUDE

Magnitude is a quite different concept from intensity. It refers to a par-

ticular earthquake, it is based on instrumental records and the figure assigned

should, of course, be independent of the distance between epicentre and

recording station. One of the earliest successful magnitude scales was that

*Peterb rough

Cleve.

@ Epicentre,

a Seismograph Station.

“ff

ADELAIDE | Mt Bonython

Fig, 1. Map showing seismograph stations and isoscismal regions.

SOUTH AUSTRALIAN EARTHQUAKE, AUGUST 28th, 1965 71

QUES TITIONNATIRE

Name of Person reporting (block letters) 22... nike ccc nade dere ew eaneee

AGBSSGR wolsteiess trees ese esa Biopsies dowel wees ree Perea ro ease ars sures

Date of shock ...-¢.e.e-+5e+-Time ,».-212+ AM, P.M,

Locality where you: were at time of shock 2... cc cccceureseactsservereteeeer

Shock felt, felt and heard, heard but not felt, neither heard nor felt ,,..

MOTION rapid, SlOW Joss awe eee e ee cn tee eee beeen sabe eee east be nbanae

FELT by me, several people, many, all wosscicin een d eset nese wd ees atnamsaen

NATURE OF GROUND UNDERNEATH LOCALITY: rock, soil, loose, compact, marshy,

LAL IR AA ig TT ele Tee lee con eee eae Opeeye me me erre eer ryiyd A yyee re sealeneyiiete ms eslginte ete

Level, sloping, S€€ED pec eae ec ces esse ces at eee e esa beeuees ees pererastiapapae

AWAKENED me, no one, few, many, all (in my home) ...,. eee ener ener eecctece

(in my community) .. ye. eee eee ees eaees

FRIGHTENED me, no one, few, many, all (in my home) ....ssccs cease vanecnees

(in. my community) sisceisciounestace

RATTLING of windows, doors, dishes yi. eee een e ween ween eee enews aha

CREAKING of walls, frame ,.iaceceis ee wees e rapa pe nawesguaesesraseerereperes

HANGING OBJECTS, doors, etc., did, did not, swing, ..........- beasvperacusas

N,, NEL, etc. cies le cece evens ee a eee eee ee ae ee ee ee ee ee

PENDULUM CLOCKS did, did not, StOD; Loeccsseecunedesedscetasencbaretanenns

clock faces N., NEL, €tC. aces eee eae eee eee eee eee eee ests ats enececsaas

TREES, BUSHES shaken slightly, moderately, sttongly ....... ws degen a > fae Mee a

SHIFTED small objects, furnishings .o..apeeceaae rer cnaaaaepae este tsvapewas

OVERTURNED: yases, etc., small objects, furniture 2... cee ee eee nen ne sees

CRACKED plaster, windows, walls, chimneys, ground .2...40ieeeeererreeceeee

BROKE dishes, windows, furmiture ...cecncaeerns Pee ere ee ee ee ee

TWISTING, fall, of chimneys, columns, monuments, water tanks ...........-.

DAMAGE, none, slight, considerable, great, total, in building of wood,

brick, masonry, CONCTELE eipeee ees g erent eerie eed ew neers cece racsersrerages

PETS, did the dog, cat, get frightened? Yes Na Did not notice

ANIMALS ; what did the farm animals do? .........+2 Phd adm eperesserinabanae

NOISE, I did, did mot hear anything 2... c eee i cece ees ned ee ner sare eseeenaee

It sounded like a truck, like thunder, like rolling a galvanised iron

PANK cs gags ome ter etatates tote heel ae gee Ses ak oe ore Diba, Bo ale aes) 5 4 Scat eae aS A

The sound seemed to come from over the hill, across the flat, in the air,

belGw MY Feet. piece ces esse see ane as eas tote eee separ npersr sens erga

From the N, 5, EF, W, ..ssoecesesees The sound lasted for ....... seconds,

REMARKS;

Signature wisecreeievacadssevena

Fig. 2. Copy of the questionnaire issued to postmasters for distribution to persons living in

their areas.

developed by Richter (1935) for local earthquakes. in southern California.

Instrumental records from Wood-Anderson torsion seismometers were used

since all stations were equipped with these instruments, The magnitude M of

a particular earthquake is defined by the equation

M = log(A/A,) = log A — log A,,

72 D. | SUTTON axp BR. E, WHITE

where A is the recorded trace amplitude in mms, for that earthquake and A,

is the amplitude at the same distance of a particular earthquake chosen as a

standard. The scale is thus a logarithmic seale and M can be calenlated if

A, tor the standard shock is specified as u fuuetion of distance. This is achieved

by arbitrarily fixing its value at a particular distance (one thousandth of a milli-

metre at 100 kilometres) and determining by experiment the way in which this

amplitude varics with distance. If the specification of A, as a function af

distance is accurate and consistent, determinations of M from readings at

different stations will give the same value, In practice, after some experience

a correction is applied to each station related chiefly to local conditions of

ground and installation and this correction is added ta or subtracted from the

calculated value of M. If the standard shock is specified in the manner de-

scribed then an earthquake of magnitude 3 will record on a Wood-Anderson

scismometer at a distance of 100 kilometres with a trace of amplitude of 1 mm.

The values ot log A, as a function of distance up to 600 km. are given in

Richter (1958), p. 342.

The assigning of magnitudes to lucal earthquakes in Australia at the

present Gime is difficult mainly becanse of the low density of seismograph stations,

except perhaps in the south-eastern part of the continent (see Doyle and Under-

wood, 1965), Pending a more thorough study, however, a rough magnitude

scale can be set up as follows, which possibly may not differ too significantly

from the Richter scale for southern California. The commonest short period

instrument in use in Australia is the Beniolt variable reluctance seismometer

and, with a galvanometer of period 0-75 sec, (as used in W.W.S.S.N, stations)

aud a nominal system gain of 25,000, the magnification at frequencies which

predominate in local earthquake recordings is about 10 times that of a Wood-

Anderson seismograph, Thus, if it is asswmexl that the standard shock results

in an amplitude of one hundredth of millimetre at 100 kms. and that A, varies

with distance in the same way as it does in southern Calitornia, a formula is

available for assigning magnitudes. The magnitude of the main Quorn shock

calculated on this basis using readings from the W.W.S.S.N, station et Me,

Bonython was 5+2 and the magnitude of the aftershock 4:6,

Following the specification of a magnitude scale for local earthquakes, a

seale was developed for teleseistis using surface waves (CGutenherg, 1945) and

finally body waves. The U.S.C.G.S. now publishes in its Earthquake Data

Reports magnitudes determined from wave amplitudes and periods. Magnitude

is computed as the log of the average of A/T x 10°, where Q is the distanee-

depfly factor as defined by Gutenberg and Richter (1954), A is the P-wave

amplitude in microns and T is the period in seconds, The magnitude, caleu-

Jated on this basis, of the mam shock under consideration was 4:9 based on

the reading from Port Moreshy alone which is somewhat lower than the fisure

gl 5-2 based on the reugh love! earthquake scale described,

REFERENCES

Focre, B.A. Doyir, We A. and Sivrros, DL .. 1858, Geophys. J. RAS 1 op, 135,

TDovon I A, Eveuneuam, lB. aid Hocas, To KR. L959. Aust 1, Mliys.. 12, 9. 222.

Dovrr, TL. A. and Byernauant, LB. 64, J. Geol, Soo, Aust, 11, p. 141,

Dovue. H. A. and Unvenwoep, R.. 1965. Aust. J, Su., 28, p, 40.

Gurensenc, B., 1945. Bull. Seismol, See. Amer. 85, p. 3.

Ovvinwene, Band Brewer, ©, F. 1954, “The Seismology of the Eurth,” Princeton Tar

versity Press.

Kent-Crana, ©, 1956, Trans, Roy, Soc. S, Anst.. 78, p, 177,

Jvrrrevs, PL. ond Boves, K. E., 1948. ‘Seisinvlogical ‘lubles Brit. Asswen Cray-Milte Trest.

Aicwrer, C.F. 1935. Bull, Seismol. Sue. Amer. 25, p. L.

Hicimer, C.F. 1958 “Elementary Seixmology.” W. A. Frevine

Surrow, D, J. ancl Wire, BR. E.. 1966, Amst. J. Phys, 19, pp. 157-1 64.

A REVISION OF THE GENUS CASSIA L. CAESALPINIACEAE

IN AUSTRALIA

BY D. E. SYMON*

Summary

The Australian and introduced species of Cassia L. are revised. Maps of the distribution of most

species are given.

The following new species are described: C. charlesiana, C. ferraria, C. hamersleyensis,

C. manicula and C. pilocarina.

The following new varieties are described: C. oligophylla var. sericea, C. pleurocarpa var.

angustifolia and var. longifolia. The following new combination is presented: C. barclayana Sweet

var. pubescens (Benth.) Symon.

A REVISION OF THE GENUS CASSIA L. CAESALPINIACEAE

IN AUSTRALIA

by D. E. Sywron*

[Read 12 May 1966]

SUMMARY

The Australian and introduced species of Cassia L. are revised, Maps of

the distribution of most species are given,

The tellowing new spevies are deseribed: C. charlesiana, C. ferraria, C.

tiamersleyensis, C, manienla and C. pilocarina.

The following new varieties are described: C, oligophylla var. sericea, C,

pleurocarpa var, angustifolia and var. longifolia. The following new combina-

tion is presented: C, barclayana Sweet var. pubescens (Benth,) Symon,

INTRODUCTION

In this revision of the genus Cassia in Australia the broad concept of the

enus firmly established by Bentham, Trans, Linn. Soc. 27 (1871) 503, and

followed by many authors has been accepted.

The recent revision of the genus Cassia in Malesia by De Wit, (1955) 197,

has been of great assistance to me and his introduction summarising the past

taxonomic history of the genus need not be repeated here. However, I have

not followed De Wit in all taxonomic and nomenclatural details.

In contrast to De Wit’s opinion of the genus in Malesia, | consider some

species of all three subgencra to be native to Australia, The subgencra Cassia

and Absus are sparingly represented here, each with four native species and

it is the subgenus Senna with about 50 species and varieties in which a great

deal of speciation has occurred and is occurring.

Both F. Mueller and G, Bentham commented on the difficulty of defining

the limits of some species and despite the more extensive collections now avail-

able this problem still remains in some groups. The cases of apparent hybrid-

ity, Symon (1955) 190, and of polyembryony, Symon (1956) 191 and of poly-

ploid ‘series with high numbers in Australia, Irwin and Turner (1960) 309,

all suggest a complex reproductive biology and until this is unravelled specu-

lation of the parentage of suspected hybrids based on morphological studies

alone may be of limited value, For this reason I have not invoked the term

“hybrid” to account for the many variants seen, although some hybrids undonbt-

edly occur.

The collections from Western Australia have heen of special interest. All

the new species described come from that State and fiirther collections (still

inadequate) suggest that more new species remain to be described. Several

of these new specics are quite localised (e.g. C. manicula and ©. pilocarina)

whilst another alder one (C. cuthbertsonii) has not been rediscovered since 1888.

° Waite Apricultural Research Institute,

Trans, Roy, Soc. 5, Aust, (1966), Vol. 90,

74 D. E. SYMON

It has not been possible to publish full citation lists of all the many

hundreds of specimens seen, In the very short lists of selected specimens given

below I have recorded, if possible, the earliest collection of each species in

each State and then a few collections that have been widely distributed. With

these limitations it has not been possible to indicate with cited specimens the

full range of variation of any species, All possible collections have been mapped,

although repeated collections from one site are not indicated.

tn the body of the text the species have been placed in a number of appar-

ently natural groups generally preceded hy the introduced species, Since in

any of the groups the relationships are reticulate or branched no simple linear

order can avoid some anomalies. The relationships within some of these

groupings are suggested in Fig. 1. This is in no way to be taken as indicating

any strict order of descent. Their relationships will obviously be more complex

FIGs Ts

ire urinth ae eee srt hae ob ele ory el tenghiya oo fem emihvic serels uf Gusste In \usteallty

ee ee

wewni indi Se ‘. ———,

Wewred Did it : —_— \ mrelayand

f Lowe git

Z eye Lagi

bifey bist \ phintiitiel

Abb tae | F. P i hap. ware

Wt era hvy onde i Ebeey puhbsbers

selpmryniefet |

aN ni rcerim rh

wt ~

wire ine hy

Worearia Litt leet citi

pedbiise vice “.o-— LS lu se eeabe oT a ene — “uelphy lia

| in \

ih-pesati 6 leyardertres —stavtit ” phy ded inea

| \

| p cliitantens, Tied bone). a artis (sles citcinnara

vier Tul idid a

{ seiiaver.platypenla —— mesopha lim nen. var. aypoptetia

riorlcs lava Sa

cardiespersn. Rem. Var. curiacea -

in space and time than can possibly be presented in a plane diagram. The two

sub-genera Cassia and Absus are not represented on the diagram as the species

numbers are so few and their relationships so tenuous that apart from linking

C, queenslandica with C, brewsteri and C. marksiana with C. tomentella, it is

scarcely profitable to place them except in the much larger context of a mono-

graph on the whole genus. Likewise C. absus and C. harneyi have no close

relatives in Australia though C. pumila and C. mimosvides have some affinities

wilh each other,

The trend from C. helmsii to C. nemophila is from relatively large, flat,

densely pubescent leaves to almost glabrous tercte Jeaves, and that from C.

desolata to C, circinnata the reduction in leaflets and the development of

phyllodes, The evolution of phyllodes in C. nemophila var. platypodu is

possibly an independent development, and an example of convergent evolu-

lion and adaptation to the very arid environments in which these species occur.

Cassia helmsii, C. desolute and C. sturtii also in an extreme environment, and

all with broad leaves, have a dense woolly tomentum.

A similar pattern is also shown in the group C. ferraria-C, churlesiana.

Here C. ferraria has large leaflets and the series culminates in the narrow phyl-

lodes and reduced leaflets of C. charlesiana. This figure also represents to a

THE GENUS CASSIA L, CAESALPINIACEAE. IN AUSTRALIA 5

surprising degree the geographical distribution of the various species in Aus-

tralia within limitations of a plane figure and a single name representing area.

The only comprehensive survey of the chromosome numbers. of the genus

is that by Irwin and Turner (1960) 309, and in this the Australian species are

poorly represented. Table 1 summarises this information for the species endemic

in Australia.

TABLE 1

Chromosome numbers of Cassia spevies.

n 2n

C. artemisioides 28 — Ahuja (1957) 117.

C. artemisioides —_ 56 Irwin & Turner loc, cit.

C. artemisioides 25 — K. Abele, unpublished,

C. nemophila 28 — K. Abele, unpublished.

C. nemophila — 28 Irwin & Turner.

C. nemophila —

var, platypoda 25 _ K. Abele, unpublished.

C_ sturtii (probably

C, nem, var. coriacea ) 38 — K. Ahele, unpublished.

C. oligophylla 28 = K. Abele, unpublished,

C. desolata var. . .

invuluerata (? helimsii) — 56 Tewin & Turner,

C. chatelainiana M4 — B. L. Turner, nnpublished-

C, aff, luerssenii C24 _ B. L, Turner, unpublished,

C. aciphylla 13 a K. Abele, unpublished.

C, notabilis ADW 23824 13 —_— B. A. Barlow, unpublished,

The information is very incomplete and does little more than indicate the

obvious scope for an cxtensiye study of the genus in Australia. The suggestion

of two chromosome races in C. nemophila is also supported by measurements

of pollen grains.

The genus Cassia is a very large one. Bentham in 1871 maintained 335

species, De Wit, 1955, considered that it contained more than 400 species, whilst

Irwin and Turner, 1960, attribute to it “600 described species”. It occurs on

all the Continents and most areas with a tropical or warm temperate climate,

the greatest number of species being found in tropical America.

It is not intended in this regional revision to revise the supra-specific units

of this genus. This can only be done satisfactorily in a comprehensive revision

of the whole genus. However, an attempt has been made to typify the sections

used by Bentham and to allocate to them the species found in Australia.

Introduced species are indicated throughout the text by an asterisk and

the standard abbreviations are used for the yarious Herbaria,

GENUS CASSIA L. (1753)376, anp (1754)178.

1. Cassia sabgenus Cassia, type species Cassia fistula L., (1753)377.

Generic Synonyms:

Cathertocarpus Persoon, (1805)459, type species Cathartocarpus fistula (L.)

Persaon,

Bactyrilebium Willdenow, (1809)440, type species Bactyrilobium fistula

(L.) Willd.

Brewsteria F. Mueller, in Hooker, (1857)229, 230, Na species are actually

mentioned here, but perhaps C. brewsteri is implied.

76 D. FE. SYMON

Subgencric synonyms:

fi pantie subgenus or section Fistula Bentham (1871)513, type species C.

stula L.

Cassia subgenus Fistula Baker in Hooker. f. (1878)261.

Cassia section Cassia.

Sectional Synonyms:

‘ ae section. Fistula DC. in Colladon, (1816)83, type species C, fistula

Cassia section Cathartocarpus Bentham, (1864)281, type species C. brew-

steri (F. Mueller) F. Mueller.

To the subgenus Cassia in Australia belong the following species:

°C. fistula C, tomentella

C. brewsteri C. queenslandica

C. marksiana

2. Cassia subgenus Senna Bentham (1871)513, 518.

Basionym. of the subgenus.

A, Section Senna DC. in Colladon (1816)82, type specimen not indicated but

the lectotype Cassia obovata Colladon is suggested.

Basionym of the Section.

Genus Senna Tourn, ex Mill. (1768), the type of the genus Senna italica

[C. senna L. in parl, Cassia obovata Colladon],

Synonyms of Cassia Section Senna.

Section Herpetica DC, in Colladon (1816)91, type species Cassia alata L.

This sectional name was used as a generic name by Rafinesque (1838)123, of

which the lype species was Herpeticu ulata (L.) Rat.

Section Chamaesenna DC. in Colladon (1816)95 [Bentham, (1864)283],

type species of the section was not indicated.

To this section of the genus in Australia belong

*C, alata C. magnifolia

°C), didymabotrya C, notabilis

2. pleurocarpa

C. timoriensis

C. venusta

B. Cassia section Chamaefistula DC. in Colladon, (1816)87. [Bentham, (1864)

282.| No type specimen seems to have been selected for this section which

was raised to gencric level by G. Don, (1832)451. The type of Don’s genus heing

C. bacillaris Lf.

Australian representatives of this section are all introduced and are: °C,

coluteoides, °C. floribunda and *C. tomentosa.

C. Cussia section Oncolubium Bentham, 27(1871)513, 530.

Basionym.

Cassia sub-section Oncolobium Vogel, (1837)21.

Type species C. occidentalis L. (1753)377. To this Section in Australia

belong °C. oecidentalis, °C. hirsuta, C, berclayana and C. planitiicala,

D. Cassia section Prososperma Vogel, (1837)7 [Bentham (1871)513, 535], type

species of the section not indicated and C, tora L, (1753)376 chosen as lectotype.

To the section Prososperma in Australia belong two introduced species;

*C!, tora and *C. obtusifolia.

THE GENUS GASSIA 1, CAESALPINIACEAE IN AUSTRALIA 77

E, Cassia section Psilorhegnu. Vogel, (1837)8, 47. [Berithamn, (1864)264.]

Vogel did not indicate any type species for his section in which he included

7 Australian and I Brasilian species, nor did Bentham indicate a type in L864

or 1871. However, Baker in Hook, f. 1874, used the name Psilorhegma as a

subgenus in Cassia and indicated C. glauca Lam. as the type of the subgenus.

This name is considered by De Wit to be a synonym of C. surattensis Burm. f.

The species C. glauca Lam. is certainly within the concept of the section Psilar-

hegma Vogel and was included in that section by Bentham 1871, and it is

accepted as the type of the section here. The name Psilorghegma was used as

a genetic name by Britton and Rose (1930)255. The type of their genus

was designated by them as C, planisiliqua L, (1753)377, apparently interpreted

in the sense of Backer (1941) fam. 114-23, not of L. as De Wit considers it to

be a synonym of C. occidentalis which is not in this section. That they inter-

pretcd C. planisiliqgua in this sense is indicated by the fact that they did include

C, glauca Lam. in their genus,

To this section belong many Australian species and the section can be con-

sidered to have its fullest development in Australia.

C, aciphylla desulata odorata

artemisioides ferraria oligoclada

cartliosperma glutinosa oligophylla

charlesiana hamersleyensis phyllodinea

chatelainiana helmsti pilocarina

circinnata leptoclada pruinosa

cladophylla luerssenii retusa

coronilloides manicula sturtii

costata nemophila surattensis

cuthbertsonii

3. Cassia subgenus Absus (DC.) Symon, comb, noy., stat. nov. Type of the

subgenus ts C. absus L,

Subgenecrie Synonyms:

Cassia Subg. Lasiorhegma Bentham, (1870)86, 129; type specimen not in-

dicated but the section is hased on Vogel's section Lasiorhegma (sce hclow).

A, Cassia section Absus DC. in Colladon (1816)82, 116, type species C. absus

L., (1753)276 [Bentham (1864)290].

Sectional Synonym:

Cassia section Lasiorhegma Vogel, (1837)8, nom, illeg. because Vogel did

not use the section name Absus DC, already available to him and cited this in

synonymy. The type specimen of Vogel's section Lusivrhegma could be C.

absus L. by lectotypy.

Cassia section Baseophyllum DC. in Colladon (1816)115, type species C.

eytisoides DC, in Colladon (1816)116, t.14.

The only species in Australia in this section is C. absus L.

B. Cassia section Apouvouita Bentham, (1871)513, 557, type species C, apou-

couita Aublet, (1775)379, t.146.

There are no Australian representatives of this section,

7 b, E. SYMON

C, Cassia section Chamuecrista DC, in Colladon (1816) 118, [Bentham (1564)

290, and (1871)513, 567,]

rencric basionym Chamacerista Moench., (1794)272, type species Chamae-

crista.

Specific basionym Cassia chamacecristu L., (1753)379.

To this section in Australia belong the following three speeics: C. harncyi,

C. mimosoides, C. pumila,

Cassia

Linnaeus, (1753)376. Linnaeus, (1754)178, Colladon, 1516. DeCandolle,

(1825)489, Vogel, 1837. Mueller, (1863)36. Bentham, (1864)279. Bentham

and Hooker, (1865)571. Bentham, (1871)503. Mueller, (1882)42. Builey,

(1883)124. Mueller, (1888)199. Mueller, (1889)73. ‘Tate, (1890)71. Bailey,

(1900)453. Bailey, (1913)151. Maiden and Betche, (1916)97. Ewart andl

Davies, (1917)133. Black, (1924)292. Domin, (1926)790, Ewart, (193L)610.

Gardner, (1930)35. Senn, (1938)153. Black, (1948)429. Dormer, (1953)313.

De Wit, (1955)197, Venkatesh, (1956)168 and 272; (1957)253. Trwin and

Turner, (1960)309. Hayat, (1963)123.

Trees, shrubs or herbs, leaves paripinnate with one to many pairs of Jeaflels

present, or the leaves xedyved to phyllodes in a number of Australian specics.

Glands frequently present on the petiole or on the leaf rachis between one or

more pairs of leaflets; stipules present, persistent or caducous, Flowers pale

or deep yellow in Australian species in simple or rarely componnd racemes or

in condensed sub-umbellate racemes. Sepals 5, uneqnal, imbricate, the outer

ones smaller, Petals 5, spreading, nearly equal or the lower outer one Jarger.

Stamens usually 10, rarely 5 but much modified, and 10, 7 or 6 may be fertile

with the upper 3 and the lowest one reduced to staminodes; filaments rarely all

equal, often with one longer than the rest when all ten untbers are fertile. or

with the lower three much longer than the others, Fertile anthers opening by

pures or slits, Ovary usually curved and with few to many ovules, the stigma

is obliquely terminal, small, and may be surrounded by a fringe of minute hairs.

Pod variable, cylindrical woody and indehiscent, or cylindrical or fattened and

two valved, or flattened and elastically dehiscent. Seels generally obovate

sometimes oblong, albuminous.

Type species Cassia fistula L. Sp. Pl. 1 (1753)377.

KEY TO THE SUBGENERA OF CASSTA

|, Foliar glands absent 9 an ree: 7 :

1. Foliar glands present... 26 = . = sent!

3 Pod indehiscent. lurve, 20-60 ci. long, cylindrical or elliptical in section, never

Hat, transverse: septs entire; the three lower anthers on long arenate Mlaments,

never ten fully Fertile anthers: inflorescence a long, 7-40 cm. pendant raceme.

shrubs or trees in Queenshind aod New South Wales.

e.!

bua

—

cS)

i=)

_... ....subgen. Senna, p. 82.

3. Pod dehiscent but nat elastically so flat ov turgid 1-15 em. long; Howers with 10-7

fertile anthers; sepals rounded: leaves vatiuble bat rarely with more than 20 pain

of leaflets, mostly shrubby, rarely tree-like.

siiitineonune SUDLEIL Senna, p, $2,

3. Pod clastically dehiscent. small, rarcly greater than 4 » 1 cm; fertile anthers 10-5,

ull Alaments ‘short; sepals acute; Jeaflets im many 5-60 pairs (exurpt Co wbsus &

pairs and broader); herbs or snbshrubs in trapical Australia.

ae _. snbgen. Absus, p. 131.

THE GENUS CASSIA L. CAESALPINIACEAE IN AUSTRALIA 79

KEY TO THE SPECIES OF CASSIA OF THE SUBGENUS CASSIA

“

eo.

—)

2 é

we Golo

4, Pods 20-45 x 1-25 cm., oval in section, shallowly transversely grooved, the

1, Cassia fistula L..,, (1753)377.

Colladon, (1816)85. De Candolle, (1825)490, Vogel, (1837)11, Bentham,

(1871)514. Dorin, (1926)790. Webb, (1948)79. De Wit, (1955)207.

Venkatesh, (1956) 168.

Common Name: Golden Shower.

Type Specimen: In Herb. Hermann, in BM, not seen.

Description: A deciduous tree 3-10 m. Leaves of 3-8 pairs of leaflets,

aecrescent, the smaller ones 5 x 3:5 cm, the larger 15 x 8 cm, oblong-elliptic;

petiolules 0-5-1 em, thick; petiole and rhachis without glands. Inflorescence, a

pendant raceme 20-40 em long, with many flowers (30-50), fragrant. Bracts

3-4 mm, subulate, caducous, bracteoles similar, smaller; pedicel 4 cm; sepals

1 x 0-6 cm, obovate-oblong, greenish yellow; petals slightly unequal, the upper

and two lower petals larger than the two lateral, oboyate-elliptic 2 x 1 em,

clawed, yellow, stamens 10 : the 3 upper reduced or sterile, the lower 7 fertile «

the uppermost filament 5 mm, the anther 2 mm, the two lateral to it on longer,

& mm, more slender, arcuate filaments, the anthers 2 mm, 4 of the fertile stamens

with filaments 7 mm and anthers of 4+ mm alternating with 3 fertile stamens

with long, arcuate, flaments 2-5 cm, and anthers 5 mm; ovary 1:5 com curved,

pubescent; stipe 8 mm, style 2-3 mm, stigma small, ovules numerous, 70-120.

Pod 30-60 x 2-2-5 em, cylindrical, woody, dark coloured, indehiscent. Seeds

10 x 7 mm, flattish, smooth, glossy brown.

Note: This beautiful Howering tree has been widely prown as an ornamental tree ju the

Tropics, and has become established in_a few localities in northern Queensland, The above

description is from that by H. C.D. de Wit, supplemented by fresh material from a tree

in the Waite Institute Arboretum.

Selected Specimens—

QueeNsLanp: JH, Saint-Smith 33, 1.xi1.7958, Murray Upper via Tully: BRI. K. Domin,

Bibl. Bot. 89(1926)790 reports that this species ig established nt Cairns.

2, Cassia queenslandica C. T, White, (1939)74.

Francis, (1951 )165.

Type Specimen: E. Fryer, Sept., 1936, Mt. Molloy, large rain forest tree,

Molotype: BRI, isotype K.

Synonym: C. brewster F. Muell. var. sylvestris F. M. Bailey, (1891)11,

Description: This species is inadequately collected) and represented in

Sioa and the following description is adapted from the original by ©. T.

SU b..E. SYMON

A tall tree, sometimes shrubby, the floworing, branches tomentose, somewhat

ribbed. Leaves of 6-8 pairs of leaflets, about 18 cm Tong, the rhachis puberu-

lent, subangular, glandicss; leaflets oblong 4-7 x 2-2-5 cm, apex obtnse, hase

cuneate, prominently reticulate on both sides, glabrous above, clothed with seat-

ter¢d white hairs below; petiolules densely puberulent 3-4 mm long. Racemes

25-33 em long, 50-60 flowered, rhachis subangular, densely poberulent; bracts

2 mm long, Janceolate, soon deciduous; pedicels 2-5-3 cm long, slender; sepals

about 6 mm long, broad ovate, prominently minutely puberulent. Petals 1:7

cm ling yellow, oval-oblong, contracted to o short claw, strongly veined when

dry. Ovary densely pubescent, Pod pendulous, about 35 em long and 1-1°5

cin wide, somewhat fattened, the sutures sravuth and continuous, the valves

markedly contracted at intervals between the sutures; transverse septa between

the seeds; seeds transverse, obovate, 7 x 5 mm, black or dark, the pod in the

type specimen contains about 80 sceds, .

Distribution; Ram forests near Cairns, northern Queensland. Map 1.

Nites In his description under C. Grewsteri var. sylvestris, BM. Bailey adds that the

think dias dark rough bark, the wood is close grained and a golden brown colour and very

hitter, the flowers are brownish and the pod is a deep glossy brown.

selected Specinnens—

Qeeensuanp: E. Bryer, Sept, 193, Mt. Molloy; BRT, K, Bh, Cowley, Redlynch (Kauwes-

ung) Barron River; BRI, BR, W, Poland, Nov. 1902, Bloomfield! River; BRI,

‘3, Cassia brewsteri (F, Mueller)F, Mueller ex Bentham, (1864)282.

Mueller, (1858)17, nomen nndum, Bentham, (1864)282. Bentham,

(1871)515. Bailey, (1883)125. Maiden, teenie: Moore and Betche,

(18931159. Swain, (1928)464. Francis, (1929)146, Andas, (71935)182

Francis, (1951)164. De Wit, (1955)290 Anderson, (1956)233.

Common Name; Leichhardt Bean,

Type Specimen: Hilly pastures and river banks on the Burdekin, Queens-

land. P Mueller.

Holotype: K, ? isotype P.

Basionym: Cathartocarpus brewsteri F. Mueller (185@) 110.

Description; A shrub or tree 2-12 m. bark dark. Leaves pinnate, 2-4/6)

pairs, of accrescent leaflets, glandless, The larger leaflets 4-5 < 1-5 em, narrow

avate to oblong lanceolate, blunt or slightly emarginate, sparsely pubescent when

young becoming glabrous above but usually remaining appressed pubescent

below, paler below, stipules minute; 0-3 mm, caducous; rhachis terminated by

a subolate, caducous mucto 1 mm, petiolules distinct L2 mim. Intoreseence

a pendulous raceme 7-20 cm long of 6-12 flowers. Pedicels slender 2-3 om,

bracts minute; sepals 6 mm long, oval, blunt, puhescent, greenish-yellow, Petals

10-12 mm, yellow, orange, reddish ur brownish in colour, ovate, stipitate,

Sturnens 10 variously modified, the lower three fertile on long filaments swollen

to a globular appendage in the middle and with ovate anthers, the upper three

stamens very redneed and sterile, the lateral four stamens with filaments and

anthers shorter than the petals, Ovary slender, often sparsely pubescent, with

many avules. Pod 20-45 x 1-2-5 em, slightly or markedly campressed, the trans-

verse ribs more or less distinct, many seeded + 60, the sutures persistent as the

body of the pod disintegrates. Seeds falling enclosed in the oval, pithy, parti-

tigns £2 x 10 mun, of the pad. Seeds 9 x 6 mm, thick, smooth, brown, oval-ovate.

Disribution: Map 1.

Note: ‘Khe three species, €, Srewsteri, C. tomentella and ©. markstane, have been

nielt confused, herbarinm specimens are often poor and carely combine Teeves. flowers und

THE GENUS CASSIA L. CAESALPINIACEAE IN AUSTRALIA 8)

piss. The pods when svailuble ure x reliable aveans. by which to separate the species and

the illustrations of pods in F. M. Bailey, the Q.Flora 2(1900) Pl. XVI shows them fairly well.

Flower size and Hower colour is very variable and leat characteristics are perhaps snare

useful.. The specimens of C, brewsteri from the more southerly areas (c.g. Kajewski, 23,134,

Gondiah, 25-30m. N. of Gympie), are somewhat distinct in leaf shape and represent a form

of the species in a qere mesic environment. The few pods available from this area seem

vo different from those from the Burdekin district and are quite distinct from those of

C. marksiana whose leaf characteristics this southern form of C. brewsteri approaches.

Because of their showy nature some trees of these species are grown in domiestiv gardens,

This may account for the Wwe records of C. brewsteri from New South Wales. The proven-

ance of these specimens is at the moment unknown and more evidence is needed before it

can be considered that C, brewsteri is native ta New South Wales.

Selewted Specimens

WEENSLAND; M. Lazarides and Story 41, 5.ix. 1961, 42 m,. ENE of Sprimesure; K. CANB,

AD. . Lazarides and Story £37, 12,ix.1961, Jellinbah Homestead, 21.5 m. N of Blackwater;

CANB_ K, K. Northcote, 22.vi,1962, Honeycomb Station, McKenzie River; ADW- 5S. J,

Kajewski. 23.x.1934, Guncdiah; BRI, K.

4. Cassia marksiana (F. M. Bailey) Domin, (1926)791.

Francis, (1951)165. Anderson, (1956)233,

Type Specimen: Upper Nerang Creek (SE. Queensland), foliage and wood,

F. M. Bailey, 1986; Flowers, pod and Jeaf. Hon. C. F. Marks, M.D., Dec. [S9G-

Holotype: BRI.

Basionym: Cassia brewsteri var, marksiana F. M, Bailey, (1897 )79.

The tolluwing description is modified from the original by F. M. Bailey:

An erect wee of 20 m, trunk 30 cm, or more, in diameter; wood pinkish,

close in grain, and tough, branchlets dark coloured, fluted, Leaves 20-23 cm

long, bearing 7-8 pairs of leaflets from 2-5-8-5 cam long, lanceolate to, oblong

ovate, shortly petiolulate, the Ieayes nearest to the flower racemes often ot

only three leaflets, glabrous above and on the lamina below, but often with i

few hairs on the midrib and leaf cdges below. Inflorescence a raceme 7-8 cm

long of yellow flowers. Racemes terminal on the branchlets; Howers crowded

on slender pedicels; bracts minute, sepals oblong 5 mm, pubescent on the hack,

petals 8-L1 mm, obtuse, tapering to the base marked by a dark ventral and

distant lateral vein, yellow; stamens of the normal form (i.e, of C. brewster:

laments of the three long lower stamens lpnger than the petals, swollen into

a globular appendage about the middle, with ovate anthers, the other stamens

shorter than the petals, the upper three very reduced), ovary apparently glabrous

in the few specimens seen. Pod about 30 x 1-1:5 em nearly eylindrical,

glabrous, dark glossy brown, not or scarcely marked by transverse ribs between

the seeds.

Distribution: Map, 1.

Note: On pod characteristics C. marksiana and C. tomentella appear to le closely re-

lated, but they namber of differences in pubescence, leaflet shape und geographical distei-

bution warrant their maintenance 2s separate species.

Seleoted Speotmeans—

Queens panu: W, A.W. De Betzeville, JOxL L994 Beeclimeant, Moreton District; BHI,

New Sourit Waris; W. Bauerlen 876. Nov. 1892. Murwillumbah; NSW. . M,

Bailey, 26.1,1904 Prewett, Tweed River; BRE R.A, Campbell, Sept.. 1920. Piguabcen:

NSW. GG. Moos PMay, L867, ‘Tweed Heads; K, BM.

5. Cassia tomentella (Lentham) Domin, (1926)791.,

bailey, (1883)125 sub. C. brewster’. Frangis, (1951) 165.

Basionym; C, brewster var. toumentella Bentham, (1864)252.

52 D, E, SYMON

Type Locality; Castle Creek, E. M, Bowtnan.

Holotype: Pads at MEL.

Description: A shrub or tree to LO m, young twigs and petioles densely

minutely pubescent, with pale curved hairs. feayes LO cm, pinnate, of 4-5 pairs

of accrescent leaflets, glandless, the terminul leaflets 4-6 x 2 cm, obovate,

romeded or slightly emarginate, the lower leaHets 1-2 x 1-1-5 em almost orbi-

cular or broadly obovate, often drying brown and shining above, with the veins

prominent aboye and below, glabrous above, densely minutely pnbescent below,

mean length-breadth ratio of the leaflets ranges from 1-5 to 2-3, Petiole 0-5-1

em, grooved above; leaf rhachis 4-8 em, grooved above, petiolules distinct, 1-2

mm. Inflorescence a raceme of yellow flowers, Racemes 7-18 em, minutely

pubescent. pedicels slender, sepals 5 mm, oblong, pubescent, petals 5-10 mm,

stipitate, rounded, stamens 10, variously modified, the upper thrce very ro-

duced, the lower three fertile, and on long filaments swollen into a gland ahout

the middle, the fonr lateral stamens on much shorter filaments, ovary hirsute or

pubescent. Pod 15-30 x 1-1-5 cm. almost cylindrical, the transverse ribs not

prominent, the surface if not weathered is densely minutely pubescent under a

lens.

Disivibution: Map. |,

Note: In the more northerly areas of its range where C, tamentella meets C. brewsteri

tho Icaflets tend to be somewhat longer and less densely pubescent, suggestive of some intro

gression; howeyer, pods of an intermediate nature have not been seen,

In F. M. Bailey, Queensland Woods (1886)23, (1888)40, and (1899)48, the name

Cassia brewsteri var. tomentosa is sec. apparently in error as it is athibuted to FI, Aust.

2(1864)282. where yar. fomentella is mentioned,

Selected Specimens.

Queens.awp: N. H. Speck 1810. 8.x.1963, 7 m. S. Rosewoud IMmstd.. Pt. Curtis; CANB.

Nsw. 5. L. Evyerist and L, J. Webb 1412, 24.x1,1946, Palen Creek; CANB, BRT. C., T,

White 10788, Apl, 1937, Grevillea Plateau, Callide Valley; K. BRI. ©. T. White 12098.

27..1937, Yaamba, Pt. Curtis’ dist; K_ BRI,

KEY TO SPECIES AND VARIETIES OF THE SUB-GENUS SENNA

1. Leaves reduced to phyllodes, or the petiole defintely phypdineous avd

bearing 1-3 pairs of leaflets. fertile stamens 10 et =

1. Leaves not reduced to phyllodes, petioles terete or scarcely flattened.

leaHets usually well develuped, terete or flat, persistent and in Lmiany

pairs. fertile stamens 10 or less We _. : . 6

2. Phyllodes terete or nearly so, rarely greater than 1 min wide... 4

2. Phyllodes or petioles definitely flattened. 1-5 mm wide 4

3. Phyllodes terete, often clustered. with no leaflets, pod coiled. N.S.W.

and Q, seve io . Ps ae

3. Phyllodes terete or slightly flatlenod, with terminal leaflets at Teast

when young. pod straight, WiA- : . wok Ck 13. CG. charlesiona

4, Vhyllodes or petiole densely pubescent, pod curved or siraight _.. 5

4. PhylNodos or petiole sparsely pubescent ar Plalwous at anaturity,

1.3 pairs of natrow Jealets sometimes degiduous. pod straight

Ala. C. nemaphila var. platypacdta

5. Phyllodes 2-4 ram wide, densely huary pubescent, without Jeaflets,

pods oflen curved ... fo a f a :

5, Whyllodes 1-5-2 mm wide, serivevus pubescent, 2-3 pairs of Jeaflets

well developed, pod straight. loral in-Q. andl S.A. ..... ... ida. 0, desalata yar. qlanies

6. Fertile stamens 7 or Jess, pods various, often treid. of flat and

with lateral ridges, rarely simply flat ..

& Fertile stamens 10 rarely Jess. pods flat or nearly so without

ridges or wings. foliar glands usnally present _ 24

57. OL circienata

36, C. phylludinea

THE GENUS CASSIA L. CAESALPINIACEAE IN AUSTRALIA

7. Pods conspicuously fattened and with lateral ridges, or terete and

winged, or less commonly tetragonous, or sim ly flat, foliar

glands usually absent (present in C, tora and C, 0 tusifolia) —.... 8

7. Pods turgid, terete or nearly so at maturity (dry Mattish if immature)

without wings or ridges, foliar glands often conspicuous 18

8. Leaves with 3-3 pairs of leaflets, pods relatively long and narrow

10-15 x -4-G om, somewhat tetragomons a. este uv

8. Leaves with 3-20 pairs of leaflets. pods Hat or winged; or ridged 10

Y. Gland between the two Jower pairs of leaflets. pod pedicel to 1-5 em,

arcole of seccd 1-5-2 mm, almost as wide as the sced, three larger

anthers with rounded apex ‘ ape 13, C. tora

9. Gland between the lowest pair of leaflets conily, pad pedicel 1: Bad cm,

wreole of seed linear, -3-'5 mm. three larger anthers with marcawvedd

apex 14. C. obtusifolia

10. Leaves large, 10-60 cm a Sons, lesflets ‘Wstally at least 4 om wide IL

10, Leaves smaller, 10-30 em long, leaflets rarely 3 em wide 12

1L, Leaves with 10-20 pairs of leaflets, pods terete and with prominent

lateral wigs, introduced weed hs

11, Leaves with 3-8 pairs of leaflets, Side lat andl svi & a aati lateral

16. C. alata

ridge somewhat developed * _. 18. G. magnifolia

12, Plants completely glabrains, stems often slightly alancons

stipes small, deciduous 9. ue ett 13

12, Plants pubescent to some degree, not glaucous, stipules narrow

or conspicuous and sub persistent , 8 © ae * athe 15

13, Leaflets 11-12 pairs. -4--6 om wide, Joc al in Q. 20h. Cc. pleurocarpn var. longifolia

13. Leaflets 5-9 pairs, broader or narrower .... . 14

14. Leatcts 6-9 pairs, narrow -3--4 mm, idihes erect, Ww. A,

Qla. C. pleurocarpa var. angustifolia

14. Leatets 5-9 pairs, -6-1-2 em wide - 21. C. pleurocarpa var. pleurocarpa

15. Stipules broad and well developed, sub persistent __.... 7 ee 16

15. Stipules subwlate or linear, not persisient 17

16. Bracts of the inflorescenee pale, pods 4-5 x L 1- 4e em fhativ c 19,

16, Bracts of the inflorescence dark, pads 7-10 x 2 eni, introduced ii

Q, and cultivated -

L7. Plints conspicuously pilose, pods 3- 4 em Jong and. witht lateral tiles

fod

C. conistir

CG. didymobotrya

20. C. notabils

17. Plauts pubescent but not pilose, pods 7-9 cm Jong. flat aw 15, C. timoriensis

18. Plowering and fruiting peduncle very short, rarcly 5 mm long _ 9.C. ecoidentalis

1S. Flowering and fruiting peduncle usually greater than 3 mm. 19

i9. Glands between the leaflets, not at the base of the petiole ste not 20

19, Glands at the base of the petiole _ - 52 =e = 22

20, Plant glabrous or mearly sow ce cenit 1

20, Plant densely pubescent with somewhat golden Bairs. leallets i mo

5-6 pairs - we ‘ne ees &. C. tomentoya

91, Glands canical Getweon seversl pairs of leaflets: oak P wo 7. G, floribunda

2). Gland conical hetween the lower pair of Isaflets only ... ee. oor 6. C. colutenides

22. Petiolar gland usually large, dark and squat, plat gle brpu,

sometimes glaucous . 12. ¢C. planitiicola

22. Petiolar gland conical. slates abwong, pihescent or hirsute she 23

23, Leaflets 2-3 cm wide, plant hirsute = rm 10. GC. hiryuta

23, Leaflets 7-10 mm wide. plant glabrous or finely pubescent. 7 24

24. Pht wlabrous or nearly so, leaflets 4-6 pairs 11. ¢. harefejona. vay. barclayana

24. Plant finely pubescent, lenflets 8-5 pairs =... Llu. C. barelayana var. pubescens

25, Young leaves, twigs, pods, etv.,. viscid... . a am . 45, C. plutinasa

25. Plats not viscid 26

D. E. SYMON

26. Petals haity on the back, all W.A. species (this character occurs

sporadically in same other specimens fram W.A.) nen 27

26, Petals not hairy on the back. .. ite 4 — 30

27. Glands stipitate, several, leaflets 3-4 pairs... ve soe E “AA, C. chatelainiana

27, Glands sessile, leaflets 1-6 pairs ..... beg: non . 28

28, Leallets L rarely 2 pairs, petiole 5- 9 tt a ion rem 43. C, charlesiana

28, Leaflets 3-6 pairs, petioles shorter -5-2 cm ae + aus 29

29. Leatlets 4 pairs, 4x 1-1-5 om _... Sp. er wants ona 48. C. ferraria

29. Leaflets 5-6 pairs 12x °23em wa cane AG, CL luerssenii

30. Leatets terete or narrow linear, not markedly flattened . . 31

30. Leaflets usually flat or broadly channelled. i+3 wm or iors wide 34

31. Leatets 1-2 pairs 000 o. Late oo fain aw 4, GC, nemophila var, nemophila

31. Leaflets 3-10 pairs 2. es wm Ot 32

32, Leaflets 3-4 puirs, leaves short 1 cm, compact, petiole 12 rin,

W.A., tate do eel * Bt ana PT, | is 40, GC. manicula

92, Leaflets 3-10 pairs, leaves laruer 2 cm or more, petiole: ‘at Teast

Be lift op "uae ccteny oes CIT 33

33, Leaflets 3-4 pairs. glands. stipitate, leaflets sparsely pubercent. petals

hairy on the hack Ty Wan Oe en) Beh, Bs ae 44, C. chateluiniana

33. Leatlets 3-10. pitirs, glands sessile; leaflets asiialby- pouty pubesvent,

petals glabrous ee 39. C. artemisioides

34, Leaflets 4-6 pairs, glabrous above, densely ‘white woolly pubescent

below and on twigs, ete, WA. rare aan ck 32, C. euthbertsanii

34. Not as ahove ..... vs sin soot 35

35. Veaflets rarely less than By pairs (5 5- 5-17) Easterti States _ 7 36

35, Leaflets rarely as many as 8 pairs (1-9) see Gene Sine 38

36. Leallets revolute, aristate, almost pungent __ _ ; . 2T, C. aciphylla

36. Leaflets more or less flat, never pungent .... an vp =. 37

37. Twigs terete, peduncles rarely 2 em long 2. .... ., 23. C. coronillvides

37. Twigs striate or winged, peduneles rarely less than 2 cm lore .. 24, C. odorata

38. Leaves. quite glabrous, young stems at least often glances _ 39

38, Leaves pubescent to some degree 0.0 nu en 41

39. Leaflets 2 pairs, stems slender and often purplish, Northern Australia

PAE eS ius Pee ote _ ate _.. 2&. ©. leptoclada

39. Leaflets 3-7 pairs, slems-nist ngually: purplish. ..... ks a oa 40

40. Leaflets und stem glaucous, stipules often well developed _, 47. C, pruinosa

40,. Leatlets and stems mostly green, stipules small... “a0 a 46, C, luerssenii

41. Plants densely pubescent, hoary, grey, or silvery ae ees 2,

41, Plints sparsely or minutely pubescent but not hoary or grey... _ 45

42, Leaflets 4-6 pairs, linear oblanceolate, 3-4 nun wide ; 38, C. sturfii

42. Leaflets 1-4 pairs usually wider... si ven es 43

43. Leatets. elliptic or oval 4-6 imum wide, yvatishld 35, Cc. desolata var. desoluta

43, Leaflets obovate. rarely less than 6 min wide _. 44

44. Leallets 24 pairs. woolly pubescent, the lateral edues uéten

slightly recurved especially when dry 301 nt = : 33, GC. helmsii

44. Leaflets 1-2. pairs, sericeous pubescent —..., Oda. C, oligophyllu var. sericec

45. Leatlots 12 pairs, obovate, 1-2 om, wide _ 34. C_ oligophylla var. oligaphylla

45. Not as above “thn wish - m. 46

46, LeaHety 1-2 pairs, line: arelliptic a4 ( cm linge _ Alb. C. nemophila var. zyzophylla

46. Not as above ., i: 47

47, Petioles at least 1-2 crn, leaflets 46 (7) 1 pairs. seeds black and wloasy.

pods slightly or markedly curved F 43

47. Petioles rarely £ cm, !eatets 2-9 DAW, Rivoekt not “Plack aad glossy: potl

straight or nearly so H ps Kees 3 : 30

THE CENUS CASSIA L. CAESALPINIACEAE IN AUSTRALIA 53

26. C, costata

48, Twigs pubescent, stipules 8-15 mm, pod slightly curved , 49

49, Leaves glaucus below, glabrous except on the midrib lelow 22 CG. suraltensis

49. Leaves not glaucous, plant sparsely or densely golden pubescent = 83. CL reins

50. Leatlets 5-9 pairs. oblong cimeate, involute when dry, pilose

villous. below. W.A, rare aa “ - a we BL. CL pilocerine

50. Leaflets usually fewer (but 2-8 pairs in ©, nemophile vay,

coriaced). shape and details different al

SL, Fruiting peduncles 2-5 em, leaflets 2-3 pairs ..... 7 52

51. Fruiting peduncles rarely 2 em Jong, leaflets 2-8 puirs 53

52. Leaflets oval obovate. ta 1 cm long, midnerve only prominent

below, peduncles 4-6 flowered _ be — 30. C. hamersleyensis

42. Leaficts oblancevlate to elliptic, to 3 cm eng, mid and lateral

nerves prominent below, peduncle 2-4 flowered ..... a . 29, C, oligocladau

54, Leaflets 3-4 pairs, 1-2 x -2 om oblong cuneate, petiale: vers short

(WAAL) _ Pe P fs i. : _- —. 42, CQ candliusperma

53, Leatets 2-8 pairs, very variable elliptic, narraw abovate retuse, Jeaf

rachis often somewhat recurved a 4le, C. nemophila var. voriacea

6. “Cassia coluteoides Colladon (1816)109.

DeCandolle, (1825)495, Vogel, (1837)42. Bentham, (1871)525. DeWit,

(1955) 239.

Type Specimen: Not seen,

Synonyms: Cassia bicapsularis auct, Aust. non L. White, (1919)306, While,

(1937 )223. Hurst, (1942)150. Webb, (1948)79. Beadle, Evans, Cavolin,

(1963 ) 232,

Description: A large sprawling shrub several metres high, stems terete,

sparsely pubescent with pale curved hairs becoming almost glabrous. Leaves

3-5 cm long; petiole 2-3 cm, grooved above, leaf rhachis similar; leaflets in 4-5

accrescent pairs, lower leaflets 1-1:5 x 0-5-1 em, oval, the upper leaflets 2-5 x 1-2

cm, obovate, obtuse, with an unequal base, glabrous above and usually with a

distinct patch of pubescence adjacent to the base of the midrib below, leaf

margin often prominent and yellowish or orange in colour; a single conical

gland, 1-1-5 mm, between the lower pair of leaHets; petiolules distinct, 3 mm,

pubescent;, stipules 5 mm, linear, early caducous, Inflorescence a number of

racemes from the upper leaf axils and also terminal forming a more or less

leaty panicle of large deep yellow flowers. Peduncle 3-5 cm, terete, fora! axis

shorter 0-5-2 cm, each peduncle with 3-10 Howers; pedicels slender, 2 cm; bracts

not seen: sepals unequal, the outer shorter 0-8-1-5 cm, obovate, glabrous; petals

2-2-3 em, obovate almost sessile, two rather more oblong and ane deeply emar-

ginate. Stamens 10, variously modified, the upper 3 reduced to staminodia

2mm long on filaments 2 mm long, the 4 lateral slarnens fertile about 5 mm long

on filaments 1-2 mm, the lower pair fertile about 1 em long, curved, on fila-

ments 1-3 cm long the lowest stamen reduced, the anther § mm long on a fila-

ment 6 mm, the fertile anthers with apical, round pores. Ovary 2 cm, curved,

sparsely glandular pubescent laterally and towards the base: style 5-6 mm,

glabrous; stigma obliquely terminal ‘and surrounded hy a fringe of minute

hairs, ovules about 60.

Pod terete, but uneven over the seeds, 10 x 0-6 cm, glabrous, the sutures

prominent, indehescent, seeds transverse and within partitions, Mature seeds

not seen but described hy De Wit as black, oval, flattened 5 mm long, emhrya

large embedded in copious albumen,

mr] 1D. EK. SYMON

Note; This species is qiutive to topical S, America and has been widely urown as a

purden shrub in Australia giving a fine display of Lowers in carly winter, J is apparently

sparsely naturalised in x few places in New South Wales and Queensland, but it is nut al

all vlear [rom mest collections whether the plants aca truly natiralised or not. This species

is Nisted in sone Australian Nursery Catatognes as Cy cantlollednd or as CL carymbosa.

Selected Specimens—

Queena ann; M. 7. Colclongh, May, 1918, Brisbane; ART, G,'T. White 9965, Liv. 1034,

Brisbane; BRL ©, H. oAllen 205, 2,v.1942, Cilruth Phiins, oewr Curnaroulla: CANB.

N. Mivhael. —, Praserpine school ground; BRI, M, S$. Clemens, Sept. 194%. Marybarough

eity dump; BRI,

New Sourn Waxes: H, $ MeKoo, 97.iv,J052, Northbridge mpongst Lintana at the

edge of bush; NSW. B.S, Parker, 30.ii1,1964, near South West Rocks; CAND

7. *Cassia floribunda Cavanilles, (1802)132.

Colladon, (1816)88, De Candolle, (1825)491. Vogel, (1837)19. Bentham,

(1871)526. DeWit, (1955)245, Everist, (1957)99, Beadle, Evans, Carolin,

(1963 )232,

Common Names: Smooth Cassia, Arsenic Bush, Dooley Weed, Laburnnim.

Type Locality: Mexico,

Type Specimen: Possibly at MA, not seen.

Synonym; Cassia laevigata Willdenow, (1809)441. Colladon, (1516)89-

De Gandolle, (1825)491, Vogel, (1837)19. Mueller, (1563)14. Bentham,

(18G64)282, Bentham, (1871)527, Bailey, (1883)125. Moore and Betche,

(1893)159. Maiden, (1895)232, 671. Maiden, pete Bailey, (1900)457.

Bailev, (1906)45, Hurst, (1942)150, Venkatesh, (1957)253, Webb, (1948)79.

Description: A glabrous shrub or small tree 1-3 m, branches thick, smooth,

green. Leaves 10-15 em long of 3-5 accrescent pairs of glabrous leatlets: leaflets

3-7 x 2-3 em, vyale-elliptic, acute or long acuminate, the sides more or less equal

and the base rounded, marginal nerve somewhat prominent, dull green above sub

claucous below; petiolules stout, distinct, 2-4 mm long; petiole 3-4 em grooved

abiye; leaf rhachis 4-10 em similar but bearing a geuerally prominent comical

gland 1-2 mm long between all or at least the two lower pairs of leaflets, the

rhachis terminated hy a short mucro, stipules 5-8 inm, linear, curved, soon lost.

Inflorescence a raceme of 5-L0 fowers, terminal or from the upper leaf axils, the

upper flowers on each raceme rarely setting pods. Peduncle 3-4 em long; bracts

4-5 mm, linear acute soon lost; pedicels 1-1-5 em slender; sepals uncqual, the

outer smaller, ovate, 5 x 3mm, the inner larger, ovate or oblong, 10-12 x 5 mm;

corolla wunecual, the upper petals 10-15. x 10-15 mm, obovate, or very broad

obovate and as broad as long, rounded or slightly retuse, the lowest petal 12-14

mm long narrower, concave; stamens 10, the upper 3 sterile and very reduced,

their anthers 2am long on filaments 1-2 nm, the 4 lateral stamens 4 mm long

on filaments 1 mm long, the lowest stamen 4 mm on a filament 2-3 mim, the

remaining pair the largest, the anthers 5-6 mm long, stout, curved on filaments

10 mm, all the fertile anthers almost sagittate and the terminal pores prominent:

ovary 10-12 mm glabrous, curved; style 4 mm; stigma obliquely terminal, Pout

bom ona stout pedicel and peduncle, pod 5-8 x 1 cm, terete, straight or slightly

curved, membraneous, the partitions papery and breaking down at maturity,

40-50 seeded. Sceds about 5 x 3-4 mm, tregularly ohovate, thick, vlossy, olive

green-brown,

Distribution: Map 9-

Noie: This species is believed! to he indigenous to tropical and subtropical Aniucries, but

it is now widely spread in Africa and Asia as a weed of disturbed sites. It was probbily

introdticed anto Australia and it is occasionally cullivated, Te was not collected hy any

of the varliest explorers and aonate an a specimen collected by J, Dallachy at Rockinghain

THE GENUS CASSIA FE... CARSAT.PINIACEAE LN AUSTRALIA sv

Bay in 1668 suggests that itowas both rare aud introduced there, ‘lhe first Australian collee-

tions ure all on the east coast and close lo early ventres af development.

Cassia floribunda Tas: hucome weedy on the Central North Coast of New South Wiles

dudoon the coust and tablelands in Qneenslind. Tt is not palatable wud although suspected

of being poisonous this does nat appear to have been clearly demoustrated, Tn Australia

it has often been identified as Cassie laenigata Willd,

Selected Specimens—

Queexsnann; C. kK, Wubbard 2777, 24.v.1930, Palmwoods. 60 wi. N. of Brishune; K,

BRI, J. L, Boonuanm, Ap), 1899. Brisbane: NSW, MEL. F. Mueller. Dec. 1856, Brishaie;

MEL. L. J. Webb. S.viii.1945, Atherton-Herbarton Bd.; CANB,

New Sout Watts: F. A. Rodway 1713, 18.v.1935, Merso, 6 m. N. of Nowny k,

Nsw, L, A, S. Johnson, 25.iv,1949. Ourimbah Creek, 3 m. W. of Ourimbah; NSW. FE,

Belche, Dec. 1881, Springwood: NSW. M. Gray, 3.xii.1957, Goonengerry, LO im, W) uf

Mullumbimby: CANB.

4. *Cessia tomentosa L. F., (1781)231,

Colladon, (1816)104. De Candolle, (1825)496. Vogel, (1637)22. Ben

tham, (1871)528, De Wit, (1955)275,

Holotype: In Linn. No. 528,23 (specimen nol seen).

Description: A shrub 2-3 m, entirely villous with somewhat golden hairs

pacticularly on the younger growth, stems and twigs terete, Leaves 5-10 em;

foaficts 5-8 pairs, 2-3 x 0-6-1 em, densely pubescent below, much less so ahove,

unequal sided, base oblique, tip rounded, acute, mucronate; petiole 1 em with

caducous mucro; petiolules 1 mm; glands 1 mm, conical, between must pairs

ol leaflets; stipules 4-5 mm, linear-acute, caducous. Inflorescenee Of terminal

and wxillary corymbose racemes 3-5 cm, 3-5 flowered. Bracts 3 mm, obovate,

acute, caducons; bracteoles 2 inm, subulate caducous; pedicel 1-1-2 em. Calyx

unequal 2 guter lobes smaller, 7 mm, mhlony elliptic denisaty pubescent, the 3

inner lobes longer 10 mm, obovate orbicular almost glabrous. Corolla unequal,

the upper petals orbicular obovate 1-3 x I-2 cm, the lower narrower 1-3 x 1 cr,

bright deep yellow, very shortly clawed. Stamens 10, the upper 3 sterile 2 mm

long, ou filaments 2 mm long, 4 lateral anthers + mm on filaments 2mm, 3 lower

anthers 6 mm, curved, on Fiaments Sim. Ovary 10 mm, on a short stipe 2

mm, which is laterally adnate to the disk, densely woolly tomentose laterally,

nearly glabrous along the upper and lower sutures; style 2-3 mm, glabrous:

stigma punctiform; ovules 40-50. Pod 8-14 x 1 cm, somewhat compresseut,

pubescent, annulate with swollen margins, septute. Seeds 5 mm, olive grecn,

compressed, pointed at the radicle,

Nole: Thix species is native to tropical America and is grown in Australia as q garden

slirub. 1t has become raturalised in Queensland and New South Wales. Tt was also estab—

lished over an acre of land near Portland in Victoria, but developmental work in the last

decade has eradicated this colony (R. T. M. Pescoté, private communication). Hewever,

this indicates that the species’ potential for ivasiun and establishment uay be greater than

at present indicated,

Selected Speecimens—

QUEENSLAND; Piler. May, 191], Pittsworth; BAL

New Souta Wares: Av Boyd. 20.vii1051, Corunna (shrib 8-10 feet in rain forest

gullies); NSW. A. Vloyd, B.iv.1b52, Corona Lake (rain forest shrub); NSW, Vet. Oicer

15.1.1935, Bega; NSW. Anon, —, Bhie Mountains (may be garden escape); NSW.

Vicrouta: J. W.. Audas, 15.x.1916, Batten Hill, Portland (garden esenpe); MTET.,

9, *Cassia occidentalis Linn., (1753)377.

Colladon, Dele) 107. De Candolle, (1$25)497, Vogel, (1837)21, Bentham,

(1871)532. Bailey, (1888B)18.. ‘Maiden, (1897)4. Bailey, (1900)456.

Gailey & White, (1916)40, Domin, (1926)791, De Wit, (1953)256. Ven-

katesh, (1957)253. Webb, (1948)80,

bh D. E, SYMON

Common Name: Cottee Senna, Ant Bush.

Type Locality: Jamaica.

Type Specimen: Holotype in LINN (aot seen) photo in AD.

Description: An annual or short-lived shrub 1-2 m, very sparsely pubescent

ardl mostly glabrous at maturity. Leaflets 3-7 x 2-3 em in 3-5 accrescent pairs,

ovate-elliphie, acuminate, aristate, dull, glabrous or with few sparse hairs towards

the base below, somewhat unequal sided, the base cuneate-rounded, the margin

almost always ciliolate; petiole 3-5 cm, grooved aboye, glabrous or sparsely

pubescent about the pulvinous with curved hairs, and within the groove; Jeaf

rhachis similar, 3-10 cm long, terminated by a short, subulate, caducous muero;

etiolules 2 mm, distinct, stout, generally puhescent above with short curved

hairs; gland 1-2 mm, large, dark, globular or conical at the junction of the

petiole and the pulvinous; stipules 5-10 x 1-2 mm, linear-subulate, soon fost,

Inflorescence a very short raceme of 2-4 flowers in a terminal panicle with the

leaves reduced and indicated by ylands or in the upper leaf axils. Peduncle

short, rarely 5 mm long; pedicels about 10 mm, sparsely pubescent; bracts

10 x 2-3 mm, linear-acuminate. Sepals unequal, the outer smaller, 5 mm long,

ovate, the inner Jarger, 5-10 x 3-5 mm, obovate, glabrons; petals 10-15 x 7 mm

obovate, almost equal, offen drying whitish with dark veins; stamens 10, only

6 apparently fertile, the wpper 3 very reduced and sterile, the anther remains

about 1-1-5 mm on filaments 2-3 mm Jong, 4 lateral stamens fertile 5 mm lone

an filaments 2-3 mm, the lowest anther very reduced, 2 mm long on a filament

4-5 mm, the remaining two anthers the largest 5-6 mm long, stout, curved, an

filaments 5-7 mm long; ovary about 1 cm, sparsely pubescent; style 4-5 mm:

stigma lateral. Pod 10-12:5 x 0*8-1 em somewhat Hattened, with transverse

partitions, the margins pale and sides darker, straight or slightly curved, 40-55

seeds, Seeds 5 x 3mm, obovate, dull grey brown, transverse, thick flattish.

Distribution: Map 9.

Note: This species is believed to he indigenons to tropical America. but is now widely

spread ay w pan-tropic weed. In Australia it was first recorded from the Endeavour River

district in Queensland jn 16888 It has been confused with Cassia plunitiiculu but the very

short peduncle of C. occidentalis appears to be jt reliable character by which to separate them.

Selected Specimens—

Western Ausorarta: A. J. Ewart, Ap). 1927. Liperinga, Fitzroy River; PERTH.

Nontnenn Tenrirory; R, L. Specht 1200, 17.x.1948, Ovnpelli; K, NSW. AD BRI,

CANB, F, W. Hely 118, 1948, Adelaide River flats, CANB. (C. Chippendale. 18,v.1959.

Fogg Dam_area, 40m. SE Darwin; NT, ADW, NSW. CANB. N. ‘Tl. Burbidge 3045, 6,iv.1956.

lm, &, of Katherine; CANB.

Qurenstann: C. T. White 8650, 6.11.1933, Brisbane River; BRI, NSW. HI. A. Lonz-

niin, 1912. Bower Park, near Brishane; BRI, K, 1, B. Millar. 1891. Walsh; BRI. I, TL

Kleinsehmidt 75, 31.v.1950. Burdekin Delta area; CANB,

WU), °Cassia hirsuta L, 1(1753)378.

De Wit, (1955)250.

Holotype: Not seen.

Type Locality: Tropical America,

A shrub, hirsute on most parts with pale hairs. the plant is reported te

he fvetid (De Wit), stem and twigs yrooved at least when ury.

Leaves 10-15 cm long of 4-4 pairs of acereseent leaficts, the lower lahets

often not in pairs.

Leaflets variable in size and shape, the lower ones ovate, acute or acumm-

ate 1-3.x -5-2 em, their bases rounded, the upper ones 4-7 x 2-3 cm, ovate lanceo-

THE CENUS CASSIA L, CAESALPINIACEAE IN AUSTRALIA 8H

late to obovate, acuminate, their bases rounded to cuneate; petiole stout 4 cm,

leaf rhachis similar 6-8 cm, terminated by a subulate mucro 2-3 mm, petiolules

distinct 2 mm, gland solitary, conieal, towards the base of the petiole; stipules

8-10 mm, linear subulate, caducous.

Inflorescence an axillary or terminal panicle at least 10 cm long (but few

examples seen), Pedicels 1 cm lengthening to 1-5-2 cm and thickening in fruit;

calyx lobes unequal, the outer about 5 mm long, oval, the inner to 10 mm, obo-

vate, almost glabrous; corolla 12-15 x 7-8 mm, obovate, the claw | mm; stamens

10 variously modified the upper three sterile and very reduced the filaments

about 2 mm and the anthers 1 mm, the six lateral stamens fertile, four on fila-

ments 1-2 mm with the anther 5 mm, the Jower pair on filaments 5 mm with

anthers 7 mm, firm, curved, tapering upwards, the lowest filament 3 mm with

a sterile anther 3 mm long. Ovary 1 cm, densely conspicuously hirsute with

pale hairs; style short, 1 mm, glabrous, stigma almost literal surrounded! by a

ting of minute hairs; ovules numerous, 50-100,

Pod 10x 0-6 em, slightly curved, slightly fattened, septate with membranous

partitions, seeds yery numerons. Sceds dark olive grcen, compressed, almast

circular, 2-3 mm in diameter, slightly pointed at the hilum.

Note; This weedy Cassia is a native of tropical America and is now widely spread in

tropical areas of the world. It has only recently been collected in Queensland.

Distribution: J. S. Gould. 26.v.1959, spontaneous in garden at Koma; BRI. E, Volck,

AFO/2744. July, 1960, Forestry Reserve, Danhulla; BRI.

11. Cassia barclayana var. barclayana Sweet, (1528) t. 32.

Vogel, (1837)45, Mueller, (1863A)14.

Common Names: Pepper Leaf Senna, Yellow Pea, Senna,

Type Locality: “From the collection of Robert Barclay Esq. of Bury-Hill

and we are informed by Mr. D. Cameron that it was raised from seed from New

Holland in 1824.”

Type Specimen: No specimen has been fomnd, and the plate, indicated

above, must represent the type.

Synonyms:

1, C, lancifelia Colla, (1631B)281.

Type Locality: “Grown from seed sent by Schultes collected in New Iolland

with that of C. burrenfieldit and C. sehultesii.”

Holotype: TO.

2. C. schinifolia A. De Candolle, (1836 )299,

_ Type Locality; Of uncertain origin, the seed came to Geneva from Mont-

pellier.

Type Specimen: Not seen.

3. C, sophera var, schinifolia (DC) Bentham, (1864)283, Maiden, (1895)

158, 241, 243. Maiden, (1897)4. Sulman, (1914)32. White, (1919)306.

White, (1935)419. Hurst, (1942150. Webb, (1948)80.

4. C. sopherm var. barelayana (Sweet) Domin, (1926)792.

5. C, sophera var, clavigera Domin, (1926)792.

Type Locality: Queensland, A, Dietrich.

Holotype: PR No, 527598,

6. C. occidentalis var, schinifolia (DC) De Wit, (1955)258,

yO D. E. SYMON

Description: An erect herbaceous perennial or sub shinb 0-5-1 m the younger

stems striate with purplish brown markings. Leaves 10 em, glabrous (except

in the variety pubescens); leaflets 24-5 x 0-7-1 em, lanceolate or lunceolate-

oblong slightly unequal sided and with an unequal base, dull green above and

lighter green below, 4-6(7) pairs; petiole 1-5-3 cm, grooved above; rhachis

yrooved above and produced into a caducous mucry [ mm long; petioluile 2

mm: gland variable usually globular, dark sessile and solitary, towards the base

at the petiole, hut sometimes more slender conical and almost stipitate; stipules

2-3 mm, ouarrow triangular acuminate, deflexed, caducons. Inflorescence a

condensed, sub-rmbellate, axillary raceme, with 3-5 flowers from the upper

axils. Peduncle 1-5-3 cm; pedicels 1-5-2 cm, grooved above and both lengthen-

ing slightly in fruit, bracteoles 5 x 1 mm lanceolate, acunsinate, early caducous;

sepals 3-5 mm, unequal, oval-ovate, yellowish green; petals 10 x 9 mm, obovate-

oval, very shortly clawed, bright yellow; stamens 10, 6 fertile, the upper 3

sterile and very reduced, the anther and filament cach ahout 1 mm long, the

four lateral stamens fertile, their anthers 3 mm, light coloured, the flaments

2mm, the 3 lowest stamens more prominent, the lowest one sterile, the anther

1 inm and filament 2-3 mm, the two lateral stamens fertile, anthers 3 mm,

darker coloured, the filaments 2 mm; ovary 3 mm, green, glabrous; style 1-2 mn,

stigma terminal and surrounded by a crown of minute hairs, ovules about 30.

Pod 4 x 0-7 cm cylindrical, slightly curved, brown with paler sutures, vlabrous,

dehiscent but not elastically, partilions papery. Seeds 4 min, thick flattish,

orbictlar, minutely roughened and with smooth, oval, lateral patches:

Distribution: Map 5,

Note: Cassia barcluyana has proven: weedy in the central western wheat Uistricts of

New Seuth Wales and in south-western Qneensland isinly on pasture and cereal Jands,

The plant may form large perennial clumps up to 10 feet across. It is apparently not

particularly palatable or poisonous, but like same other species of Cassia is a powerful

purgative,

Although closely related to OC. planitiicala (C.. sophera of most Australian authors} the

tumiber of differences. leaflet shape, size. and umber. glands, and pod size suggest that

specite status is Warranted. T gin cunvinced that this laxon is native to Australia and is

not of South American origin (:t least recently) ay sugested hy De Wit, Tt wo oveurs in

New Guinean and in Malaysia,

Iw K. Doin (1926 )236 the name Casyie sephera var, australis is attributed in synonymy

to Bentham, (1864)283, and to various publications. by Fo M. Bailey, but this is apparently

in error, and it does not appear to have been publishert.

Selected Specimens—

QuerNsoANp: C. ‘l. White, Apk. (909, Homa; BRL §. 1... Everitt aad Webb 1209.

20.x1,1946. near Westbrook; BRL K. CANB. CG. EB, Hubbard 537], 30.x7.1930. between

Teviotville and Anthony. BRI, K. M. Lazarides, 27.1954. 43 m. SSW. of Mt, Garnet ‘Cown:

CANB, BRI, MET, P, AD.

New Sourte Warns: E. J, McBarrow, 20.1.1949. Culcairn Tlwy. enclosure; NSW) Dr.

Leichhardt, 22.xii.1846. Bokkura Creek; NSW. E, Betche, Meb., 1879, Gunnedah; NSW,

C, 'T, White. 12.41.1944, Unumpar near Mt. Lindesay; BRI.

lu, Cassia barclayana Sweet var, pubescens (Benth.) Symon nov, camb,

White, (1941 )247,

Common Name: Yellow Pea, Arsenic Bush,

Basiunym: Cassia sophera vai. pubescens Bentham, (1864)283.

Type Locality; (1) Broad Seund, Queensland, collected by R, Brown, (2)

Bread Sound, collected by F. M. Bowman. (3) Ottleys Station, collected by L.

Leichhardt. (4) Parramatta, collected by W. Wools.

Syntypes: (1) BM, K, KE, P, NSW, MEL. (2) MEL, (3) Probably BP, bat

specimen not seen, (4) MEL.

THR GENUS CASSIA L. CAESALPINIACEAE IN AUSTHALIA ‘1

Description; An erect herbaceous perennial or subshrubh 0-5-1 m, stems

somewhat ribbed, tomentose with appressed curved hairs. Leaves Mh em,

leaflets 2-0-4°5 x 0-6-1'3 em, 3-5-(6) pairs, lanceolate-elliptic, very slightly un-

equal sided and with an unequal base, green above, duller below, sparsely

pubescent especially on the leaf edge and main vein helow; petiole 1-3-2 cm,

srooved above, sparsely appressed pubescent; rhachis grooved uboye and pro-

duced into a subwate mucro 1-2 mm; potiolules 1-2 mm, pubescent; gland 1 mm,

conical, solitary towards the base of the petiole; stipules 2-3 mmm narrow

triangular aeuminate, Inflorescence a condensed, sub-umbellate, axillary raceme

with 3-5 flowers. Peduncle 1-3-5 em; pedicel 1 ern, both pubescent and becom-

ing stouter in trait; bracteoles not seen; sepals 3-7 mm unequal, oval-cbovate;

petals 8-9 x 5-8 mm, obovate, vellow, often drying whitish; stamens 10, 6 fertile,

the upper 3 sterile and very reduced, the anther and filament each about 1 mm

long, the two lateral stamens on each side fertile, 3 mm long, on filaments 1 myn,

the 3 lowest stamens on longer filaments 3 mm, two anthers fertile 3-4 mm

Jong, the lowes! sterile and much smaller. Ovary 7 mm, densely appressed

pubescent, style 2mm; stigma oblique. Pod 7 x 0:7 em laterally flattened when

young, with pale sutures, becoming almost cylindrical with maturity, slightly

curved, Pubescent, :

Distribution; Map 5,

Note: This taxon differs from C. barclayana im being shortly pubescent jn all tty party

and in ils dlands usually being conical rather than squut. Lt is also mmwe restricted in its

distribution,

Selected Specimens—

Qunensianns R. Brown. Broad Sound, 1902; NSW, PB. BM, Ko MEL. GC. ‘LT. While.

4.161916, Goodna, near Brisbane, NSW, BRI, M. Taizoriclsy 4211, 27.47.1954, 43 m. SSW.

of Mt. Carnet township; CANB,

New Sourn Warnes: H. J. Rumsey, Jon., 1930, Shoalhaven; NSW, J, J, Fletcher,

41.1888, Nepean River; NSW. M. V. O'Reilly, 36.v.1939, near Scone: NSW. A. Cunniny-

hain. Apl. 1824. Argyla; K.

12. Cassia planitiicola Domin, (1926)237.

Common Name: Yellow Pea, Arsenic Bush.

Type Locality: Locis graminosis in collibus. Holling Downs inter, opp,

IIughenden ct Cloncurry, Queensland, K. Domin 5027,

Holotype; PR. No, 527594.

Synonyms: Cassia sophera auct. Aust. non L.

Colladon, (J816)90. De Candolle, (1825)492, Vogel, (1837)20. Ben-

tham, (1871)532. Bailey, (1883)125. Tate, (1890)71. Moore & Betohe,

(1893)160, Bailey, (1900)457. Bailey, (1906)45, wart & Davies, (1917)

135. Ilack, (19244)292. Seddon & Carne, (1926)46, White, (1937) 223

and (1940)241. Hurst, (1942)150. Black, (1948)430. Whittet, (1956)

306, Beadle, Evans & Carolin, (1963)2:33.

Deseription: A shrub -1-2 m, herbaceous or short lived. Stems grooved,

wlahrous, sometimes pruinose, Leaves 5-15 cm; leaflets 4-6-(7) pairs, accresccnt,

the smaller leaHets 1-5 x 0-8 em, and the larger ques 4-6 x ]+2-2 om, ovate, or

ovute-lanceolate, obtuse or acute, young leaves with a few course seattered

hairs often glabrous when mature, or remaining sparsely ciliate, green above

yaler below, unequal based, slightly uncqual sided; petiolules 1-2 mm; petivle

2-4 em with a large, squat, dark gland towards the base, occasionally glands

also peenr between the pairs of leaflets, where there are usually clusters of

vlanduliferous hairs, rhachis terminated by a small, blunt macro 1 mm. Stipules

o2 D. E, SYMON

1-2 mm relatively broad, ovate, acute, caducons. Inflorescence an axillary ar

terminal, corymbose raceme, with 2-4 flowers. Bracts 1-2 mm oblong, acute,

caducons; bractecles 1-2 mm, similar, Peduncles 1-3 cm, lengthening in fruit,

pedicels 1 cm. Sepals unequal, 4-8 mm, rounded. Petals 8-10 mm, obovute-

oval, unequal, one often obcordate, very shortly clawed, yellow or pale yellow

sometimes drying whitish. Stamens 10: the 3. upper ones sterile, 2-4 mm long,

4 lateral ones fertile, the anthers 3 mm on filaments 1-2 mm, the 3 lower ones

6n dilaments 3-5 mm, the anthers 3-3 mm long, the lowest stamen usually greatly

recueed and sterile. Ovary 5-10 mm, appressed pubescent, style 3 mm recurved

and slightly swollen towards the stigma. Pod 6-8 x 1 cm, dattish when young

almost cylindrical when mature, straight or curved, with a few sparse hairs or

elabrons, the suturcs pale and the walls of the pod darker in colour, purtitiuns

thin and papery, stipe 2-4 mm. Seeds 4 x 3 mm, flattish but irregularly thick-

ened, cuneate-obovate, pointed at the hilum, dull oliye-brown.

Distribution: Map 5.

Note: This species which is widely distributed in inland Australia is closely related

to C, sophera L., C. baralayana Sweet (C. schinifolia ADC) and to C. occidentalis 1... ane

all fanr have been much confused,

Selected Specimens—

Westraw Ausrratia; ©, A. Gardner 10,031. 14.v.1951, Flats of the Fitzroy River:

PERTH. N. T, Burbidge 5104, 17.iv.1956, Entrance gap to Ord River, Kimberley; CANE,

VL. Mill 4, 16.viii1952, South Hermite, Montebello, BM, K. A. Cunningham. 1820

Mottague Sound; BM.

Nowrueun Tenncroey: TL A, Perry 2253. 95,vi.1949, near Wave Ifill Police Stu. K. MEL.

CANB. BRI, AD. Kempe 1, 1880, Finke Biver: MEL. G, Chippendale, 43i,1955, @en

Leln, Finke River Valley; NSW, NT, ADW, CANB. 5, T. Blake 17841, 18.1947, between

Rrovett® and Rockhampton Downs; BRI, CANB.

Qupenstanp: C. KB. Uubbard and C. Winders. 7292, 6.i1937, Nonda. between Huyh-

enden and Cloncurry; K. BR. A. Perry 733, 4.v.58.. 56 m, SSE, oF Camaoweal; CANB. BRI,

K. W. McGillivray, 27.vii,1988, Gregory River, near Gregory Downs; BRI, ADW. F, Sul-

own, Aug, 1913. on the banks of the Flinders River; NSW.

Sourn Ausrmauia: FE. RK. Lord. 11.iv.1950, Everard Ranges; MEL, AD. R. Helms,

5.4i.1691, Mt. Ibillie. Everard Ranges: AD. D, Fi. Symon, 27.y.1953, Wantapilla Swianip;

ADW. Mrs. French. 26,iv.1939, Pernalty Station via Pt. Augusta; ADW,

13. *Cassia tora 1.., (1753)376,

Colladon, (1816)96. De Candolle, (1825)493, Yogel, (1837)23. DBen-

tham, (1871}535, White, (1917)269. De Wit, (1955)276. Brenan, (19591

248. Irwiri & Turner, (1960)315.

Cammon Name: Voetid Cassia, Stinking Cassia.

Type Locality: Ceylon.

Lectotype: BM, Hermam Herbarium No. 152, not seen by me, fur disers-

sion of typification see Brenan, above.

Description: A shrub or subshrah 0+5-1 m. Stems light coloured, terete, with

seatiered appressed pubescence when young, becoming glabrous, Leaflets 2-3

pairs, increasing, the larger 2-4 x 1-2 em obovate, obtuse, nearly equal sided,

buse oblique, cuneate, finely pubescent ur becoming glabrous, minutelw

mucronate; petiole 2-3 em, greoved above, sparsely pubescent, produced inta a

short subulate caducous mucro; glands 2 mm, slender, cylindric, between the

two lower pairs of leaflets; petiolules 1-2 mm; stipules 5-10 mm, linear, acute,

sumewhat falcate, shortly persistent. Inforesvence a short raceme of 1-2 vellow

Howers from the upper leaf axils, Pedanele very short 1-2 mm; bracts 2-3 mm

linear; pedivels 410 mm; sepals 5 mm narrowly ovate, slightly pubescent; petals

3-8 mm, unequal, narrowly ovate, stamens 7 fertile, 3 upper very reduced

THE GENUS CASSIA f,. CAESALPINIACEAE IN AUSTRALIA Es]

sometimes absent, the 4 lateral anthers 1-5-2 mm long on Iilaments 2 mm long,

the 3 lower slighth larger their summits rounded; ovary 5-7 mm, curved,

ribbed, densely appressod ubescent, style glabrous, stigma obliquely terminal

and truncate, Fruiting pesinele 0'8-1-5 em; pod 10-15 x 0:-40-6 cm, turcte

somewhat tetragonous with pruminent sutural ridges, tardily dehiscent but not

elastically so, 20-30 seeded. Seeds 5 mm, rhomboidal, glossy, their areoles

15-2 mm and almost as wide as the seed,

Distritution; Map 4,

Note: Cassia tura is mdigenous to Asia and does appear ta be an introduction jo Aus-

tralia. Bentham, (1871)535, reeords it for Australia, but the earliest collection I have suen

is that of M. W, Holtze, in 1888, from Pt. Darwin, and there is no indication whether this

is wullivatedl or spontaneous, The species does not appear to have hecome established in

Queensland until about 1917-18, when ©, T. White, (1917)269, reports its escape from

green manure trial plots.

Selected Spevimnens—

Nonatnery Territory: M, W. Holize. 1845. Pt. Darwin; MEL.

Queenszanp: G. H. Ludbrook, July, 1817, Innisfail; BRI. G. H. Ludbrook, Jan., 1918,

Johnstone River; BRI, S, L, Everist 5159, 29,v,1952, East Palmerston, 20 m, SE. of Millaa

Millaa: CANB. BRL, ADW. A. Farquehar, July, 1960, Ingham at Victoria Mill; BRI,

14. *Cassia obtusilolia L., (1753)377.

De Wit, (1955)254, Brenan, (1958)248. [Irwin & Turner, (1960)515.

Type Locality; West Indies (see Brena (1958)248 tor discussion of typi-

fication ).

Type Specimen; OXF, (wot seen),

Deseription; A herb or small shrub about 1 m high (two of the three speci-

mens available ure noted as 2 ft, high, but De Wit reports the species to 2 m

younger parts and leaves below, quite densely pubescent with pale, appressed,

unequal hairs, glabrescent with age. Leaves 5-10 em mug. Leaflets in 3

acerescent pairs, obovate, obtuse, the base slightly unequal, and somewhat

cuneate, the midnerve produced juto a minute mucro 05.1 mm; dull and pube-

scent below with appressed hairs, glabrous and greener above; the margins

paler and almost ciliate with coarser hairs; the lower leatlets 13 x 0-5-2 cm,

the upper 3-6 x 1-5-3 cm; petiole 1-5-2-5 cm, grooved above; leaf rhachis

similar, produced into a caducougs mucro 1-2 mm; gland 2 mim, cylindrical,

between the lower pair of leaflets only; petiolules 1-2 mm, distinct; stipules

10.15.x L-1°5 mm, linear, long acute, slightly narrowed towards the base, faleate,

subpersistent, Inflorescence a short, few tew Howered raceme from the upper

leal axils. Flowering and frniting peduncle quite short, 2 mm = comroaly

bearing 2 flowers, bracts similar to the stipules but smaller, about 5 mm long;

pedicels 10-12 mm slender; sepals unequal, oval to narrow ovate, the ouler

34 mm long, the inner 6-7 mm lon, sparsely hairy about the margins; corolla

unequal, the standard 7 x 7 mm, obovate emarginate, the lower petals obovate

to narrow oval, 7-10 mm long; claw 1 som, stamens unequal, 7 fertile, the upper

3 reduced to staminodes 1-2 nm long, the 4 latcral stamens with anthers, 3 nin

Jony on filaments 2-3 mm long (1 of these 4 is sometimes smaller than the rest),

the lower 3 stamens longer, the anthers 3-4 mm long, on filaments 2-3 min long;

the anthers stout, firm, contracted at the summit to a blunt apex; ovary about

1) mm, recurved, grooved, laterally pubescent; the style 2-3 mm glabrous,

enlarging towards the obliquely terminal stigma. Pod about 15 x 0:5 em, sub-

tetragonous, curved, glabrous, tardily dehiscent but not elastically so, transverse

septs papery and oblique, at least 30 seceded; seeds 3-5 mm lony, rhamboidal,

uhossy, dark olive green, longitudinal. '

O4 D. E. SYMON

Distribution: Map 4,

Note: These recent collections, all in the Northern Territory, represent a new intro-

duction ta Australia. The species is probably native to frepical America, and is closely

related to the Old World species C. tora, lt has become a pantropic weed. particularly im

America and Africa, and now occurs in Malaysia according to De Wit and Brenan, bnt js

generally rare or absent in Polynesia,

Selected Specimens—

Nowraekn Terrrrory: C. 8. Robinsan 1060, 8.vi.1964. Eust Point. Darwin; NT. ADW,

1D. J. Nelson 1147, 13, vi.1964. Lee Point. 13 m. N. Darwin: NT, ADW, P, Walter, 14;iv,1962,

Oolloo: NT, G. Chippendale, 18.11.1961, 7.6 m. ENE. of Batchelor; NT. ADW.

15. Cassia timoriensis De Candolle, (1825)499.

Vogel, (1837)35. Bentham, (1871)550, De Wit, (1955)273.

Type Locality: Tn the island of Timor.

Holotype: Not seen.

Synonym: Cassia laxiflora Bentham, (1864)283.

Bentham, (1871)3550. Ewart & Davies, (1917)135.

Type Locality: Ammhem North Bay (Melville Bay), Northern Territory,

14.37.1803, R. Grown.

Holotype: BM, Isotypes K, MEL, BRI, NSW, P, E.

Description: An erect or straggly shrub, stems with two raised decurrent

lines below the insertion of the leaves, pubescent with appressed golden hairs.

Leaves 4-10 cm; Jeaflets 1*9-3-3 x 0-5-1/2 cm, 15-19 pairs narrow oblong, shortly

mucronate, shortly petiolulate 1 mm, pubescent with appressed or erect, curved,

golden hairs; glands absent; stipules 1-2 mm, subulate, caducous. Inflorescence

in racemes 2-9 em in the upper axils and in a loose pyramidal terminal panicle

20 em long. Bracts small; pedicels 1-5 em; sepals 6-7 mm, oval, obtuse, unequal,

the outer smaller and narrower, corolla 7-10 mm, obovate, chiw 1 mm; stamens

10, the lower 7 fertile and the upper 3 greatly rednced and sterile, fertile anthers

variable, 4-5 mm long, a lower one sometimes larger than the others: flaments

mostly very short, with 1 or 2 sometimes longer; ovary 5-7 glabrous; style 2-3

mm, Pod 7-5-9 x 0-9-1-2 cm, stipitute, flat, straight, shiny rich dark brown; seeds

7 mm, dattish, obovate, about 10-20,

Distribution: Map 2,

Note; This species is not common in Northern Australia and is poorly represented in

Australian Herbaria. The specimens from inland areas are smaller than the coastal ones.

The specits is widely distributed in S.E, Asia,

Selected Specimens—

Western Avgrnauaa: ©. A, Gardner 7216, 19.1944. Benn River (trib. af the Ord RF.

for NW. W.A.); PERTH. KR. A. Perry 2668. 2.viii 49, 14 in. SW. of Argyle Downs Stn.; K,

NT, BRI, NSW, CANB,

Nonrnens Treanitony: R. Brown 4255. 147.1803, Arnhem N. Bay; BM, K, HE, K, Brown.

LiiJ803, Arnhem NS. Bay; K.P. R, Brown, 1802-5, Arnhem N. Bay; MEL. BRI, NSW.

Qurrnsiann; R. A. Perry 1435, 1111948. 30 im, SH. Biversleigh Sui; K. N'l. BRI,

CANB, A, De Lestang, Dec,, 1938, Camooweal; BIT. TR, A, Perry 1414, 9.71948, 12 m. T..

of Lawn Hill Stn.; CAND.

16, *Cassia alata L., (1753)378.

Colladon, (1816)91, De Candolle, (1825)492, Vogel, (1837)21. Bentham,

(1871)550, Builey, (1893). Bailey, (1900)457. Hailey, (1908)44. Webb,

(1948)79. De Wit, (1955)231.

Common Name: Seven Golden Candlesticks, Ringworm shrub.

THR GENUS CASSIA L, CARSALPINIAGCBAE IN AUSTRALIA a)

Type Specimen: Holotype in LINN, No, 528.26 (not seen) photo in AD.

Description: A stout erect shrub or small ice, stems densely minutely

pubesvent and retaining the stiff stipules, Leaves to 60 cm, and consisting of

1120) accreseent pairs of leaflets; petiole short, 1-1-5 cm to the first pair of

caducous leaflets (not seen); rhachis stout, striate when dry, and with two

parallel ridges on the upper side, terminated by a triangular acuminate mucro

3-6 mm; the ridges are connected by a transverse ridge between the petistules;

leaflets 6-12.x 4-6 em, oblong, oblong-obovate, unequal sided, the top rounded

ar obtuse, or cmarginate on the lower Toatleta, the base tfmeate, sparsely minutely

pubescent, bright green above, paler below, midrib and lateral yes prominent

helow,; stipules 5-6 mm, auriculate-deltoid, acuminate, rigid, persistent, re-

curved, minutely pubescent. InHoreseenee, an erect, axillary raceme 30 to 60

em long, Peduncle 9-15 cm, stout, mimitely pubescent; bracts 1:5-2-5 x 1-2

em, ovate-acutc, imbricate and enveloping the buds, deciduous at anthesis,

densely minutely pubescent; sepals 1-2 x 0-5-1 em, unequal, oblong-oval, the

outer ones minutely pubescent; petals 1-5-2 cm, obovate-oval, golden yellow,

claw 2-3 mm; authers 10, very unequal, the lowest 4 mm long on a filament

6-7 mm long, the lower lateral pair the largest, 10-12 mm long, swollen, curved,

the filaments 2 mm long, the two mid-lateral pairs similar to the lowest anther

but on filaments 3 mm long, the uppermost 3 filaments and anthers greatly

reduced, intertile; ovary 1-5 cm, sessile, slendcr, curved, densely minutely

pubescent, style 4-5 mm, stigma narrow, ovules about 60-70. Pod 15 cm, stiff,

straight, minutely pubescent or glabrous with a prominent wing 5 mm high

along each valve. Seed not seen, but described by De Wit as flattened + quad-

rangular, 1 x 0-8 cm, two sides lengthened into a triangular point towards the

hilum.

Distribution; Map 4.

Note; 'Vhis species is untive to tropical Sonth Americn and it is now both weelly’ Ani]

widely grown as un ornamental shrub im the teopies. Tt berame established near Cainus in

Queensland betore 1893, but it is not clear whether the records from Darwin and Hawen

refer to cultivated ov naturalised plants

Selected. Specimens—

QuEENSLAND: S. Li Everist 5091, 17.1952. About 4 m. N. of Babinda, Cook distyict,

Q. Damp ditch along roadside, BRI, CANB, L. J. Webb 625. 4.41948, North of Babinda

oi Cairns Road, in swampy ground on the edge of road in rain forest; CANB, I. Cowley.

{tir SH, Kamerunga (near Cuims); BRI, E, Fitzalan. 15.vii.1879, Willow Vale, Rowen;

} 5.

NogTHern Trerniroxv: H, E, Hill 120. Der., 1939, Darwin; BRT. Dr. Cilenta, Sepl.,

1823. Darwin; AD,

17. *Cassia didymobotrya Fresenius, (183958.

Bentham, (1871)551. Webb, (1948)79. De Wit, (1955)24!. Beadle, Evans

& Carolin, (1963)233.

Type Specimen: Not seen.

Description: A large spreading shrub 2-3 m tall, branches, peduncles and

leaves pubescent, hecoming glabrous, smelling unpleasantly, Leaves 15-30 em.

leafléls 7-15 pairs, elliptic-oblong to obovate-oblong, 2-5-6 x 1-2-3 em al first

sparsely pubescent, later almost glabrous, remaining pubescent on the main

veins below, the top rounded and with a mucro 1-2 mm, base oblique, unequal

sided. petiolule 1 mm, short, distinct; stipules L0-15 mm long, broad ovate,

apiculate, persistent, reflexed. Luflorescence an erect, spike-like raceme, 20-40

cm, from the upper Iraf axils, fowers tumerous anc shawy. Peduncle 5-1) om,

stout, pubescent, erect; bracts 15 x 10 mm, concave, ovate, apiculate, dark

46 D. E. SYMON

purplish-brawn, at first enclosing the buds, Init soon shed; pediccls 3 mm, erect

for 2-3 mm and then turning outwards, pubescent; calyx unequal, 10-15 mm

long oblong-obovate, minutely pubescent, dark in colour. sometimes shed

during anthesis; corolla showy, petals 1-5-2 x 1-1-5 cm, obovate, the veins

prominent; slipe 1-1-5 mm; stamens variously modified; the upper three re-

duced and sterile, the anthers 1-2 mm on filaments 1-2 mm, the four lateral

stamens fertile, the anthers 5 mm long on filaments 2-3 mm, the two lower

lateral stamens well developed, the anthers 1 cm Jong, firm, curved, on filaments

3-5 min, the lowest stamen reduced, the anther 5 mm. long on a filament 5 mm;

ovary 13 mm long, green, densely pubescent, the stipe 3 mm; style 1 cm, erect,

slender; stigma minute, terminal on the slichtly incurved tip of the style, ovules

about 14, Pod 7-10 x 2 cm, dat. pubescent along the sutures, blackish-hrown,

with marked transverse depressions between the seeds; stipe 5 mm, stylar

lip persisting, Seeds not seen.

Note: This species is native to tropical Africa and is wiclely grown as an ornamental

shrib In Anstralia, Te has beesme locally established in Queensland and New Seuth Wales.

Selected Specimens -

QuernsLanp: S. L. Everist, 1956, Banyah Saki near D’Agnilar. tn red loom, shrub & feet.

naturalised in pasture; BRI.

New Sours Waves: #. S, Parker, 30.iii.1964, near SW. Rocks; CANB. Beadle, Evans

and Carolin in Plants Sydney Distr. and Blue Mutos (1962)233, report this species estab-

lished there.

{8. Cassia magnifolia F. Mueller, (1859)166,

Bentham, (1864)283, Bentham, (1871)551. Mueller, (1876)9. Bailey,

(1883)125. Bailey, (1900)458,

Type Locality; Rocky ridges, upper Gilbert River, northern Queensland,

altitiide L000 ft. F. Mueller.

Holotype; K, 2 sheets.

Description: Erect, straggly shrub, 1-4 m, stems thick, spreading. Leaves

large, 1O-30 cm; leaflets 3-5 pairs, shortly petivlulate, the base oblique, ovate

or orbicular-ovate, emarginate, from 3 x 2 to 8:5 x.6°5 em, glabrous, coriaceous,

shiny, with prominent reticulate veining at least when dry; glands none; stipules

oblique, cordate acuminate, deciduous, Flowers numerous in long, erect, axil-

lary racemes, 35-40 cm, naked in the lower third, Pedicel ] cm, minutely hispid,

lengthening to 2 em in fruit; sepals 1 em, obovate, minutely hispid inside and

out: corolla 0-8-1 cm, obovate, with a claw 2 mm, yellow, the veins darker on

drying; stamens 10, 3 sterile, 2 mm long, on filaments 1 mm long, 7 fertile

consisting of 5, 4 mm long on filaments 1-3 mm, and 2, 10 mm long on filaments

2 mm, unequally bluntly sagittate; ovary 4 mm, glabrous or with a few lair

on the shorl stipe-like base, style curved 2 mm, ovules 7-15, Pod flat, stipitate.

dark? when mature, 8-9 x 1°5-1-8 om, broader at the distal end, the curve!

stvlat tip persisting for some time, 10-12 seeds. Seeds 7 x 5 mm, oblong obovate,

rough dull black,

Distribution: Map 4.

Note: Vhis strikingly large leaved Cassia has not been confused with any other Aus-

tralian Cassie. The disjunct distribution is of interest.

Selected Specimens—

Wesienn AustnAtta: M. Lazarides 6335, 14.vii.1959_ ld m. NNE. Margaret River St.,

NSW ADW, K, G. F. Barnett. Aug., 1936, between Wyndham and Turkey Creek, PERTH,

GA. Gardner 7168, 15,.~.1944. S, of Halls Greck. Albert Edward Range: PERTH, A, Forrest,

1870, latitude 17°50", longitude 128910" (neay Timer Sty, Ori River), METy

Noxwtnbay Teaarrony; A. TL. Blackman. July. 1906, Newcastle Ringe, BRL I. Mueller, - .

Newenstle Range; MEL.

THE GENUS CASSIA L. CAESALPINIACEAE IN AUSTRALIA a7

QvEENSLAND: R. A, Perry 3749, 6.¥ii.1953, 8 m, NE, Wyandotte Stn; MEL, BRI, NT,

CANB. K. W. Armit, 1876, Glen Dhu and Mt. Surprise; MEL, BRI. C. T. White 1355.

Feh., 1922, Bullock Creek; BRI, NSW. L. J, Brass 1780. Teb., 1928, between the Lynd

River and Bullock Greek; BRI,

19. Cassia venusta F. Mueller, (1859)165.

Bentham, (1864)284. Bentham, (1871)551. Bailey, (1883)126. Tate,

(1890)71, Bailey, (1900)458. Ewart & Davies, (1917)135, Domin, (1926)

792.

Type Locality: “In terra Amhem's land et circum sinum Carpentariae ad

ripas aridiores, rupes ct scopulas”, Northern Territory, F. Mueller,

Holotype: MEL, Isotype K.

Deseription: A shrub, 1-2 m, straggly with age, Stems ribbed, softly

pubescent. Leayes large 10-25 cm; leaflets recrescent, 6-15 pairs, oblong,

obliquely rounded at the base, mucronate, the basal and terminal leaflets 2:5 x

1-3 cm, the intermediate ones 4 x 1-9 em coriaceous; glands small between

inost pairs of leaflets. Stipulcs large, 18 mim, ovate-cordate, acuminate, persis-

tent. Flowers numerous on stiff, long, terminal and axillary racemes. Pecluncles

15-25 cm, rigid; pedicels 1 cm pubescent; bracts large, & mm, membrunons,

oval, imbricate towards the tip of the raceme, but fulling before flowering,

Sepals 10 mm, boat shaped, the inner larger, Corolla yellow, petals obovate,

emargmate, 10 x9 mm, Anthers 10, 3 sterile 2 mm long on filaments 2 mm, 7

fertile of which 5-6 are short 3mm on filaments 2 mm and 1-2 are much larger

9mm, sagittate at the base. Ovary 7 mm, villous; style 4 mm curved: ovules

about 9, Pod 4-5 x i-l-4 cm, flat, with transverse ridges above the seeds and 4

longitudinal ridge between the transverse ridyes, light brown. Seeds 3-7 mm

ohcordate, thick, dark, dull, .

Distribution: Map 3,

Nole, ‘Vhis species has rarely been confused with other Australian Cassis,

Selected Specimens—

Westean Austnaua: BR, A. Perry 2943, 10.vii.1953. Thompson Springs, 43 m. SE, nf

Kiuberley Res. Stn; AD, NSW, K, MEL, BRI, CANB. F. Mueller, Nichol Bay; #2) K MEIT..

Pn re i 123, 1818. Enderby Island; CGE, K. BM. P. Hooper. 3,viii.1963, Ord River

mar .

Norrseny Treanirorny: R. A. Perry 1682. 16,viil948. 40 m, E, of Creswell Stn.; K,

BRI, CANB. FE. Giles. Glen of Palms; MEL, G. Chippendale, 7,ii,1955. 13 m. S. of Harrow

Creek; NT, BRI. NSW. G. Chippendale, 11.iii.1959. 3.2 noi. E. of O.T, Downs T.S.; NL,

AD, ADW.

Queenstaxp; G. Trapnell 29. 4.vii1958, 5 m, E, of Wonarah; BRL J. McCallum,

Nov., 1930, Me. Isa: BRI. A, de Lestang 236. 18,i.1946. Adel’s Guin via Camounweul:

BRL. T.. J. Trass 205, Sept,, 1922. Settlement Creek; CANB.

20, Cassia notabilis F. Mueller, (1862)28.

Bentham, (1564)254, Bentham, (1871)551, Tate, (1890)71. Bailey (19UD)

458. Ewart & Davies, (1917)135. Domin, (1926 )792.

Type Locality: Between the Bonney River and Mt. Morphett, Northern ‘ler-

titary, J. McD. Stuart, March, 1562,

Holotype: MEL.

Description: A small shrub or short lived perennial, the whole plant hirsnte

eacept the corolla and pods; stems densely hirsute with erect hairs. Leaves

large 10-15 cm, paripinnate, villous, rhachis terminating in a mucro 5 mm,

leaflets @13 pairs 2-5 x 1 om, sessile, ovate-lanceolate, obliquely rounded at

the base, aristate, glantls small; stipules 12-15 mm, narrow cordate-acuminate,

98 b, kb. SYMON

deciduous. Flowers in crect terminal and axillary racemes. Fedunecle 10-15

em; pedicels +6 mm; bracts 10 mm, lanceolate-acuminate, deciduous; sepals

5-6 inm oblong, rounded; corolla 6 x 4 mm, obovate, yellow, the veins pro-

minent on drying; anthers 10, 3 sterile 1 mm long, on filaments 1 mm, 7 fertile,

5 smaller 2 mm Jong, 2 larger 3 mm long, all on filaments 2 mm, all bluntly

sagittate: ovary 3-6 mm with thickened margins, sparsely hirsute; style 3 mm,

curved; ovules about 7. Pod flat, 3-5-3-5 x 1-3 em, with raised blackish brown

ridges over the seeds, the edges of the pods paler. Seeds 4 mn, obcordate,

thick, wrinkled, with an angular ridge, dull, dark coloured. Chromosorne

No. n = 13, Barlow 290, Dupl. ADW 23824.

Distribution: Map 2,

Selected Specimens—

Wesrenn. Ausvdania: M. Luzarides 6463, 1.viii.1959. 8 m, N. of Liveringa Stu; NSW,

AD, CANB. W. V,. Fitzgerald, july. 1006, Pt, Hedlund; NSW, PERTH. 1. Giles, Apl.

1875, between Barrow and Rawlinson Range; MEL. BR, TMelms, 28-viii 1891, Mb Squires,

Burrow Ranges AD, NSW, K.

Nosruein Tesarvorvs CG. Chippendale. 1iti1055, 110m. NE. Arwadarwada LS.

NT, NSW, BRI. ADW. KK. E. Winkworth 506, 27.vii.l934, 24 my, SW. of Barrow Creek;

BR], CANB. E. Giles, Apl., 1873. Mt, Olga; MET, G, Chippendale, loi 1956, 15-16 an.

N. of Houkers Greek; NT, AD, ADW.

QOurrensLano: S. L. Everist 1605, 30.41,1938, Oban Stn,, 60 om. SW. of ML Isa; BRI.

R. A. Perry 4007, 29.viii.1953, 13 m. SSE. of Kajabbi Town; CANB. BRI. W, MeGilliveay,

Ang, 1928. between Boulia and Dajarra; BRT, ADW, 4, A. Barlow 299, LL viii 1961, LOO mi.

S. af Normanton on road to Julia Creek; ADW.

21. Cassia pleurocarpa var. pleurocarpa, F. Mueller, (1859)223,

Rentham, (1861)284. Bentham, (1871)552. Bailey, (1883)126. ‘Tate,

(1890)71. Moore & Betche, (1893)160. Bailey, (1900)458. Dicls & Pritzs4,

(1904)274. Black, (1924)293. Ising, (1935)245, Black, (1948)430. Webb,

(1948 )50. Gardner & Bennetts, (1956)39. Chippendale, (1963)31,

Common Names: Native Senna, Stripe Pod Cassia, Fire Bush.

Type Locality: In thickets towards the mouth of the River Murchisun,

Western Australia, A. Oldfield.

Holotype: MEL, Isotype KE; PERTH.

Description: A shinb, 1-3 m, sometimes suckering and forming colonies,

completely glabrous. Stems terete, often slightly glaucous. Leaves 7-15 om,

paripinnate with 5-9 pairs of well spaced leaflets, glandless: leaflets 2-5 x 06-12

cm, linear oblong, thick, often yellowish green, veins prominent when dry;

petiolules 1-2 mm, stipules 2-3 mm, subulate, deciduons. Flowers in racemes

7-15 em, terminal and from the upper leaf axils. Bracts 1 em, obovate, de-

ciduous; pedicels 0-7-1 em, Sepals 0+8 cm, narrow obovate, soon shed. Petals

(7-1 x 0647 em, unequal, obovate, cuneate, yellow, the veins prominent wheit

dry, Stamens 10,3 sterile 1-2 mm long, on laments 2 mm and 7 fertile of which

are 2-4 mm long and 2 are 9 mm long on filaments 1-2 mm. Ovary 5-7 mm,

stipitate; ovules about 11; stvlc 5 mm, slender, curved. Pod 4-5-5 x 1-1-6 em,

flat, with a raised longitudinal ridge along the cenlre of each side interrupted

between the seeds, Seeds 6 mm, thick, cuneate emarginate, with a thick but

shallow reticulation and a raised transverse line across each, corresponding to

the line On the pad. wall, dull, almost black. :

Distribution: Map 3.

Note: This species las been varely confysed with any other Australian species. It is

widely sproad over the drier parts of Australia, Two now varieties are described here.

The species has been suspected of being poisonous to stock, Tt is certainly purgative tn

min aud animals,

THE GENUS CASSTA L. CAESALPINIACEAE IN AUSTHALIA bs)

Selected Speciniens—

Western Austraria: R, Helms, 27.viii.1891, Mt, Squires, Barrow Range; NSW. K,

MEL, AD. R, Helms, 10,xii.1891, Camp 93, 45 m. from Knutsford; NSW, K. J. Forrest 71,

ra aa all Range: MEL. N. H. Speck 782, 10.ix.1957, 40 mm, E. of Meekatharra: AD,

NorTHERN Trenrrony: M. Lazarides, 22,viiiJ956. 13 m. N. of Aileron; CANB, BAI,

Nsw, AD. BR, A. Perry, 8.ix,1955. Hale River, Simpson Desert; CANB, BRI, NT, AD, NSW.

€. Chippendale, 9.ix.1959, 10 m. SE. Lilla Greek H.S.; NT, NSW. ADW, AD. &. Giles,

Ap! 1873, between Alberga and Mt, Olga; MEL.

Queenstann:; J, I. Boorman, Oct, 1912, Waverley Downs, Parnogo River; BRI §. T,

Everist 5631, Bonus Downs. 30 m. S. of MitcheH; BRI W. McGillivray, 26.vili192°3,

Charleville; BRI. T. R. N. Lothian 673, 29,viii.1960, 12 m, SE, of Arraburry HLS, 40 Kai,

E. of Cordillo SA/Q border; AD.

New Sout Wates: L, A, 5, Johnson 963, 3.vi.[955, Winnathee Stn, 60 m, W) ol

Milparinka; NSW. Dr. W, MeGilliyray, Aug., 1921, Fert Grey: NSW. BRL, ADW. J. LL

Boorman, Oct., 1917, Waverley Downs, Paroo River; P, NSW. C. T. White, — Sandhills,

NW, corner of N.S,W.: ADW.

Sourn AusTRALIA: IL Basedow 54 Oct, 1919. near Tooroowatchi waterhole between

Coopers Creck and Cordilla Downs; NSW, K. C. Sturt 22. 1844-1846. Gentral Australias

BM. D. E. Symon 1148, 10.xii.1960, 40 m. SH, of Kingoonya between Lake Everard and

Luke Gairdner; ADW. R. Helms, 11.vii.1891, Camp 19, far NW. of S.A.. SW. of Musgrave

Ranges; AD,

21a. Cassia pleurocarpa yar. angustifolia D, E, Symon var. nov,

A forma lypica caulibus crassioribus et erectioribus, foliis erectioribus et

rigidioribus, foliols 5-7 x 0-3-0-4 cm in paribus 8-9, pedunculis crassioribus,

racemis confertioribus et bracteis maioribus differt; legumina 8 x [+5 cm,

maiora illis formae typicze, semina crebriora ct 15-16 in Iegumine.

Type Locality: Coolgardie, Western Australia. E. Kelso, Oct., 1900.

Holotype: Perth, Isotype K, Plate 1, Fig, 1,

Description; Stems stouter and more erect than in the typical forrn. Leaves

stiffer and more erect; leaflets 5-7 x 0-3-0:4 cm, in 8-9 pairs. Pedunele stonter,

and the raceme more crowded, bracts larger. Pod larger than in the typical

furm, 8x 1-5 om, Seeds more numerous, 1516 per pod. .

Distribution; Map 3.

Note: This distinct variety is not rare, and may be worthy of specific rank, Iylet anert

information is needed on its relationship with the typical farm, Although their distribntiore

overlap ofvious jotermediates have not been notived,

Selected Spevimens—

Wesrenn AustrracraA: A. Morrison 14366. 11.ix.190d, Yandanooka; K, PERTH. 1.

Nathan. Oct., 1599. Coolgardie; NSW, P, E. K. Drommond 140, 1849, Interior of S,W,

‘Australia: K. M. Koch, 20,xi,1923, Merredins NSW, MEL, K.

21b. Cassia pleurocarpa var. longifolia D. E, Symon var. nov.

Caules eidem ac illi varictatis typicac, sed foliis multo longioribus et uscqur

ad 35 em longitudine, foliolis 2-5-4 x 0-4-0-6 ci in paribus 11-12 dispositis

differt. Peduneuli breviores quam illis varictatis typicae, ct plerumiue

foliis superioribus cireumdati. Legumina 3:7 « 1-1-1:4 cm, semina 5-6

mm, crassa obovata cmarginataque.

Type Locality: Mungalalla, Queensland, C. E. Hubbard 6076, and C. W,

Winders, 1.11931.

Holotype: BRL, Isotype K, Plate 1, Fig. 2.

Description: Stems as in the type, but the leaves much longer, and up to

35 om long; leafets 2-54 x U-4-0-6 cm, and as many as LI-12 pairs. Peduneles

shorter than in the typical form, 6 cm and with a tendency to be encircled by

10 12, Li. SYMON

the upper Ieaves. Pod 5-5-7 x L-l-1-4 em. Seeds 5-6 mm, thick, emarginate-

vboviite,

Distribution: Map 3.

Selecled Spccimens—

Queenstanp: Dr. McGillivray, 26,vili.1923, Churlevilla, ADW, W. 1D. Francis.

18-21.ix:1925. Charleville; BRI, &. CG. EB. Hubbard GO76 aud ©. W. Winders, J.i1931,

Munyallala; BRT, K, S, T., Everist 5921, 17.51.7957, Bonus Downs, 30 m. $. of Mitchell;

K. CANB.

29. Cassia surattensis Burman f., (1768)97.

Colladon, (1816)105, Burkill, (1935)481. Corner, (1940)390. De Wit,

(1955) 269.

Type Locality: ? Bombay Province, India.

Type Specimen: Uerbarium Garcin (probably in G) nut seen,

Synonyms: C, glauea Lamarck, (1785)647. Colladon, (1516)102. De

Candolle, {1825)495. Vogel, (1837 )26. Bentham, (1871)555. Mueller (1876)9,

Bailey, (1883)126. Moore & Betche, (1893)160, Bailey, (1900)459. Bailey,

(1911)66. Domin, (1926)792. Pantulu, (1941)175. Venkatesh, (1957)253,

Chatterjee, (1961 )695.

Type Locality: India.

Holotype: Not seen.

C, suffruticosa Kuen. ex Roth, (1821)213. De Candolle, (1825)496. Ben-

tham, (1864)285, Bentham, (1871)555. Ewart & Davies, (1917)135. Domina,

(1926 )702.

Type Locality; India,

Holotype: Not scen.

Description; A shrub or small tree several metres tall, Leaves about 15 em

long, leaflets to 7 pairs, 2-5 x 1-2 em, ovate to _ovate-oblong, slightly unequal at

the hase, the top rounded or emarginate, the base rounded cuneate, green and

glabrous above, glaucous and sparsely pubescent below with appressed hairs

principally on the larger veins. Petiole 4-5 cm, groaved above, pubescent to-

wards the base, leaf rhachis 5-10 cm, terminated by a small mucro and bearing

glands between the lower 2-3 pairs of leaflets; glands 3 mm, stipitate; petiolules

2 anm, distinct, pubescent. Stipules 10 mm, linear falcate, subpersistent.

Inflorescence a condensed raceme of yellow flowers from the upper leaf

axils, Peduncle 5 cm, firm, erect, sparsely pubescent, floral axis 12 em, golden

pubescent; bracts 5-10 mm, ovate-lanceolate acute the lower ones persistent

and reflexed; pedicel 2-3 cm sparsely golden pubescent. Sepals ovate-orbiaular,

the outer smaller, 5 mm, the inner larger 5-8 mm, minutely ciliate; petals 10-15 x

§-LL yam, obovate, claw 2-8 mm: Stamens 1,0, all fertile, filaments thick, one

3-4 mm, the rest 1-2 mm, anthers about equal 5-6 mm long opening by a lateral

slit, Ovary recurved, about 1 cm long, densely pubescent with appressed pale

golden hairs; style glabrous stigma small, ovules about 23. Pods flat, 10 x 1 em,

becoming glabrous, nearly: straight; stipe and stylar tip each about 5 mm. Seeds

not seen but described by De Wit-as blackish, glossy, sinooth, flattened, 9-10 x

4 mm.

Nate: 1 doubt whether this species: is mative to Australia. and Lelieve it to be an early

introdnetion to Northern Australia. It appears to be restricted mainly to the vicinity of

Darwin and to Arnlium Land, and is essentially coastal in its clistribution. ‘

Selected Specimens—

Nowtuesn ‘Lersrrory: R. Brown (No. 4256), Dese. No. 27, 26,1i,1803, islands off the

NE. tip of Arnhem Land; BM, K, E, P, MEL, NSW. R. Schomburgk 329. Octuber. 1869,

Pt, Darwin; K. M. Schultz 71, 1871, Pt, Darwin; MEL, M. W. Holtze 113, 1880, Pt,

THE GENUS CASSIA L. CAESALPINIACEAE IN AUSTRALIA WL

Darwin; MEL, T. S, Lea, 16.vii.1886 (Fanny Bay, Palmerstone), Darwin; BM. CC, Hi.

Allen, 24.11.1914, near Darwin; K. BR, L. Specht 25, 20.17.1948, Nightcliff. Darwin; AD,

BRI, MET, K, CANB. NSW.

23. Cussia retusa Vogel, (1841)72.

Bentham, (1864)285. Bentham, (1871)555, Bailey, (1883)126, Bailey,

(1900)459. Domin, (1926)794. De Wit, (1955)260.

Type Locality; Bustard Bay, N.S.W. (now in Queensland), collected by

Banks and Solander, 1770.

Holotype: BM,

Synonyms:

L. ©, acelinis F’, Mueller, (1863A)13. Bentham, (1871555,

Type Localities; (a) Hastings River, Dr. Beckler; (L) Ipswich, ], Nernst;

Queensland. )

Syntypes: (a) K, (b) MEL, (ve) MEL?, P, (d) MEL, Kk, P,

2. C. retusa@ yar. dietrichiae Domin, (1926)794.

Type Locality: Brisbane River, A. Dietrich 2841.

Holotype: Not traced.

3. C. retusa var, glabrata Domin, (1926)794.

Type Localities: (a) Mungana near Chillagoe, K. Domin; (b) Pt. Markay,

A. Dietrich; (¢) Perey Isles, A. Cunningham 168, 1819 (cited as No, 160), (ATI

sites in Queensland. )

Syntypes; (a) Not seen, (b) BM, (c) K, BM,

Description; A shrub or small tree, twigs ribbed and pubescent with curved

or appressed golden or pale hairs, becoming glabrous with age. Leaves 5-10

cin long, consisting of 4-6(7) pairs of accrescent leaflets, the Jower leaflets about

1 x 0-7 cm, the upper leaflets 2-3 x 1-1-5 cm, elliptic-oboyate, nearly equal sided,

the top rounded, emarginate or slightly retuse; petiole 1-3 cm, grooved above,

leaf rhachis similar and Besring 1-3 stipitate glands 2-4 mm long, between the

lower pairs of leaflets; petiolules distinct 2 mm long: stipules linear subulate

8-15 mm Jong, slightly faleate, persistent. Inflorescence a raceme 4-10 cm long,

of 4-10 flowers, from the upper leaf axils. Peduncle 3-5 cm, straight, stout,

rhachis shorter; bracts 0-5 x 0-2 em, distinct, lanceolate; pedicels 2-3 cm; the

muter sepals smaller 5-6 mm, oval, pubescent, the inner sepals larger 6-8 mm

uearly glabrous or minutely ciliate; petals 1-1-5 em, oval, yellow, often drying

to_a dark brick red colour; claw 2 mm; stamens 10, all fertile; filaments stout

1-2 mm, sometimes one longer; anthers 5-7 mm, stout, slightly curved and with

short cuspidate tips; ovary 1 cm, densely appressed pubescent with pale or

yellow hairs; stipe 1-2 mm; style 2 mm, glabrous: stigma small. Pod 10-15 x 1

em, Hat, slightly curved, the margins slightly erenate, sparsely or densely

pubescent with appressed yellowish hairs, the partitions hetween the 7-20 seeds

evident; seeds 5-6 mm long, obovate, thick flattish, shiny black.

Distribution: Map 6.

Note: This species is closely related to C, surattensis Burmann {. {C, glauca Lam.) and

to Its var. suffruticosa which Chatterjee (1961)695, considers to occur in Australia. How-

ever, he does not discuss the relationship of C, accliniy and C. retusa with the Asian material

and T prefer to maintain the name C. retusa in view of many small differences between

these species.

102 D, E. SYMON

Selected Specimens—

Qurens.ANpD: J, Banks and Solunder, 1770, Bustard Bay: BM. M. Lazarides 5680,

2.y.1956, Pine Islet. Peroy Island; K, CANB, NSW. L. J. Brass and CG, I’, White 127,

13.ix.1937. 40m. W. of Mt. Garnet; BRI. E. Fitzalan, —, Edgecombe Bay; MEL, k, ADW.

24, Cassia odorata Morris. (Sept. 1826) t..57.

Type Locality: “he present specimen was kindly forwarded by Aylmar

Bourke Lambert, Esq., from Boynton House, Wilts... . It was introduced by

seeds from NSW in 1825."

Holotype: Not located, the plate representing the type.

Synonyms;

1. Cassia australis Sims, (Aug., 1826) .2676 nom. illeg., non C. australis

Velloso, (1825)166. Vogel, (1837)48. Bentham, (1864)285. Rentham, (1871)

555. Mueller, (1963B)36. Bailey, (1883)126, Moore & Betche, (1893) 160.

Bailey, (1900)459, Bailey, (1906)45. Domin, (1996)794, Ewart, (1931)61L.

Audas, (71935)163. Mueller, (1888A)199, Webb, (1948)79.

Type Locality: “This handsome Cassia was raised at Bury-Hill from seeds

received from Mr, Telfair, early in 1824 with an observation that he had just

gat them from New Holland.”

Holotype: Not located.

2. Cassia barrenfieldti Colla, (1827)343, and (1831)23, t. 11.

Note: Bentham states (1864)285. that this name was later changed to C. fieldii, but no

record vf thiy change has: been found,

Vogel, (1837)48. Bentham, (1871)555.

Type Locality: Grown from seed from New Holland.

Holotype: TO.

3. Cassia schultesii Colla, (1827)344, and (1829}21, t. 10.

Vogel, (1837)48, Beadle, Evans & Carolin, (1963)232,

Type Locality; Grown fram seed from New Holland.

Holotype: TO.

A. Cassia umbellata Reichenbach, (1830) t. 206. The details on the plate

would validate the publication of the name, although in the text Reichenbach

considered the plant to be C. australis Sims.

L'ype Locality: Grown in the Botanic Garden, Dresden, from seed fram New

Holland.

Holotype: Not located.

5. Cassia fraseri A, Cunn. ex Vogel, cited by Bentham, (1664)255, is a

nomen nudum published in synonymy by Vogel in (1837 )48,

6. Cassia australis var. pedunculata Bentham, (1864)286,

Type Locality: (A) B. Brown, St, Georges River, (B) A. Cunningham,

Bluc Meuntaius, New South Wales.

Syntypes: (A) BM. (B) K.

Description: A shrub 1-2 m tall, the young stems, petioles and peduncles

sparsely pubescent with appressed yellowish hairs, but becoming glabrous with

age. The young stems, upper edges of the leaf rhachis and peduncles are

sometimes narrowly winged: Leaves 5-11 em long consisting of 8-11 slightly

accrescent pairs of leaflets; petiole 0-5-1 cm, channelled above or slightly winged

THE GENUS CASSIA L. CAESALPINIACEAE IN AUSTRALIA 103

ou the upper angles; leaf rhachis similar and terminated by a short mucro;

Jeallets 1-2-5 x 02-06 cm, oblong, obtuse or rounded, minutely mucronate,

glahrows or sparsely pubescent below; petiohiles distinct 1-2 mm; glands 2-3

mm long, slender, prominent, between all or the lower pairs of leaflets; stipules

0-3-1 em, subulate, subpersistent. Inflorescence a corymb of 3-6 flowers in the

upper leaf axils, there are rarely two peduncles in each axil. Peduncles (2)-5-

(9) cm, angular in section; bracts 2-3 mm, ovate; pedicels 1-2 om, calyx 3-5 x

2-3 mm, unequal, evate; petals 10-15 x 8-10 mm, oval-obovate slightly unequal,

bright deep yellow; claw 1 num; anthers 10, all fertile, 4-5 mm long: filaments

1 mm, or a few of them longer, 2-3 mm; ovary 10 mm, glabrous. Pod 4-10 x 0-5

em, nearly flat. Seeds 4-5 mm long, obovate, dark coloured,

Distribution: Map 6.

Note; Cassia olurata, coronillotdes and aciphylle are all closely related to one anpther

ant have sometimes been considered as one under the name C. qustralis Sims. At the

nwrtherm end of their range atypical forms occur whieh could be considered to tink the

species with C. retusa,

Selected Specimens—

New Sourn Wares: A, Cunninghum, 4 Oct,, 1835, banks of the Nepean Fiver: K,

K. Brown 4258, Mount Hunter; K. NSW, BM. E. J. Vickery, 26.ix.1936, Grose Vale; NSW,

J. Ht. Maiden, Sept.. 1597, Brushy Mountains; NSW, AD, BRI.

25, Cassia coronilloides Bentham, in Mitchell, (1548)384.

Bentham, (1864)285, sub. C, australis.

Bentham, (1871)555, sub C, australis,

Type Locality: St, George's Bridge Camp, on the Balonne River, Queens-

land, T. L, Mitchell 426, 11.43.1846, (When Bentham published the name C.

coronilloides he ascribed it to A. Cunningham, but the name in Cunningham's

manuscript and on his specimens is C. coronilluefelia. )

Hololype; K, Isotypes?, TCD, BM, CGE,

Description: A shrub 1-2 m, stems ribbed, and with the petioles, peduncles,

stinules and outer calyx sparsely appressed pubescent, becoming glabrous with

age. Leaves 3-6 cm, of (7)-9-10-(17) pairs of leaflets; green above paler below,

petiole 3-5 mm, grooved above; leaf rhachis grooved above; leaflets 8-18 x 2-5

mm, oblong, obtuse, glabrous; petiolule short, 0-5 mm; stipule 2-3 mm, subulate,

subpersistent; gland 1-2 mm, slender, usually between the lowest pair of leaflets

uly, Inflorescence s corymbose-umbel of 2-4 flowers in the upper leaf axils.

Peduncle 1-1/5 em shorl; pedicel 1 em; sepals 4-6 x 3-4 mm, oblong, uncaqual,

the outer smaller and sparsely pubescent; petals 13-14 x 6-8 mm, oval-oblong,

unequal, bright rich yellow; claw 1 mm; anthers 10, all fertile, 4-5 mm long

and with shortly attenuated tips; filaments 0:5 mm, very short; ovary 4 mm.

labrous, very oblique, curved, stipitate. Pod 7-11 x 0°5-0-7 om, straight or

slightly curved, almost flat, glabrous, dehiscent along the sutures bul not

elastic, with up to 20 seeds. Seeds 4-5 x 3.1mm, obovate, thick, hlaek, shining.

Distribution; Map 6.

Seleoted Specimens~

Quernspanp: ©, FE. Mubbard 5035, 13.51.1930. near Wandoan; K. BRL C, T. White,

Aus. 1916, Gindie; K. BRI. L, Pedley 532, 3.411959, 380 m, S, of Meandarra; K. BRI,

CANB. fF. Mueller, — Penk Downs; EK, TCD, A, Cunningham 55, 1825. Liverpuol Plains: K

New Sourn Waney: E. Cordon, 10.iv.1961, Glenborn Dam. near ‘Tamworth: NSW.

K. Mair, 23.41.1051, Mosquito Creek, NSW, J, IL. Maiden, Nov, 1899. Narrabri; NSW.

A. Ctinningham, May, (9835. Liverpool Plains: BM, CGF,

Ww4 D. FE, SYMON

26. Cassia costata J. F. Bailey and C, T, White, (1915)287.

Bentham, (1864)286, suh. C. australis. Ewart & Davies, (1917)134 sub.

C. australis.

Type Locality: Woolgar. Queensland, E. W. Bick, Aug,, 1915.

Holotype; BRI (2 sheets), Isotype: K,

Synonym: Cassia qustralis var. glaucescens Bentham, (1864)286. Eywart &

Davies, (1917)134.

Type Locality: Hooker's Creek, Northern Territory, F. Mueller.

Holotype: K.

Description: A shrub of 1-2 m or rarely a small tree, foliage pale, stems more

or Jess ribbed but nvt prominently so. Leaves 4-6 cm, glaucous; leaflets 2-4 x

4--6 com, 4-6 pairs, oblong-elliptic, glabrous except for sparse hairs along the

midrib below; petiolules 1-1-5 mm, slender, distinct; glands 1 mm, slender,

stipitate between 1 or 2 of the lower pairs of leaflets or absent: petioles 1-5-2

em, glabrous, glandless; stipules small caducous. Inflorescence a condensed,

subumbellate, axillary, raceme 2-6 flowers. Peduncles 1-1-5 cm, elongating

slightly in fruit to 2-5-3-5 cm; pedicels 1-1-5 cm, sparsely pubescent, some-

times with a gland at their base; bracts 2 mm, bracteoles small; sepals 4-5 mm.

unequal, broadly ovate; petals 7-10 mm, yellow; stamens (0 all fertile, filaments

short, anthers equal; oyary densely appressed piibescent, curved, Pod 7-8 x

0-7-0+9 om, stipitate, curved to ¥-% of a cirele, with marked transverse. grooves

between the seeds, the edge broadly crenate, bright golden yellow when freshly

mature and becoming rich brown on drying, aunesly pubescent when youny.

soon becoming glabrous, with up to 20 seeds. Seeds 5 mm, plump shining

black. frequently hanging by their funicles along the edge of the freshly opened

valves,

Distribution; Map 7.

Note: The strikiug fruits make this a distinctive species, It appears to be rare, and

despite its wide distribution across uurthern Australia. it has not been extensively collectudd.

Selected Specimens—

Westenn Austratra: D. W. Rust 54K. Oct., 1954. Karunjie Sin; CANB. C, A. Gardner

7044, 5.v.1944, 22m. E. of Broome, PERTH, W, V. Fitagerald 1588. Aug., 1906, near

Native Well, West Kimberleys; PERTIT. W. ¥. Fitzgerald 336, Apl, 1905. near Native

Well, 9m. from Coody Goody; PERTH.

NonTHers Ternirony: F, Mueller, Hookers Greek; K. ©. FE. Mill 393, 28.vi.1911.

20 mm. N. of Lander River; NT. G, C. Simons, 27.v.1964, 10 m. E. of Wonaral:; NY. oN, T,

Burbidge 3067, 8,iv.1956, Elsey Falls, E. of Mataranka; CANB,

Quernstano: M, S, Clemens, Mch,. 1946, Jericho; K, BRI, AD. ‘T, 1... Mitchell Aug. 9,

Belyando R, (near Yucumunda); K. § L. Everist 2120, 24.v.1940. Castleroi. 10 m, SE.

of Yalleroi; K. MET, BRI W. MeGiivray. Aug., 1928, Barcaldine; BRI, ADW.

27. Cassia acipbylla Bentham in Asa Gray, (1854)465.

Bentham, (1871)556. Williamson, (1930)176. Bailey, (1890)20.

The above references sub. C. australis or yariety.

Type Locality: (1) Tunters River, New South Wales; in uit; accompanied

by (2) a Howcring specimen which is noted as having heen presented by Mr.

Cunningham,

Syntype: K,

synonyms: Cassia recvoluta FY. Mueller, (1855) 120.

Type Locality: On gravelly, sometimes overflown places along the Avon in

Gippsland, Victoria, F. Mueller.

TIM, GENUS CASSIA L. CABSALPINIACEAE IN AUSTRALIA Lik

Holotype: MEL, Isotypes K, BM, E, TCD.

Cassia austialis var, renoluta (F, Mueller) Bentham, (1864) 286,

Description, A sprawling shrub 1-5 m, the stems somewhat ribhed and

pilose pubescent with pale or yellowish hairs or almost glabrous. J.eayes 2-10

vm long, of (5)-8-(12) pairs of linear Jeaflots; petiole short, 2-5 mm, grooved

above, pilose; leaf rhachis 3-6 cm, channelled above, pilose, terminated with a

small mucro 1-2 mm; leaflets 1-5-3 cm, linear, often aristate and almost pungent,

revolute, particularly when dry, the midnerve prominent below, the nerve and

leaflet edges prominently pilose, or the entire plant with few hairs and the leaves

almost glabrous; petiolule very short; stipules 4-5 mm, subulate, sub persistent;

Jands slender, erect, prominent, 1-2 mm loug between all or most pairs of

‘aflets. Inflorescence an umbel of 2-4 flowers, from the upper leaf axtls.

Peduncle 2-5 cin; bracts 2-3 mim, oblong; pedicels 1-1-5 cm; sepals 3-5 x 3-4 mm,

orbicular-oval, unequal, the onter smaller pubescent, the inner larger and

shortly ciliate; petals 11-13 x 8-10 mm, unequal, orbicular-oblong or orbicular,

bright yellow; the claw 1 mm; anthers 10, all fertile, 3-4 mim long, slightly at-

tenuated at the tips; filaments 1 mm, sometimes one longer than the others;

ovary oblique, curved, 8 mm, sparsely appressed pubescent or glabrous; stvle

lmm, Pod 4-8 x +5--6 cm, elliptic in section often slightly curved, dehiscent

along the valves but not elastic, stipe short, 2 mm long, stvlar tip persistent.

Seeds 3 mm long, thick, obovate-oval, dull dark brown,

Distribution: Map 6,

Selected Specimens—

QOuFENSLAND; N. Michael 3042, 21.x.1947, Holy Creek Road: BRI. Mossmin 276,

(850, near the Wonhyan, Cook district: BRI, E, K. F. M, Bailey, 24,v,1889. Goodna; BRI.

kK. W. Dunn, Nov., 1905 Acacia Greek near Killarney; NSW,

New Sourn Wars: H. S. McKee, 28,ix,1952. 1 m, W. of Timor Rock, 8 m W. of

Coonabarabran; NSW. J. H. Maiden, Aug,, 1899. Page River; NSW. E. F. Constable,

24.y.1945, Warrumhungle Mnts.. NSW. K. BM. A, Cunningham 71, Apl,, 1826, western

branches of the Hunter River; BM, K.

Vietona: F. Mueller, —, Avon, Cipps Land: MEL, E, BM. K, TCD. F. ©. Presentt:

Now, 1900. Snowy River neay Orbost; MEL. W-. Canc. Oct. 1956, 7 m. N. of Briagolong

an the Dargo Read; MEL, K. Bell, 1884, bunks of the Snowy River. Gipps Land; MEL

25. Cassia leptoclada Bentham, (1864)290.

Bentham, (1871)554 and 557. Bailey, (1883)127. Bailey, (1900)402.

Ewart & Davies, (1917 )135,

Type Locality: Islands of the Gulf of Carpentaria, R. Brown.

Holotype; BM, Carpentaria Islands, Jan, 21, 1803. No, 22 Dese. ( Morgan's

Island, Bhae Mud Bay).

Tsotypes; K, E, MEL,

Description; The following enlarged des¢ription is based on that by Beu-

tham. A shrub 1-1-5 m, glabrous and very glaucous with very slender, often

purplish branches. Leaflets 2 pairs, obovate to oblong-elliptical, very obtuse

and sometimes emarginate, the upper puir 1-3-3 x 0-7-1-5 cm long, the lower

pair smaller or wanting in the lower leaves; plands small, ovoid belween those

al each pai; stipules very minute; peduncles in the upper axils very short (to

5-7 mm) hearing 2-3 flowers on filiform pedicels, or sometimes the peduncles

adnate to the branch, the pedicels then proceeding from a little above the

axils, pedicels 10-15 mm, slender; sepals obtuse, unequal, 4-3 mm long; petals

§-10 x 5-6 mm obovate-oval, deep yellow; stamens 10, all fertile, more ur less

equal 4-5 mm long; the filaments very short 0:5-] mm, one or two of the lower

106 D. E. SYMON

ones longer; ovary 5-6 mm long, glabrous; stipe 2 mm; style 1-2 mm; stigma

obliquely terminal. Pod stipitate, Hat, glabrous, either 1-seeded and nearly

orbicular 1 em diam., or 2-seeded and 1-5 x 1 cm.

Note: This species has rarely been collected since the original collection was made,

Tt has athnities with C.. oligoclada but differs in its slender habit, glabrous glaucous leaves

and stems, broader. more rounded leatets.

Distributjon—

Nortuenn Tranitony: All specimens seen. G. F, Will 745, 15.11.1912, Sandstone Ranges

neur Western Creek, Borroloola; MEL. NT. KR. Brown, Jan. 21, 1803, islands (? Morgan's

Island) between Blue Mud Bay and Groote Eylandt; BM, K, E. MEL. 11. Basedow 60a,

1928, Arnhem Land; AD, F, W. J., Leichhardt (1845). Voyage dans J'Intcrieru de la partic

Nord Est de la N. Hollande 1849; P.

29. Cassia oligoclada F, Mueller, (1862)49.

Bentham, (1864)289. Bentham, (1871)557. Bailey, (1900)462, Ewart &

Davies, (1917)135, Domin, (1926)241,

Type Localities: (1) In flocis arenoso-rupestribus secus ripus ostium Vic-

toriae versus, (2) nec non ad rivum Sturt’s Creck, F, Mueller, (3) Prope

Attack Creek, Northern Territory. J. McD. Stuart, 1862.

Syntypes: (1) MEL, K. (2) Not traced. (3) MEL,

Synonyms:

1, Cassia oligoclada var. (?) gracilis Bentham, (1864)289.

Type Locality: Attack Creck, J. McD, Stuart, 1862,

Holotype: MEL.

2, Cassia goniodes A. Cunn. ex Benth., in Hooker, (1870)48, t. 1061,

Bentham, (1871)554. Domin, (1926)242 in obs.

Type Locality: (1) York Sound, (2) Greville Island. (3) Usbornes Har-

bour, all on the North West coast of Australia, A, Conningham.

Syntypes: (1) K, BM. (2) K, BM. (3) K.

3. Cassia heplanthera F. Mueller, (1876)8.

Type Locality: Ad flumen Liverpool River, B. Gulliver, qui plantum sub

itinere Cadelli legit.

Holotype; MEL, isotype K,

4, Cassia neurophylla W. V. Fitzgerald, (1918)147,

Type Locality; Edkins Range, hills near Barker River, Western Australia.

W. V. Filsgerald, 1905,

Holotype: NSW.

5. Cassia cladophylla W. V. Fitagerald, (1918)147.

Type Tocalities: (1) Hills near the junction of the Hann and Barmett Rivers;

(3) Edkins Range; (3) Dillen’s Springs, all in north Western Australia, W. V-

Fitzgerald, 1909.

Synlypes: (1) NSW, PERTH. (2) Erskines Range (?Edkins Range), E,

(3) Not traced.

6. Cassia neurophylla C, T, White and W. D. Francis, (1926)156.

Type Locality; Sandstone Ranges, Settlement Creek, Queensland, L. Brass,

Feh., 1923.

Holotype: BRI, isotype K.

7. Cassia oligoclada var. goniodes (A. Cunn. ex Benth.) Domin, ( 1926) 242.

THE GENUS CASSIA L CAKSALIPINIACEAK IN AUSTBALITA ty

8. Cassia oligoclada var. subsinguliflora Domin, (1926)242.

Type Locality; Between the Ashburton and De Gray Rivers, Western Ans-

tralia, E. Clement.

?Holotype: K.

9. Cassia curnistyla, |. M- Black, (1938)354.

Type Localities: (1) ‘Twenty miles suuth of the Granites. Northern Terri-

tory, J. B. Cleland, Aug. 1936. (2) West of Mt. Davenport, Treucr Range.

Northern ‘Terntory, Ben Nicker, 1938,

Syntypes: (1) AD, MEL, K; (2) AD.

Description: An undershrub 20-60 ¢m rarely 1 m, apparently short lived,

with few, erect, angular branches, The whole plant densely pubescent with

short straight hairs or almost glabrous with a few hairs about the leaf axils.

Leaves 1-5 em rather variable in size even on one plant, the upper leaves often

being only half the size of the lower ones. Leatlets rarely 1, mostly 2-3 aecre-

scent pairs, cblong-oblanceolate, or oblong-elliptic, rounded, obtuse or acute,

the lower leaflets from 0:5 x 0-15 to 2 x 1 em, the upper leaflets from I x 0-3 to

& x 1 cm, unequal based, the nerves prominent on both sides of the leaflet at

least in dried specimens, muronate. Petiole 8-5 mm, relatively short, prooved

above; leaf rhachis 4-13 mm, grooved above, shortly mucronate; petiolule 0+5-1

mm; stipules linear-subulate to cordate 2-¢ mim, green subpersistent; glands 1-2

mm, subulate-clayate, hairy, between each pair of leaHets. TnHorescence an

umbel of 2-5 yellow Howers, in the upper axils. Peduncle £-5-3/4°5) cm

slender: pedicels 5-10 mm slender; bracts 1 mm linear, caducous. Calyx un-

equal, the oviter lobes smaller 2 x 1-5 mm obovate, glabrous or pubescent, the

inner lobes larger 3.x 2 mm, obovate, usually glabrous and with pale mem-

branous edges. Corolla unequal, the petals 5-8 x 4-7 mm, obovate, or almost

circular, the short claw 1 mun long. Stamens 10, or fewer 8 or T, all fertile,

anthers 2-3 mm long on short filaments 1 mm, some of the lower filaments

slightly longer. Ovary 2-3 mm, quite glabrous or with a dense appressed

pubescence; stipe 1-2 mm well developed; style 1-1-5 mm usually glabrous;

stigma small, termimal. Pod 2-3(4) x 07-1 em, oblong, Mat, slightly curved,

same, but nut all, erenate along the lower margin, rather grey brown, pubescent

or glabrous and containing 4-7 seeds; the stylar tip 1-2 mm, persistent and pro-

minent; stipe 2-3 mm. Seeds 5 x 4 mm, obcardate, thick, flattish, almost black.

Distribution: Map 7.

Note: It is with some hesitation that I reduce all these names to synenyis, ‘te species

ig poorly represented in herbaria and appears to be a very variable ane. ©. neurophylla

Fitz, was described as glabrous, whilst C. neurophylla White and Fiancis and C, eaniodes

were described as glabrous or pubescent, and within a single collection, ez. M, Lazarides

6303 both densely pubescent and almost glabrous plants can be found, The stamens also

appear to be variable, C. heptanthera was based on a plant with 7 anthers, C. neurophylla

Fitz. was described as having 10 ot sometimes 8 and C, curvistyla as having 7 large and 3

small anthers. The stipiiles are usualy green and linear subulute, but C.. cladophylla was

deseribed as haying distinctly broad, cordate stipules, very few other specimeny like this

buve heen seen, C. curvistyla wax collected from the most southerly and arid portion of

the species’ range und appears to represent a desert form. 1 consider it a variable and

widespread species and some formisy may warrant at least yirietul status when better repre

sented and understoad,

Selected Specimens—

WestTERN AustRALIA: R. A. Perry 2572, 23.i1.1949, 9 m, E, of Kimberley Res, Stn;

CANB. K, NT, BRI. M. Lazarides 6300, 12.vii.1959, § in. SW. of Lamboo Stn.; CANB. K,

©, A. Gardner 9640, 14.11.1930. Grey's Cave. Prince Regent Rivers PERTH. W. V. Fitz-

veruthl, May, L905, Artesian Ranges, Kimberleys: BRI,

WS D. E. SYMON

. Nowmeks Ternrrony; ROA. Perry 2146, 12.vi.1949. 35 am. SSE. Victoria River Downs

Stn. CANT, NT. MEL, NSW, BRI, AD, K. RB, A, Perry 2209, 21.vi.ld4d9, 30 m. SSW, of

Wave Hill Stn. CANB, NT, MED. NSW, BRL AD. K. RK. Brown 4252. 41.1803, Groute

Eylandt; BM, K. C, Chippendale, £7.vi.1957, 17 m. NE- Lake Mackay; NT, NSW. AD.

Ovmensnann: Lb. G. Brass 274, Feb. 1923, Sandstone Ranges, Settlement Creek; BRI. K,

30. Cassia hamersleyensis Symon sp. nov,

Frutex parvus, C, oligocladue F, Muell. affinis, a basi lignoso ramosus; caules

erecti ct ubi 15-20 cm altitudine flores leguminaque producentes: ramunculi

pallide brunnei, striati, forsitan viscidi. Tota planta pilis pallidis erectisque

pilosa.

Folia 2-3 em longa; foliola 2-3- jugata, accrescentia, 5-12 x 4-9 mm elliptico-

obovata, ad hasin paulo inaequalia, apice rotundato vel acuto; petiolus 3-6 mm

longus, aagulasie: rhachis similis, mucrone 1 mm longo terminata; pvtioluli

0°5-1 mm longi; stipulae 3-5 mm longae, subulatae, sub-persistentes.

Kiacemi erecti, sub-umbellati, ¢ 4-6 floribus Juteis constati, in axillis folivrum

superiorum positi.

Pedunculi 4-5 em longi, rigidi erectique, striati, bracteae 2-3 mm oblonygo-

ellipticae; pedicelli 10-15 mm longi, tenues; sepala oblongo-ellipticu, inaequalia,

exteriora minora 3-4 mm, interiora 5-6 mm, ciliata; petala 1 x 0:8 em, elliptica,

ungui L mm longo; stamina 10, omnia fertilia, filamentis brevissimis (0-5 mm)

vel 1-2 filamentis inferioribus longioribus 1-2 mm, antherls 8-4 mm Jongis,

oblongis, paulo atlenuatis, poris oblique apicalibus dehiscentibus: ovariun 5-7

mm longum, glabrum, stipitatum, ca, 15-ovulatum, stylo 1 mm. longo et stigmate

oblique terminali,

Legumen ca. 4 x 1 cm, planum, oblongum, stipite 2-8 min longo, stylo 1-2

mm persistente, sed legumen totum matirum non visum,

Holotype: The flood plain of Wild Duck Creck, between Brockman and

Mount Pyrton in the Tamersley Ranges, Western Australia, M. M. Cole, WA3019,

1963, PERTH, isotype K, Plate 2, Fig, 1.

Pescription: A small shrub with affinities to C. alizoclada F. Muell., fower-

ing and fruiting when 15-20 cm high and consisting of a number of erect stems

from a woody base, twigs light brown, striate with some raised lines, perhups

viscid. All parts of the plant pilose with erect pale hairs.

Leaves 2-3 cm lany, of 2-3 pairs of acercscent leaflets, the leaflets 5-12 x 4-9

mm oval-obovate, slightly nnequal based, the apex rounded or acute; petiole

3-6 mm, angular, the rhuchis similar and ending in a mucro 1 mm long; petiolules

(!-3-L mm; stipules 3-5 mm, subulate, sub-persistent, Intlorescence of evect suh-

wmbellate racemes of 4-6 velluw flowers Fecal the upper leaf axils,

Peduncles 4-5 em, firm and erect, striate; bracts 2-3 mm oblong-elliptic;

pedicels 10-15 mm, slender, sepals oblong-elliptic, unequal, the outer smaller

34 mm, the inner 5-6 mm, ciliate; petals 1 x 0-8 em, oval; claw 1 mm; stamens

10, all fertile, filaments very short, 0:5 mm, or 1-2 of the lower ones longer 1-2

min, anthers 3-4 mm, oblong, slightly tapered, dehiscing through obliquely apical

pores, ovary 5-7 mm, glabrous, stipitate, ovules about 15, style | mm, stigma

obliquely terminal.

Pou about 4 x 1 em, flat, oblong, stipe 2-3 mm long and stylar tip 12 mm

persisting, but fully mature pod not seen,

Distribution: Hamersley Ranges, Western Australia.

Note; Professor M. Cole states that the species occurred on deep brown loam and wus

associated with Ftilotus carndelabrum and Pt, gomphrennides, Like a number of author

Westem Australian species of Cassia this appears to be restricted in its distribution and 10

date iz known only from the type locality.

THE GENUS CASS#A T,, CAESALPINIACEAE IN AUSTHALIA Lou

31, Cassia pilocarina D. E. Symon sp. nov.

Frutex 30-50 cm altus, caules juniores costati ct pilosi, senescentes vlabri

et griseo-brunnei. Folia 1-2 em longa, foliolis in paribus 5-9; petiolus 2-3 mm,

hrevis, costatus et pilosus; rhachis 7-14 mm, costata, pilosa el parvo mucrone

raedita; foliola 5-12 mm, oblonga vel cuneata, ad extremum distali 2-3 mm

ata, emarginata, in speciminibus siccis valde involuta, infra pilosa-yillosa, supra

sparse pilosa; nervus medins infra rominens, venge laterales obscurae; petio-

Julus O°3 mm, brevissimus; inter foliola infima parva glandula conics interdum

pracsens; stipulae 1-2 mm, subulatac, pilosae et subpersistentes. Inflorescentia

umbella, ex +-5 floribus hiteis constata, in axillis foliorum posita. Pedineulus

25-33 mm, tennis, pilosus; pedicelli 10-12 mm, bracteae 1-2 x 1-2 mm, oblancco-

latae et sparse villosae; sepala imparia, elliptica, exteriora 3-3 mm, villosa,

interiora maiora 3-5 mm, ciliata; petala 6 x 5 mm, obovata vel elliptica: antherac

10, omnes fertiles, impares, 2-3 min longae in filamentis brevissimis; oyarium

8-5 mm longum, curvatum, glabrum aut in carina et in stipite pilis villosis ves-

titum; ovyla circa 14; stylus curvatus 0-5-1 mm, stigma parvum, Legumen 40 x

15 mm, oblongum, planum, glabrum; stipes 3 mm; stylus 1-2 mm; semina circa

12, immatura in speciminibus visis.

Type Locality: South Barlee Range, Western Australia, A, RKolinsan,

7.ix.1959, confined to gibber crab-hole hills,

Holotype: PERTH. Phoio of holotype Plate 2, Fig. 2.

Description: A shrub, 30-50 cm, younger slems ribbed and pilose, becorine

glabrous and grey-brown with age. Leaves 1-2 cm long and consisting of 5-9

pairs of leaflets, Petiole 2-3 mm_ short, ribbed, pilose: Jeat rhachis 7-14 mm,

ribbetl, pilose, mucronnlate, Leaficts 5-12 mm, oblong-cuneate, 2-3 mm wide

at the distal end, emarginate, markedly involute in the dried specimens, pilose-

villous below, sparsely pilose ubove; midrib prominent below, lateral veins

obscure; petiolules 0-5 mm, very short. A small conical gland is sometimes

present between the lowest pair of leaflets. Stipules 1-2 mim subulate, pilose,

suibpersistent. InHoreseence an umbel of 4-5 yellow flowers, in the leaf axils.

Peduncle 25-35 mm, slender, pilose; pedicels 10-12 mm; bracts 1-2 x 1-2 mm,

oblanceolate, sparsely villous, Sepals unequal, oval, the outer ones 3-3 mun,

villous, the inner ones larger 8-5 mm, ciliate. Petals 6 x 5 mm obovate-oval.

Anthers 10, all fertile, unequal, 2-3 mm long on very short filaments. Ovary

3-3 inm long, curved, «labrous or with villous hairs slong the keel and on the

stipe; ovules about 14; style curved 0-5-1 mm, stigma small. Pod 40x 15 mm.

ohlong, Hat, glabrous; stipe 3 mm; stylar tip 1-2 mm. Sceds about 12, immature

in the specimens seen,

Distribution; Map 13.

Nate: Mr, R. D. Royee has given aie the (ollowing information about this, spewies.

Tr is a shrub of 12-18" (30-45 em) in height and 3 feet (Lom) in

diameter, a low, fat, twiggy plant, Flowering is sparse, and most shrubs would

have about 12 flowers fully expanded, but many buds tightly closed, and

numbers of pods at various stages of development. ‘In small areas it is commnan,

but it is not widely distributed in the area of the Range. It occurs on stony

hills in pebbly, sandy soil among Cassia pruinosa, Ptilotus gumphrenoides,

Solanum oldfieldii, Sida, Velleia, and other herbs.”

It is a very distinct little Cassia and its alliuities may be with C. alivocluda,

110 D, E, SYMON

Selected! Specimens—

Wretian Acsrnauia: A. Kobinson, 7.ix,1959, South Barlee Rauve. confined to evbber

crab-hols hills, (Type); PERTH. R. D. Royce G590, 19.vili.1AG1. Barlee Range; PERTH.

R, D, Royce 6477, 16.viii.1961, Ullawarra Station, stony soil; PERTH,

82. Cassia cuthbertsenii F. Mueller, (1488B)75.

Type Locality: On the upper Ashburton River, Western Australia, 1888, W-

Cuthbertson,

Holotype: MEL, Isotype K:

This yery distinct species has not been collected again since its original

discovery, and 1 have seen nothing which closely resembles if. Its relationships

with other Western Australian species are obscure, and 1 can find no closer

comparison with C. pruinosa, as suggested by F. Mueller, than with almost any

ather Western Australian species. The sheet in Melbourne has been re-exarpined

recently and it definitely appears to be a Cassia and not a misidentification,

F, Mueller’s original description is republished below.

“1warf-shrubby; leaves short-stalked; stipules small, subulate slightly

spinescent, deciduous; leaflets in six or fewer pairs, small, of thick texture,

almost sessile, from narrowly elliptic cuneate to obovate or even almost orbi-

cular; slightly recurved at the margin. above dark-green, shining and glabrous,

beneath as well as the branchlets, Jeaf-rhaches, flower-stalks and stalklets, sepals.

and ovulary beset with a whitish velvet-like yestiture; ylandules on the rhachis

absent, replaced by tufts of very minute black hairlets: peduncles axillary,

rather short, bearing terminally from two to four Howers; stalklets about as

long as the largest sepals or somewhat longer, but considerably exceeding the

always small bracts; petals glabrous; stamens ten or occasionally less, all much

shorter than the petals; anthers almost of equal size, the lowest on short. fila-

ments, the others nearly sessile; style very short; ovulary nearly semi-cireular-

curved,

On the Upper Ashburton River; W. Cuthbertson.

Where found only one foot high, Leaflets mostly from \ to & inch long,

Petuls roundish, deep-yellow. about % inch long. Anthers dull-brownish. Fruit

unknown,

In some respects allied to C. pruinosa, but with very diferent stipules, less

~ flat and blunter leaHets, shorter pedicels and peculiar but imperfect indument.

by which latter characteristic this species also differs from all other Australian

congeners, even those of the group of C. artemisioides.”

33. Cassia helmsii D. E. Symon in Hj. Richler, (1965)150-

Bentham, (1864)289 sub. C. sturtit variety.

Black, (1924A )293 sub. C. sturtii varicty,

lack, (1948)430 sub. C, desolata variety.

Black, (1923)370 sub, C. sturtii varicty,

Ising, (1935)246 sub, C. sturtii variety.

Svmon, (1955)190 sub. C. desolate variety.

lratex 1-2 tm, saepe rotundus vel cum plano cacuminy: plurimae partes

canentes Vel albae, dense tomentosae brevibus pilis laneis. Folia 2-5-5 em lunga,

altcrnata, pinata, foliolis (2)3-4(5) binatim obovatis, (0-8) 1-1 -5(2-5) x 0-6-

08(1:2) cm, obtusis, acerescentibus (margines latcrales foliolorum in spect

minibus siccatis sacpe recurvati). Petiolus 0-5-1 um, petiolulus distinctus 1 mm;

rachis parvo mucrone terminata; stipulae 1-2 mm, subulatay, caducae; glandulae

inler omnes vel (inter) inferiores paria toliorum, sessiles hreves lataeque, 1 mom

THE GENUS CASSIA L. CAESALPINIACHAE IN AUSTRALIA IL

diametro, saepe atro-fuscae vel nigrae. Inllerescentia racemosa, sub-umbellata,

axillaris, ex 4-10 flavis foribus constituantis. Pedunculus 1-2-5 em longus, cur

4-5 bractcis 8-5 x 2-3 mm, formantibus involucrum sub pedicellis; pedicelli

(8-1-3 em longi, Calyx impar, ovata vel ohovata, 6-9 x 38-5 mm; corolla ellip-

tica, 8-12 x 6-9 mm; unguis 2 mm; stamina 10, omnia fertilia, superiora 7-8 in

brevissimis filamentis 1 mm, inferiores 23 antheraé in flamentis 3-5 mm longis;

antherae 3-4 mm; ovarium 6-8 mm, curvatum, glabrum vel sparse vel dense

adpressis pilis vestitum; stipes 2 mm, stylus 1-2. mm, glaber, stigma obliquurn;

ovula ca. 15-16, Legumen planum, oblongum, (3)5-6°5 x 1:8-2 om, brunncum;

stipes 4 mm, stylus 2-3 mm; semina obovata, 5-7 x 4 mm, crassa, planiora, nitida.

Holotypus; G, Chippendale 6428: 5 miles cast of Coniston Homestead,

Central Australia; L1viii.1959. Grey shrub, 3 feet, flowers bright yellow. In-

frequent in sandy soil near creek, (AD 96049106), Plate 3, Fig. 1.

Tsotypes: NT6428, ADW, NSW.

Synonyms:

1. C. sturtii var, tomentosa Bentham, (1864)289, Domin, (1995)795.

l'ype Specimen; Mt. Murchison, N.S.W,. J, Dallachy.

Holotype: K.

2. C. sturtii var. involucrata J, M. Black, (1923)370.

Type Specimen: Birksgate Nange, far N.W. of South Australia, BR. Helms,

6,vii.1891, Camp 15.

Holotype; AD, Isotypes K, NSW, MEL.

3. C. desolata var. involnerata (J, M, Black) J. M. Black, (1948 )430,

Description: A shrub 1-2 i, often ronnded or Hat topped, most parts grey

or white with a dense, short omentum of woolly hairs. Leaves 2-5-5 om, alter-

nate, pinnate, of (2)3-4(5) pairs of obovate, obtuse. accrescent leaflets (0-S)1.

1-5(2-5) x 0-6-0:8(1°2) om (the lateral edges of the leaflets are often recurved

in dried specimens ); petiolule distinct 1 mm; petiole 0-5-1 cm; Jeaf rhachis ter-

minated by a small mucro; stipules 1-2 mm, subulate, caducous; flands belween

all or the lower pairs of leaflets, sessile, squat, 1 mm in diameter, often dark nr

black. Inflorescence an axillary sub-imbellate raceme of 4-10 yellow Howers.

Pedunele 1-2-5 em, with 4-5 bracts, 3-5 x 2-3 mm, forming an involucre at the

base of the pedicels which are 0-8-1+3 em long: calyx unequal 6-9 x 3-3 mm

ovate-obovate; corolla §-12 x 6-9 mm, oval, the claw 2 mm; stamens 10. all

fertile, the upper 7-8 on very short filaments of 1 mm, the lower 2-3 anthers

on filaments 3-5 mm long; anthers 3-4 mm; ovary curved 6-8 mm, glabrous or

sparsely or densely appressed pubescent; stipe 2 mm; style 1-2 mm, glabrous;

stigma oblique; ovules about 15-16. Pod flat, oblong (3)5-6:5 x 1°8-2 cm,

brawn, stipe 1 mm, stylar tip 2-3 mm. Seeds ohovate 5-7 x 4 mm, thick, flattish,

shining.

Distribution; Map 8,

Note: This spevics ix widely spread in arid Central Australia, It forms .a complex with

G, desalata and C. olizaplylta with which it has frequently been confused. It is best sepur-

ated by its dense woolly tomentimn, umbellate rather than racemose inflorescence and having

3-4 yother than 1-2 pairs of Jeaflets,

Selected Specimens—

Westrens Austraura; C. A, Gardner, 26.ix.1920. Laverton; PERTH. W. E. Blackall.

Sept., 1939. Yandel. Lake Darlot: PERTH. M. Laarides 6430. 25.vii,1Y39 4 om. W_ of

Tableland Stn.; CANB, AD. E. Giles, 1873-4, Rawlinson Ranges; MEL,

Nosturny Territory: G. Chippendale. 29,.x.1958. 4 m. \, Alice Springs; NT, ADYW.

NSW, G. Chippendale, 25.xi.1954, Ayers Rock; NT, NSW. ADW. BRI. Tl. A, Perry,

112 D, E, SYMON

5.vii 949, 24 m. SSE, af Inverway Sto, K, CANB, BAI, AD. TE. Giles, 1873-4, Mt. Olga,

MEL.

Qvrensuann: N. H. Spevk, G.viii.1954. 7 m, SE. of Gipsy: Plains Stn; K, CANB. AD,

BAT. 8. L, Everist $930, 9.vi.1949, Currvawilla, 100 m, W. of Winctora, K, BRI, J. 1. Debney

45, Aug, 1801, Monkira Stn.s BRI. Dr. Wheeler. —. between Stokes Range and Cooper

Crevk; MEL.

New Sout Wanes: A. Morris, 148.1921, Uimberomberka; NSW. BRI, ADW. Ev BE.

Constable, 17.x.1949, Tibooburra; NSW. K. J. Dallachy, — Mt, Muvehison, K, MEL. Dr.

Beller. $0..11,1880. Mt. Goninghberri; K.

Sours Ausiwauiat Baldwin Spencer Sept., 1903, Lake Eyre, NSW, BM. Andresys,

1675, vieinity of Lake Eyre: K. EL ts. Lord, L3,iv.1950, Mt, Mbillie, Everard Range; MEL,

AD, M, Koch, May, 18u8, Mt. Lyndhurst; NSW, BM, MEL,

34. Cassia oligophylla var. oligophylla F, Mueller, (1862)49,

Bentham, (1864)289. Bentham, (1871)557, Bailey, (1900)462, Ewart &

Davies, (1917) 135.

Type Locality: In sandy places at Nichol Bay, Western Australia, P, Walcott.

Holotype: MEL, Isetypes: K, ?P.

Description: A shrub 1-2 m rounded or flat topped often wide spreading,

staucous and variably pubescent, Leaves of 1-2(3) accrescent pairs ot leaflets;

petidle 0-5-2 em, channelled above, appressed minutely pubescent, leaf rhachis

similar, terminating in a small mucro; petiolule 1-2 mm, distinct, pubescent;

glands 1-1-5 mm diameter, globular, dark, prominent between each or the lnwer

pair of leaflets; leaflets 1-3 x 1-2 em, the lower pair smaller, elliptic, obovate

(usually) or oval, the lop obtuse, rounded or obcordate, minutely pubescent or

nearly glabrous and glaucous, generally firm and coriaceous, the midnerve

prominent below; stipules 4-6 mm, subulate, caducous. Inflorescence a lony or

short to subumbellate raceme of 6-20 flowers from the upper leaf axils. Peduncle

2-3 cm, firm, erect, sparsely pubescent to pilose; pedicels 1-1-5 em, bracts 2-3 x

2mm, oblong, deciduons. Sepals unequal, the outer smaller and more pubescent

3-6 x 2-3 mm ovate, concave, the inner ones ciliolulate; petals §-L0 mm, aval-

ybovate, nearly equak the claw 1 mm; stamens 10, all fertile. 3-+ mmm long; fila-

ments 1-2 mm or one of the lower ones longer, 2-3 mm; ovary 3-8 mom glabrous

or pubescent; stigma 1-2 mm glabrous; style obliquely terrninal. Pod 7 x 1-3-2-5

em, relatively large, flat, oblong ot slightly curved, very sparsely pubescent or

glabrous, with about 12 seeds, stipe 8 mm, stout, stylar tip 3-4 mm. Seeds 7 x 4

mim, thick, Hattish, obovate, dark, dull.

Distribution: Map &.

Note: This. spevies is partof a mast difficult taxonomie and biological complex in ugeters

arid Anstralia. It has beeo inisidentified Trequently as C. desolata. Tntermediates with ©.

helmstt are readily found and specimens with narrower leaflets may connect the species with

C, nemophila var, zygoephylla on the one hand and with CG, nemaphila var. coriacea an the

other, T have made the new vuriely sericea to name those particularly silky pubescent speer-

mens tonnd jn Western Australia and Northern Territory. but have hesitated to separate

(hose plants, often more central anc sonthern in their distribntiion which have a single pair

of lentlets, short petiole and a rather Jong racemose inflorescence for which F, Mileller has

usec) the unpublished varietal names “n7ijaga™ and “ciety.

Selecied Specimens—

Western Ausiaania: A. Morrlson, 1...1905, between Globe Hill aud Uuroo, Aslihurtan

River; KO BE PERTH. R.A. Perry 2448. 13.vin 449. 4 mi. NE. of Gordon Downs Station.

K OANB. NLL MEL, NSW. M. TLazarides 6506. 5.ie.L45h 9 om. ESE. of Calwynyardah

Shu. Kimborluys; K. CANB, NSW. ©. A, Gardner 4938, 24,viii 1932, Hanersley Biunivs;

PERTH,

Nowruens Tuanmory: M. Tararides 6244, 9.v.1955. 40 11. NE. af Tarlion Dawns Sun:

WANK. K. NSW. NT, MEL, G, Chippendale. 9.viit957 Harts Range. G m. 8S. of Police

Str NL. ADW. NSW. G, Chippendale. 13.viii.1955. 7 m. W. of Soudan H.8., NT, MEL.

NSW. E, Giles, 1873, MaeDonnell Ranges: MEL.

THE GENUS CASSIA L. CAESALPINIACEAE IN AUSTRALIA 13

QuvEnsL.ann; §, L. Everist 3246, 23.57.1947, Ardmore Stn; K, CANB. RB. aA. Perry

4036, 3.ix.1953, 20 mm. NE. Dajarra township; CANB, K, NT, MEL, NSW. R.A. Perry

4014. 24x.1953,, 12 m. SW. of Malbon township; K, CANB. NT, MEL. H, S. Longman,

Devc,, 1912, Chatsworth Stn.; NSW.

New Sours Waxes; J. L, Boorman, Oct.. 1912, Waverley Derwins Hun gertied: P, NSW.

E, Perrett, Feb,. 1911. Amphitheatre Stn., 12 m. from Cobar; NSW, . F, Constable,

17,x.1949, Tibooburra; NSW.

Seurn Austrania: A. L. Andrews 103, vicinity af Lake Eyre; K. M. Koch, May, 1898,

Mt. Lyndhurst; K. F. L. fill. 10.x.1953, Enin Fields, 300 m, NW. of Woomera, BM,

34a. Cassia oligophyila F, Mueller var, sericea, D, E. Symon yar. noy,

Frutex similis Cassiae oligophyllae, sed pilis adpressis rectis et sericcis

dense obtectus, folia igitur aspectu aureo- vel argenteo-sericen, Ovarium

plenionque pilis adpressis dense pubescens.

Black, (1938) 102,

Type Locality; J. B. Cleland, 14-viii.1936, The Granites, Northern Territory.

Holotype: AD, Plate 3, Fig. 2.

Description; A shrub similar to Cassia oligephylla, but differing in having a

dense covering of straight, appressed, scriccous hairs, giving the leaves a golden

or silvery silken appearance. The ovary is also usually densely appressed

pubescent.

Distribution; Map 8.

Selected Specimens—

Western AustRacia: W. V. Fitzgerald, 1900, Gascoyne River; PERTH, N. TY. Burbidge

173, Boolardy Station; K. J. H, Maicen, Oct,, 1909, Gue: NSW. D, Syimou, Lviii.1962, Sir

Frederick Range: ADW.

Nowrnenn Tesaniosy: Mr. Rose, — Tanami; K, J, B, Cleland, (viii i936. The

Cranites; AD. ;

35. Cassia desolata var, desolata F. Muciler, (1853)389.

Bentham, (1864)287. Bentham, (1871)557, Mueller, (1863B)38, Bailey,

(1883)127, Mueller, (1888)200. ‘Tate, (1890)71. Turner, (1891)29,

Moore & Betche, (1893)160. Bailey, (1900)462. Ewart & Davies, (1917)

135. Black, (1924A)293, Demin, (1926)795. Ewart, (1931)612, Wil-

liamson, (19380)176 Ising, (1935)245,

Type Locality; In sunny, undulating, dry clayey sand between Arkaba and

Wulpina (Wilpena) (Flinders Ranges, South Australia), F. Mueller.

Holotype; MEL.

Description: A shrub 1-2 m, grey-green in appearance. Leaves 4-5 em long,

leaflets usually 3 pairs; leaflets 12-22 x 4-6. mm, elliptic, acute, obtuse or rounded,

densely pubescent with short woolly hairs; petiolule I mm, distinct; petiole 8-15

mm, terete; leat rhachis terminated by a triangular mucro 0:5 mm, a sessile

globular gland 0:5 mm in diameter present between the lower or all pairs of

leaHets: stipules 1-2 mm, subulate, caducous. Inflorescence a corymbose raceme

af 4-5 yellow showy flowers in the upper leaf axils. Peduncle 2-3 cm, bracts

2-3 mm oblong-ovate caducous; pedicels 10-15 mm; calyx unequal, outer lobes

smaller 3-4 mm, the inner larger 5-6 mm, oval, pubescent, ciliate; petals 7-8 x

4-5 mm, oval, slightly unequal, claw 1 mm; stamens 10, all fertile, 2-3 mm long;

Glaments short -5-l mm or one anther slightly larger and on a longer filament

1-2 mm; ovary 5 mm, glabrous, style 1 mm; stigma obliquely terminal. Pad

5-7 x1 cm, flat, brown, the stipe 2-3 mm and a stylur tip 1-2 mm often persisting,

dehiscent along the sutures but not elastically. Seeds 4-5 x 5 mm, thick, flattish,

irregularly obovate. dark.

114 RD. B. SYMON

Distribution: Map 7.

Nate; The name C. desolata has been widely applieck within the genus in Anstealia.

The taxon to which it can be applied in the strict sense is not very comrion, ulthonvh fairly

wiclegniead, in the arid areas of Australia, ‘Che species is closely related to, and forms a con-

neoting link between, C. sturtii, C. helmsii and C, nemophila yar. xygophylla and particularly

in Central Australia forms a biological complex which is difficult to order in conventional

laxonomic tenus. The variety planipes ], M, Black is more clusely related to C. dewlata

thant te C. sturtii and is here transterred to the former species: In addition, the variety

uiwaluerata has been raised to specific rank as C. helmesil.

Selecta Specimens—

Western Ausrrauia: BR, A. Perry 2440, 13.vii.1949, 9 m. N. of Cordon Downs Stn.;

CANB, AD. N. H. Speck 727, 8.ix.1957, 16m, SW. of Nanmne; CANB, AD, Anon, [931,

Cue; ADW, E, Giles, 1973-4, Rawlinson Range; MEL,

NortHenn Texrrrony: R, Schodde 462, L.ix.1957. 15 km. W. of Angas Downs Stn., AD,

CANB. N. Forde 196. 3.vii.1936, Ilann Range; NT, ADW, NSW, K. G, Chippendale,

29,717, 1958, 15 m, SE, Anningie AS; N'T, ADW, NSW, BRL, E, Flint, 1892, N, of Alice

Springs; MEL,

Jumansnann: W. MoGillivray, Aug., 1928, near Winton; ADW. W, MeGillivray 983,

fi,ix, 1928, neay Noreundra; BRI, “Miss Walker, 1890, Jericho, Upper Burcoo; MEL,

New Sour Wanna: E.R. Reed, 20.viiil021. Thauckaringa Hills, E. of Broken Hill; AD.

A. Morris, 30.ix.1922, near Cartwrights Crock, near Broken Hill; ADW. Mrs. Trvine, Jnne,

1889, Barrier Range; MET. W, Baucrlen 66, Ang, 1887, ‘Tacella; MEL,

Sowrm AverkactA: Max Koch 32, Sept. 1809, Mt. Lyndhurst; AID. W. §. Reid.

4. 9iii.1953, Everard Park, Everurd Ranges; ADW. W. S, Reid, 306-v,1957. Innamincka,; ADY-

Thos. Newlanel, 1887, near Lake Fyre: MEL,

35a. Cassia desolata var, planipes (J. M. Black} D, E. Symon comb, nov.

Basionym: C, sturtii var. planipes J, M. Black, (19248 )256.

Type Locality: Cordillo Downs, South Austrulia, J. B. Cleland, May, 1924,

Holotype: AD, Isotype K.

Description; A shrub 1-2 m tall, Leaves 2-5 cm, grey sericeous pubescent,

af 2-3 pairs accrescent Icaflets; leaficts oblanccolate-elliptic, the lower ones ():5-1 x

{344 cm, the upper 1:5-2 « (6-0-8 cm, midvem prominent below; petivlule

1.1-5 mm; petiole, G-4-1+5 cm, petiole and leaf rhachis distinctly vertically Hat-

tened 1-5-2 mm wide, striate with 2-3 veins; glands 1-3, dark, globular, sessile

between the leaflets, the young glands topped by glandular hairs but these appear

to be lost at maturity; stipules 12 mm, subulate, soon lost. Inflorescence an

axillary, corymbose raceme of 4-6 Howers, Peduncle 1-2 em; bracts 2 mm, ovate;

pedicels 1 cm; calyx unequal, outer lobes 3 x 2. mm, inner lobes 4 x 4 mm oval,

pubescent, ciliate; corolla petals 6-8 x 4-5 mm, oval; claw 1-1-5 mm; stamens 10,

all fertile, 3-4 mm, filaments mostly very short (0-5-1 mm, but several lower

anthers on longer filaments 1-3 mm; ovary 5-6 mm, curved, sparsely appressed

pubescent on the stipe and keel, stipe 1-1-5 mm, stigma circular, obliquely

terminal, surrounded hy sparse short hairs. Pod 5 « 1-2-1:9 em, oblong, flat.

slightly curved. Seeds 6» 3 mm, obovate, thick flattish, shiny, brown.

Distribution: Map 7.

Note: Although limited in its occurrence and distribution, it appears distinct enguult to

warnuil sane taxapomic separation.

Selected Specimens—

Quexnsianp: 8. L. Mverist 3279, 26.x1.1947, Ardmore Stn.; BRI, F, L, Berney, 20.y.1981.

Barcarolle, near Jundah; BRI, §$, L, Everist and Smith 1223, 26.1.1937, Worenda Stn. 50 su,

k. of Boulia; BRI, N. J. S. Little, 1910, South-west Qucensland; BRT,

New Soutm Waris: FP. Martens G22), 87 viii, 1964, Bostra Stn, near Tero Crk. Stn.

near White Cliffs; CANH-

Sourn Ausixauia; J.B. Cleland, 23.v.1924, Cordillo Downs; KAD, WS, Reid 117.

Livii957, Innamincka: ADW,

THE CENUS CASSIA L, CARSALIMNIACKAF IN AUSTRALIA 15

%. Cassia phyllodinea R.Br, in C, Start, 2(1849)78.

Bentham, (1864)287. Bentham, (1871)556. Mueller, (1863B)38, “3, Cassia

platypoda,” Mueller, (1858A)201, Bailey, (1890)2!. Tate, (1890)71.

Turner, (1891)27. Moore & Betche, (1893)160, Bailey, (1900)460,

Black, (1924A)293. Williamson, (1930)177. Mwart, (1931)6L3. Black,

(1948 ) 431.

Common Name: Silver Cassia.

Type Locality; “In Herbariv D. Sturt specimen exstat nulla stationis aul

loci indivatione, sed landem speciem ad funduia sinus Spencer's Gulf dicti in

sterilibus apricis anno 1802 legi.

Syntypes; Both at BM, Isusyntypes of the R. Brown vollection are at K,

E. MEL.

Deseription: A hoary shrub 0+5-2 m, often spreading and somewhat broad

tupped. Stems branching from the base, densely pubescent with short silvery

hairs when young, becoming glabrous with age, the bark of the older stems prey,

ultimately dark grey, Leaves usually completely reduced to phyllodes, the

juvenile 5 a consisting of 1-2 pairs of Ieaflets 8 x 2 mm, the first phyllodes

sometimes bearing 1-2 leaflets ustally in a lateral rather than terminal position,

phyllodes 1-5-5 cm x 0-2-0-5 cm, often faleate, narrow oblanceolate, densely

pubescent with short silvery hairs, the gland not prominent aud occurring

4-# along the upper cdye of the phyllode. Stipules 0-5-1 mm, caducous. Mlowers

2-5 in short racemes or subumbellate in the axils of the upper Jeaves. Peduncles

1-1°5 om, pedicels slightly Icss; bracts minute 1 mm, caducous, Calyx ciliate,

variably pubescent, sepals oval, the outer smaller 2 mm, the inner larger 4 mm,

Corolla yellow, glabrous, the petals oval spathnlate 6 x 4 mm, Stamens 10,

all fertile. the upper seven with short filarneuts 0:5-1 mm, the lower 2-3 (or

one only) often with longer filaments 1-3 mm. Style 1-2 mm, terminating the

curved, fat ovary, the stigmatic surface surrounded by « crown of minute brairs-

Ovary 5 mm, curved, glabrous, on a stipe 2 mm; ovules about 17. Pod 3-8 x

1-3 em stipitate, Hat, usually coiled in a semicircle, rich brown when mature.

Seeds dull dark brown, obovate, about 7 mm long.

Distribution; Map 9.

Note: This species Has been confused with the broad phyllode extremes of G. nemophila

var. platypoda and reports of the occurrence of C_ phyllodinea in W, Aust: are based on that

variety, They may be distinguished by C. nemuphile var, platypoda having a terminal pair

af flat or terete leaflets 3-10 mm long (these are often Jost ary’: the gland in a terminal

position, the phyllodes nat densely hoary pubescent and the pod narrower, 5-7 imm, and

straight

Aberrant specimens (ADW 13411 from the flood plain of the Frome) with long narrow

phyllodcs 70 x 2 mm with an accasional pair of leaflets and with almost straight marrow pods

70 x 7 mm may represent hybrids with C, nemophila. The sheet (ADW 12088 Cachra Dain.

Mulynngarie Stn.. N. of Cockburn) with phyllodes normal in sive but less hoary and with

nayvow, almost straight pods, 60 x 7 mun, any represent a hybrid with C, nemophila var.

vlilypoda,

Selected Specimens—

Nortuean Treratrony; G, Chippendale, 2.41954, Tobermorey; NT, MEL, NSW, BRI,

ADW. _B. A, Perry, 21.v.1948. 90 m. WSW, Lake Nash Sto,; GANB, BRL G. Chippendale,

10.x.1955, Aleoora Springs, Tobermorey; NT, ADW,

QurensLann: A. €. Ivory, Sept, 1894, Charlotte Plains, 36 m. MF. of Curutamulla; BRI.

C, T. White 11802, 26.11.1941, Offham, BRI, K. |S. L. Bverist 3214. 21.xi1947, Ardmore

Sim; BRI, K, CANB. Brown and Brown, Sept., 1962, “Ruckabie". Quilpie: BRI, K,

New Sount Watas: J. Dallachy and T, H, Goodwin, Darling River; MEL, B. COL,

BM, K, E. F, Constable, 16.21.1957, Glenlyon Stn., Menindee District; NSW, K. A. Maris,

ae Mt. Robe; NSW, ADW. J. L. Boorman, Oct, 1912, Urising-Thurlon Dowts;

NSW, P.

116 D, E, SYMON

Soum: AustRarza: KR. Brown, 1802. Const Inlet XIL (Head of Spencers Gulf); MEL,

B, BM, K. Max Koch, Oct, 1898, Mt, Lyndhwest; 2, MEL, NSW, BAI, W. McGillivray,

Sevs., ee Cordille Downs: NSW, BHI, ADW. E, H, Ising, 22.ix.1953, Evelyn Downs

Sta. A

37, Cassia cireinnata Bentham in Mitchell (1548)384.

Mueller, (1859)165. Bentham, (1864)286. Bentham, {1871)556, Mueller,

(1863B)38, Bailey, (1883)126. Tate, (1890)71. Turner, (1891)25. Moore

& Betche, (1893)160. Bailey, (1900)460.

Type Locality: Camp at St, Georges bridge on the Balonne River about

28°S, 148°50’E, Queensland, between Nov. 5-9, 1846, T, L. Mitchell.

Holotype: K,

Description; A shrub, 1-2 m, rarely a small tree, stems appressed pubescent

when young, becoming glabrous, mature twigs grey. Leaves usually completely

reduced to phyllades, the juvenile leayes consisting of 1-3 pairs of leaflets to

12x 6mm, obovate, almost glabrous, phyllodes 1-5-5 x 0-1 cm linear, subterete,

slightly flattened vertically, sometimes clustered at the nodes, appressed pube-

scent when young becoming glabrous, gland not prominent, about & along the

upper edge of the phyllode; stipules 1 mm, subulate, caducous. Flowers few,

in short racemes, in the: axils of the leaves, sweetly scented. Peduncles -61-5

em, pediccls slender 5-10 mm, bracts minute, caducous; calyx sparsely hairy,

ciliate, the outer sepals 3 mm, the inner larger, 6 mm, oval, yellowish green,

corolla bright yellow, glabrous, the petals 10 x 6 mm, oval with a short claw

1-2 mm; stamens 16, all fertile, 3 mm long, the upper 7-8 sessile or with short

filaments, the lower 2-3 with longer filaments 2 mm; style 1 mm terminating the

glabrous green, curved ovary, 5mm, on a stipe of 1 mm; ovules about 14. Pod

variable, flat, | crm broad, stipitate, circinate, forming 1-2 coils 8 cm in diameter,

grey brown. Seeds dark, shining obovate 5 mm,

Distribution: Map 9.

Note: This species bas rarely been confused with any other Australian Cassias. The

specific name "cireinnaty” was used by Benthar although the correct spelling is “cireinata™.

Selected Spacimens—

Qveensiann: §. L, Everist 747. 15.51.1934, Noondoo; kK, BRI, L, §, Smith and &. L.

Everist 892, 21.x.1940, Duneira, 14 m. SE. of Blackall; K. BRI, MEL, CANB, Dr. M-

McGillivray, Ang. 1928, Burcoa River, near Blackall; BRI, ADW. W. N. Rose, 1910,

Windorah; BRI.

New Sourn Waxes: J. Dallachy and Goodwin, Mt. Murchison; KM. K, NSW, MEL.

A. Cuoningham 182, 22.vi.1817, Mt. Flinders: K. E, F. Constable, 11.x.1947, Hustun-Went-

worth Rd.; NSW, J. B, Cleland, 30.x.1911, Gular; AD.

35, Cassia sturlit R.Br, in Sturt, (1849) App. 77.

Mueller, (1863B)38, Bentham, (1864)287, Bentham, (1871)557. Bailey,

(1883)127, Mueller, (18884 )200. Tate, (1890)71- Moore & Betche, (1893)

160. Bailey, (1900)461, Ewart & Davies, (1917)135, Black, (19244 )298.

Domin, (1926)795, Ewart, (1931)612. Williamson, (1930)176. Osborne,

Wood & Paltridge, (1935)392. Ising, (1935)245. Webb, (1948)80. Black,

(1948)4381. Chippendale, (1963)31.

Type Locality: “In sandy brushes of the Western Interior No. 25 D. Sturt,”

Lalotype: BM,

Description; A shrub, 1-2 m, foliage und most parts of the plant grey

pubescent with villous woolly hairs, stems hecoming glabrous with age. Leaves

24 cm, und consisting of (3)4-5(6) pairs of linear-oblanceoclate, emarginate

leaHets, 1-2 x 03-04 em; petiolule 1 mm, petiole 0-5-2 em with 1-3 sessile, glohu-

lar. dark glands between the lower pairs of leaflets. Inflorescence a corymbose

THE GENUS CASSLA L. CAESALPINIACEAE IN AUSTRALIA 1t7

raceme of 4-8 flowers, Peduncle 1-2(3) cm; bracts 2-3 x 1-2 mm, ovate. soon

falling: pedicels 0-5-1-5 cm. Calyx uncqual, vuter lobes 3-4 x 2 mm, inner lobes

3.x 3-4 mm, oval, woolly pubescent, ciliate, Corolla yellow, petals 0-6-1 x 0-6-0-7

cm, aval, claw 2 mm, Stamens [0, all fertile, 7 or 8 of them 2 mm long and

on filaments of 1 mm, the lower 2 or 3 longer 3 mm, on Alaments 3-4 mm.

Ovary 6-7 mm, curved, glabrous or with a few sparse hairs; stipe 2 mm; style

2mm; stigma circular, obliquely terminul. Pod (2)6-7(8) x ig ented ai um,

Hat, straight or slightly eurved, opening along the sutures but not elastic,

glabrous, and containing 5-17 seeds: stipe 2-4 mm; stylar tip 2-3 mm_ often

persisting, Seeds 5 x 4 mm, irregularly obovate, thick-flattish, shining.

Distribution; Map 10,

Note: The name C, sturtti has been misapplied to many specimens of Australian Casstas,

Intermediates with C. artemisivides, the C. desolaia-helmsii complex, and with C. nemaphila

var. aygophylla may be found. The variety coriacea Benth. has heen transferred to become

a variety of GC, nemophila with which, in some forms at least, iL appears to have a close

alinity, The variety fomentosa Benth. and ineolicrata J. M. Blac » bas been raised to

specitic rank (see C. helmsii) and the variety planives |. M, Black transferred to heeome

uw varicty of C. dexolata P, Muell.

Selected Spacimens—

Western Austuania: IT, Basedow. 6.vii.1926. Wooroorinna Watcthole, NW, Peterman

Ranges; K. G. Chippendale, 20.vi.1958, Gilus: NT, ADW. NN. H. Speck 955, L,vil, 1944,

Mileura H.S.; CANB, AD. G. F. Melville 166, 1936, Boolardy,; K, PERTTI.

Nortuern Terrrrony: M. Lazarides 5718, 16.viii.1956, 5 rm. SSE, Undoolya Stn;

CANB. AD, BRI, NSW. Chandler, 1882, The Peake; AD. G. Chippendale, 30.vii, 1954,

Billygoat Hill, Alice Springs: BRI, NSW, N17, ADW. R.A. Perry 3247, 5.i1.1953. 2m. W.

of Undoolya Sin, CANB, K,

QvEENSLAND: C. T, White 11803. 2.iv.1947. Dundoo between Eulo and Thargomindah;

BRI, Dr. McGillivray, 26.viii.1923, Charleville; ADW. RB. A. Perry 835. 16,v,1948, 30 m.

SW. of Uraudangie; BRT, CANB, R.A. Perry 4015, 12m. SW, of Malbon Town: BRI, CANB.

New Sourm Wares; A, Morris, 13.vil.1920, Broken Hill; BRJ, NSW, ADW. S. G.

Couch, Jan. 1913, Tikhooburra; NSW, 'T. aud J. Whaite, 20.01.1956, Mt Manara. 49 an, N.

Ivanhoe; NSW. J, Dallachy and T. H. Guodwin, — Datling River: P, BM. :

Sourn Ausrrania; Hj. Eichler 12564. 12.ix,1956, Chambers Gorge. near Mt. Chanibers:

AD, M, Koch 6, 1899, Mt. Lyndhurst; AD, P, NSW. E. F, Mueller, 18452, Flinders TRanwes;

I, Wf. Helms, 15.v.1891, Ackarinvas NSW, K,

39, Cassia actemisioides Gaudichaud in DeCandolle, (1835)495.

Voxel, (1837)47 Mueller, (1863B)37, Bentham, (1864)287. Bentham,

(1871556, Builey, (18S) 127, Dixon, (1886)19. Mueller, (1888A )200,

Tate, (1890)71, Turner, (1891)28. Moore & Betche, (1893)160, Bailey,

(1900)461. Diels & Pritzel, (1904)274. Black, (19244 }263, Domin, (1996)

795, Williamson, 1930)178, Hwart, (1931)612, Ising, (1995)244. Carn,

(1988)126. Carn, (1989)422, Black, (1948)431. Symon, (1955)190. Chip-

pendale, (196331,

Common Names: Silver Cassia, Dense Cassia, Puntee,

Type Locality: “In partibus Novae Hollandiae interiuribus legit cl. Fraser

(vs, in h, Gaudichaud),”

Specimens—

1, Phere js if Pa specimen labelled Cassin (teretifolia) C. Gaudichaud N,

Holl Pt, Jackson,

2, Ink a sheet of two collections (a) Cassia glancescens Mt, Flinders, and

(b) 163 Fraser N. Holl. Cassia findersia.

3, Inv Ea sheet labelled 100 Cassia flindersia, Barren deserts of the SW

Taterior FI, in Aug. Height 5 ft.

All three collections agree with Ube original description and in view of the

ambiguity of the labelling of the Paris specimen, the specimen in Edinburgh

might best be chosen as a lectotype until the holotype is located.

L18 1. BH. SYMON

Synonyni—

Cassia teretifolie A. Curningham ex Lindley in Mitchell, (1538)286,

Type Locality: “This plant was found by Mr. Cunningham in 1817 on Mt.

Flinders when he called it C. teretifalia.”

Neolotype: K,

Cassia tereliuscula F. Mueller, (1852)389,

Type Locality: “In stony hills near Cudnaka” (Flinders Ranges, Sth, Aust. }.

TF. Mueller,

Holotype: MEL,

Description: A shrub 1-2 m or rarely larger, often with several stems from

the base, Leaves 3-6 cm. grey-green; petiole 0-5-1-5 cm; leaflets 1-4 x 6-1 an.

(3)4-6(10) pairs, slightly or densely pubescent with appressed hairs, tercte and

channelled above, more rarely deeply and broadly channelled to be sub-linear.

sessile; glands 0-5-1-5 mm, sessile or shortly stipitate, between 1-3 of the lower

pairs of leaflets, rarely absent, stipules minute, caducous. Inflorescence an

axillary raceme of 4-12 yellow, sweetly scented Howers. Peduncle 0+5-2 em;

pedicels 5-10 mm; bracts 1-2 mm, ovate sub-persistent; calyx unequal, pales

the outer lobes smaller, 2 mm, the inner lobes 5 mm, oval, ciliate; corolla slightly

unequal, the petals 7-10 x 5-7 mm, oboyate-oval, with a short claw 1 mm;

stamens LO, all fertile, unequal, 2-4 mm, the upper filaments very short, 2-3 of

the lower anthers on filaments 1-2 mm long, one of these flaments sometimes

longer and thicker and bearing a larger anther than the others; ovary 5 mm,

curved, glabrous or with some hairs on the short stipe, ovules (14)-20-( 26).

Pod 4-8 x 06-1 cm, flat, oblong, sometimes shining brown, dehiscent along both

sutures, but not opening elastically, aid with 2-12 seeds; supe 3 mim; a stylar

tip of 1-2 mm often persisting. Seeds 4 x 5 mm, obovate, dark greenish brown

to nearly black, shining, fattish,

Distribution: Map 11,

Nate; ‘This species is widely spread and although usually distinctive, intermediates with

other species to occtir and are sometimes difficult to place. The dividing line between

C. artemisioides and C. nemophila ix not sharp. A most satisfactory break can he made

between plants having 2 (or less) pairs of leaflets (C. nemophila) and those with 3 (or more)

airs of leaflets (CL arlemisioides), This arbitrary division works quite well in pmietive.

t is noticeable that those specimens with only 3-4 puirs of leaflets often have less obvinus

pubescence and approach C, nemophila in this feature too.

Intermediates: approaching C, styrdi ave also found, These have broader, flatter leaflets

and increased tomentum. the individual hairs of which may be almost woolly. Ifere it has

not been easy to draw an arbitrary line, separation depending rather on the width of the

JenHets, For the account of a suspected hybrid swarm see Symon, Aust. Jour. Bot, 3(1955) L90,

Selected Specimens—

Western Atstrarta: N. T. Burbidge 2606. 18.ix.L947, Tom. Lf. -of Codlgardie an the

main Kalgoorlie Road; BRI, CANB, RB, Helms, July, 1809, Conlgarcdie. PERTIT, K, G, BF.

Melville 27 ancl 167, 1936, Boolardy Stu.; PERTH, K. N, H, Speek 577, 3,ix,1956, 5 an. W.

of Meekatharra; AD.

NoxrHeRn ‘Venrtrorny; G. Chippendals, 22.vii.1lps4. 30 m. W. of Hermannsburg; NT

BRI, NSW, ADW. G. Chippendale, 30,vii, 1954. Billygoat Hill, Alive Springs: NT BRI,

AD, NSW. M. Lazarides 5719, 16.viii.1956, 5 m. SSE. Undoolya Stn. BRI, AD. NSW.

R. Tate, 1894, Alice Springs; AD.

Quexensnann: FP. L.. Berney 113, 9ix 934, Barcarolle. 6 an, Fron, Jiuindah; BRI L. §,

Smith and S, L. Everist 931, 23.x.1940, Henley Pk. 5 m. EB, of Jericho: BRI, K, CANB. 8. L.

Everivt 1657, 20.ix.1938, Gouuamurra, near Bulo; BRI, RB. A. Perry 4026. 216.1953, 15 m.

NE. Duchess: BRT, AD, NSW, CANB.

New Sours Wares: A. Morris, 4iii1,1928, Broken Hill; BRI, K. ADW. A. Cunningham

184, L817, Mt. Flinders; BM, K. E. F. Constable, 18.x.1949. Tiboolwrra; NSW, K.P.

Brongbt and WN. Beadle, 24.viii. 1939, Cobur; NSW,

THE GENUS CASSIA L, CAESALPINIACEAE IN AUSTRALIA 119

Vierosia; F, Mueller, Wirmera; P, (a doubtful record).

Sovrn Austeuta: E. H. Ling 1749, 22.ix.1920. ‘Tareoola, BRI, NSW, ADW. C. E.

Muhbard 8894. 264v.1931. Unghes, Nullarbor; BHI, K. R. Tate, 29.viii1883, Mb. Party

(Woof Leigh Creek); AD. R- Elelms, 30.vi,1891, Camp 12, Birkseuto Runge: AD, NSW,

40. Cassia manicula D, E. Symon sp. nov.

Frutex 0-5-1 m, foliis brevioribus densisque et caulibus pilis brevibus ct

allidis dense pubescentibus, Folia ca, 1 em longa, conferta, ex 3-4 jugis folio-

lorum composita; petiolus 1 mm, pilis adpressis sparse vestitus: rhachis 1-2 mm,

supra costata et mucrone brevissimo, 0-5 mm, obtusoque terminata; glandula

parva, 0:5 mm, vonica, inter foliola infima posita, haec a paribus. superioribns

paulo remota; foliola 5-10 x 0-5-0-75 mm, obtusa, supra canaliculata, sed quidem

in sicey terctia ut videtur, apicibus paulo recurvatis ct pilis adpressis sparse

pubescentibus, obtusa; vetustiora folia pallida propter cerac tegumen crassum;

stipula 0-3 mm, triangularia et caduca, Inflorescentiae racemi breves, ex 12

floribus flavis compositae, in axillis folioram superiorum. Pedunculis 2-5 mm,

pilis adpressis pubescens; bracteae 2, 1 mm, sub pedicellis voucavae et trian-

gulares; pedicelli 10 mm, tenues, sparse pubescentes: calyx impar, sepala

exteriora 2.x 1-5 mm, elliptica, et pubescentia, sepala interiora 3-4 x 2-3 mm,

elliptica et ciliata; corolla impar 5-7 x 4 mm, obovata vel elliptica, inferius

petalum longius, 7-10 x 4 mm, concavum et stamen longum saepicns; stamina

10, omnia fertilia (interdum non omnia fertilia), imparia, 3 antherae, 2 mm

longae, in filamentis tennibus, 1 mm longisy una anthera inferior 4 mm longa

in filamento crasso 3 mm longo. Ovarium 4-5 mm, curvatum, glabrum: stylus

1 mm Ieniter incurvatus, glabrus: stigma oblique terminale et anulo piliorum

brevium circumcinctum; ovula 9-13: stipes 1-2 mm, pilis adpressis pubescens,

Legumina matura non visa,

Type Locality: Near Diorite King, Western Australia, shrub 2-4 ft. 5.

Davies, 11.vii.1960.

Holotype; PERTH, Plate 4, Fig, I,

The specific name manicula has been chosen because of a fanciful resem:

hlance of the leaves to a little hand.

Deseription: A sbruly 0-5-1 m, with relatively short, dense foliuge, stems

densely pubesvent with short, pale hairs, Leaves about 1 em leng, crowded.

of 3-4 pairs of leaHets; petiole 1 mm, sparsely appressed pubescent; leaf rhachis

1-2 mm, grooved above, terminated by a yery short (0-5 mm), blunt mucro;

sparsely, minutely pubescent; a small conical gland 0-5 mm, between the Jowest

pair of leaflets which are slightly distant from the upper pairs; leaflets 5-10 x

()-5-0-75 mm, channelled above, but appearing terete at least when dry, sparsely

appressed pubescent towards the tips which are slightly recurved, blunt, the

older leaves pale with a thick waxy covering; stipules 0-5 mm, triangular, cadu-

cous. Inflorescence a short raceme of 1-2 yellow flowers, in the upper leaf

axils. Peduncle 2-5 mm, appressed pubescent; two bracts, 1 mmm, below the

pedicels, coneave triangular, caducous; pedicels 10 mm, slender, sparsely

pubescent; calyx unequal, the outer lobes 2 x 1:5 mm oval, pubescent. the

mner lobes 34 x 23 mm, oval, ciliate; corolla unequal, 5-7 x 4 mm, obovate-

eval, the lower petal longer 7-10 x 4 mm, concave and enclosing the lung

stamen; stamens 10, all fertile (occasional Hewers have been found with fewer

fertile stamens), unequal, 3 anthers 2 mm long, with slender filaments about

1 mm long, 1 lower anther 4 mm long on a stout filament 8 mm long; ovary

curved, 4-5 mm, glabrous; style 1 mm_ slightly incurved glahrous; stigma

obliquely terminal and surrounded by a ring of short hairs; ovules 9-13; stipe

120 TD). E.. SYMON

1-2 mm, appressed pubescent. No mature pods oceur on the specimens seen

by me.

Distribution; Map 11,

Note: This little Cassia is related to C. curdiosperma and C. artemisiodes, It has similar

short nodes and compact foliage. of the fonner, and has terete leaflets like the latter,

The speginens are very uniform and no obvious intermediates with other species have

been seen. The J. Forrest specimen in MEL bears the F, Mueller manuscript name ~“C-

urtemisinides var, fascicularis”,

Selected Specimens—

Western AusteartA: 5, Davies. 11.vii.960, 13 m. N, of Leonora. in stony country,

shruh 26”; PERTH. D. A, Herbert, July, 1918, Lawlers; PERTH. W. FE, Blackall 68,

Sa A eHRs 10 mw. from Leonora towards Laverton; PERTH, J- Forrest, 1869, Lake Barlec;

41. Cassia nemophila yar, nemophila A. Gunn. ex Vogel, (1837)47.

F. Mueller, (1863A)38.

Type Lovaliiy: “In Novae Hollandia (v.s. in Hrb, Luecae).”

Holotype: Not traced, but attributed by Vogel to Cunningham in whose

manuscript notes for 1817 there is a list of plants collected, “183 Cassia eremo-

phila, foliis simpliciter pinnatis, foliolis lanceolata lincaribus canaliculatus,

apicibus subuncinatis, floribus axillaribus racemosis, petiolis communio ulatis

folii formibus. A shrub 6-7 ft high abundant in low deserty country, SW and

Westerly of Lachlan River 7 June’, and in Cunningham’s journal under June 7,

1817, “I gathered flowering specimens of Cassia which is now the greatest

ornament of these deserts and might be termed eremophila, from it being found

in such places.” See also below under C. eremophila R.Br,

Synenyns—

1, Cassia heteroloba Lindley in Mitchell, (1838)121. The following para-

eraph occurs in the text under the date June 6, 1836. “In scrub near lagoon

found a yery beantiful new shrubby specics of Casyie with thin papery pods

and numbers of the most brilliant yellow blossoms. On many of the branches

the leaflets had fallen off, and left nothing but the flat leafy petioles to repre-

sent them. The pods were of varivus sizes and forms on account of which, if

new, I would name it C. heteroloba.” The party was al that time on the north

bank of the River Murray between its junctions with the Darling and Murrum-

bidgee near, but east of, Gol Gol Creck.

ag Pe Locality: Near Gol Gol Creek, N.S.W., T. L. Mitchell, No. 168, Jume 6,

836.

Holotype: CCE,

3, Cassia canalieulata V.Br., in Sturt, (1849) App. p. 77.

Type Locality: In the bed of the creeks of the Barrier Range, about 36

miles from the Darling in latitude 32°5, 1D. Sturt.

Uolotype: BM. This specimen which has been labelled “Type” is certainly

close to C. nemophila var. zygophylla and the name might be considered hy

some to be a synonym of that variety. A specimen in MEL grown from seed

apparently collected by Sturt, from the type locality is definitely C. nemophila

var. zygophylla but the relationship of this specimen to the type is obscure.

3. Cassia eremophila R.Br. in Sturt, (1849) App. p. 78.

Type Locality: In desertis prope Huvium Lachlan anno 1517, detesit D.

Cunningham,

Holotype: There are two sheets in BM labelled respectively: “Cassia species

THE GENUS CASSIA L. CAESALPINIACEAE IN AUSTRALIA 121

. of the brushes of the interior observed in Hower and seed in July, a tall

shrub. Cunningham in Oxley’s ist Expedition, No. 183”, together with speci-

mens collected by Fraser, and on the second shect, “Cassia 188, NSW, A. Cun-

ningham 1817, W. Interiur 1817, Cussia eremophila’, together with specimens

collected by Speticar Moore.

Nn material has been located that has been annotated by Vogel as C, xen

phile, but R. Brown may have annotated the collection “Cassia 183... .”

believe both shects to be part of the type collection for both names, and until

any sheets annotated by Voyel are found these sheets at the BM are considered

neotypes for both names.

Other Cunningham collections are those at K where there is a sheet of

three shoots with the following labels (1); “No, 89, Cassia nemophila Cann,

Reliquae Cunninghamianac. NSW (interior) cir. 1836.~ ‘The specimen to which

this abel appears to refer is certainly close to C. nemophila var. zygopliylla,

(2) a small label “A.C. No, 180” attached to a fragment which appears stinilir

to the specimen above, (3) a small label, “C. eremophila A.C. No, 180? 1857?"

attached to a specimen ahove which, at the top of the shect, is the label “Cassia

eremophila Cunt, mss & R-Br. in Sturt. Shrubs 6° high. Desert country boarder-

ing on the R, Lachlan NSW (Oxleys Ist Exped.) 1817, Cunnnigham Nw, 180,

Pres. by R, Heward”. This specimen (No, 180) represents the narrow terete

leafed plant generally understood in Australia as C. eremophila. The eollec

tion Ny, 89 is also represented by specimens at CGE aud E.

4, Cassia eremophila Bentham, (1864)287,

This is Bentham’s “correction” of the name published by Vogel and has

tu be regarded as an orthographic variant of the latter name.

Bentham, (1864)287. Bentham, (1871)556. Bagley, (1883)127. Dixon,

(1896)19. ‘Mueller, (1888A)200. Maiden, (1889)121, Tate, (1890)71.

Turner, (1891)27, Turner, (1891)29 sub, C. desolata. Moore & Betcha,

(1893)160. Maiden, (1897B)8. Bailey, (1900)461, Diels & Pritzel, (1905)

274.. Ewart & Davies, (1917)135. Black, (1924A)293. Ewart, (1931)612,

Williamson, (1930)177, Osborne, Wood & Paltridge, (1935)392. Ising.

(1935)245. Carn, (1938)126, Carn, (1939)422. Black, (1945)431. Stan-

nard & Condon, (1958)81. Chippendale, (1963)31, 35,

Common Names: Desert Cassia, Bird's Eye, Kangaron Bush.

Description; A shenb 1-3 m, leaves 4-8 cm, pinnate, the leat form of the

species, ils varictics and intermediates is very variable and ranges from a

phyllode with reduced caducous leaflets, to leaves with 1-2(3) pairs of terete

ue linear Ieaflets. Lhe most widespread form of the species is described here.

Petiole terete or vertically fattened to 1-2 mm and then yreen and leaf-like (for

forms with broader petiole see under C. nemophila var. platypoda) terminated

by a mucro 1 mm; leaflets 1-2 pairs, 2-5 x 0-1-0:15 cn terete, tapering to a fine,

slightly booked point, or fattened and linear(for forms with broader or more

numerous leaflets see under C. nemophila var. zygephylla and var. ceriacea)

with a blunter, shortly hooked point, appressed pubeseent when young, becom-

ing glabrous. Specimens from about the Nullarbor may haye a thick grey sealy

cuticle. Older leaflets are often shed leaving the phyllodineous petiole. Glands

0-5-1 mm, between one or both pairs of leaflets, conical-globular; stipules 1 tam,

minute, suhulate, caducous. Inflorescence, a short, axillary raceme, of 3-10

yellow flowers, Pedunele 0-5-1-5 em; pedicel 1 em slender; bracts 1 mm ovate,

caducous; calyx unequal. lobes 1-3 x [-2 mm, ovate-oval, appressed pubescent,

ciliate; curolla unequal, petals 7-8 x 4-6 mm, ovate, with w short claw 0°5-1] 1m,

332 D, E, SYMON

anthers 10, all tertile, unequal, 2-3 mm jong, 6-7 filaments very short 0-5-1 mm,

3 filaments longer 1-2 mm, ovary 3-5 mm curved, glabrous or with appressed

hairs; stipe 1-2 mm, stigma obliquely terminal and surrounded by a coronel

of short hairs, ovules (10)-17-(18). Pod 2-8 x 0-7-0-9 cm, flal, opening slong

the sutures but not elastically and containing up to 10-15 seeds. Secds 6 x 4 mm,

thick, Aattish, oblong obovate, dark hrown,

Distribution: Map 1,

Selected Spevimans—

Wesrenn Austaacta: M, Koch, 13.ix.1923, Merrecin; NSW, K. F, Pritzel 439, July,

1901, between Moore and Murchison; AD. NSW, P, E, BM, K. ©. A, Gardner 780, 21,fx, 1920.

Kalgoorlic; PERTH. M. Drummond 280, 1843. Cygnet River; P.

Nortagny Territory; G, Chippendale, 2 m. NW, of Animaroo H.S.; NT, BRI, NSW,

AD, ADW, RB. A. Perry 877, 21.v.1948, 70 m. WSW. of Lake Nash: TT, kK, CANB, G.

Chippendale, 5.vii.1955, 34 m. S. of Maryvale, NT. NSW, AD, ADW, E. Giles, 1873-74,

between the Albergs and Mt. Olga; MEL,

QueensLann: M. S, Clemens, Apl., 1946. Jericho; BRI. E. Jervis. Get. 1913, Long.

reach; BRE. L. 8. Smith and §, TL, Everist 913, 22.x.1940, 15 m, ‘SW, of Yalleroi: BRI. K,

1, 5. Smith and §. L. Everist 860, 17.x.1940, Oakwood Stn. + 50 m. N, of Charleville: K,

BRI, CANB.

New Sours Wates; L. A. 8. Johnson. May, 1947. Narrundera to Croug Grong, NSW,

kK. F. Constable, 22.ix.1947. Cookamiidgera vin Parkes; NSW. C. Fraser, (1817), Me,

Plinders; OXF. N_C. W, Beadle, Aug,. 1955, Fowlers Gup, 70 m. N, of Broken Hill; AD.

Vicronra: IL. B. Williamson, Qet.. 1915, Werribee Gorge; NSW. F, M. Hendler.

28.x.JH04, County of Baroring; P. 1, Davis, 1889. Pine Plains, Dimboola; MEL. Mrs.

Capt. Rowan, 1886, near Lake Hindmarsh; MEL. C. Walter, Nov., 1887. Lower Loddon

River; BM. 3B, P. Henkel, 3.x.1952. 10 m. E, of Sea Lake on Sea Take-Ulsima Road: K.

Soure Austnatra: S§. T, Blake 16913, 31 .viii.I946, Blinman Cemetery; BRI, CAND.

P Wilson 1797, 20.ix.1960, Ooldea Siding; AD. F. Mueller, 2.ix,1852, pine forest Gawlec-

town, MEL, DBD, E, Symon, 13.x1.1958. Winulta; ADW,

tla, Cassia ncmophila var. platypoda (R.Br.) Benth., (1864)288["Cassiaeremophila

yar. plalypada’ |

Williamson, (1930)175. Chippendale, (1963)81.

Basionym: Cassia platypoda R.Br., in Sturt, (1849) App. 78.

Mueller, (1863B)38. Mueller, Lithograms (1864-65 }1 5,

Type Localily: “Juxta fuvium Murray, anno 1841 detesit Domina Grey,”

[On 27,xi.1841 the Governor and Mrs, Grey visited Moorundi near Blanchctown

on the River Murray in South Australia.] ‘The labels on the sheet in BM read:

{1) “No. 9, Murray Scrub, 27th Nov. 1841. We could procure the one fower

sent as all the plants were in seed. Grows from 7-9 ft. high—shrubby” and

(2) “Cassia platypoda R.Br, South Australia, Murray Scrub, Mrs, Grey.”

lolotype: BM.

Description: A shrub, 1-3 m rarely more. Leaves consist of a phyllodineous

petiole and one (very rarely (wo) pairs uf leaflets which may he well developed,

reduced or absent from mature leaves. Phyllodes 2-5 x 0-2-0-4(0-6) cm linear

oblanceolate, cuneate, vertically flattened, sparsely pubescent when young be-

coming glabrous or with a scaly waxy covering, often with a slight upward curve

and with a hooked tip, mucronate; gland 0-5 mm, conical, terminal. Leaflets 0-5-3

x 0-1-0°2 em, terete or flattened and linear lanceolate and with a recurved aeu-

minute tip, usually deciduous in those forms with broad phyllodes and short leaf-

lets. Inflorescence an axillary raceme of 2-10 flowers. Pedunele 2-10 mm, terete,

sparsely appressed pubescent, bracts 1-2 mm, linear-oblong, soon deciduous,

pedicels 5-10 mm slender; calyx unequal, outer Inbes 2 mm, inner Iches 4 mm.

THE CENUS CASSIA L. CAESALPINIACEAE 1N AUSTRALIA 124

oval appressed pubescent, ciliate; corolla unequal, petals 5-7 x 4-5 mm, oval;

claw 0+5-1 mm; stamens 10, all fertile 2-3 mm long, flaments unequal 05-2 mm;

ovary 4-5 mm, curved, sparsely appressed pubescent or with curled hairs: stipe

1-2 mm; style 1-2 mm; stigma obliquely terminal surrounded by a coronct of

short hairs, ovules (13)-16-(21). Pod 4-§ x 0-6-1 cm, flat,. straight or slightly

curved, opening along both sutures but not elastic; stipe 2-4 mm; stylar tip 1-2

mm often persisting; seeds 215. Seeds 5 x 4 mm, irregularly obovate, thick,

Hattish.

Distribution: Map 12.

Selected Specimens—

Nortiuan Tensrrony: C. Chippendale, 8.111955, 14 m, SH. of Mt, Doreen HiS,; NT,

BRI, NSW, ADW. G. Chippendale, 22.yii,1954. 30m. W. of Hermannsbury; NT, ADW,

BRI, NSW, AD. M, Lazarides 6005, 16,ix.1956, 37 m, SE, of Yuendumu; NSW, AD, Horne

Exped,, 1894, Tipilla (145 kun. SW. of Alice Springs); AD,

New South Watrs: PF. Bruchner, Sept., 1885, hetween the Darling and the Lachlan;

MEL, E, F. Constable, 12.x.1947, Coomealla-Wentworth Rd.; NSW, =A. Morris, May,

1920, Broken Hill; NSW, L, A. S$. Johnson and E. F. Constable, 4.vi.1955, Winnathee Stn,

GO ou. W. of Milparinka; NSW.

Vierara: H. B, Willianison, 5.ix.1912, Mildura; NSW, MEL. Dr. E. D'Alten, —,

tn MEL. M. Daly, Sept., 1921. Redeliff; MEL. J. G. Luehmann, Oct., 1890, Swanhill:

Soute Austnarsa: B, 11. Ising 1477, 11.1x,1920, Qoldea; NSW, AD, ADW. BR. Brawn

4335, 1802-5, Inlet XII (Spencer Gulf); E, BM. F, L. Hill 85, 1953, Em Field, 300 jn,

NW, ot Woomera; K, BM, BD, E, Symon 1141, 10,xii.1960, 38 m. SE. Kingoonya hetween

Lake Everard and Lake Cairdner; ADW.

Wastern Austrauia; T, A, N, Lothian 908, §.vii,1958, Giles; AD, WN. PY. Speck 1404

9,ix,1958, 9 m, N, of Camel Well; AD. J. W- Audus, 3.ix.1926, Keronial; K. C. A. Cardner

18010, 20,viii.l953, Mt. Singleton; PIERTH.

4]h, Cassia nemophila var. zygophylla (Bentham)Bentham, (1864)285.

Basionyms: Cassia zygophylla Bentham in Mitchell, (1845 )288.

Type Locality: From the text above, “incamped under Mt. Mudge (New

South Wales). ,.., In the sheltered ravine below. a curios new Cassia formed

a shraly 6 ft high.”

Syntypes: (a) “T. L. Mitchell No, 268, 29.viii.1846, Fl,, 6 feet, sheltered

valleys”, and (b) “T. L. Mitchell No. 276, S1.viti.1846. In gullies”. Both speci-

mens at K, with an isosyntype of No, 276 at CCE.

Synonym: Cassia eremophila var. zygophyila (Bentham) Bentham, (1864)

258. For further details see also the synonymy under Cassia nemophila.

Chippendale, (1963)31.

Deseription: A shrub 1-3 m, rarely a small tree, leaves 4-8 em Tong, cosist-

ing of 1-2 pairs of linear-elliptic to oblanceolate leaflets (1:5) 3-4 x 0:3-0-5(0-8)

em, appressed pnhescent becoming glabrous with age; petiolule 1-3 mm; a de-

pressed globular gland is preseut between the lower or both pairs of leallets;

petiole 1-2-5 om terete, rarely “slightly vertically flattened; stipules small, de-

ciduous. Inflorescence an axillary raceme of 6-10 Howers, Peduncles variable

0-5-3 cm (short in the type); pedicel 0-5-1 cm; bracts 2 mm, oblong-oval soon

deciduous. Calyx unequal, outer lobes 3 x 2 mm, inner Iohes 5 x 4 mm, oval,

sparsely or densely pubescent, ciliate; corolla yellow, petals 6-6 x 5-6 mim. oval,

claw 1 mm; stamens 10, all fertile, 23 mm long, the upper filaments very short

0-5-1 nm, several of the lower ones longer, fo 2 mm; ovary 3-5 min, curved,

glahrous; stipe 1-2 mm, style 1 mm, stigma small. Pod 2-7 x 1-1-2 cm dat,

straight or slightly curved, brown, opening along both sutures, but not elastic;

124 D. K, SYMON

stipe 3 mm, stylar tip 1-2 mm often persisting. Seeds 6 » 4 mm, irregulyrly

obovate, thick, Mlattish, dark brownish green.

Distribution: Map. 132.

Seleeled Specimens—

Nortuern ‘Terntrory: CG. Chippendsle, 1,viii1958. 18 m. SE. Willawra; NT, NSW,

AD, ADW, T. BR. N. Lothian 700, 1954, corner of Adelaide and Tempe Dawns Stis AD,

R. EF. Winkworth 339, 10.vi.1954. 30 m. WSW_ Narwietooma;s CANB. ADW. Rev. HH.

Kemp, 1479, Finke River; MEL.

Qvurenstann: C. E_ Hubbard 5085, 17.x1.1930, Curulmundi, BRL, K. S. L. Ryerist

3294. 27,.xi.1947. Mungerabar: BRE K. CANB, Dr. W. McGillivray 27.vii} 1923, new

Charleville; BRT, ADW, F. W, L.. Leichhardt. 1v.1843, Oxleys Stn, NSW.

New Suura Wares: W. Forsyth, Oct.. 1899, Warrumbungle Ranges; NSW, BM. E,

Betche, Oct., 1883, Tomingley, S$. of Dubbo, NSW. E, Constable, 1.x.1951, Mungery, Bogan

Buy NSW. K. J.B. Cleland. Oct.. 1918, Pilliga Serubs AD.

Souta Austrania; T. RK. N. Lothian 643, 2t.viii.19G0, 5 m. WNW. of Cordillo Downs;

AD. E, H. Ising 3136, 29.vili.1932, Pedirka; AD, A, L. Crocker. 21.vii1939, Camp 34, NE,

er Eyre North, oeyr Mt. Guson bore; AD. F. M, Hiltom 1391, 10.iv.1955, The Frome;

1c. Cassia nemophila var. coriacca (Benth.) Symon, vonib. nov,

Basionym: C. sturtit var. coriacea Bentham, (1864)288.

Suatype Localities: (a) R. Brown, South Coast, (b) A. Cunningham, Mt.

Flinders; (c) Darling. and (d) Murray Desert and {e) South Australia.

Syntypes: (a) R, Brown (Mimosa pinneta) Inlet XU (Spencer Gulf) South

Coast, 1803; BM, K- (b) A. Cunningham, base nf Mt. Flinders (N.8.W., 1817);

K, BM. (c-d-e not traced.)

Deseription: A shrub or small tree 1-3 m tall, green or glaucotis green jn

appearance, often extremely Horilerous, twigs striate when young and dry,

pubescent. Leaves relatively short 2-5 cm long, but very variable and extreme

forms look very different, leaflets in 2 to 8 pairs; leatets, when in few pairs,

0-8-2.x.0-2-0-3:em long and elliptic or narrow oblanceolate. broadly and shallowly

channelled, or when numerous, 3-5 x 2-3 mm, and obovate, obtuse, sparsely or

densely minutely pubescent or becoming glabrous with age. Petiole 1-10 mmr

(short in the microphyllous forms) channelled above, pubeseeut; the rhachis

similar, 1-1'5 cm long and ending in a minute mucro, | mm long. Gland small

I mm, conical usually between the lowest pair of leaHets, or rarely apparently

absent, Stipules small, triangular, caducous, less commonly dark, sub-persistent,

rarely sub-spinescent. Inflorescence a short corymbose raceme of 6-10 Howers

From the upper leaf axils. Peduneles 1-10 mm, pediecls 5-10 mm, slender; bracts

0-5-1 mm, oblong acute, caducous; sepals unequal, the outer smaller and more

pubescent, 2-4 x 2-3 men, oval; petals 5-6 x 4-5 mm orbicular-oboyate, the lower a

little longer and concaye, claw 1 mm, the flowers often appearing rather elobu

lar, sweet scented, Stamens 10, all fertile, anthers 1-2 mm slightly unequal and

a lower one often slightly larger; filaments 1-2 mm, a lower one often longer.

Ovary 4-5 mm, curved, glabrous or sparsely pubescent; style 1-2 mm, stigma

eblignely terminal; the stipe uf the young pod relatively slender and long 3-5

muy, Pod 35-45 x 10-12 mm flat, oblong, straight or slightly curved, glahrous,

Seeds 5 x 4 mm, oheordate, dark olive brown,

Distribution: Map 12.

Note: This very variable variety has caused considerable taxonomic confusion, Tt jias

been identified as C. sturtii in aany collections, There re yeoyruphical clines running

from east to west, in the nature and mimber of leatlets. The specirnaens from south-castero

Australia have fewer pairs of oblancevlate leaflets and as oue goes Further west the trend

ts to smaller obovate TeaHets and an increase in mimber to. 4-8 pairs. the cline ceachiny

THE GENUS CASSIA L, CAESALPINIAGEAF, IN AUSTRALIA 125

ity extreme on Eyre Peninsula and in Western Australia where the variety is rare. A seoand

cline is a trend from south to north where the more northerly specimens approach C. nemo-

phila var. zygophylla in the north-east and north central areas of its range, and ta comiect

with ©, oligophylla in the north central ureas, both with fewer larger leaflets. In the

southern localities C. nemophila, in the strict sense. is very often accompanied by the

vuriety, but relatively pure: stands of the variety do ocenr, particularly in the western and

north-western areas. of South Australia.

Selected Specimens—

Wesvern AusTRALIA: A, Morrison 16356, 30.x-1906, Carnamah. Vict. Dist.; K,

Nortuean Ternrory: GC. Chippendale, 3.ix.1956, 11 m. N. Maryvale H.S.; NT, ADW.

G. Chippendale, 26-vi.1959, King Creek, 12 m, S, George Gill Range; NT, ADW. CG. Chip-

pendale, 8.ix.1955, Window Hill, Simpson Desert; NT. ADW. C. Culvenor 306, 4.v.196.3,

James Range, 5m; N. of Finke River: NT,

New Souts Waxes: kK. F, Constable, 26.vii.1955, Wooleunda Stn, 65 m. S. of Hroken

Hill; K, NSW. J. Vickery, 15.x.1949, between Euston and Gol Gol; NSW. EN. Charsley,

1886, Silverton; BRI. E. Cheel, 12.viii.1920. racecourse, South Broken Hijl; ADW.

Victorta; B, P. Henekel, 2.x.1952, 10 m, E. of Manangatang on the Manangalong-

Piangil Road; K. St, E. D’Alton, 1903, Dimboola; NSW. F. M, Reader, 6.xi.1903, N. wt

Warracknabeal; MEL. C, Walter, Oct., 1886, between Lake Hindmarsh and Yarriambtok

Creek; MEL.

Soura Avustmaura: F, Mueller, 1852, Enfield (Adelaide); MEL. K. D. Rohrlach 490,

Lix.1859. 35 km. NW. of Kimba; K, AD. L. M, Sherwood, 26,vili,1955, Koonamore: ADW,

kK, AD. M, Koch, Sept. 1899, Mt, Lyndhurst; NSW. P. MEL.

42. Cassia cardiosperma F, Mueller, (1876)50,

Type Locality: In eremo virgultoso inter Victoria Spring & Ularing, Western

Australia, Young, 7.-9.x.1875.

Holotype; MEL.

Synonym; Cassia stotvardi 5. Moore, (1920)171.

Type Locality: Mt. Marshall, Western Australia, F. Steward 386, 1918

Holotype: BM.

Description: A shrub 1-2 m, stems sparsely or densely pubescent with pale,

striyose, hairs. Leaves 1-2 cm, sparsely appressed pubescent, consisting of (2)

3-4 pairs of leaflets; petiole 2-3 mm; leaf rhachis 0-5-1 em, with a minute blunt

mucro; gland conical, sessile, between the lowest pair of leaflets; leaflets 0'8-2 x

0-2 cm, flat or nearly so, oblong-cuneate, obtuse to slightly emarginate; petio-

jules 0-5 mm, distinct; stipules 1 mm, small, triangular subulate, caducous. In-

florescence a short, corymbose raceme of 2-4 flowers in the leaf axils. Peduncles

3-5 mm, appressed pubescent, bracts 1 mm, ovate, concave, caducous; pedicels

5-10 mm, slender, minutely pubescent; calyx unequal, outer lobes 2-3 x 1-5 mm,

oval, inner Jobes 3-5 x 3 mm, oval, all ciliate. sparsely pubescent: corolla un-

equal, petals 6-§ x 3-6 mm, obevate- oval to almost orbicular, a lower petal

slightly longer and concave: stamens 10, all fertile, unequal, 9 anthers 2-3 mm

on filaments 1-2 mm of which 1-2 filaments may be distinctly more slender, 1

lower anther 4-5 mm, prominently curved and on a flament 3-4 mm long and

stouter; ovary 4-5 mm, curved glabrous; stipe 1-2 mm, style 1 mm, stigma

obliquely terminal and surrounded by a ring of minute hairs; ovules 8-14. Mature

pods not seen, but youny pods are flat and on a slender stipe 5 mm long. Secds

not seen,

Distribution; Mup 14.

Nete; Cassia cardiosperma is yaciable and is closely related to ©. nemophila var. coriacea

particularly in the SE. part of its range, Forms occur which have less condensed leaves

pal ue type xed inclyle C. stowardi S. Moore, but a fill range of intermediates is readily

one,

126 B, E, SYMON

Selected Specimens—

Wesrees Ausra: C. A. Gardner 6501, 104.1942, near Dundbleyung; PERTH. 4. tl,

Maiden. Nov., 1909, Laverton; NSW. N. T. Burhidge 177, Ang., 1938, Glenorn Stn..

Malewlm: K. f. Helms, 21.v.1S91. Fraser Range, E. of Norseman; AD,

43, Cassia charlesiana D, E. Symon, sp. nov.

Frutex 1-2 mi altus, ramis tevetibus, bremneis vel brinneo-griscis; folia 4-4

em long, ex 1 pari (rarius ex 2 paribus) m extrerno petioli long phyllodineaedue

constata: folios (0°5)-1-5-(3°3) em longa, teretia vel lincaria, canaliculata, pilis

udpressis sparse pubescentia, glabrescentia, saepe caduca, specimina vetera

interdum sine foliolis; glandulae 0-5-1 mm, conicae vel globosae, inter foliola,

saepe subterminales in phyllodio post casum foliolorum; petiolus 5-9 x 0:1 evn,

phyllodineus, subteres, parum complanatus, sacpe supra curvatus; stipulae 1

ym, subulatae, caducae, Inllorescentia racemus subumbellatus, in axillis

foliorum, ex floribus, 2-4 Havis et maioribus constata; pedunculus 1-2 em, subs

umbella, plerumque 4 bractéis 2 min praeditus; pedicelli 5-7 mm; culyx impar,

sepala exteriora 8-4 mm, interiora 5-6 mm longa, elliptica, sparse pubescentia,

prominenter ciliata; corolla 10 x 8-9 mm, obovata vel elliptica, extrinsecus hirsuta

el villosa; unguis 2 mm Jonyus, birsutus; stamina 10, omnia fertilia, 3-4 mm

longa, 8 in filamentis brevibus 1 mm (interdum 5 hirsutis), 2 in filamentis longi-

orilbus, 3mm et glabris; antherae omnes vel nonnullae interdum in dorso medio

paucis pilis vestitae; ovarium 7-8 mm, curvatum, pilis adpressis dense vestitum,

stipes 2-3 mm; stylus. glabrous; stigma parva; legumen 5-6 x 1-2 cm, oblongum,

planum; sernina non visa.

Type Locality: One milé north of Pintharuka, Western Australia. C. A,

Gardner 7540, 29.5,1945.

Holotype: PARTH, Plate 4, Vig. 2.

Description: A shrub 1-2 m, branches terete, brown or grey-brown, Leaves

4-9 em long, consisting of 1 (less commonly 2) pairs of leaflets at the end of the

lung phyllodineous petiole. LeaHuts (0°5)1+5- ere om, terete or linear, chan-

nelled, sparsely appressed pubescent, becoming glabrous, often shed, old speci-

mras may be almost without leaflets; glands 0-3-1 mm, conical-globular, between

the leaflets, frequently sub-terminal on the phyllode when the Icaflets have

heen lost; petiole 5-9 x 0:1 em, phyllodineous. sub-terete, slightly flattened ver-

tically, frequently curved upwards; stipnles I nim, subulate, caducous, Tifore~

scence uibellate, sub-racemose, axillary, bearing 2-4 relatively large showy

flawers. Peduncle 1-8 cm, with usually 4 bracts 2 mm long below the umhel:

pedicels 5-7 mm; calyx unequal, outer sepals 3-4 min, the inner 5-6 mm oval,

sparsely pubescent, prominently ciliate; corolla 10 x 8-9 mm, obovate-oval,

yellow, hirsute-villous on the outside, claw 2 mm, hairy; stamens 10, all fertile,

3-4 mr long, 8 on short filaments, 1 mm, of which 5 may be hairy, and 2 on

longer, 8 mm, glabrous flaments; some ar all of the anthers may have some hairs

along their outer midline; ovary 7-8 mm, curved, densely appressed pubescent;

stipe 2-3 mm; style glabrous; stigma small. Pod 5-6 x 1-2 cm oblong, flat; seeds

nail seen,

Distribution; Map 13,

Note: This new species has in the pitst been coufused with Cassia nemuphila. Despite

the preat vavintion in some species in the section, Psilorrhegma, I have no hesitation in

giving this specific rank, Tt differs fram C. nemoplile in its distinctive foliage, larger, hairy

Hewers and brouder pod. and trom C, chatelainiana, m having fewer cadneons Jeallets and

sessile glands, Nome of the herbariwn specimens in Australia have mature fraits and the

Uletails of the pod are based on the Morrison collection from Carnamah, now at Kew.

haye named it in honour wf Mr. C, A, Gardner, the namé Gardneri being pre-vecupied.

THE GENUS CASSIA L, CAESALPINIACEAE IN AUSTRALIA 3

Selected Specimens—

Westerns Ausrratia; C. A, Gardner 12084. 8.ix.1953, near Jibberding; PERTH, J. H,

Gregory, 1901, Northam; PERTH. N. H. Speck 799, 13,ix.1957. near Lorna Glen; GCANB.

A. Morrison, 25,is,1904..'S. of Ebbauo, near Yandanooka; K. PERTH,

44. Cassia chatelainiana Gaudichaud in Freycinet, (1826)485, £.3.

Vogel, (1837)47. Bentham, (1864)286. Bentham, (1871)556, Bailey,

(1590)20, Bailey, (1900)460. Diels & Pritzel, (1905)274. Ewart & Davies,

(1917) 134,

Type Locality; “In Novae-Hollandiae ora occidentali baie des Chiens-

Marins” (Shark's Bay, Western Australia).

Holotype: P.

Description: A shrub 14 m: Leaves 4-6 om, with 3-4 pairs of narrow leaf-

lets which are usually widely spaced being 1-2-5 cm apart; leaflets 1-5-4 x 0+ 1-025

cm, linear, with sparse appressed pubescence when young, becoming glabrous;

rhachis ending in a mucro 1-2 mm; glands small conical-globular or cylindrical

on a prominent stipe 1-4 mm, between all or the lower pairs of leaflets; petiole

1-2 om, terete or slightly fattened vertically; stipules 2 mm, subulate, caducous.

Inflorescence axillarv, umbellate, 2-4 flowered, rarely more, flowers relatively

large and showy. Peduncles stout 1-5-2-5 cm, lengthening in fruit to 3-4 cm,

pedicels 1 cm, lengthening to 1-5-2 cm, both sparsely pubescent; bracts 8 mmm.

ovate, pubescent, subpersistent; sepals 5-6 mm _orbicular, sparsely pubesvent,

ciliate; petals 8-13 mm, unequal, oval-orbicular, shortly clawed, pubescent out-

side with scattered appressed, curved hairs; stamens 10, all fertile, 4 mm long

on very short filaments 0-5-1 mm, with one or two of the lower filaments longer

1-3 mm; ovary 7 mm, curved, appressed pubescent, on a stipe of 4 mm; style

2-3 mm, sparsely pubescent; stigma small; ovules 10-13. Pod 5-8 x 1-5-2 om,

flat, membranous, glabrous, stipe 5-7 mm long.

Distribution: Map 13.

Note; The long stipitate glands, and especially the hairy corolla, aid in identifying this

species, It is closely related to C. luerssenit, C. glutinosa, GC. pruinosa and C. charlesiana,

A specimen in MEL (A. Vorrest, 1878, Fortescue River) bears the manuscript varietal names,

“pilesula”, but there seems no justification for adopting il.

Selecled Specimens—

Western Austrania: N. IL. Speck 960, 15,vii.1958, Mileura Hinstd., NSW, CANT,

£, Ashby, Sept... 1930, between Geraldton and Yuna; BM, ADW, A. F. Oldfield, 1855-59,

Murchison River, N. of Murchison; MEL, K. A. Forrest. 1878, Fortescue River; MEL,

45, Cassia glutinosa DeCandolle, (1825)495,

Vogel, (1837)47. Bentham, (1864)286. Bentham, (1871)536. Tate, (18905

71. Ewart & Davies, (1917)135. Ising, (1985)245.

Type Locality: “In Novae Hollandiae ora orientali.” Nowhere in its natural

distribution does C. glutinosa approach the Eastern Coast of Australia, The

type was in all probability collected on the West Coast of Australia by Lesche-

nault under Baudin, There is in P a specimen labelled:

“Cassia

Nouvelle Hollande Cote Occidentale, Port Jackson,

Voyage aux Terres Australes Capitaine Baudin, 1801".

This agrees with the incorrect distribution given by De Candolle and is probably

the type-or an isotype:

Holotype: ? P.

Cassia glutinosa var, ? 3.

128 D, k, SYMON

Type Specimen: “In Nava Holl. et in Ins. Admiralitatis vs. in Hrb. Kth,

e Mus. Par.”

Holotype: P.

Deseription: A straggaly shrub, 1-3.m, the older stems smooth and groy, the

younger stems, petioles, peduncles and pods very viscid. Leaves 2-5 cm.

with 3-4-(6) pairs of leaflets; leaflets 1-2-3 x 0-3-0-5 cm, linear-oblanceolate,

een, glabrous, flat, the edges viscid; petiole 1 cm, terete, viscid, rhachis pro-

uced into a caducous mucro I mm; glands variable, usually one, flat, sessile

between the lowest pair of leaflets, but occasionally more, or absent; petiolules

distinct, slender, 1-2 mm, viscid; stipules 1-2 mm, subulate, caducous. In-

florescence a 2-4(6) flowered, axillary sub-racemose umbel. Bracts 2-3 mm,

green, oblong, caducous; peduncle 2. em, viscid; pedicel 1-2 em, viscid, hoth

peduncle and pedicel lengthen in fruit; sepals nnequal, coloured yellowish

green, broad, 7 mm very sparsely pubescent, ciliate; petals 14 x 10 mm,

obavate-oyal, very shortly clawed, glabrous, showy, yellow, anthers 10, all

fertile, 5 mm long, sessile or 1 or 2 on filaments 1-2 mm long; ovary 5-7 mm, ap-

pressed pubescent, style 1-2 mm, glabrous; stigma small; ovules about 15, Pod

4-6 x 0-5-1-1 cm, flat, shining, viscid; stipe 2-4 mm; stylar point 2-3 mm. Seeds

about 6x 4 mm, itregularly obovate, thick flattish, dull brown,

Distribution: Map 14,

Note: This is the only Australian Cassia in this subgenus which is viseid and jt can

usually he determined by that character alone. However, it iy closely reluted to Cussic

chalelainiana, GC. pruinosa and GC. luerssenii. Vogel (1837)47, tlistinguished a var, B (C,

quadriflora Vegi. mss.) examination of this specimen shows no good reason for muintaining

if ag a Variety.

Selected, Sperimens—

Wesrenn Ausrnaia: P. G. Wilson 2406. 3.viii.1962. Warrabri Gorge, SW. side of

Rawlinsons Range; AD, RR, A. Perry 2481, 14.vii.1949, 22 m. SE. of Gordon Downs Stn.;

K, MEL, BRI, NSW, CANB. 8B. Bynve, 1839-40, Depuch Island; BM. M. Lazarides 6323.

13.vii,1959, 18 m, E. of Margaret River Stn.; ADW, NSW, AD.

Noataern Trenrmony: MeDouall Stuart, Attack Creek; K, MEL. R. A. Perry 2547.

Avii.1949, 14am. N. of Inverway Sta; K. MEL, BRI, NSW, AD. CANS. GC, Chippendale,

{2.vii, L956, 20 mm. SW. of Hooker's Greek; NT, NSW, ADW, AD. ©, Chippendale.

26.71.1955. Devil's Marbles; NT. BRI, NSW, ADW,

Sours Avstrauia: W, S. Reid, 24.ix.1955, Nickel Mine, Mr. Davies, Tomkmson Range:

ATW12950.

46. Cassia Inerssenii Domin, (1926)794,

Type Locality: North Western Australia between the Ashburton and De

Cray Rivers. E. Clement.

Holotype: ? Prague not seen; Tsotype, K.

Description: A slender sparse shrub 1-2 m tall, usually green, non-glutinous,

the younger twigs sometimes slightly pruinose, the plant glabrous except for a

tew sparse hairs on the calyx and the tips of the bracts. Leaves 7-8 em, glabrous,

green, of 5-6 pairs of leaflets, 1-2 » 0-2-0-3 em, linear or narrow linear-oblong,

rounded obtuse at the apex, the pairs of Jeafiets about | com aparl; petivlule 1

mun; petiole 1°5-2 cm; gland small, 0-5 mm diameter sessile between the lowest

or several lower pairs of Jewtlets; rhachis terminated by a small mucro | mim

long; stipules 2-3 mm, lincar-subulate soon deciduous.

{Inflorescence a sub-umbellate. corymhose raceme of 35 showy yellow

flowers from the upper leaf axils, Peduneles 2-3 (4-5) cm, firm, slightly arcuate,

terete; pedicels 2-265 om; bracts 2-3 mm ovate-lanceolate: sepals unequal oblong

evate the outer smaller 5x 3 mm, the inner larger 5-7 x 3 mm. spursely ciliate,

THE GENUS CASSIA L. CAESALPINIACEAE [X AUSTRALIA 126

sparsely pubescent towards the base, petals 10-15 x 9-11 mm, oval obovate,

speseely pubescent outside in the type, but not always so; anthers 10, all fertile,

about 5 mm long, sessile or nearly so and I or 2 on filaments 1-3 mm; long; ovary

about 8 mm long, curved, very sparsely pubescent; style 1 mm; stigma obliquely

terminal; ovules about 20.

Pod 4-5-5 x 1-1-3 cm, oblong, flat, straight; stipe 2-3 mm, stylar tip 2-3 mm:

seeds 6-7 x 4-4-5 mm obcordate, thick Hattish dark olive green.

Distribution: Scattered in arid northem <Ausiralia.

Note: Thix species appears to be closely related to C, pruinuosa and C, glutinusa and its

wide: distribution and sparse populsbons suggest that it may he only an extreme for of

C. pruinosa ov possibly a hybrid between C. pruinosa and C. plutiusy, Dr. B. L. Ture

repurts (personal communication) that it is definitely tetraploid n = C24.

Selectcd Specimens—

G. Chippendale, 11.viii.1959, 23 m, W. Pine Lill Homestead; NT. ADW. CG. Chip-

penelale, $.ix,1955, Hale River, SO m. 8. of Ringwood Homestead; Ni’, ADW. AD. G.

Chippendale, 9.vii.1957, Harts Range, 6 i, S. of Police Stn; NT, NSW, B.A, Perry.

15.iii1.53, 22 m, SSW. Georgina Downs Stn.y NSW, CANB, .

47, Cassia pruinosa F, Mueller, (1862)48,

Bentham, (1864)286, Bentham, (1871)556. Bailey, (1883)126. Tate, (1890)

Tl. Moore & Betche, (1893)160. Bailey, (1900)460, Ewart & Davies,

(1917)135. Black, (19244)293, Domin, (1926)794. Ising, (1935 )245.

Type Locality: “In rocky hills at the mouth of Nichol Bay, Western Australia,

Pemb. Walcott.”

Tlolotype: MEL.

Description: A glabrous shrub 1-5-2 m, often straggly, youn stems, petioles

and peduncles white pruinose, older stems grey. Leaves 5-10 cm, with 3-7 pairs

of Jeallets; leaHets (9)10-15(20) x 3-6 mm, oblong-elliptic, glabrous, pruinos¢

less commonly green, petiolules 1 mm, gland hetween the lowest pair of leaflets

inconspicuous, petiole 10-15 mm, terete, pruinose, stipules variable, 3 x 1 mm to

$x 5mm, falcate lanceolate, pruinose, relatively persistent. The type and some

specimens from W.A. have large, well-developed stipules, but plants from

Central and Eastern Australia have much smaller stipules. Inflorescence sub-

racemose or umbellate, axillary, bearing 4-6 relatively large showy flowers.

Peduncle 2-3 cm, terete, pruinose; pedicels 1-2 cm: bracts 2-3 x 1-5 mm. Calvx

unequal, the sepals oval, the outer ones 3 x 3 mm, the inner 5x 3 mm. Corolla

yellow, petals oval, 12 x 8 mm, the claw short 1 mm, Stamens 10, all fertile

4-3 mm long, the upper ones sessile and one or two of the Jower ones on fila-

ments 1-2 mm long, Ovary 7-8 mm, glabrous, curved, on a short stipe 1 mm,

ovules: (15 )-16-( 181. Pod flat 3-6 x 1 com; stipe 3 mm; stylar tip 1-3 mm. Seeds

5-6 3mm, obovate, thick flattish, dark greenish brown, the surface shallowly

pitted,

Distribution: May Ll.

Nole> This species ig widely distributed ja the northern avid areas of Australia brit iy

rarely conimon. It is typically a thin, straggly shrub om rocky outcrops and slopes, The

specimens frov W.A. tend to be broader in all their parts and more cowpact than specimens

from Central Australia.

Selected Specimens—

Westerns Ausrrania: N. 1, Speck, 10.ix.1958, 18 m. S$. of Lorna Glen; CANB, NSW,

KR. A, Perry 2436, 13.vii, 1949. 40m. $, of Nicholson Sta, CANB, NSW. BRI, MEL, kK, AD.

bY Th. Gusack, 1898, Nichol Bay; MEL, ©. A. Gurdner 3147. 25.viin,1932, Mt. Bree:

PERTH,

1H) : D. E. SYMON

NorTHenN Terrtrory: ©, Chippendale, 13.vii.l955, 24 m. E. of Soudan; NT. BRIT,

NSW, ADW. G. Chippendale. 8.ix.1955, Hale River, 50 m. S. of Kingwood ILS.; NT,

NSW, AD, S.A. White. 23,y.1928. Burrow Creek; NSW. R.A. Perry 3475, 15.11.1953.

22 miles SSW Georgina Downs St.; CANB, MEL, NSW. BRI. K.

Quernsiann: 8, L. Eyerist 3199, 21.xi.1047, Ardmore St.; BRI CAN, 5S. L, Everist

4007, 13.vi.1949, Currawilla, 100m. W, of Windorah; BRE K, CANB. B. A, Perry, 4,ix, 195%.

J3.m. S. of Dajarra;s CANB, BRI, NSW, MBL, K. AD. Dr. McGillivray, “29.vii. 1928,

Dajarra-Urandangie Rd.; ADW-.

New Soutt Wares: E. F. Constable, 24.x.1949, Tibooburra: NSW.

Sortie Austuauea: M. Koch, — Mt. Lyndhurst; BM, MEL. M. Koch, 1899. Mt, Dis-

tance; UM. Rach 265. Sept.. 1898, Mt, Lyndhurst; K. AD. FE. H, Ising 3118, 29.viii.1932,

Pedirka, = 65 km. S. of the S.A\-N.T. border; AD.

48, Cassia Ferraria Symon sp. nov,

Frutex magnitudinis ignotae, ramis rigidis erectisque, caulibus terelibus,

leyibus, glabris. Folia 6-8 em longa, & parihus 4 foliorim constata; petiolus 5

mm longus pilis minutis appressis sparse vestitus; rhachis folii 4 em longa,

trassior et rigidior, petiolo similis, mucrone 1 nim longo, subulate caducoque

terminata; foliola 3-4 x 1-1:5 em longa, elliptica, acuta, utrimque pilis minutis

adpressis sparse vestita; petioluli 2-3 mm crassi, prominentes; glandulae ca, 1

min diametro. rotundatae, sessiles, atres, inter foliola ima et quae proxima

positae; stipulae 1-2 mm longae, subulatae et caducae.

Racemi conferti, Soribus ca. 12, luteis, in axillis foliorum superiorum positi.

Rhachis racemi ca. 3-35 om longa, pedunculo 2-5 cm lonyo, rigide et crasso,

striata et sparse pubescente incluso; bractcae 2-3 mm longae, oblongae; pedi-

cellis 1-5-2 cm longi; sepala elliptico-oblonga, inaequalia, exteriora 5 x 3 mm,

interiora 8-9 x 4-5 mm, ciliata; petala 15 x 11 mm, clliptica vel oboyata, dorso

jlosa; ovarium ca, L cm, adpresse pubescens, ca. 15-oyulatum; stipes 1-2 nim

vugus; stylus 1-2 mm longus stigmate oblique terminali; stamina 10, omnia

fertilia, 5-7 mm longa, filamentis brevissimis 0-5-1 mm longis vel 1-2 flamentis

inferjoribus longioribus 1-3 mm. Legamen non visum.

Holotype: Hamersley Ranges, Western Australia, over the iron ore body at

Mé. Tom Price, M. M. Cole, WA5104, 1963 — PERTH, isotype K, Plate 5.

Description; A shrub of unknown size with firm, erect branches, the stems

terete, smooth, glabrous.

Teaves 6-8 cm of 4 pairs of leaflets; petiole 5 mm sparsely minutely ap-

pressed pubescent; leaf rachis 4 cm similar, both rather stout and firm, termin-

ated by a subulate, caducous mucro 1 mm long; leaflets 3-4 x 1-15 om elliptic,

acnte, sparsely minutely appressed pubescent, above and helew; petiolules 2-3

mm, thick, prominent; ‘alanis 1 mm diameter, rounded, sessile, dark, between

the lower two pairs of leaflets; stipules 1-2 mm subulate, caducous,

Inflorescence a condensed raceme from tho upper axils of about 12 yellow

Huwers.

Pedunele 2:5 cm, firm and stout, striale, sparsely pubescent, axis of the

raceme about | em: bracts 2-3 mm, oblong; pedicels 1-5-2 om; sepals oval-

oblong unequal, the outer 5 x 3 mm, the inner 8-9 x 4-5 mm and ciliate; petals

by fi 1 mm, obovate-oval, pubescent on the back; ovary ahont 1 em appressed

pubescent; stipe L2 mm, stylar tip 1-2 mm, stigma obliquely terminal, ovules

about 15; anthers 10, all fertile, 5-7 mmm long, filaments very short 0-5-1 mm

or 1-3 of the lower Glaments longer 1-3 mm. Pod not seen,

Distribution; Hamersley Ranges, Wesler Australia,

Note: Professee M, Cole states that the species occurred with Eucalyptus duniasr.

Prilotus exaltatus, Burtonia polyzyya, Indigofera monophylla and Corchorus walcoltii. Like

a mumber of other Western Australian species of Cassia this appears to be restricted in its

distribution, The specific name refers to tron ore deposits over which it occurs,

THE GENUS CASSIA L. CAESALPINIACEAE IN AUSTRALIA L3

KEY TO THE SUBGENUS ABSUS

1. Leaflets usually in two potrs, relatively large 1°5-3 em Jong; plant viscid,

stamens 5 _.. as a ns 2 hom 5 Dad! salt lend 49, C. absus

1, Leaflets nuiterous, 6-60 patys, smaller, rarely 2:5 em long, plants not viscid,

51, C. pumila

2, Starmens 10, occasionally fewer, leaves 4-10 cm long, leaflets 5-80 pairs Zt 3

3. Leaflets 5-14 pairs, leaflet 2-2-5 em long... =: _ a 50. C. harneyi

3. TLeatlets 20-60 pairs. leaflets -5-lemlong an set 52, C. pitmosiodes

49. Cassia absus L., (1753)876,

Colladon, (1816)117, De Candalle, (1825)500. Vogel, (1837)50. Mueller,

(1862)50, Bentham, (1864)290. Bentham, (1871)558. Bailey, (1883) 127.

Maiden, (1889)162. Maiden, (1898) 13. Bailey, (1900)463, Ewart & Davies,

(1917)134. Domin, (1926)796. Webb, {1948)79. De Wit, (1955)279.

Venkatesh, (1956)272,

Type Specimen: Holotype in LINN, No. 528.4. Specimen not scen, photo

in AD.

Description: A herb or short-lived undershrub, 10-50 cm, twigs and stems

with viscid bristles. Leaflets accrescent in two pairs 1-2-5 x -8-1-5 cm, thin,

obovate, unequal sided, the top rounded, midrib mucronulate, pubescent; petiole

1-2-5 cm, slender, viscid, pubescent; stipules 2-4 mm, linear-lancealate, pubes-

cent, recurved, persistent. Inflorescence a raceme 2-8 cm, solitary axillary

flowers also occur. Bracts 1-2 mm, ovate-acuminate, bristly; bracteoles 1 mm,

lanceolate, bristly; pedicels 3-4 mm, slender with the two bracteoles unequally

placed towards the middle; sepals 5 x 1-1-5 mm, oblong obovate, blunt, bristly;

petals 5-7 mm, obovate, tapering to a claw 1-2 mm long; stamens 5, all fertile,

filaments 1-2 mm, glabrous; anthers 1-2 mm, slightly tapering, the apical pores

well developed and the lateral split extending downwards; ovary 3 mm, densely

strigose-hispid laterally; style 2 mm, glabrous, incurved, stout; stigma expanded;

ovules 6-8. Pod 2-4 x -5--6 cm, flat, viscid-hispid, elastically dehiscent, stylar

pomt 1 mm; friting pedicel 5 mm, stout. Seeds 4 x 3 mm, shining black, dat-

tish, rounded rhombic.

Distribution; Map 15.

Note: De Wit believes this species to have been introduced to Malaysia from the tropics

af the Old World where it is native. As it was collected in Australia by Banks and Solander,

its introduction to Austrulia must have preceded white settlement if it is not native.

Selected Specimens—

Wrstean AusrrautA; C. A, Gardner 9875, Jun., 1951, Gibb River; PERTH, D. W,

Rust 29, 1.1i/.1950. Karunjie Station; CANB. N. T. Burbidge 5715, 12.4v,1958. near Kimberley

Research Station; CANB,

Nontnenn Tansrrony; R. Brown, 24.11,1803. North Coast (Cotton’s Pobasso and Astell's

{elands); MEI, NSW, K, BM, E, P. F. Mueller, Apl., 1856, Depot Creek: K. —R, b. Specht

176, 4.iv.1948, Nightalitf, Darwin; MEL, BRI, K, CANB, AD. CG, Chippendale, 13.vii.1956,

Sloan. S, of Haoker’s Creek Settlement; NT, MEL, NSW, CANB.

Qurenst.anp: Banks and Solandcr, 1770. Bustard Bay; BM, Rev. N. Michael. Slatey

Creek near Proserpine; BRI, NSW. A. Dietrich 1001, Curtis Island; BM, MEL. C. E,

Hubbard 6672, 19,i.1931, Townsville; BRI. K.

132 D, bk. SYMON

50. Cassia harneyi R, L. Specht, (1958)237.

Type Locality: South Bay, Bickerton Island, Northern Territory.

Holotype: BR. L. Specht 523, 10.vi.1945, BRI. Isotypes were sent to MET,

NSW, CANB, AD, PERTH, L, A, K. and US.

Description: The following is taken directly from the original description.

An annual or perennial herb of short duration with an almost woody stem, 1 m

tall, 20 cm diameter. Leaves 5-9 cm long, 5-14 opposite pairs of leallets, slightly

asymmetric oblanceolate mucronate, slightly hairy, 16-24 mm long, 4455 mm

broad; gland depressed below the lowest pair. Stipules acicular 2 mm long,

Flowers: Peduneles axillary solitary or 2 or 3 together, nnequal, 3-4 mm long.

Sepals obtuse, 3. mm long, Petals 4 mm long. Stamens 8-10; anthers all pertect,

altemmatively long and short. Style with a truncate stigma. Fruit: Pod 2-5-3-5

cm long, 45 mm broad, oblong, finely hairy surmounted eccentrically with a

sparsely hairy style 1 mm long. Seeds 5-9, oblong, 2:5 x 3 mm,

Note: No further collections of this species uppear to have been made, Lt is known

ouly trom the type collection cited above:

51. Cassia pumila Lamarck, (1785)651.

Colladon, (1816)126. De Candolle, (1825)504, Vogel, (1837)65. Mueller,

(1862)47, Bentham, (1864)290. Bentham, (1871 )570. Bailey, (1883) 127.

Moore & Betehe, (1893)161. Bailey, (1900)463. De Wit, (1955)288,

Type Specimen: Not seen.

Synonyms:

1. C. concinna Bentham, (1864)291.

Bentham, (187)581, Bailey, (1683)127. Movre & Betche, (BS) IBL:

Tate, (1897)69. Bailey, (1900)463. Ewart & Davies, (1917)134. Damin,

(1926 )797,

Syntypes:

F, Mueller, Upper Victoria River; MEL. McGillivray, Keppel Islands; K.

J]. C. Bidwill, Wide Bay; K, E. M, Bowman, Broad Sound; MEL. M. Thozct.

Rockhampton; P, MEL. J. Dallachy, Rockhampton; not traced. C. Stuart,

Moreton Bay; MEL. F, W. L. Leichhardt, Met. Flinders, MEL.

3. C, longipes Domin, (1926 )243.

Type Locality; Mungana near Chillagoe, on limestone, North Queensland,

K. Domin 4987.

Holotype: PR No, 527635.

Description: An herbaceous perennial or stall shrub 10-40 em, with several

or numerous slender stems fram an almost woody base. Leaves (}-8-1 em oval in

outline; leaflets 4-7 x 1 mm, in 10-15 closely arrunged pairs, linear oblong,

sessile, uvequal sided, and with an obliquely truncate, unequal hase. acuminate,

veins prominent, glabrous or hispid and with hispid ciliate edges, the lower

edge at each leaflet partly overlapping the leaflet below; petiole 1-2 mm, hispid;

with u truncate stipitate gland below the lowest pair of leaflets; leaf rhachis

hispid, produced into a mucro 1 mm; stipules 1-3 mm, triangular, long acute,

reflexed, rigid, persistent, hispid, prominently veined. Inflorescence 4 single

flowered raceme in the upper axils, Peduncle 4-5 mm, hispid, bracts. similar to

but smaller than the stipules; hracteoles 1-1-5 mm, alternate, sub persistent;

pedicel 3-5 mm hispid. Sepals 5-6 mm, linear lanceolate, acute the outer ones

narrow, appressed pubescent, the inner ones broader, membranous, less pubes-

vent. Petals 8-9 x 5-9 mm, ovate-orbicular, shortly cluwed, yellow. Stamens 4,

TIME GENUS CASSIA L. CAESALPINIACEAE IN AUSTRALIA 193

nearly equal, straight; anthers 3-4 mm; flaments 1 mm. Ovary 2-3 mm densely

appressed pubescent; style 3 mm, curved, glabrous; stigma terminal, truncate or

peltate; ovules. about 8, Pod 2-2-5 x 0-4 cm, flat, elastically dehiscent, sparsely

appressed pubescent, 8-10 seeded, with thin partitions between the seeds. Seeds

2mm, thick flattish, rhomboid, smooth, dark; crateriform pits sometimes de-

veloped,

Distribytion; Tropical Asia and in Australia (see Map 15),

Note: Despite the two characters wed by Hentham in FL Aust. 2(1864) 1 have not

been able to find any vonsistent characters with which to separate C. pumila and GC. coneinna,

Specimens with relatively short petals and slender styles are readily found, peltate stigmas

are less common im Australian plants. In ell other respects the plants are extremely alike.

The two Australian specimens of C. pumila cited by Bentham are rather smaller than the

average material of C. concinna but the description of C. pimila in Malaysia hy De Wit

suggests that there C. pumila is a slightly larger shrublet.

Selected Specimens—

Western Austuauia: A, J. Ewart, May, 1927, near Christmas Creek; PERTH, ©. F,

Barnett, Aug. 1936, East Kimberley; PERTH. Bradshaw and Allen, 1891, Prince Regent

River; NSW.,

Nonmienn Tenmrony: F, Mueller, —, Sturts Creek Desert; K, MEL. i. A. Terry

606, 26.iv.1948, 50m. N, of Termant Creek; CANB, NSW, BRI, MEL, K, G. Chippenlalt,

12.11.1959, 14% m. W. Borroloola; NT, CANB, NSW. ADW. G. Chippendale, 13.vii.L956,

81 m, S, Hooker's Creek; NSW, NT,

Qurenstanp: R, Brown 4246, Aug,, 1802, Keppel Bay; K, EK. L. G. Brass 275, Marcli,

1923, Settlement Creek; K, CANB. BRI. 8S. L. Everist 5187. 8.vi.1952, Range View. 30 m.

SH, of Ravenswoud; CANB, BRI. C. T. White 1356, Feb., 1922, Gilbert River; NSW, BRI,

New Sourn Waxes: H. M, Rupp, July. 1905. Warialda; NSW.

%, Cassia mimosoides L., (1753)379.

Collsdon, {1816)123. De Candolle, (1825)503. Vogel, a es F.

Mueller, (1862)48. Bentham, (1864)29]1. Bentham, (1871)579,’ Bailey,

(1853)127. Moors & Betche, (EN )18i, Bailey. (1900)464. Bailey, ( 1906)

45. Ewart & Davies, (1917)135. Domin, (1926)797. White, (1937)223,

De Wit, (1955)285, Venkatesh, (1956 )272.

Type Specimen: Not seen,

Description: Herb or short-lived shrub, 0-4-1 m tall, stems terete, slender,

appressed pubescent. Leaves 3-8 em, narrow oblong; leaflets 35 « 0-5-1 mm,

30-80 pairs, almost sessile with a short broad petiolule, very unequal sided,

with an oblique base and apex so that the leaflets are almost rhumbic, almost

glabrous but ciliolate along the edges, tip acute, mucronate; petiole short 1-3

mm, pubescent, ribbed, with a single, flat, sessile gland on the upper surface

helow the first pair of leaflets; rhachis produced into a mucro, 1-2 mm; stipules

3-10 mm, Jong acuminate triangular, with prominent nerves, glabrous, sparsely

ciliolate. InHorescence a single flowered raceme, solitary or a group of 3-3 in

the leaf axils, Peduncle 5-10 mm, pubescent; bracts and bracteoles like the

stipules but smaller; pedicels 2-3 mm pubescent, slender; sepals 5-8 mm, lanceo-

late, long acute, pubescent; petals 6-10 mm, obovate, natrowing to a short

elaw; stamens 10 or fewer on filaments 1-2 mm, 2 anthers 5-6 mm, the rest 24

mm; ovary 3-4 mm, sessile, pubescent, style 2 mm, recurved, sparsely hirsute

towards the truncate stigma, ovules (15)-20-(30), Pod 3-4 x -4 cm. thin, flat,

elastically dehiscent, arsely pubescent but becoming glabrous, grooved be-

bony ie seeds, a stylar point 1 mm persisting, 10-14 seeded. Seeds brown,

smouth, flat.

Distribution: Map 15,

134 D. E. SYMON

Nute: De Wit considers that this specits was probably introduced into Malaysia.

where it is now weedy. but that fact that it was collected in Queensland and Northern

Auatralia by both Banks and Solander aud KH. Brown sugwests that it is in fact native to

Australia or was introcuced before white settlement. The specimen from Gibb River, W,A,

(C, A, Gardner 9878), with prominent golden yellow pubesceuce. approaches the “wuricoma™

forms mentioned hy De Wit,

Selected. Specimens—

Wrstrrn Austra: C. A, Cardner 9878, 28.14.1951, Cibb River; PERTH. W. V

Fitygerald 745. May, 1905, 6 m. NE. of Mt. Eliza; PERTH, D, W. Rust 46, 3.iii,1950,

Karunjie Str.; PERTH, CANB. C, A, Gardner 9980, 34,1951. Kunmninya; PERTH, JT, J.

O'Donnell, 1886, near the Ord River; MEL.

Nowrumen Terrrory: A. b, Specht 553, 14.vi.1948, South Bay, Bickerton Tsl.; K) MET,

NsW, AD. BRI, CANB, F. Mueller, 1856. Victoria River; MEL, G. Chippendale, 33.iii, LYB1.

Beatrice Hill, 40 m, SE. Darwin, NT, CANB, ADW. N. T, Burbidge 5021, 4,iv,.1956, 4 yu

Expt, Farm, Kathering: CANB,

2467, 5.y.1930, ‘Tambourine Mnis.; K, BRI, E. F. Constable. 15.47.1952. slopes of Mt.

Berney, McPherson Ranges, NSW, BRI. M, Luazarices, 27.41.1954, 20 in N, of Conjubay

Stin.; BRI, CANB.

New Sourm Warxs: E. F. Constable, 21.95.1953, Big Will, Comara-Anmidale Rd.; NSW,

1838, Pt. Stephens OXF. J. B, Cleland, 26.41.1917, Kendall, AD.

53, Cassia lechenaultiana DeCandolle, (1824)132,

kK. Domin, (1926)243, records this species from a savannah wood near

Yarraba, and from the South Percy Islands (collected H. Tryon); hoth places

aré in Queensland. The species is closely related tu C. mimosvides, but has

larger. broader leaves with fewer pairs of leaflets and a niember of other differ-

ences. The species is native to Wwopical Asia and is considered by De Wit to

have heen introduced to Malaysia where it is occasionally weedy. The H. Trvon

collection at BRI is C. mimosoides and Mr. §. L. Everist (iu correspondence )

does not consider C, lechenaultiana to be established in Queensland.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

It is a pleasure to acknowledge assistance from Miss Mary Todd who gave

me her notes and observations on the genus, from Mr. George Chippendale,

who made special collections of Cassia for me, [ram Mr, Lin Smith tor assist-

ance with the subgenus. Cassia, and from Dr, Hj. Eichler for advice on many

points,

My gratilude is extended to the Directors of the variuus Australian State

Hlerbaria, who gave me access to their collections and of the several European

herbaria BM, CCK, F, OXF, P, PR, TCD, TO, and in particular Kew, who have

helped in ways which make such revisions possible,

collections, and Miss I, A. Shaw prepared the Latin diagnoses.

REFRRENCES

Auusa, M. Ry, and Naranagan, A, ‘T. (1957), Curr, Sci, 26, p. 117.

Awpenson, R. H. (1956). Trees of New South Wales. (Cov. Printer: Sydney.)

Avusuer, J, B, (1775). Histuire des plantes de la Guiane , .. 1, p. 379, L146.

Aupas, J. W. 2(1935), Native Trees of Australia. (Whitcombe and Tombs Ttd.: Melhourne,)

Backrr, G. A. (1941). Beknopte flora van Java em, etl, 5, :

Banex, I, M. (1883), Synopsis of the Queensland Flora. (Guy. Printer: Brishane.)

Barcer, F. M. (1886). Queensland Woods. p, 23 ( Brishane),

Bamry, FM. (18584). Quessadiinl Woods, p. 40 (Brisbane), ;

Bauwry, ¥, MN C1BR8R). Synopsis of the Queensland Flara. Sud Supplement (Chav. Printer:

Brisbane).

THE GENUS CASSIA 1,, CAESALPINIACEAE IN AUSTRALIA 135

Bailey, FM, (L890). Synopsis of the Queensland Flora, 3rd Supplement (Gov. Pyinten

Brisbane),

Bairey,, F. My Prete Bot. Bull. No. 3. Dept. of Agric. Brisbane.

Bamey, F, M. (1893). Bot. Bull. No. 7, Dept. of Avric,. Brisbane.

Barey. F. M, (1897). Od, agric. J,. 1, P. 79,

Basuey,, F. M. Monat! Queensland Woods, p. 48 ( Brisbane),

Baiey, F. M, (1900), The Queensland Flora, Vol. 2. (Gov. Printer: Brisbane.)

Baitey, F. Me (1806). Weeds and Suspected Poisonous. Plants of Queensland, (Pole and

Co.; Brisbane.)

BAILey, he M, (1913). Comprehensive Catalogue of Queensland Plants, (Gov. Printer:

Brisbane, )

Bamey, ), F.. und Warre, C. T. (1915). Od. agric. J... 4, p. 287,

Bawey, |, F,, and Wurrr, C, T. (1916). Qd. agric, J. 5, p. 40.

Barer, |. C.. in Hooxen, J. D. (1878). Flora of British India, 2, p. 261.

Beanie, N. C. W,, Evans, O, D.. and Caron, K. C. (1963). Handbook of the Vasewlay

Plants of the Sydney District and Blue Mountains, (The authors: Armidale.)

Bextuam, CG. (1864). Dora Australiensis, Vol, 2, (Reeve & Co: London.)

BenrHam, G, (1870). In Flora Braziliensis, 15, pp. 86. 120).

Bentiam, G. (1871), ‘Trans. Linn. Soc, Lond. 27, pp. 503-593,

Denes G.. and Hooker, J. D. (1865). Genera Plantarum. Vol. 1. (Reeve & Co;

London. )

Buack, J, M. (1923). Trans, R, Soc, §. Aust. 47, p, 370.

Buacr, J. M. (19244). Flora of South Australia, Pt. 1. lst Ed, (Gov, Printer: Adelitide.)

Brack, [, M, ae ‘Trans. R_ Soe. S, Aust., 48, p. 258,

Brack, J, M. (1938), Trans. R. Soc. S, Aust., 62, p. 354,

Brack, J, M, (1948), Flora of South Australia. Pt, If, 2ud Ed, (Gov. Printer: Adeluide)

Brewan, J. P. M. (1958), Kew Bull. 18, p. 248,

Burton, N, L,. and Rose, J, N, (1930). North American Plova, 23, p. 255.

Bunkiwi, T. A. (1935). Dictionary of the Economic Products of the Malay Peninsula. Vil J,

(Crown Agents for ihe Colonies: London.)

Bunn, N. L. (1768). Flora Indica. (Luagduni: Batavoriin, )

Carn, K. CG. (1938), Agric. Gaz, N.S.W., 49, p. 126.

Gans, K, G. (1939). Agric. Gaz, N,S.W., 50, p. 422,

Cavanitirs, A. J. (1802). Description de Jas plantas. . . Madrid,

Cratrensre, D, (1961). J, Bombay Natural Hist. Soc... 57. pp. 695-698,

CHirrenpace, G. (1963). Aust. J. exp. Agric. Anim. Husb.. 3, p. 31-

Cura, L. (1827), Hortus Ripulensis . .. Secund Appendix. ( Turin, )

Cota, L. (1829), Hortus Ripulensis .._ Third Appendix. {Tyirin.)

Corra, L. (1831A). Hortus Ripulensix ..., Fourth Appendix. { Turin.)

Gouna, L. (1851B), Hortus Pedemontanum. { Turin.)

Coiapon, L, T. F. ( 1816). Histoire naturelle et medieale des Casses. (Montpellier. |

Conner, E. J. H. (1940), Wayside Trees: of Malaya. Vol. I. (Gov. Printer: Singapore. }

DeCanpvouze, A, These: Mem. Soc. Phys, Hist. nut. Ceneve, 2, p. 152,

DeCaNboL ns, A. (1825), Prodromns systematis nabrralis regni vegetabilis , . , Part UL.

( Paris,

DeCanporte, A, (1836). Mem, Soc. Phys, Hist, nat. Geneve, 7. pp. 299-301,

Dr Wir, H.C. BD. (1955), Webbia. 11, pp. 197-292.

Dieu L,, aul Pitzer, F. (1905). Frapmenta Phytographiae Australiac Occidentalis

sPipzig ). ;

Dixon, S, (1886), Trans. R, Soc. 5S. Austy, 8, p. 19,

Dixon, W, A, (1908). Plants of New South Wales.

Domin, K. (1026). Wiblthea. Bot, 89, pp. 790-797.

Don, G. (1832), General History, 2, p. 451.

Dormer, K. J. (1953). New Phytol. 52, pp, 13-315,

eh Hr. ' 1965). Supplement to J. M, Black’s Flora af South Australia. (Cov. Printer:

Adelaide.

Eveniir, & L, (1957), Connon Weeds of Farm and Pasture. (Goy. Printer: Brisbane. )

Ewarr, A. J.. and Davies, O. B. (1917). The Flora of the Northern Territory. (McCarron,

Bird & Co.:; Melhoume, )

Ewaur, A. J, (1931). Flora of Victoria. (Melbourne University Press, })

Pirzcenaup, W. V. (1918). J. Proe. R, Soc, West. Aust.. 3, p. 147,

Fuancts, W, D, (1929), Australian Rain-Forest Trees, (Goy. Printer: Brisbane.)

Fraxces, W, D, (1951), Australian Rain-Forest Trees. (Angus and Robertsan: Sydnev.}

Fresenrus, G. (1839), Flora, 22, p. 53.

Prevemert, L. (1826), Botanique du voyage autour du monde, , — . Paris,

(Angus & Robertson. Sydney.)

136 DB, E, SYMON

Fpabciene > A. (1930). Enumeratio Plantarum Australiae Oecdentalis. (Gov, Priiter:

Perth,

Gatonexn, C, A, and Bennervs, H. W. (1956), Toxic plants of Western Austrulia, (West

Australian Newspapers Ltde: Perth.)

Gray, A. (1854). U.S. Exploring Expectition duving the years 1838-42 _.. Vol. 15. Botany

(Philadelphia).

Havat, M. A. (1963). Bull. Torrey. hot. Club, 90, p. 123.

Hooxen, J, D, (1870). Ivones plantarum, ‘Third Series Vol, (Williams & Northgate, Loudon. )

Hursi, E.. (1942). Poison Plants of New South Wales (Sydney).

lnwin, H., and Turner, B, L. (1960), Amer. J. Bot., 47, pp, 309-318,

Isinc, E. 11. (1938), Trans. R, Soc. S. Aust., 59, p. 240.

Lamancx, M. (1785). Encyclopedie methodique, Vol. 1. ( Paris.)

Linnatus, C. (1753). Species Plantarum, Vol, I. (Stoekhiolen, }

Linwakus, C, (1754). Genera Plantarum, Fifth Edition, ( Stockholm.)

Linnagus, C. f, (1781). Supplementum. . . . asics

Mamen, J. H. (1889). Useful native plants of Australia. (Turner & tfenderson: Sydney.)

Matpen, J. H. (1895). Agric, Gaz. N.S.W.. 6 pp. 232 and 671.

Mawun, J. H. (1897A). Agric, Gaz. N.S.W., 8, p. 4.

Mamen, J. H. (18978). N.S.W. Dept. Agrie. Mise. Publ., 185, p. 8:

Maen, J, H. (1898). N.S.W. Dept. Agric. Mise, Publ, 856, p, 13,

Maingy, J. ia and Brtcun, E. (1916), Census of New South Wales Plants. (Cov. Printer:

Sydney.

Mirtem, P. G. (1768). The Gardeners’ Dictionary. Edit. §,

Mrregeny, T. L. (1838), Three Expeditions into the interior of Eastern Australia, Vol, |

(Boone: London, )

Mercurir, T. L. (1848). Journal of un expedition into the interior of Tropical Australia,

{ Longmans; London.)

Moonr, S. (1920). J. Linn, Soc.,45, p. 171. :

Moons, C.. and Betons, E, (1893). Handbook of the flora of New South Wales, (Sydney. )

Morris, R, (1826). Flora Conspicua, (Griffiths; London.)

Murrier, F. (1852). Linnaea, 25, p, 389,

Mcrnien, F. 1482. Trans. Victorian Institute.

Moceuuex, F. (1857). Hookers J. Bot., 9, p. 229,

Muexter, F. (1858). Annual Report of the Government Botanist and Director of the

Botanic Gardens, Catalogue of plants wnder cultivation in the Melbourne Botanic

Garden, p, 17,

Murer, F, (1859). Framnenta Phytographiae Australiae, Vol, 1.

Muster, FF. (1862). Fragmenta Phytographiae Australiae, Vol, 3.

Mun..en, F. (Beas: Fragmenta Phytographiae Australine, Vol, 4.

Muriuerx, F. (1863B), Plants indigenous to the Colony of Victoria IT Culyeiflorae. (Gov.

Printer; Melbourne.)

Musuien, F, (1864-65) Plants indigenous to the Colony of Victoria, Lithograms. (Cavts

Printer! Melbourne, )

Muetier, F. (1876), Fragmenta Phytographise Australiae, Vol. 10.

Moenner, F, (1882). Systematic census of Australian Plants, Part I—Vaseulares. (McCarren,

Bird & Co.: Melbourne,)

Mueruer, F, (1888A). Key to the system of Victorian plants, (Gov, Printer: Melhourne, )

Mueicer F. (1888B). Victorian Nat. 5, p. 75.

Mueu.ér, F. (1889). Seuond Systematic Census of Australian Plants, Bart 1. {McCurron,

Bird & Co.: Melhonrne. )

Osnouse, 'T, C. B,, Woon, J, C.. and Parrnwen, T. B. (1935), Pros, Tinn, See, N.S.W., 80,

pp, 392-427.

Pantone, (1941), Cuir, Sci, 10, p. 175.

Punsoon,, C. TT. (1805), Synopsis plantarum, 1, p, 459,

Rarinrsgue-Scumarrz, C. 5. (1838), Sylva tat. 1. p. 123.

Rerepensacn, H. C. L. (1830). lconographia botanica exotica... . (Motmeister: T.ipsiae,)

Ror, A. W. (1821). Novae plantarmn species, , .. Halherstadii; Vorler. )

Seppon,, H. BR... and Carwe, H. R. (1926). N.S.W. Dept. Agric. Se. Bull, 26, -p. 46.

Senn, H. A. (1938). J. Amold Arbor,, 19, pp, 153-157,

Sims, J, (1826). Bot. Mag., £2676.

Sproat, R, L. (1958), Ree, Ameriean-Anstralian Se. Exped, to Arnhem Land 3, Botany and

Plant Ecology, (Melbourne University Press, }

Srannann, M. E,, and Connon, KR. W. (1958). J. Soil Conserv. Serv. N_S.W.. 14, pp, 73-83,

STUaE, ce naa. Expedition into Central Australia, Vol. 11, Botanica] Appendix, (Boone:

ondon.

Scracan, HY. (1914). Wild Flowers of New South Wales. (Angus & Rabertson: Syclnuy-)

THE GENUS CASSIA L.. CAESALPINIACEAE IN AUSTRALIA

137

(Educ. Dept.,

Swain, E. H. F. (1928), Timbers and Forest Products of Queensland, (Gov. Printer:

Brisbane, )

Sweerr, R, (1eeA Flora australasica. . . - (Ridgway: London.)

Symon. D. E (1955). Aust. J. Bot., 3, pp. 190-196,

Symon, D. E. (1956), Nature, 177, p, 191,

Tate, R. (1890), Handbook of the Flora of extratropical Sonth Australia.

Adelaide, )

Tare, R. (1897). Trans. R. Sou. S. Aunst., 21, pp, 69-71,

Turnen, F, Ri peep Forage Plants of ‘Australia, (Goy. Printer: Sydney.)

VeLLoso, J. M. (1825), Florae Fluminensis. ... (Arch. Mus. Nac. Rio de Janeiro, )

Venxatesu, C. §. (1956). Phytomorphology, , pp. 168 and 272.

Vewsaresey, c S. (1957), Phytomorphology, 7, p, 253.

Vocu, T, (1837). Synopsis Generis Cassiac (Berlin).

Vooer, T, (1841), Linnaea, 15, p, 72.

Wess, L, J. (1948).

Ind. Res, (Anst.) ) Bull, 232.

Wauirr, C. T. (19 io}, Qd. agric. J., 8, p. 269.

Wurre, C. T. (1919 Qd. agric. J., 12, p. 306,

Wuire, C, T. (1935), Ba agric. J., ‘43, p, 419.

Warts, C, T. (1999). d. agric; I. 48. p, 228.

Warre, C. T. (1939). Proc. R. Soc. Od.,

Warts, C. T. (1940).

Winter, C, T. (1941).

Ware, C, T,. and Francis, W. D

WititveNow, K. L. (1809).

(Berlin. )

Wuitter, J. N. (1958). Weeds.

50, p. 74,

Qd, agric. J., 58, p. 3Al.

Qd. ae J., 55, p.

(1926), Prue, R. Sou, Od.

Enumeratio plantarum horti regii botauici Berolinensis.

(Gay. Printer;

87, p. LOG,

Sydney. )

Wituramson, H. B, (1930). Victorian Nat,, 46, pp. 175-178.

INDEX OF NAMES

Bold face type indicates the. species accepted in this revision.

Bactyrilobium (genus) __,., et

Brewsteria (genus) wa, € _ 75

Cassia absus V. 00 as 131

» Absus (Section subgenus) 77, 131

. @eclinis FMuel, 9 0 un 101

» aciphylla Benth. .,,, a 104

jo» fllataQus, 0 ce, ce hin 94

» Apoucouita (Section) _ TT

. artemisioides Gaudich. ex DC, 117

» australis Sims... 9... . 102

» australis var, glaucescens

Benth ak ee 104

» australis var, pedunculata

Benth, 102

» austrilis var revoluta (F.

Muell,) Benth, . 105

» barelayana var, barclayana

Sweet 89

.. barclayana var. pubescens

(Benth.) Symon 50

« barrenfieldii Colla. _. 102

. Basewphyllum (Section) 77

+ bicapsularis TL. ; _. $5

» brewsteri F, Muell, ac un 80

+ brewsteri var. marksiana

F, M. Bailey §1

brewsteri var. sylvestris

F. M. Bailey 79

. brewsteri var. tomentella

Benth, »- . 8L

brewsteri var, tomentosa F. M.

Guide to the Medicinal and Poison Plants of Queensland. Coun. Sci.

Bailey &2

canalienlata R, Br. 120

cardiosperma F. Muell. . 125

Cassia (Subgenus) 75, 76, 79

Chiamuecrista (Section) . 78

Chamaefistula (Section) 76

Chamaesenna (Section) 76

charlesiana Symon__.., 126

chatelainiana Gaudich. 127

cireinnata Bentli. : 116

cladophylla W. Y, Fitz. 106

coluteoides Colla. 85

coucinna Benth. 182

coronilloides Benth, ,,... 108,

costata J, F. Bailey & C. T.

Whites 6 Se nM le, LO4

curvistyla J, M, Black 107

cuthbertsonii F, Mucell, 110

desolata var. desolata F. Muell, 113

desolata var, involucrata

J. M. Black, Ji

desolata var, planipes (Blick)

Symon : e 114

didymobotrva Fres. ...... 95

eremaphila Benth. _ 121

eremophila A. Cunn. ex &, Br. 120

eremophila yar. 7 Dake m.

Br.) Benth. 129

eremophila var. zygophylla

(Benth.) Benth. ; ee

ferraria Symon ,,, ceo wR

fieldii Colla... one

fistula L, a,

Fistula (section & subgenus)”

floribunda Cay.

glauea Tam. 2 nee

glauca var, suffruticosa Baker

#lutinosa DC.

gonigides A, Cumn. ex ‘Benth...

hamersleyensis Symon _

harneyi R, L, Specht... an

heptanthera F. Mucll..,

helmsii Symon i

heteroloba Lindl, _....

hirsuta L. oa

laevigata Willd, —

lancilolia Colke.

Lasiorhegma sSeetions and Sub-

genus) ea =

laxiflora Benth, am

lechenaultiana DC,

leptoclada Benth.

leschenaultiana DC. ....

longipes Domin

luerssenii Domin

magnifolia F. Muell.

manicula Symon

marksiana (F, M. Bailey)

Domin

mimosoides L,

nemophila var. nemophila AL

Cunn, ex Vogel 2...

nemophila var. coriacea

(Benth.) Symou 4, san

nemophila var. platypoda (R.

Br.) Benth, wn. ous. ih

nemophila var, zygophylla

(Benth) Benth.

neurophylla W. V. Fitz.

neurophylla C, T. White &

W, D. Francis

notahilis F, Mull

obtusifolia L

occidentalis L.

occidentalis var. schinifolia

(DG,) DeWit ~

odorata Morris 0 ae

oligoclada F. Muell. -

olicoclada var, ? gracilis

Benth.

oligoclada yar, _Eenivices (A.

Cunn, ex Benth.) Domin __

oligoclada var. subsinguliflora

Domin aes

D, I

» SYMON

: Oligopbylla var. olizophylla

BF. Muelle a, 112

, oligophylla var. sericea. Symon 113

3, Oncolobium (Section) 76

5, Phyllodinea R.Br. 115

» Pilocarina Symon... 109

» Dlanitiicola Dorin 91

platypoda R.Br. .. 115,122

3» Pplenrocarpa var. pleurocarpa

F. Muell. - 98

>, Ppleurocarpa yar. angustifolia

SyMOW_ . cop Gey 99

.. Pleuroecarpa var. “Jonwifolia

Symon _ 99

» Prososperma (Section) 76

>: Prumosa F. Muell. 129

>» Psilorphegma (Section) 77

» pumila Lam, on. 00000 ous 132

» queenslandica C. 'l'. White 79

» retusa Vogel 104

» retusa var. dietrighise Domin. 101

» Yetusa var, glabrata Domim ., 10]

» vrevoluta F, Muell. 104

» Sschinifolia A.DC. 89

> schultesii Colla, vow 102

» Senna (Subgenus) — _ . 76, 82

» ‘sophera L, .., ' ai 91

> sophera var. barelayana

(Sweet) Domin . 9

>» sophera var. clavigera Domin., 89

» Ssaphera var. pubescens Benth. 90

» sophera var. schinifolia

{A.DC.) Benth. 89

5 stowardi §. Moore 125

>» Slurtii RiBr, 116

» — &turtii var. Peoriacea Benth. 124

» sturtii var, involucrata J. M,

Black .. — il

3 Sturtii var, planipes im M.

Black 114

» stnrtii var. tomentosa Beuth, 111

» suffruticosa Koenig 100

» ‘surattensis Burm. f, .. 1041

. teretifolia A. Cuun, ex Lindl... 118

» teretiuscunla F. Muell. ; 118

» timoriensis DC. _.... 94

» tomentella (Benth.) Domin $1

. tomentosa L. f. fe Oy 87

» torab. une 92

, umbellata Teichh. : 102

» wenusta Fy, Muell un 97

» zygophylla Benth, 123

Cathartacarpus (genus) 7A

Cathartocarpus brewsteri F. Muell, 80

Chamaccrista (gens) _ 78

THE GENUS CASSIA L. CAESALPINIACEAE IN AUSTRALIA 139

Map 1

4 4

‘

i ee eattnee C.queenslandica A . Bea, al

t a C.brewsteri Romy

ww, ye i

Shem Ctomentetla ye

C morksiana ! ee

Map 1. Distribution of Cassia queenslandica, C. brewsteri, C. tomentella and C. marksiana

C.notabilis ie)

C.timoriensis X

ete Mice 0

Map 2. Distribution of Cassia notabilis, C. timoriensis and C. venusta

140 D, E. SYMON

& ha

A :

Map 3

C pleurscorpa '

C.p.var.ongustifotia 0

C.p.varlongifolia +

Map 3. Distribution of Cassia pleurocarpa C.p. var. angustifolia and C.p. var. longifolia.

Woes, es

haa m, r ; \

£ “ek, Ms,

as . ;

yeh Rs at

\ ;

. t

‘ i

4 \

, |

X oe

net

\ 7

j eset

fo Map 4

She ae Colota

C magmfchia

C sbtusifolic

C.tore

xb oO

Map 4. Distribution of Cassia alata, C. magnifolia, C. obtusifolia and C. tora.

THE GENUS CASSIA L. CAESALPINIACEAE IN AUSTRALIA

Map 5

C.barclayang ia}

C.planitiicola x

rs ated

per

\ 5 y4

es, saps

- Caciphyita .

Ccoronilloides 0

C. odorata a

Cretusa x

Map 6. Distribution of Cassia aciphylla, C. coronilloides, C, odorata, and C. retusa.

141

142

D. E, SYMON

jd eng

aa & o 8? is

il - ;

i : Pe oo

{\ ;

\ € a nie fee har

C costeta

C desolata

C dvarplanipes A

C.atigoclada 0

Map 7. Distribution of Cassia

| \ A

An ee Mop8 “He i Lae!

CG helmsii CY) ° ' Se,

Coligaprylia 0 ' Sr te

Cover sericea x : f

Map 8. Distribution of Cassia helmsii, C. oligephylla, and C.o. var. sericea

THE GENUS CASSIA L, CAESALPINIACEAE IN AUSTRALIA

cooeany %

As why Sy

cy fs

Co a LC 4

é oe BN A 4 r La

e i Me. {

a int 1 mm / at

\y : 5)

“ {

at =

oe 2

ae Fa

0 . Y

a iy

\ o. 4 . 4

. ‘

hal TY aN

| ' o

a ee ta _ oS eh e if A A.

~) , of #8 ae om

a) he e A ard i

5, tg lah. va oo e ory

° [ee W218 oe ah

my H 2 ° oR a om aan

Av me cod =e

e s "ee

Natal 4

ste Map 9 “4 ; * t 5,

Ctloribunda xX 4 ‘ ¥

C occidentalis A rt Laer .°

Ccircinnata = 8 ci ao

C phyltodinea & ic Ak

= Es 4

as ae

143

Map 9. Distribution of Cassia floribunda, C. occidentalis, C. circinnata and C. phyllodinea.

H : .

H - ¢

‘oe, *%

=| - . °

ae i toca

; ° *

aye ld |

. c Ps

“ee Map il 4

Csturti @ \ \

Map 10. Distribution of Cassia sturtii.

144 D, E. SYMON

Mop 11

C.artemisiaides @

C menicula c

Map 1l. Distribution of Cassia artemisioides and C, manicula.

Map 12

Unemophita

C.nemvarccriaced

C.remvarplatypoda @

Crem verzygoshylta B =D a

Map 12. Distribution of Cassia nemophila, C. nem. var. coriacea, C. nem. var. platypoda and.

C. nem. var. zygophylla.

THE GENUS CASSIA L. CAESALPINIACEAE IN AUSTRALIA

Map 13

Ccharlesiana ©

C.chatetainiana @

C pilocarina x

-. *

a Map 14

— Ccardiosperma xX

C.glutinosa ®

C.pruinosa is}

Map 14. Distribution of Cussia cardiosperma, C. glutinosa and C. pruinosa.

145

146

PLATE

D. E. SYMON

: 2)

Map 15 A a, #

Cobsus a “~*~ ‘ m, - + f

C.mimoscides O i

i /

C pumela x /

Ma Ao ee

Map 15. Distribution of Cassia absus, G. mimosvides and C. pumila.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES

Holotype

of Cassia pleurocarpa var. angustifolia D. TE. Symon.

of Cassia pleurocarpa var, longifolia D. E. Symon.

of Cassia hamersleyensis D. E, Symon.

of Cassia pilocarina D. KE. Symon.

of Cassia helmsii D. E, Symon.

of Cassia oligophylla var. sericea D, E. Symon.

of Cassia manicula D, E. Symon.

of Cassia charlesiana D. E, Symon.

Holotype of Cassia ferraria JD. E. Symon.

Puate 1, Fics. 1 & 2

SYMON

‘T omsry

‘E amMsly

—

1&2

PLATE 2, Fics.

SYMON

TL analy

TReryp yp ete

i oe ds Nae

Frnt Seren pony} wey

tay Lie cum tr Ww

reenter stasEe

Whinvauad svis

a —

bles

el a! YM

——--

3, Fics. 1 & 2

PLATE

SYMON

“‘T omar

"% onary

Dow eye ars pawanargey

sety ‘16 vutas ergy

Steraetttgn +5 RD

235g) atzeraen ‘y "my AT

“DAT S*e*> WEwUeNTORLT *awe eureny

*TiShyg seToOwED eg EROEN

VitWRISNY “SoNiNES ZINI¥ y

ABOLRREAL NESHLION 40 WAEVaHaH °7 5

cmaneeemaeneoreitccen eter:

MORE FRRaTOH opReN

*3diL- =

SYMON Puate 4, Fics. 1 & 2

s 5 |

1 =

¢ % So

| eg )

i3\ z ie id

a te g 3

ai 3 ee 8

3} 3 #24

2 Fey <P 3 3

< eh ow :

Sane

> |i

KS c

> : ee

s i

3 3 3 £

z3 13

3. |g 4.4

cs i

* ue) Te 3

te 70

it 2 aS

io ws

Ee 4 2 5

E 5 oe

4 a

a me

SYMON

1 ee

pe Ae

* 2 ; a

CA ABA hey ee AAA,

PLATE

arth tte

THE PETROLOGY AND AGE RELATIONS OF ROCKS IN THE

MOONABIE RANGE, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY DAVID SMALE*

Summary

The Moonabie Formation in the Moonabie Range is volcaniclastic, and features present in it may

best be explained by normal sedimentary processes acting on an easily eroded rhyolite or rhyolitic

tuff. The Moonabie Porphyry is a felsitic porphyritic rhyolite, with minor variations to non-felsitic

and more sodic types; it has intruded the Moonabie Formation possibly as a late phase of the

activity that produced the detrital material in this unit. A darker greenish-grey epidote-actinolite

rock occurring at the main boundary between the Moonabie Formation and the Moonabie Porphyry

may be spilitic. In the basal unit of the Corunna Conglomerate in the southern part of the range

epidotization has been strong, and some distinctive epidote-andradite-diopside skarn rocks have

been developed, probably by the introduction of calcium, magnesium and iron.

The existence of an erosion interval between the Moonabie Formation and the Corunna

Conglomerate is clearly shown by the presence of rounded pebbles of the Moonabie Formation in

the lower part of the conglomerate. A few pebbles in the conglomerate could have been derived

from the Moonabie Porphyry. Though the Charleston Granite is clearly younger than the Moonabie

Porphyry. its relation to the Corunna Conglomerate is obscure.

THE PETROLOGY AND AGE RELATIONS OF ROCKS IN TIF

MOONABIE RANGE, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

by Davin Smae®

[Read 9 June 1966]

SUMMARY

The Muonabie Formation in the Moonabie Hange is volcaniclastic, and

featites present in it may best be explained by normal sedimentary processes

acting on an easily eroded rhyolite or rhyolitic tuff. The Moonabie Porphyry

is a felsitic porphyritic rhyolite, with minor variations to non-felsitic and more

sodic types; it has intruded the Moonabie Formation possibly as a late phase

of the activity that produced the detrital material mm this unit. A darker

greenish-grey epidote-actinolite rock occurring at the main boundary between

the: Moouabie Formation and the Moonabie Porphyry may be spilitic. In

the basal unit of the Corunna Conglomerate in the southern part of the range

epidotization has been strong, and some distinctive epidote-andradite-diopside

skam tocks have been developed, probably by the introduction of calcium,

magnesium and iron,

The existence of an erosion interval between the Moonabie Formation and

the Coruna Conglomerate is clearly shown by the presence of rounded pebbles

ot the Moonabie Formation in the Ipwer part of the conglomerate. A few

pebbles in the conglomerate could have been derived from the Moonabic

Porphyry, Though the Charleston Granite is clearly younger than the Moonabie

Porphyry, its telation to the Cornmna Conglomerate is obscure:

INTRODUCTION

The Moonabie Range has been inchided in various studies summarized by

Miles (1954) in his bulletin on the Middleback Range, which covers the

geology of the Moonabie Range in more detail than any previously published

reports. However, the relations between the Moonabie Formation, the Moon-

abie Porphyry and the Corunna Conglomerate in northern Eyre Peninsula have

not in the past been clearly understood, and since 1954 officers of the South

Australian Department of Mines have done a considerable amount of work in

the area, much of which is described by Thomson (1966). Though material

presumed to be correlative with the Moonabic Formation unconformably under-

lics the Corunna Conglomerate at Mt, Laura, north-west of Whyalla, its corre-

Jalion with the Moonabie Formation has been questioned; it has been suggested

that the Moonabie Formation and the Corunna Conglomerate in the Moonabie

Range may, in fact, form a sequence of interbedded sandstones and conglomer-

ates (Webb and Crawford, 1961). Subsequent ficld evidence of Johnson (1964)

contradicts this interpretation.

° The Australian Mineral Development Laboratories,

Trans. Roy. Soc. §. Aust. (1966), Vol. 90.

LOCALITY

MAP

‘eee ee eo,

\eetee a

cereal

peeee es mh,

®t eh ee eee eH

‘f@eee tee ee a oy,

\ Bene wpe eae &# & @ Or,

;@ @ we oe senesees

se e*@ eewpeetetess

“* @oe ete eeweae

se@*e ®@eecseesea#sa*#

owe eh we Oe es

\p ee ee en oeaeorn

peeewee we eones

tle

eee eve ee o

lee tee oe oe

oepeeees

Pr i Pia

Quaternary

Wy Charleston Granite

Corunna Conglomerate

Moonabie Porphyry

Moonabie Fortnation

Spilitic rack

Tracks

Quartz vein

500 Sample localities

Bedding

500 1000 metres

Fig. 1. Geological maps of part of the Moonabie Range.

RELATIONSHIPS OF ROCKS, MOONABLE RANGE, S.A. 153

GENERAL GEOLOCY

The formations whose relations are here examined occur on the western

flank of the Moonabie Range. the main ridge of which rises to 528 ft. above

sea-level at its highest point, The ridge itself consists of a sandstone member

of the Corunna Conglomerate, at the base of which a conglomerate member

eecurs. The Moonabie Formation underlies the conglomerate, and both are

steeply dipping to the east. The Moonabie Formation is bounded on the

western side by the Moonabie Porphyry. The Charleston Granite has intruded

the Moonabie Porphyry, and occupies a large, low area to the west of the range

about 16 milcs across. The general geology is shown in Fig. 1.

The basal unit of the Corunna Conglomerate consists of a conglomerate

with interbedded sandstone lenses, and contains rounded or well rounded pebbles

3 to 30 em. across. Most of the pebbles are porphyritic rhyolite, sandstane or

quartzite, but in the road cutting where the Lincoln Highway crosses the range

Moonabie Formation pebbles are present near the base of the sequence and

Middleback ironstone and shale pebbles are common a little higher, so that

a threefold division can be recognized (Johnson, 1964). The presence of

Moonabie Formation pebbles shows that an ervsion interval thus exists between

the Moonabie Formation and the Corunna Conglomerate. The conglomerate

has heen kaolinized in its upper part in the road cutting, and has been epidatized

with local skarn formation in the south of the area. |

The Moonabic Formation in the Moonabie Range is a dense, medium to

dark grey rock consisting predominantly of felsitie and rhyolitic fragments

0:5 to 5 mm, across in a sericitic matrix that forms only a small part of the

rock, [t is well exposed in a large road-metal quarry readily visible from the

Lincoln Highway. Bedding is not readily apparent, but in many parts is

clearly shown by groups of heayy mineral bands. Pebbles up to 20 em. aeross

are sparsely scattered throughout,

The boundary between the Moonabie Porphyry and the Moonabic Forma-

tion is obscured for most of its length by a dense, dark grey-green basic volcanic

rock that may be spilitic. Around the one isolated mass of the Moonable

Formation where the contact is not obscured, those parts juxtaposed with the

perphyry have undergone extra silicification,

Tongues of the Charleston Granite extending into the porphyry have

chilled margins, and are obyiously intrusive

MOONABIE FORMATION

The Moonabie Formation on Eyre Peninsula includes fine conglomerates,

sandstones and siltstones. In the Moonabie Range, however, it is very unitorm

throughout its outcrop, though its grain size varies from 1 to 5 mm,, and

alteration processes have heen different in different parts, In the southern

part of the range the rock has undergone somewhat more silicificution and seri-

citizatiun than that around the road-metal quarry, and tends to be of finer grain.

Beds containing rounded pebbles are common, though only isolated examples

of pebbles could be seen in the main exposure in the quarry. Even in the

pebble-rich parts, however, they are not sufficiently numerous for the rock fo

be classed as a conglomerate.

In a typical specimen 70 to 80% consists of fragments of rhyolitic rock,

3 to 10% of other fragments ( mostly quartz, feldspar and opaques), and 10 to

25% matrix (see Plate 1, Fig. 1). Most of the volcanic fragments are felsitic,

TAG D. SMALE

consisting mainly of a mosaic of large, grey-polarizing areas possibly crystal-

lized from_a cryptocrystalline or glassy yroundmass, and contain numerous

tmagmatically corroded quartz phenocrysts. Sericitized alkali feldspar pheno-

crysts are rather less common, and altered biotite flakes occur sparsely, Many

volcanic fragments show evidence of having contained abundant feldspar

microlites, but these have been entirely removed and their original positions

are marked by an absence of the fine chloritic and opacue inchisions common

elsewhere in the groundmass, This indicates that the original texture of the

rock may have been hyalopilitic. The microlites vary in size, as do the felsitic

units®; the former are generally ahout 0-02 mm. long, and the Iatter about

0-1 mm- across, though varying between 0-02 and 1 mm, across.

Some of the volcanic fragments are crossed by narrow, irregular quartz

veins which do not continue beyond the edges of individual frugments. Similar

quartz veins are present that continue across many fragments, and these may

even disappear across the intervening matrix. All such veins are in aptical

continuity with the adjacent felsitice units.

In the heavy mineral bands rounded grains of hematite greatly predominate,

smaller euhedral zircons are fairly common.

Scricite is the dominant mineral in the matrix, but a considerable amount

consists of quartz and clay, and it is apparently these constituents that cause

the rock to be so finnly cemented, Near the contact with the Corunna Con-

lomerate in the southern part of the arca, the Moonabie Formation has been

silicified and partly recrystallized, and quartzite “spots” about 2 mm, across

have been developed in some parts, The resultant rock iy a mass of quartz and

sericite which shows very little, if any, original structure. Where the spots are

absent, ghost-like relies of the original structure can he seen and some granules

with relict felsitic texture are present (see Plate 1, Fig. 2), The original ymatrix

cansists almost entirely of sericite, hut this shows little, if any, alignment.

The alteration is even more pronounced further south, where the Moonabie

Formation is juxtaposed with the Charleston Granite, Here the original form

becomes almost unrecognizable, and the heavy mineral bands appear more

homogeneous and partly recrystallized.

Pebbles in the Moonabie Formation

Most of the pebbles in the Moonabie Formation are volcanic, but cherts.

and more rarely siltstones, are also present. None appear to have been derived

from rocks now ouleropping in the Moonabie Range, though some cherty jas-

pilites are present in the Middleback Group.

Most of the pebbles arc porphyritic, but in some of them sericitization has

been sufficiently strong to remove nat only the original material uf the pheno-

erysts, but also most signs of their presence, and the original groundmass

texture has’ been virtually obliterated. Many of the porphyritic rhyolites are

similar ta the material forming the bulk of thé unit. Becanse of the more easily

deformed rature vf the more strongly sericitized pebbles they have much more.

irregular boundaries than those less altered. Some are strongly serrate, and in

general all except the freshest and hardest pebbles (such as cherts) have been

letermed at least to a minor extent by the surrounding [anvework muterial.

Chert pebbles are the commonest of the non-voleanie pebbles; they are

generally fairly pure, and vary in grain size from almost cryptocrystalline ta

wbeut 0:2 mr.

* The tetra “felsitic anit” is used ti refer to one component part of the mosaic of grey-

pblivizing areas.

RELATIONSHIPS OF ROCKS, MOONANTE, RANGE, S.A, INT

The Origin of the Moonabie Formation

The origin of the Moonabie Formation is not readily evident, and whatuver

origin is suggested must take into account the following features:

1. The great predominance of one type of acid volcanic rock amongst the

framework fragments indicates either a very uniform area of praycnance or i

tuffaceons origin,

2, The close packing of the framework and the high degree of roundin

indicates rather unusually thorough sorting, and can be explained by prolonge

sedimentary sorting, which could also explain the rounding, such ‘sorting 104

unnaturally involving considerable abrasion. The sediment must have been in

motion for some time, yet the comparatively large size of the grains suggests

that the distance of transport was not great, Some process of sorting in situ ov

within a small distance is therefore postulated, during which the diner grains

were transported while the coarser ones remained,

A second explanation would account for both the uniform size and the

munding, and assumes that the area of provenance consisted of a readily

eroded perlitic rock, Such rocks are characteristically brittle in addition to

their clistinctive fracture pattern, and the croded detritus would be of two types:

tounded glassy grains of fairly uniform size (described by Johannsen, 1932, as

“marekanite”), and fine shard-like material readily comminuted with compara-

tively little abrasion. The round fragments would resist abrasion longer hy

virtue of their shape. Thus. little physical sorting or abrasion would be required

to produce very uniform fragments,

3 The motual deformation vf the fragments must necessarily have been

post-depositional. The fact that some of the softer pebbles can be ‘seen to have

heen deformed plastically at their edges without altering their general shape

(as shown clearly by a streaked “tail” of a pebble along a cleavage in the rock—

see Plate 1, Fig. 3) indicates that the whole rock was subjected to slight de-

formation at a late stage in its diagenesis.

4. The shape of most of the larger pebbles in the rock, particularly the

cherts, suggests that they were water-worn. Subaqueous deposition is also indi-

cated by the regular and extensive heavy mineral bands, by current-bedding

features displayed by some of them, and by the deformation caused hy the

settling of some of the larger pebbles.

3, The presence in fragments of quartz veins not extending into the matrix

indicates fairly clearly that the veins were ptesent in the parent rock before

erosion, and that the rock was already comparatively old at this time. It scems

juipussible to reconcile this with the possibility that the fragments may have

been derived from a fresh perlitic rock. Some similar quattz veins, however.

cioss a number of grains, and have obviously been formed at a period of

silicification after the deposition of the rock in its present Form,

Classification

The Mvuonabie Formation in the Moonabie Range is highly distinetive,

though by no means unique in South Australia. [t is water-laid, and of normal

sedimentary rather than tuffaceous origin, derived from a uniform. silicifed

rhyolitic arca of provenance. It would he appropriate if same indication of its

ulistinctive nature could be expressed in its classification; to classify it merely

according to grain size is deluding. as the result would be in no way different

Irom a common conglomerate or coarse sandstone. The fact that its grain size

is between 1 and 5 mim, is unfortunate, as this places it across the boundary

between two normal sedimentary divisions.

Las D, SMALE

Fisher (1961), in his proposed classification of volcanic rocks, uses the

term “voleaniclastic’ to cover autoclastic, pyroclastic und epiclastic rocks.

Thomson (1966) uses the term “Moonabie Tormation—volcaniclastic phase”,

which thus secms entirely appropriate.

MOONABIE PORPITYRY

The main Moonabie Porphyry outcrop is bounded to the east by the

Moonubie Formation and to the west by the Charleston Granite; to the north

and south the ground falls away und the outcrop disappears under surface

sand and rubble,

There is considerable variation within the porphyry outcrop from a hard,

black rack with few phenoerysts to greenish-black and reddish rocks with many

phenocrysts. Some of this variation, particularly in the colour of the ground-

rae may be due to secondary alteration rather than to variation in the original

rock,

Alteration hag obscured the relative proportions of plagioclase and alkali

feldspar. Potassium feldspar appears dorninant in most parts of the outcrop,

and in only a few specimens is plagioclase more cormmon. In the specimens of

Moonahie Porphyry that have been analysed K,O is dominant over Na,O, but

the calculation of the CIPW norms shows or to be dominant over ab and an

in only one of the specimens (sec Table 1). Even allowing for the fact that

it may not be sound to use normative feldspar in a mineralogical classification,

this does constitute some evidence that the rock is a rliyodacite rather than a

rhyolite. However, on niineralogical grounds its classification as a rhyolite

may be more acceptable,

TABLE 1,

Analyses wail CTPW norms of Moonahie porphyry.

Analysts 1 2 CIPW norm 1 pi}

of or Oy oy

at) “Ay O rer)

NiO 66-7 65-86 Quartz 29-34 23.46

Al,D, 14-6 14-31 Orthoclase 34°47 23°91

Fo,03 5-25 3-26 Albite | 18-84 26-72

FeO O-73 2-43 Anorthite ; 2-34 12-79

Mg 0-69 1-35 Hypersthene 1-70 a2)

Cad 1-7 BBL Din pside 1-3

Na, 2-15 318 Carundum 3-47 —

KO 5-85 £002 Apatite 0-67 1-67

CO. 10 _ Thmestite 1-Az | D1

P05 33 Os | Hemutite i 5-26 =

Th, 77 45 Magnetite | 41-64

Mn | 0-06 0-13

1. PUST, Analysis by R. L. Broce, Australian Mineral Development Laboratories.

2. Hd7. Analysis by A. McClure (in Joplin, 1963).

Virtually the only specimen with enough unaltered plagioclase to allow

identification by use of the universal stage was found to have a composition

Ang, to Atturs.

The mafic phenocrysts are not as common as the feldspars, and are generally

considerably smaller. Almost all of them have been altered, but they may have

heen derived from such minerals as hornblende, ilmenite and muscovite.

Rarely secondary hornblende is present. Some of the phenocrysts in which

sphene and opaques are ussociated are fairly distinctive, with sphene forming

RELATIONSHIPS OF BOCKS, MOONABIE RANGE. 5$.A. 15ia

« coating on the opaque. In some, opaque material is pseudomorphous after

some other mineral (see Plate [, Fig. 1). Some secondary epidote has heen

introduced in parts of the outcrop.

The groundmass is distinctive, and was originally probably hyalopilitic; it

has a felsitic texture with a unit size of 0-1 to 0-4 mm., increasing to 0:8 ymm-

near the contact with the Charleston Cranile. Feldspar microlites have heen

abundant, generally 0:008 to 0:6 mm. long, and in the original rock there was

probably as much feldspar present in the microlites alone as there is now

remaining in the phenocrysts. The mierolites have been replaced by quartz in

uptical continuity with the felsitic units (sce Plate 1, Fig. 4). Rare specitnens

may have heen fine-grained rather than glassy.

Some of the felsitic units are in optical continuity with small, rounded

quartz, phenocrysts, as though these had acted as nuclei for the crystallization

of the glass. ‘This is the only form in which quartz appears to have been

present in the original rock; other quartz now present is either a product of

crystallization of the glassy groundmass or else secondary, Quartz phencerysts

uot in optical continuity with the felsitic units have not been observed in the

Moonabie Porphyry, though they are common in the detrital material in the

Moonabie Formation.

Specimens from near the contact with the Charleston Granite show definite

recrystallizathon; though the felsitic texture is still readily discernible, the grannil-

mass has become a mass of fine-grained crystals of plagioclase, quartz and

biotite. The new plagioclase has a composition of Ang;, in contrast with the

older plagioclase in the phenocrysts,

Tt is noteworthy that in the altered porphyry from near the granite the feld-

spar Bhennemsts have been far less altered than elsewhere, except for the

growth of small, new plagioclase crystals within them; it is as though the

recrystallization of the groundrnass has protected the phenoerysts from serici-

tizution (see Plate 2, Fig, 2).

Relationship between Moonabie Formation and Moonabie Porphyry

From the resemblance between the Moonabie Porphyry and the framework

of the Moonabie Formation it would seem initially that the latter could have

been derived from the erosion of the porphyry; however, the field occurrence

indicates (as stated by Miles, 1954) that the porphyry is intrusive. It is difficult

lo determine the nature of the main contact between the two. as this fs ohsoured

throughout its length by the basic volcanic (spilitic) rock (q.v-), but in two

places there are contacts discernible.

At the first, where a small outlier of the Muonabie Formation oceurs within

the main porphyry boundary, the contact is very irregular, and where the

Moonabie Porphyry is directly jn contact with the Moonabie Formation there

is a zone about 30 em, thick where the latter has been silivified,

The second is a small outcrop of porphyry on the same side of the spilitic

rock as the Moonabie Formation; here there is a clear and sharp contact hetween

the porphyry and the Moonabie Formation, and the porphyry forms hulhaus

masses that leave no duubt of its intrusive nature, It is slightly more altered

than most of the Moonabie Porphyry, but it is within a few metres of the

main porphyry mass, of which it appears to be an off-shoot. It probably repre-

sents the only part of the Moonabie Porphyry that breached the barrier formed

by the spilitic rock, the bulbous nature of the porphyry and the fack of alters-

tion of the Moonabie Formation (in contrast with the first contact described )

probably heing a result of the fact that nearly all the heat of the porphyry was

160 D. SMALE

used up in breaching the barrier. A similar situation may exist in the south of

the range, but alteration there has been considerable,

The petrographic similarity that exists between the framework of the

Moonabie Formation and the porphyry suggests that the porphyry may have

been @ later phase of the same period of volcanic activity that produced the

voleaniclastic material.

BASIC VOLCANIC ROCK BETWEEN MOONABIE FORMATION

AND MOONABIE PORPHYRY

This rock occurs along the main boundary between the Moonabie Forma-

tion and the Moonabie Porphyry. Its ficld relations are not clear; it could he

associated either with the Moonabie Formation or the porphyry, or even be

oe It is presumably one of the “older dolerites” mentioued by Miles

1954).

The rock is dark greenish-grey in hand specimen, and is usually fairly

fine-grained and homegencous in appearance, Its outcrop can be traced every-

where along the main boundary between the Moonabie Formation and the

porphyry, though it is not present near the outlier ocewring within the main

porphyry boundary.

Everywhere this rock contains large quantities of pale green amphibole

(actinolite). Generally nothing remains of any original material, but in some

specimens both phenocrysts and microlites of albite are fairly abundant (see

Plate 2, Wig. 4).

The phenocrysts are twinned on the albite and Carlsbad laws, aud com-

monly show signs of strain, bending, and even fracturing, ‘They are subhedral.

but in detail have yery irregular outlines. Much secondary actinolite and

epidote are present, and these mincrals predominate in some parts of the rock,

forming a coarse mottling with the less altered parts. Some vesicles appear toa

have been irregularly lined, and some almost filled, with fibrous actinolite, the

remaining space has been filled with fine-grained epidote. A noteworthy feature

iy the presence in some specimens of rure, narrow veins of prehnite,

In a few specimens a large number of opaque-rimmed relict phenocrysts

are present, forming about 10% of the rock.

In sOme parts of the outcrop the phenocrysts are sparse, and have been

completely altered to two types of chlorite; that along original cleavages is pale,

and the remainder is darker yreen. There are no opaque rims.

DISCUSSION

This rock contains certain distinctive petrographic features:

An abundance of epidote and. actinolite;

relict vesicles or other cavities;

albite phenocrysts and microlites;

relict phenocrysts with opaque rims;

a general absence of quartz, and rare veins of prehnite.

A specimen of the rock was analysed; the results, together with the results

of the CIPW norm calculation are given in Table 2.

From this table it can be seen that the composition is very similar to thal

of typical spilites, especially in the SiO. content, the high CaQ content, ant in

particular in the high Na,O;KyO ratio.

19 >

ore ¢

RELATIONSHIPS OF ROCKS. MOONABIE RANGR. S.A. 1k

TABLE 2.

Aualysis and CIPW norms of hasic voleania rock (P273/63) (a)

Analysis % CIPW norms hy

SiO, 5-0 Quartz 5-64

Als, 16°0 Orthuclase 3-80

Heats 630 Albite R144

FeQ 3°55 Anorthite 25-02

MgO 4-95 Hypersthene fie 10

Cad 9-18 Diopside 13-60

Na,0 3°75 Apatite 0-67

K,0 0+ 70 Timenite 2-43

CO, O-1t Hematita 0-46

TiO, 1-25 Magnetite 11-83

P40, 0-28 |

MnQ Q-14 |

(a) Analysis by L. Castanclli, Australian Mineral Development: Laboratories,

These petrographic features and the chemical composition are all charac-

teristic of spilites, though opinions differ as to the extent to which the origin

of spilites forms a necessary part of their definition. Hatch, Wells and Wells

(1961) regard a geosynclinal origin as a feature of major importance, Vallance

(1960), however, from the examination of references to spilites, concludes that

the environment is sufficiently wide to allow the statement that “potassic spilites

occur typically in epicontinental or continental associations” (page 37).

The rocks are thus considered to be best classified as spilites, even though

the environment is not geosynclinal; no other name would convey the existing

characteristics of the rock so appropriately,

Age Relations of Basic Volcanic Rock

As all the contacts of this reck with others are obscured, there is not enough

evidence to produce a satisfactory theory on its relations with the juxtaposed

rocks. However, it seems unlikely to be a dyke intruding both the porphyry

and the Moonabie Formation, as it occurs so consistently between them and

never actnally within either of them.

The only way in which it seems possible for the spilitic rock to be asso-

ciated with the Moonabie Porphyry is, as suggesied by Miles (1954), as an

amphibolitic selvedge. However, the petrographic similarity to a spilite, and

the compositional difference between it and the porphyry, indicate that it is

unlikely to be a part of the porphyry.

A possibility is that it may have been a dyke intrmded into the Moonabie

Formation, forming an almost impenctrable barrier to the Moonabie Porphyry,

which was later intruded alongside it.

THR CORUNNA CONGLOMERATE

The Corunna Conglomerate is well exposed in the cutting where the

Lincoln Highway crosses the range, and in the southern part of the area, but

the characteristics of the rock yary in the two places, that in the catting being

partly kaolinized, and that in the south being epidotized.

The conglomerate contains some interbedded sandstone lenses (which by

silicification and epidwtization to the south superficially come to resemble the

Moonabie Formation), but on the whole consists of rounded or well-rounded

162 D, SMALE

pebbles from 3 to 30 mm. across in a matrix of quartz sandstone of the same

type as that in the interbedded lenses.

The types of pebbles are described below,

Pebbles in the Conglomerate

funeous Rocks, These are all acidic volcanic rocks. No granilic pebbles

could he found, though a careful search was made. Jeohnson (1964) reports

that they are rare.

Porphyritic rhyolites are the most common, and resemble basically the

rhyolites that abound on Eyre Peninsula, including the Gawler Range Porphyry

and Moonabie Porphyry. Though all the rhyolites contain essential quartz the

amount varies considerably; in some it is present only in the groundmass, but

in others half the phenocrysts may be quartz, with typical corroded subhedral

shapes. Alkali feldspar paenpetysta, commonly microperthitic, are common in

all, and oligoclase or andesine phenocrysts are present in most; plagioclase yery

rarely forms more than one-third of the total feldspar. Mafic phenocrysts were

once present, but all have been altered to irregular, small scattered masses of

opaques and chlorite. Rarely the disposition of the opaque material suggests

ene sy" of the original minerals may have been an amphibole (see Plate 2,

ig. 3).

The proundmass of these specimens generally has felsitic texture, aud

numerous pebbles haye relict hyalopilitic texture in addition. In this they

resemable much of the detrital material in the Moonabie Formation, and they

may have been derived from the same parent rack,

Pebbles with vesicular and spherulitic texture are present to a minor extent.

Metasomatic Rocks, These are comparatively rare; some consist of qnartz

and orthoclase, others of albite, epidote and ilmenite. Both have textures indi-

cating that they are not solely of igneous, metamorphic or sedimentary origin

Sedimentary Rocks. Most of the pebbles of sedimentary rocks are serivite-

and clay-cemented protoquartyites, and many are orthoquartzite. ur were before

epidatization. Cementation has been partly by authigenic overgrowths on the

quartz grains, and partly by sericite (possibly with a little clay and chlorite),

A few feldspathic quartzites are present, generally well-sorted and having

undergone some recrystallization destroying the texture of the matrix.

Pebbles of Middleback ironstone and shales are common in some parts of

the conglomerate, particularly in the central section exposed by the Linculn

Highway cutting and for about 400 yards to the south.

Perhaps the most significant pebbles are those of material from the Moon-

able Formation, which oveur a short distance stvatigraphically above the wneon-

formity with the Moonabie Formation, The contact is not exposed,

Pebbles of ordinary sedimentary conglomerate occur very rarely, and may

have been derived from a coarser phase of the Moonabie Formation,

Relation between Moonabie Formation and Corunna Conglomerate

The contact between the Moonabie Formation and the Corunna Conglomer-

ate in the Moonabie Range is everywhere obsenred. Nevertheless, the presenve

of numerous pebbles of the volcaniclastic rock in the lower part of the com-

womerate is dleat evidence of an erosional break between the two. From the

petregraphy of these pebbles and from the nature of their rounding, it can be

deduced that at the time of the erosion of the Moonabie Formation it was very

similar to its present highly indurated forts. However, the urea of Mounabic

RELATIONSHIPS OF ROCKS. MOONABLE RANGE, §,A, 163

ormation available for erosion must have been yery limited, as the occurrence

of yoleaniclastic pebbles in the conglomerate is very limited in extent. This

may have resulted from progressive marine transgression fram the east, as

pebbles of the Middleback Gronp predominate in the middle part of the con-

Hlumerate (Jonson, 1964),

Relation between Moonabie Porphyry and Corunna Conglomerate

These two formations have uot been observed in contact, as the Moonabie

Formation is always present between them: however, there is some eviderve

that the Moonabie Porphyry is alder.

Althongh many of the voleanie pebbles in the conglomerate resemble the

Moonabie Porphyry superficially, very few appear to have been derived from

it specifically. In rare pebbles, however, certain features apparently charac-

teristic of the Moonabie Porphyry can be observed; these are pseudomorphie

apaqnes surrounded by sphene, and small rounded quartz phenocrysts in optical

oie Ty with the surrounding felsitic units (see Plate 2, Fig. 3 and cf. Plate

2, Fig. 1).

ff, as has been suggested, the Mosnabie Formation and the Moonabie

Porphyry are similar in age (the detrital material in the Moonabie Formation

possibly having been derived from a rock formed by the same period of

volcanic activity as the porphyry), then from this tov it follows thal the porphyry

is older than the cunglomerate.

Skarn Formation in the Corunna Conglomerate

Ta the southern part of the area some distinctive skarn rocks have been

developed; epidotization and garnetization are marked, and the Corunna Con-

glamerate as a whole has wndergone marked reddish-brown discolouration,

Epidotization is generally shown by patches. of strong alteration in the

inatrix, and by a grecn discolouration of the quartzite pebbles; where it has been

particularly strong, epidote crystals up to 1 em. across occur, Garnet is commonly

associated with the epidote in these parts, and in the more severely altered

specimens the original structure of the rock is obscured. The garnet and epidote

are fairly coarse and similar in form. and appear to be contemporaneous, The

courses epidote and gamet crystals commonly grade into fine-grained agsregates

associated with numerous individual quartz grains of similar size.

The epidote is strongly pleochroie from pale yellow to deep greenish

yellow. ‘The yariety is epidote in the nomenclature of Dect, Howie and Zuss-

man (1962), as it is optically negative and has hivher refractive indices and

birefringence than clinozoisite. Its optical properties indicate a composition

of 70% CazAls(OH )SisO,y and 30% CasFe, (OH )Si,0j.,

The garnet generally vuries from pale brown to greenish brown, and is

cammonly well zomed (see Plate 3, Fig. 3). The darker zones are generally

isotropic, but the others are wharacteristically birefringent, giving low first order

interterence colours. The composition of the garnet in a specimen assumed

tu be fuirly typical is given below. This shows the specimen to have been

impure, but markedly rich in andradite.

In rare specimens diopside is present in addition to garnet and epidote

(see Plate 2, Fig. 4). It contains numerous small quartz jnelusions, and js

generally in erystals up to 3 or 4 mm. across; its refractive indices {Na = 1-69,

Ny — 1-73} indicate thal it contains 40% of hedenbergite.

164 D, SMALE

Chemical Analysis (a) of Garnet from DS 15/29

SiO» 37 °5

CaQ 30-3

TiO, - 6G

FeO; 30-2

Fe0 0-66

MnQ Q- fg

TW 11

(a) Analysis by R. B. Oliver.

Discussion of the Skarn Rock

In the southern part of the area most rocks have been affected by epidoti-

zation. The Moonabie Formation and the Moonabie Porphyry have been

affected only to a small extent, and the cpidote is generally present in small

veins. A pale purplish-brown discoloration suggesting oxidation appears to be

associated with the epidote veins and occupies a space on cach side similar in

thickness.

The Corunna Conglomerate has been affected to a far yreater extent than

any of the other rocks, The skarn rocks have been found only in the Corunna

Conglomerate, and even then only in a small part. The skarn minerals indicate

a preponderance of Ca, Mg and Fe, and it seems more likely that these elements

were introduced rather than that they were originally present in the conglomer-

ate, as there are no indications of calcium- or magnesium-rich minerals in the

unaltered rock, or of any iron minerals apart from those in the Middleback

pebbles, which are generally absent in the skarn area,

With so much aluminium present in the skurn, it is a little surprising that

the garnet is so exclusively andradite rather than a combination of andradite

and grossular, An explanation could be that all the available aluminium was

used in the formation of epidote, and the remaining calcinm and iron went into

farnet and pyroxene,

Whereas most calcic skarns are formed by the introduction of Fe and Mg

into limestone (Turner and Verhoogen, 1960, p. 572), Firman (1957) has de-

scribed skarns adjacent to the Shap Cranite, Westmorland (Engkind?), in which

Ca and Fe have been iniurdthioed into rhyolitic and andesitie wall-rocks and

fissures. Near the boundary between the Corunna Conglomerate and the Mann-

abie Formation is a large quartz vein about two feet thick extending for some

distance but always just within the Moonabie Formation outcrop. Smaller

quartz veins, presumably similar in age to the large one, cut across all features

of the conglomerate, and are obviously a result of a late phase in the history

of the rock, It therefore seems likely that at the time of the skam [ormation

this large vein may have been a fissure up which the miueralizing fluids had

access, Jt ig relevant that the epidotization and discoloration of the Corunna

Conglomerate parallel the line of this vein in a poorly-defined zone 100 to 300

feet wide,

The Charleston Granite outcrops about 700 yards from the skarn, and

could be closer than that beneath the surfuce. Et would seem appropriate from

Firman’s work for (he skarn constitnents to have been largely derived from the

pranitc. However, dating of the Charleston Granite has shown it to be older

RELATIONSHIPS OF ROCKS, MOONABLE RANGE. S.A, 165

than the Corunna Conglomerate in the Corunna Range (Compston, in Thomson,

eh. In the absence of any other likely source for the skarn, one is forced to

conclude cither that the Corunna Conglomerate in the Corunna Range and that

in the Moonabie Range are not correlative, or that the Charleston Granite was

intruded by stages over a Jong period covering the time of formation of the

conglomerate, Again, the granite that gave rise to the skarn may be «ite

distinct from the Charleston Granite, and be still hidden beneath the outcrop-

ping rocks, It should be noted that granite pebbles in the-conglomerate are

not generally observable.

The composition of a specimen of the Charleston Granite « yuoted by Edwards

(1954), taken frum a depth of 100 feet in a shaft, shows secondary enrichment

in Ca, Al, F and Fe, forming epidote, fluorite, hematite and pyrite, and the

potassium feldspar is redder than that in the unaltered rock. This alteration

hears a noteworthy resemblance to that undergone by the Corunna Conglomer-

ate, ind may be evidence for the existence of a granite intrusion younger than

the Charleston Granite not represented at the surface,

ACKNOWLEDCMENTS

Permission from the Director of Mines and the Director of The Australian

Mineral Development Laboratories to publish the information contained in this

paper is gratefully acknowledged. Considerable assistance in the investigation

was given: by Mr. B. P, Thomson and Mr. J. E. Johnson of the South Australian

Department of Mines, and by the members of ‘staff of The Australian Mineral

Development Laboratories, especially Mr, P. J. Sweeney and Mr, H. W. Fander.

The author is indebted to Mr. Thomson and Mr. R. Dalgarno of the Depart.

ment of Mines for their comments and suggestions on the text.

REFERENCES

ee hat A, Howur, Ry A, and Zossman, J, 1962, “Rock-torming Minerals.” louernans.

sondon.

Epwanws, A. B,, 1954. Petrological Study of Rocks from the Middleback Ranve and Fuvirone.

Appendix to Geal, Surv. S. Aust, Bull, 33,

Finan, R. J, L957, issure Metasomatism in Voleanic Rocks Adjavent te the Ship ‘Granite,

Westnorland. Quart, Journ. Geol, Soc. London, 413, pp. 205-220,

Pistucn, R. V., 1961, Proposed Classification of Volcuniclastic Sediments and Rocks. Geol,

Soc. Amer, Bull, 72, pp. 1409-1414.

Haren, F.. HW, Weours, A, K.. and Weis, M, K., 1961. “The Petrology of the Leneans

Rocks", 12th ed, "Thomas Murby and Co,, London.

JOWANNSEN, Ay, 1932. “A Deseriptive Petrography of the Teneous Rocks.” Univ, of Chicago

Press,

Jounson, J. E.. 1964, Progress Report on Stratigraphic Sequence in Moonabie Runge, Oeol,

Surv, S. Abst, Rept. GS3015, Rept. Bk, 52/120, D.M, 1145/64,

Jorun, CG. A. 1963. Chetnical Analyses of Australiate Rocks: Pt, 1: Iyneous aod Meta-

morphic. Bur. Min. Res. Aust., Bull. 65,

Mires, K. Ay. 1954. ‘The Geology and Ore Resources of the Middleback Range Area, Geol.

Surv, S$. Aust.. Ball, 33.

Tuomson, BL P., 1966. The Lower Boundary of the Adelaide ee aml Older Basement

Relationships. in South Australia, Journ. Geol, Soc, Aust., Vol, 13,

Toaren, FP, J. and Veruooons, J., (960, “Igneons and Metamorphic Petrology’, 2nd ed,

MeGraw-Hill Book Co. Inc., New York.

Variance, 1, G., 1960, Concerning Spilites. Proc, Liun. Soe, N.S.W. 85. pp. 8-A2.

Wein, B, Py and Crawrorn, A, R., 1961. Report on Northerr Kyre Peninsila. Geol. Snry,

5. Aust., Rept. Bk, 53/24, GS2071, D.M. 1209/61,

DAvip SMALE PLATE |

Fig. 1, Typical Moonabie Formation from road-metal quarry, T$15296, Crossed nicols. x 25,

Fig. 2. Typical Moonabie Formation from southern part of range. TS15104, Crossed nicols.

x25.

Fig. 3. Pebble in Moonabie Formation showing “tail” along joint plane.

Fig. 4. Relict hyalopilitic texture in Moonabie Porphyry. TSL5091. Crossed nicols, x LOO.

Davip SMALE

PLATE 2

Relict mafic phenocrysts in Moonabie Porphyry. TS15090, «100.

Fig. 2, Recrystallized groundmass and andesine phenocryst in Moonabie Porphyry. TS15089,

Crossed nicols. 100.

Fig, 3. Quartz and relict mafic phenocrysts in pebble from conglomerate, T'S15072.

part crossed nicols, x40),

Fig. 4. Diopside with garnet and epidote in skarn. TS13662. x40,

Upper

A REMARKABLY PRESERVED AUSTRALITE

FROM PORT CAMPBELL, VICTORIA.

BY D. H. MCCOLL*

Summary

A remarkably well formed and preserved australite (tektite) is figured and described, from a new

locality in the Port Campbell district, Victoria. The flanged button displays detailed features which

indicate solidification in vacuo and subsequent aerodynamic ablation in its flight through the

atmosphere. It is typical of the general high state of preservation of the australites from this area,

which are tentatively correlated with similar material from Moonlight Head, Victoria.

A REMARKABLY PRESERVED AUSTRALITE

FROM PORT CAMPBELL, VICTORIA.

by D. H. McCot.?

[Read 9 June 1966]

ABSTRACT

A remarkably well formed and preserved australite (tektite) is figured anc

deseribed, from a new locality in the Port Campbell district, Victoria, The

flanged button displays detailed features which indicate solidification in vacuo

and subsequent aerodynamic ablation in its flight through the atrnosphere, It is

typical of the general high state of preservation of the australites from this ares,

which are tentatively correlated with similar material from Moonlight Head,

Victoria.

INTRODUCTION

A circular flanged button australite showing remarkable preservation was

found in January 1965, by Robert Lawson (who has since kindly donated it to the

Museum of the Geology Department, University of Adelaide), ten miles east of

Port Campbell, Victoria. The australite was found lying, rear surface upwards,

in rain-washed detrital material in a roadside drain approximately eight hundred

yards south of the Range Road intersection on the Cobden Road, five miles from

Princetown (38°37#’ S., 143°10’ E.). It had obviously not been moved far from

its original locality, as it shows no appreciable wear on the smooth fusion surface.

Description:

Diameter — 2.1 cms. Weight — 5.02 grammes

Thickness — 1.0 cms. Specific Gravity — 2.40

The figure given for the specific gravity is not more exact, due to sand

grains embedded around the flange and in some of the pits on the rear surtace.

Despite the high degree of preserved detail, the specimen appears in no way

to contradict the theories of australite formation and flanging, as put forward by

Baker (1,2). The front surface carries the normal melting rings, circular towards

the centre, but tending to spiral after the second ring. The region of turbulent

flow around the edge of the forming flange would apparently be responsible for

the rippling of the rings as they move further back. Not well shown in the photo-

graph are very fine radial striations which extend from near the stagnation point

of the front surface uniformly in all directions, and fade out after crossing the

first two rings. The only physical damage perceptible on the australite appears

on this front surface in the form of minute chipping from the centre and first

prominent ring, having the appearance of having been caused by percussion.

This may even have been caused by the impact of landing, since the other sur-

faces and rings show no such signs.

3 Geology Department, ‘University of Adelaide.

Trans. Roy. Soc, 8S, Aust. (1966), Vol. 90,

170 D. H. McCOLL

The rear surface shows the flange, which is not perfectly smooth, but shows

fine concentric striations due to the successive flows of glass during ablation.

The central area is of particular interest, as its appearance to some degree cor-

responds with what has been considered to be etching produced by soil acids. It

is mainly marked with smooth indentations resembling bubble pits. Most of

these are circular but some are oval, and a few which are very elongate show

the flowline structures present in the original primary australite spheroid. An

oval area, about two millimetres long, is noticeable because of its being relatively

unpitted.

Baker (1) has already pointed out that in laboratory etching tests there

appears to be no difference in etching rates of the front and rear surfaces of

australites, hence it is suggested that this pitting is almost certainly a feature of

the original surface of the primary spheroid, which has been protected and pre

served, The nature of the surface would not be unexpected nor unusual if the

theory is correct, that australites were initially formed as masses of liquified

material, which were drawn into spheres by surface tension, and simultaneously

subjected to the low pressures of outer space. Outgassing of such material would

be expected to produce a finely bubbled surface of the type shown by this

specimen,

The locality in which the australite was

found is also of interest as it is nearly ten

miles northwest of the Moonlight Head

strewnfield referred to by Baker (1),

in which the australites were in a very

good state of preservation, In this same

direction, nearer to Moonlight Head, are

other areas which are producing austra-

lites with equal preservation, ouly as yet

none so complete as this specimen des-

cribed above, These areas, more inland

than those described by Baker, yet bear-

ing a similar profusion of australites in an

identical geological environment, possibly

indicate an extension or elongation of the

Moonlight Head strewnfield, in a north-

west-southeast direction. It does at least

indicate an area where geologic history

has been more favourable to australite

preservation than any hitherto discovered

in Australia.

REFERENCES

lL. Baker, G., 1956. Nirranda Strewnfield Ans-

trlites, Southeast of Warrnambool. Western

Vietoria, Mem. Nat, Mus. Viet. 20» 59-172.

2. Baker, C.. 1961, A Complete Oval Austra-

lite. Prov, Roy. Sac, Vict, T4, (1): 47-34,

EXPLANATION OF PLATE

Front surface (A). side view (B). and year

suvface (C), of the complete flanged button

australite from the Princetown-Cobden Roarl

Port Campbell. Victoria. (Seale in centimetres ).

AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL STONE ARRANGEMENTS IN

NORTH-WEST SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY T. D. CAMPBELL AND P. §. HOSSFELD

Summary

A brief account of this interesting occurrence of aboriginal stone arrangements was published by

Butement and Pither (1956), who were members of the scientific party making a survey of the area

when the site was discovered. Mr. R. W. Boswell, O.B.E. -then Controller of the Weapons Research

Establishment - considered this site merited further examination and in May, 1960, kindly arranged

for a visit by the present writers. The present notes provide a more detailed and illustrated

description.

AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL STONE ARRANGEMENTS IN

NORTH-WEST SOUTH AUSTRALIA

by T. D. Caxrsent anp P. §. HossreLp

[Read 14 July 1966]

A brief account of this interesting occurrence of aboriginal stone arrange-

ments was published by Butement and Pither (1956), who were members of the

scientific party making a surycy of the area when thc site was discovered. Mr.

RK. W. Boswell, O.B,E.—then Controller of the Weapons Research Establish-

ment — considered this site merited further examination and in May, 1960,

kindly arranged for a visit by the present writers. The present notes provide a

more detailed and illustrated description,

The site is situated in the Great Victoria Desert —the eastern portion of

which forms a large arid area in the north-west of South Australia— and lies

4 miles west of a minor peak called Observation [ill (Lat, 28°52'10"S, and Long,

132°03'40’E.). It is about 170 miles north of the Head of the Great Australian

Bight and about 199 miles east of the Western Australian Border. (See Fig. L

inset), This north-west region is a tableland covered by sand as large areas of

sand plain with scattered sand dimes. Where the sand has been removed and

bed rock exposed, the surface consists of dense, hard and tough. siliceous

materials ( icsgunihnt th These materials were the sources of the chalcedony,

jasper, agate, porcellanite and chalcedonised sandstones which, in. this region,

were uséd by the aboriginals for the manufacture of stone artifacts. The duri-

crust was formed during a former climatic cycle over Lower Cretaceous shales

which dominate the sedimentary sequence over much of the Great Artesian

Basin, [rom Qucensland and New South Wales in the east, through northern

South Australia, to the border of Western Australia, including the area con-

cerned here. Where dissection has broken through the duricrust, the soft

shales and other beds undergo erosion very rapidly. Removal of material is

checked, to sume degree, by relatively resistant, horizontal rock layers, thus

producing terraces with fairly even surfaces.

At the present site, three main levels can be recognised. The uppermost

is the original tablcland to the west, with its duricrust and superimposed sand,

To the east, the lowest level is represented by a Jarge claypan, the recipient of

the drainage, Between these two levels, there exists an intermediate zone

within which the aboyementioned factors have produced several terraces at

successive levels and increasing in size eastwards, These ate connected by short

talus slopes, he lowest terrace contains two small watercourses or gutters

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. (1966), Vol, 90.

172 T. D. CAMPBELL anp P. S$. HOSSFELD

which divide it into three parts—referred to below as sections of this main

terrace (Fig. 1, A, B and C) —on which the stone arrangements occur. To the

west of section B, two small, semicircular shelves rise about 1-5 m. and 1:2 im.

above that level (Fig. 1, D and E, and Plate 1, Fig. 1).

Fig. 1. Sketch plan of stone arrangements.

An important feature is a stratum of tough limestone near the bottom of

the exposed sediments and visible in the banks of the upper parts of both water-

courses (Plate 1, Fig. 2). This horizonally-bedded limestone weathers cleanly

— both above and helow, from the shale formation of which it is a member —

to an average thickness of 6 to 8 cm. Its well-developed and regular jointing in

two directions at right angles to the bedding surface thus produced large rect-

angular slabs of relatively uniform dimensions. Examination of a number of

these slabs gave ayerage mcasurements of 90 to 96 cm, in length, 25 to 30 em. in

width, 6 to § cm. in thickness,

ABORIGINAL STONE ARRANCEMENTS IN| NORTHWEST S.A. 7A

These exposures were quarried and formed the obvious sources of the slabs

used in the construction of the stone pile arrangements (Plate I, Fig, 2 and

Fig, 1. Q). The exposed crumbling limestone bed forming the curved eastern

murgins of the main terrace has produced a talus slope—about 2 m, high —

including broken blocks of similar shape but of much smaller size than those

described above (Fig, 1, TTT).

The collections of piles on the main terrace sections have obviously under-

gone disruption [rom their original form and position through natural causes,

However. the remaining more or less intact and collapsed structures are suffi-

cient to provide at least a general, if incomplete, representation of what must

have been an imposing array.

A compass survey was made (by P,S.H,) of the site, features of the terraces

and positions of the main groupings of the rows of stune slab piles. The data

collected have been used to compile the skotch plan in Fig, 1,

DETAILS OF THE STONE ARRANGEMENTS

Section A

The slab atrangements on this section are practically limited to a single

straight row formation, lying roughly north aud south (Fig. 1 Aa and Plate 2,

Fig. 1). This row, approximately 30 m., long, is made up of the remains of at least

20 structures, about an average of 0-9 m, apart, mest of which are now collapsed.

Some at the northern end appear as if they may have consisted of a single

Jarge slab, set upright in the ground; a few of them now lic flat. The majority

of the whole series apparently were, in their original state, pile structures, each

with a single upright slab supported by smaller ones sct obliquely against it.

Judged by the number of the smaller supporting members, they do not seem

to have been the imposing pile formations occurring elsewhere on the site.

On the western aspect, towards its southern end and about 2 m. away from

this long row, is a single, fairly intact pile built up of a large central slah

surrounded by a supporting mass of 13 fairly large slabs (Fig. I, Ab and Plate

1, Fig. 1).

Apart from these remains ol this impressive long row of structures, only

a few other single slabs were observed lying about some distance away from.

and apparently not associated with, the main row.

Secrion B

This central area of the terrace presents the remnants of what was, in the

original state, obviously the most concentrated collection of arrangements on

this site. Near the watercourse at the northern end of this section, is a row of

at least six piles (Fig. 1, Be, and Plate 2, Fig. 2) three of them more or less

intuet, the others collapsed into 2 heap of slabs on the ground. These structures

ure all approximately 2 m. apart. Those in fairly intact condition consist nt 4

large central slab, supported by twelye or more, placed obliquely against it,

The collapsed pile at the eastern end of this row consists of a jumbled collection

of slabs among a heaped mass of pebble rubble. Beyond this are some dispersed

slabs — also with pebble debris — around a small dead tree, probably forming

a seventh pile of this northern row. About 3m, to the south of this line, a fallen

dead mulga tree has the remains of a small pile of slubs at its root end (Pig. J,

Bd). Then 2 m. further cast is a small heap of collapsed slabs; and 3m. to the

west of the fallen tree, the collapsed slabs of a large pile may have formed

member of this row.

Li T. D. CAMPBELL anv P. & HOSSFELD

Another 2m. to the south and situated more easterly, a row consists of two

piles with upright slabs and two collapsed piles —all these about 2 im. apart

(Vig, 1, Be). Again 2 m. to the south, and still further towards the castern

margin of this section, are rermmants of another row, There are two piles with

uprizht central slabs and associated with and hetween these, is a series of

closely set, embedded small blocks, exposed wbout 30 cm. above the ground

level (Fig. 1, Bf), This line of small blocks possibly had its own special

sigviticance, Still 2 m, further to the south and east (Fig. 1, Be) are three

collapsed piles forming a rather disjointed continuation of the previous row.

Further south, & to 10 m. on this section, an elongate “island” ridge consists

of a residual portion of the eroded terracc, rismg above the gencral level to an

average height of 1 m5 m. in length and 2 m. in width (Fig. 1, Bh). At its

western end are two Jarge collapsed piles, one asseciated with a small dead tree

whi, next to it, a second heap of slabs has pebble rubble among them. A Sew

scattered slabs in the mid part of this ridge may be the romnants of two minor

piles. At the eastern end, another large collapsed pile has the trunk of a dead

mula tree lying among the slabs. Nearby ou fut pround to the south of the

ridge is another small collapsed pile,

Near the southern margin of this section. the grouped remains of u detinite

row of five or six collapsed piles lic about 2 m, apart (Tig. 1, Bi), These had

obviously been built up of the single central slab with 6 to 10 supporting

members. Lying beyond this row and near the margin of the terrace, is a

solitary collapsed large pile.

Here and there on this section, odd slabs and broken picces are so seat-

tered that they provide no indication of whether or not they had been part of

the adjacent structures. But there are sufficient fairly complete piles and con-

wregated slabs of collapsed piles to show that all of them in their original state

mist have made up a spectacular general arrangement.

Section C

In the upper part of the watercourse, between this area and Section B,

exposures of the limestone stratum represent the southern source of the slabs

used (Fig. 1, Q). On this section, the rather scattered remains suggest what

may have been a few orderly arrangements. Near the watercourse are the

remmants of an obvious pile, situated at the east end of an elongate collection

of scattered slabs which are just suMciently grouped to indicate that here there

may have heen another row of 3 or 4 of the usual piles, each about 2 m. apart

(Fig. 1, Cj). Just to the south of these are two more collapsed piles (Fig, 1, Ck);

and about 2 m, still further to the south, the remains of another row of struc-

lures (Fig, 1, Cl), involving two mulga trees, Around the base of one of these

is a heap of 12 slubs, and a few around the other tree; still further to the cast

are two more collapsed piles, about 3 m. apart. In general, the relics of arrange-

ments on this southern section are nol so impressive as those on the ether parts

of the site.

DISCUSSION,

‘This site appuets la be the most westerly of the occurrences recorded [ar

South Australia of aboriginal stone arrangements which are generally con

sidered to have been associated with ceremonial ritual, About 170 miles to the

east of this site, line and pile arrangements of large boulders occur on a large

ehiyparn near Lake Phillipson (Wood Jones, 1925). Twoly miles west of Lake

ABORIGINAL STONE ARRANGEMENTS IN NORTIIWEST S.A. 175

Torrens aad nurth of Lake Windaboul are three circle arrangements of small

boulders on the base of a round hollow in the tableland (Campbell and Loss-

feld, 1965), In the far north of South Australia, near the south-west margin

of the Simpson Desert, are imposing line and pile arrangements formed from,

and necuing among, the large, irregular boulders on a wide gibber plain

(Campbell and Mountford, 1969), None of Uiese other occurrences presents the

complex and compact arrangement of the structures indicated in the remains

oecurring on the site described here.

The choice of this Great Victoria Desert site by the aboriginals appears to

have been influenced by several features. The topography ar the region pro-

vided some measure of isolation which generally seems a feature of these special

sites, The nearby claypan or souks may have provided water supply for periails

of activity there, The terraces overlooking the claypan may have been con-

sidered an attractive piece of natural architecture for the particular purpose of

the site. Possibly mest significant of all was the occurrence, close at hand, uf

the limestone slabs with their remarkable and unusual consistency in shape and

size, These naturally occurring slabs would readily claim the atterition of any

observer, as they must have that of the observant nomadic Australoid,

In the previous account of this site by Butement and Pither, the shelves D

and E are described as having the appearance of a “rostrum or conductin phat-

farm”, aud their party referred to this fenture as the “High Priests’ Platform’.

This speculative proposal need not be dismissed as entirely irrelevant. While the

picture of a “high priest” conducting the ceremonial may not be in keeping with

customary aboriginal procedure, it would he easy for those who have witnesser!

these customs to visualise this clevated position being occupied by the chanting

chorus and elders, playing their part in the exciting ritual being enacted below

amid this striking array of rows of pile arrangements.

Another point of interest is its prohable aye, Unless chareoal reliably asso-

ciated with these structures could be collected for radiocurbun dating, there is

ha ather way cf acceptable age assessment. Tt has been shown that im several

places, the slab piles, or remnants of them, occur aronml the base of dead

trees, mostly mulga, It might be assumed that these were probably living trees

at the time when the structures were built—apart from the possibility that

saplings grew up from beneath and through the protective pile structures in all

of these particular examples. While the mulga is & slow growing plant, it seems

unlikely that these trees could haye withstood the ravages of time, weather

and termites to persist, in living or even in dead form, for « very long lime. A

period of several hundred years, at the most, might he a reasonable assessment

of the age of the site.

The significance and purpose of this site roust, of course, remain specula-

tive. Over what period this vorth-western region has heen « semi-arid terryin

is nol known, There is no information on the lime, and ta what extetit, it

supported aboriginal nomads. There is sume evidence ty show it was, in past

times, at Ieast traversed or temporarily occupied by the nomads of this morth-

west region, ws numbers of “native wells” are recorded on maps of this part

of the State. Also, considerable archacological material in the form of slane

implements has heen collected in this area of the Great Victoria Desert. Trves-

tigations lave so far not led to any source from which reliable information

could be derived relative to the origin and use of this interesting. site,

From the above descriptive details and diagram (Fig. 1), the layout of

the rows of pile arrangements forming the site uppears lo conform to a detinite

patlern, Those of Sevtion € are too fragmentary to contribute lo this idea,

176 T. D. CAMPBELL ano P. 5. HOSSFELD

Concerning the remainder, it seems feasible to suggest that in the selection of

the location and use made of its associated features, a specific plan may have

been adopted in the development of the site. Here were the more or less level

areas below the tableland to the west and overlooking the imposing claypan

on the east; the terrace shelves D and E forming a dominant [feature on the

west of the main terrace; the conyenicnt or inspiring presence of the remarkably

shaped slabs of stone. On Section A, are the remains of what appears to have

been an impressive row of pilcs, situated diagonally when viewed from the

shelyes D and E; and on Section A, the original arrangement of a number of

rows of slab piles, all of these radiating fanlike and eastwards from near the

base of the small elevated shelves. If this reading of the present state of the

relics be correct, the whole site with its associated topography and the mniform

construction and orderly placement of the piles—all must have combined to

produce a most rexhar table and eiettatnilar display of planned aboriginal

craftsmanship and intention.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

The writers are indebted to the Commonwealth Department of Supply for

approval to work on the sites, Mr. R. W. Boswell who initiated the plan and

arrangements; to Captain J. Newman for assistance, Mr. A. Jay for organzing

field transport and requirements, and Mr. L, Beadell who established the geo-

graphical location of the site and provided relevant data. Mr. M. Mudie of

Arcoona, who joined the expedition gave valuable help, and Mr. Robert Edwards

compiled the diagram.

REFERENCES

Burement, W. A. S., and Piraen, A. G.. 1956. Native monument in Central Australia.

Antiquity, 30, Neo, 118,

Camrsett, T, D., and Mountronn, C, P.. 1939. Aboriginal arrangement of stone in Central

Australia. Trans, Roy. Sou, S. Ausi,. 63, pp. 17-21,

Camvsett, T. D., and Hossrern, P. §,. 1965. Aboriginal stone circles. Mankind. 6, No. 4.

Woop Jonzs, #'., 1925, The ordered arrangement of stones present in certain parts of Aus-

tralia. Jour. Roy. Anthrop. Inst.. 55 (JanJune).

T. D. CAMPBELL AND P, S. HossreLp PLATE |

Fig, 1. Looking south-eastwards, showing the pile Ab; the northern watercourse:

shelves D and E on the right.

The quarry Q at the northern watercourse showing rectangular slabs of

limestone.

T. D. Campspett AND P. S. HossreELp PLATE 2

Fie, 2, View of the northern portion of Section B, showing the row of piles Be in

the foreground,

OBITUARY:

BERNARD CHARLES COTTON 1905-1966

Summary

OBITUARY

Brernarp CaaAntes Corron, 1905-1966

Bernard Charles Cotton, a Fellow of the Society since 1929, died on 3rd

May, 1966, at the age of 61 years, He held office as a Member of the Council,

1943-1946 and 1948-1949; Vice-President, 1949-1950, 1951-1952; President, 1950-

1951, and Programme Secretary, 1959-1962. He was the author of 14 papers

and joint author of six papers published in the Transactions of the Society,

Born at Sheffield, England, on 2nd February, 1905, Cotton was educated at

Abbeyficld House, Abbeyfield, Sheffield. He came to Australia in 1923 and

joined the South Australian Museum as a cadet. Here he became associated

with Sir Joseph Verco, Honorary Conchologist to the Museum, in the years when

the valuable Verco collection of molluscs and molluscan literature were pre-

sented and transferred to the Museum. Negotiations were also completed for

the purchase by Sir Joseph of the May collection of Tasmanian shells and the

Mathews collection of Australian shells which, with the Verco collection, formed

the basis of the present collection in the South Australian Museum, Cotton

became Assistant Conchologist and Photographer in 1928 and C ionchologist

(later Curator of Molluscs) in 1934. He was compelled to retire because of

ill-health in 1962, Twenty-three papers, eleven in collaboration, are published

in the Records of the South Australian Museum.

Cotton's most important contributions to molluscan literature are the four

volumes in the Handhooks of the Flora and Fauna of South Australia published

by the South Australian Branch of the British Science Guild, the earlier two of

which were prepared in collaboration with F. K. Godfrey, his co-author in a

number of publications between 1932 and 1942. His primary interest in natural

history is reflected in the large number of contributions he made to the South

Australian Naturalist, of whch has was Joint Editor for severa) years, and in

his support of secicties concerned with the study of molluscs.

Mrs, Cotton and two married daughters survive him,

N.AILL.

BALANCE SHEETS:

GENERAL AND RESEARCH ACCOUNTS

Summary

180

“ouUpny Are10nopy

‘GUaHdaHS 'V 'S

‘paonpord uoOyeUazuT pun sLayQNOA HAL qoauIoD punay pure paypny

‘taunsealy, ALvIOuOH,

“TIAHOLIK ‘f “a

a a ek A ee

EP SLSES

SO°COF'T " goer ‘sunt pog a sv sourreg

SLT - 7 a ” syooq-anbayQ

SS'0G ‘ ™ ‘ CO/FYGL “Oma Ut payTparD

00°00S : ‘ ° “= ™ yunoooy [elatiagy 0} Jaysues Ly

OS "9Fe " a ~ ‘~ a } Buipurg

G6 ELT " . 4 ; gouRANsuy

OL LLL sadeAy s,uEmesqry

00'C6E a ‘ ' jingu

O9 TST ~ - ~ pe ~ sasnqping

$ SLNAWAYd,

PSLe' ss

GOVE : - " ' ‘ pSasayuy YUE

00'FZ8 7 ‘ : - ‘ horp ur quBss

OL Se8'L ~ ’ . sayes Juang

32S

so Tes a = ~ aaurreg suruadg

$ SLdISOSH

9961 “ANAL NOE GAGNA UVAA AHL YOA SLNAWAVd GNV SIdIGOaU AO LNAWNALVLS

ENQOD0Y AuvHary

a — SSNS

88'BECSS

és 69T pe a "1 m= > * gg6t ‘aunf qigg ye se souRTeg

oor me anbayy BurpueysinG | £9/F961

Le°06 “ a “ amprpuadxg Aipung

00°00T “ = % a junoooY Yorvasay OF 49ysuerL,

os'9se"sT * a ve “yas Jo aseyang

98°8T ~ 3 . . a i ~ sTepay, ooo A,

GL SPE " “ e Sunuug an0N

Os Ts ~ ¥ _ ‘i i saaq upny

tS'¥6 - x a “sosuady jdeineedser uonvoupy

oS'9S ~ i SuIOOY «JO ass) SUITIaAG

FS'6L sd ™ ™ - (anoudapy, pue Aoayy) soBrwyQ aa1areg

Sees : : ~ ysey Anad

e9'9eT a * “a am ~ : : . a aseysog

Ov gst sysop) SuruevayD

IUSFF'e ~ = 3 ssory Furgsiyqng

$ SLNANWAVd

RE R6Z EES

LET ‘ X aulosuy Aupung

OT'Le wy ul preg senbayy fo Juawsesinquicy

o0o'o0¢ a ia a ~ qunoaay Arerqry]s WOE ASJSUBLT,

0OEL " ". , a sULOOY, FO OS!)

66°01 ie a a qsorayu] Aunduiey seg

OC RL / ' 7 “r rt ‘ “ qysgrayay yueg

00' TSF “ oy ‘ Spuog JuaumsA0D wo ysareqU]

L9°GLE 7 ‘ = sunday FO AIBS

e9'TtO'9T | a ~: ™poyg JO BIBS

OO'sse es ‘a yuLiy Juemuaa0y

LY TLUL 7 - :’ suoydiiasqng

€l'6Pro ta “ SOBL Aqaf ST Fe aouvpeg surnradg

$ S.LUTAOTH

9961 “ANNE Woe GHANA WVHA AHL YOA SLNAWAVd GNY SLdId0gu AO LNGINGLY.LS

INNODaAY TYYANAt)

GALVYOdHOONI VITVULSAV HLNOS dO ALAIOOS "TVAOY AHL

181

“qOypny AreIoUO}T ‘Tauspary, ATeIOUOTT

CUaHdaHS “¥ ‘S “TTHHOLIN ‘{ ‘4

“JaImsvary, 9Yyy FO spury

aq} Ur Sayeagiytar 4yPog pue SraysnoA YY ya1L09 punoy pues paHpny

OO OFS'6IS 0O'OFE6IS

Sf 6FE : we - ~ ~ ” _PueH ur ysuy

LSOF ; " on zs 2 tH aseroyorg

SOFFI'6 = —---———

so;0se'T * ~ SHUN SEl— PHT sqjooy,

SULIE'T i - fs SHON OOE—-APIIOM 39 PIPIaH

CLeset * 7 ; ‘ sun 00Z—"WSD

OTSLe'T —~ Ce @ _ Sun OO9-Weulsy opreppy

SF'OST'T : : 2 smn 00¢—1'D'¥

SUGLPT * ‘ a. ; sHUN OO8—"d'H'a

SrObZT ~ ia os ye SHUN QOG—SYHOMTOO AA

yoysg ApMbsy

000086 = —---—-—

00°008°T - ™ . SyaasaAuy TROLMQOAaT A 00°OFS*61 —-----——

00'000'S ” : uyeqsny jo uonerodioD aounULy Lo’ OF = “ : ‘ es 4 aswayoig

00°000°S - ‘i “ ¥ quo sad FL “O'wWD 8Pe6S ET —--—-——

00°000‘F "4 “ Jed Jad g ‘aauruLg YjIoOmsusT S6'06S cf ” - hs a oe 4AOIS "AD sBry

V0 Pg sinjuaqag SFZOLRT “ ~ : " spuog twapraMmoururey

$ $ SaSVHOUNd $ $ Sa TVS

9961 “HNOL WOS ONIOGNA YVSA AHL ONIMAG SADNYHD LNANLSHANI

00°0FS*6TS aneA aoug

00°00 - . = a? * ha ~ PS paleprposuor) “y's

00°009 = _ ™ ; - 4S “OD SBD

OO'OFF’ST ™ . ™ * . . ” Spuog yITesmucrumay

S9GL ‘ANOL WOE LY SY GIAH NOOLS

GNoOy Howvasay OIUIENAIS§ UNV INS WAOUN

CF'SLES SPGLES

on - oe “ a at = & Pe ~ qsoraquy yueg

LOFLE 4 7 7 = i " 996T ‘Jun WOE ye se aouepeg { CLEFE : 7 “ bss aa ‘si : SJUBUIsaauy UO ysa10}0;

SL’ 7 . . - > \ “ qooq-anbayy 00'08T 7 7 = . i i =i . ype sarodg

§ SLNAWAVd j $ $Ld1d9a4

9961 “ANAL 0€ GHAGNA YVAA FHL YOA SLNAWAVd ANY SLdIAOTY AO LNAWALV.LS

INNOIDY HOUVASAY

CULVUOdYOONI VITVULSAV HLINOS AO ALAIOOS IVAOW FHL

OFFICERS FOR 1965-66

Summary

ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

INCORPORATED

OFFICERS FOR 1965-66

Patron:

HIS EXCELLENCY LIEUTENANT-GENERAL SIR EDRIC M. BASTYAN,

K.C.M.G., K.B.E., C.B.

President:

B, DAILY, Ph.D.

Vice-Presidents:

5S, J. EDMONDS, B.A., M.Sc., Ph.D. H. B, S$. WOMERSLEY, D.Sc.

Secretary: Treasurer:

M. J. TYLER F. J. MITCHELL

Editor: Assistant Editor:

J. K. TAYLOR, B.A., B.Sc.Agr., M.Sc. I. M. THOMAS, M.Sc, M.I.Biol.

Librarian:

Programme Secretary:

N. B. TINDALE, B.Sc. W. K. HARRIS, B.Sc.

Members of Council:

J. A. PRESCOTT, C.B.E., D.Sc., N. H. T.UDBROOK, M.A., Ph.D.,

F.R.S., FAA, FRAC,

D.LC,, F.G.S.

J. T. HUTTON, B.Sc., A.5.A.5.M.

K. R. MILES, D.Sc., F.C.S.

R. W. JESSUP, M.Sc. (to Aug., 1965)

C. B. WELLS, M.Sc.Agr.

R. V, SOUTHCOTT, D.Sc., M.D., B.S., D.T.M.&H. (from Aug., 1965)

Auditor:

S, A, SHEPHERD, B.A., LL.B.

LIST OF FELLOWS

Summary

183

ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

LIST OF FELLOWS

AS AT 80th JUNE, 1966

Those marked with an asterisk (7) have contributed papers published in the Society's

Transactions. Those marked with a dagger (+) are Life Members.

Any change in address or any other changes should be notified to the Secretary.

Note.—The publications of the Society are not sent to those members whose subscriptions

Date of

Fileatian

1895

1913

1925

1933

Date of

Pleetinn

1946,

1961.

1959,

1927,

1961.

1951.

1935.

1985.

1929.

1939,

1960.

1968.

1965.

1962,

1962.

1963.

19843.

are in arrears.

Date of Honorary FELLOWS

Houtvrary

Weetian

1949. "’Crirtanp, Prof, (Emeritus) Sin Joun B,, M.D., Dashwood Road, Beaumont.

S.A—Verco Medal, 1933; Council, 1921-26, 1932-37; President, 1927-28,

1940-41; Vice-President, 1926-27, 1941-42.

1955 *Oszoxn, Prof. (Emeritus) T. G. B., D.Sc., Department of Botany, Univer-

sity of Adelaide, North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A. Council, 1915-20, 1922-24;

Vice-President, 1924-25; 1926-27; President, 1925-26.

1964 °Paescorr, Prof. J. A, CBE, DSc FRAC, FAS, FAA, 82 Cross

Road, Myrtle Bank, S:A.—Verca Medal, 1938; Council, 1927-30, 1935-39,

1962-; Vice-President, 1930-32; President, 1932-38: Editor, 1955-62.

19635 *Trinpave, N. B., BSc., South Australian Museum, North Terrace, Adelaide,

S.A.—Verce Medal, 1956; Secretary, 1935-36; Council, 1946-47; Vice-

President, 1947-48, 1949-50; President, 1948-49; Librarian, 1952-,

Fer..ows

*Apnie, Prof. A, A., M.D,, D-Sc.. Ph.D., Department of Anatomy, University of

Advluide, North Terrace, Adelaide, $.A,

ApeELe, C,, B.Sc, Ph.D., Flat 52, 6 Glen Fira Road. Elsternwick, Victoria.

Arrxen, P. F., B.Se., South Australian Museum, North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A;

*"AuprnMan, Poor. A, RK. Ph.D.. D.Sc... F.G.S., Department of Ceology, University

of Adelaide, North Terrace, Adelaide, $.A—Council, 1987-42, 1954-57: Vice-

President, 1962-63, 1964-65; President, 1963-64,

Anners, D, J., B. Sc; Dip. Ed., B.Ed., M.A.C.E,, 85 Tlarvey Street, Woodville

Park, S.A.

*“Anpenson, Mrs. §.H., B.Se., 188 Stephen Terrace, Gilberton, S.A-

*Anprewantua, Prot. H. G., M.Ag-Se,, D.Sc, F.A.A., Department of Zoology,

University of Adelaide, North Terrace, Adelaide, $,A—Verco Medal, 1962;

Council, 1949-50; Viee-President, 1950-51, 1952-53; President, 1951-52.

*ANDREWARTHA, Mrs. TL. G., B.Apr:Sc., M.Se., (nee H. V. Steele), 29 Claremont

Avenue, Netherby, S.A.

®Ance., F. M., 293 Fullarton Road, Parkside, S.A,

*AnceL, Miss L. M,, M.Sc,, Department of Zoology, University of Adelaide, North

Terrace, Adelaide. S.A,

Arcunoip, KR. T., A.L.A.A., South Australian Museum, North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A,

Asnrar, C. M., M.Se., Department of Geology, University of Adelaide, North

Terrace. Actelaide, S.A,

Astin, F. W., 29 Elizabeth Street, Mount Gambier, S.A.

Auvaartr, Mrs, R. I, 3 Kirkdale Avenue, Ilazelwuod Park, 5.A.

Bacor, P. H.. Flat 11, 101 Caroline Street, South Yarra, Victoria,

Barry, A, B.Se. (Hons.), Departinent of Botany, University of Adelaide. North

‘Terrace, Adelaide, $.A.

Barey; Mrs. M. A., B.Sc, (Hons.), Department of Zoology, University of Adelaide,

North ‘errave, Adelaide, S.A.

184

Date of

Blection

1963.

1964,

1965.

1958.

1948,

1932.

1928,

1934,

1962,

1950,

1045.

1945,

1947.

1963.

1957,

1962.

1961.

1957.

1944,

1960.

1959.

1953.

1963.

1957.

1955.

1949.

1962,

1963,

1956.

1963.

1956.

1962,

1964,

1930).

1957.

LIST OF FELLOWS

Barnorx, R. N.. B.Se. (Hons.), 62 Robsart Street, Parkside, S.A.

Banker, §,, Ph.D., Department of Zovlogy, University of Adelaide, North Terrace,

Adelaide, §.A.

Dantow, B. A., B.Sc., Ph.D., School of Biological Sciences, The Flinders University

of S.A., Sturt Road, Bedford Park, 5.A.

Bauer, F, H., A.B. M.A. Department of Anthropology und Geoyreaphy, Californian

State College, Tillary Street, Hayward, California, 94542, USA.

Brex, R. G., B.Ag.Se,, R.D.A., Lynwood Park, Mil-Lel, Via Mount Gambier, S.A,

Beec, P_ R,, D.DSc., R-D.A., Shell House, 170 North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A.

Best R. J,. D.Sc., FACT, Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Private Bag No, |,

Glen Osmond, 8.A.

Buacr, E. C., B.A., M.B., B.S., 483 Magill Road, Tranmere, S.A.

Buesine, Virs, N, M,, 50 Anrus: Road, Westbourne Park, S.A.

Bonnrn, N. J, MB. B.S., F.R.C.S, (Rng.), F\R.A.C.S., 19 Marlborough Street,

College Park, S.A.

t*Bonytuon, C. W., B.Se., F.R.A.CI., Romalo House, Romalo Avenue, Magill, 5.A—

Council, 1961-63.

*Boomsma, C, D., M.Sc... B.Sc. For., 6 Celtic Avenne, South Road Park, S.A.

*Bowes, D. R., Ph.D., (Lond.), D.L.C., F.G.S., Department of Geology, The Univer-

sity, Glasgow, W.2,, Scotland,

Brocx, B. J.. B.Se.. Chizongwe Secondary School, Box 152, Fort Jameson, Zambia,

*Brooxes, Miss H. M,, Department of Entomology, Waite Institute, Private Bag No, 1,

Glen Osmond, §.A.

Baows, BR. G., B.Sc, 3 Jenkins Avenue, Myrtle Bank, S.A,

"Brownett, P. F.. Ph.D., 14 Myall Avenue, Kensington Gardens, §.A-

Burcx, W, G., B.A., 20 Hamelin Crescent, Narrabundah, Canberra. A.C.T,

*Tunnmar, Miss N. T., M.Se., C.S.1.1.0., Division of Plant Industry, P.O. Box 109,

Canberra, A,C,T.

"Campnett, Prof. T. D., D.D.Se, D.Se., 24 Lynington Street, Tusmore. $.A.—

Couneil, 1928-32. 1935, 1942-45: Vice-Freyident, 1932-34; President, 1934-35,

Cawoten, C., 8 First Avenue, Glenelg, S.A.

*Canrovus, B, B,, K.D., Oen., Department of Geography, University of Melbourne,

Parkville, N.2., Vivtoria.

Canter, A, N., M,Se., Ph.D,, 8 Scatt Street, Maroubra Bay, N.S.W.

Canter, E. D., B.Ag.Sc., Waite Institute, Private Bug No. 1, P.O, Glen Osmond S.A.

*CrmrrNvaLe, G, M,, BSe., P.O. Box 280, Alice Springs, N.T.

Ciotmer, FE. A., P.O, Box 1012, Launceston, Tasman,

Co.iiver, F. §., Geology Department, University of Queensland, St. Lucia, Brisbane,

Queensland.

Corzerr, D. W. P., Ph.D., F.G.S.. S.A. Museum, North Terrace. Adelaide. $.4.—

Programme Seeretary, 1964-85.

Corner, TR. L., BSc. (TMons.), Department of Botany, University College vf Towny-

ville, Pimlico, Townsville, Queensland,

Crawronp, A. R., B.Se., Department of Mines, Box 35. Rundle St. P.O., Adelaide.

S.A.

Cnowcrort, W. P., M.Se., D.Phil., South Australian Museom, North Terrace,

Adelaide, SsAc

Dairy, B., Ph.D., Department of Geology, University of Adelaide, North ‘errave,

Adelaide, S.A—Programme Secretary, 1957-59; Couneil, 1960-64, Vice-President,

1964-65: President, 1963-.

*Darcarno, CG. K., M.Se.. 43 Thirkell Avenuc, Beaumont, S.A.

Deanvovn, T.P., M.B,. B.S., 25 Harvey Avenue, North Glenelg, 5.A,

Drx, E. V,, P.O. Box 12, Aldgate, 5.A.

Dour, Kk. M.. M.Ag.Se., Waite Institute, Private Bag No. 1, P.O. Clen Osmond, $.4.

Date of

Election

1964,

1963,

1959.

1931.

1933.

1963,

1945.

1902.

1962,

1956.

1960,

1965.

1959.

1927.

1963.

1951,

1958.

1959,

1962.

1964.

1962.

1954,

1953,

1964.

1935,

1964,

1963,

1959,

1961.

1962,

1948,

1944.

1962.

1930.

1962,

1946.

1944,

LIST OF FELLOWS 185

Dracovier, Mrs. D. J.. B.A. (Hons.), Department of Geography, University of

Adelaide, North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A.

Drayton, RB, D., B.Sc. (Hons.), 309 Oaklands Road, Marion. S.A.

Duntop, P. RB. G., B.Se., 13 Walton Avenue, Clearview, S.A,

Dwyer, J. M., M.B., B.S., 157 East Terrace. Adelaide, S.A,

“Eanpiey, Misy C. M., M.Sc., F.L.S,. Depattment of Botany, University of Adelaide,

North Terrace, Adelaide, 5.A.—Counetl, 1949-46. *

Eppy, Mrs, N. G., 1106 Mitchell Street, Darwin, N.T.

*Epmonns, 8. J., B.A., Ph.D., Department of Zoology, University of Adelaide, North

Terrace, Adelaide. 8.A.—Council, 1954-55; Programme Secretary, 1955-56: Seere-

tari, 1956-57; Vice-President, 1983-64, 1965-; President, 1964-65.

*Enogust, A, G., 19 Farrell Street, Gleielg, S.A —Council, 1949-53.

*Enwanps, R., South Australian Museum, North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A.

*Ercwtrn, H.. Drrernat,, S.A. State Herbarium, Botanic Garden. North Terrace,

Adeljide. 5.A.

Fanpen, H. W., 10 Dryden Avenue, Hazclwood Park, §,A.

Fenner, I, L.. BiAg.Sc., Entomolagy Section. D,A.S.F,, Konedohu, T.P.N.G.

*Freuper, D, R., BSe. PhD, Department of Zoology, University College of

Townsville, Pimlico, Towusville, Queensland.

“Fintayson, IT, H., 305 Ward Street, North Adelaide, $.A.-Verco Medal, 1960;

Council, 1987-40,

*Fouman, J. B., B.Sc. {Mons.), 11 Wilkins Street, East Glenelg, $.A.

Fisnen, R. H., 21 Seaview Road, Lynton, S.A.

°Forues, B. G., Ph.D., Department of Mines. Box 38, Rundle St. P.O. Adelaide. S.A,

Forve. N., Dip.For,. Area School, Oakbank, SvA.

Fosven, HK. J., B.E., 91 Cambridge Terrace, Unley, 8.4,

Fnreman, R. N., M.Sc,, 4 Esplanade, South Glenelg, S.A,

*Fnevrac, lL &., BSe., 2 Selway Street, Ouklands Park, S.A.

Gmson, A. A.. A,W,A,S,M., Department of Mines, Box 38, Hundle Street P.O..

Adelaide, S,A,

*Giarssver, Prof. M, F., D.Sc, F.AA. Department of Geology, University of

hea North Terrace, Adelaide, §.A—Couneil, 1953-54; Vice-President,

Grover, C. J. M,, B.Sc., South Australian Museum, North Terrace, Adelaide, $.A.

{Gotpsacx, H,, Coromandel Valley, 8.A.

Gonnox, Miss E. M,, 7 Rawlings Avenue, Sorrengyille, 8.A,

Grarrz, R. D., B.Se; (Ilons.), Wattle Park Teachers’ College, Kensington Road,

Wattle Park, S.A.

Grasso, Bu, M.Sc., 8 Bransby Avenue. Plympton. S.A.

Green, Miss L. M. A. B.A. M.Se., Ph.D., Department of Anatomy and Histology,

University of Adelaide, North Terrace, Adelaide, $.A.

eee W. J., B.Sc., Delhi Australian Petroleum Ltd.. C.P.O. Box 1837P, Adelaide,

Gnecony, G, C,, M-B., B.S., Leigh Creek, S.A.

Gross, CG. F.. M.Sc., South Australian Museum, North Terrace, Adelaide, S,A.—

Secretary, 1950-53.

PLES, D. J., B.Se., Bureau of Mineral Resonrces, Childers Street, Turner, Canberra,

A.C.T.

HamiLron-Smira, E,, AULA. 17 Helwig Avenue, Montmorenvy, Victoria.

Tasers H, L,, 3 Bewdley, 66 Beresford Road, Bellevue Hill, Rose Bay, Sydney,

Harninc, |, H,, B.Se., 92 East Avenue, Clarence Park, 5A.

*Harpy, Mrs. J. £., (nee A, C. Beckwith), M.Se.. Stewart Avenue, Salisbury, S.A.

Hannis, J. R., B.Sc, Waite Institnte, Private Bay No. 1, Clen Osmond P.O,, S.A.

186

Date of

Election

1963,

1980.

1963.

1960.

1962.

1944.

1966,

1951,

1959,

1924,

1947,

1928.

1965.

1965,

1945.

1950.

1966,

1958,

1963.

1966.

1962.

1939,

1948,

1962.

1933.

1960,

1965.

19d].

19635.

1922,

1965.

LOd8,

W531.

1965.

1953.

LIST OF FELLOWS

Hanus, W, K., B.Se., Department of Mines, Box 35, Rundle Street, P.O., Adeluide,

$.A.—Programme Secretary, 1965-,

Haxuason, J.,.34 Winnall Strect, Clapham, §.A.

tHawzeg, V. L., M.B., B.S., 43 Semaphore Road, Semaphore, §.A.

Harman, D. L., Ph.D., Department of Genetics, University of Adelaide, North

Terrace, Adelaide, S.A,

Meare, G, B., B.Sc. (Hons), P.O. Box 2202, La Jolla, California, U.S.A.

Hemuor, BH. 1, B.Ag, Sc., Roseworthy Agricultural College. Roseworthy, S.A.

Hizwoon, E. R., B.Se., Departunent of Mines, Box 88, Rundle St. P,O., Adelaide, 8.A.

Hocxme, L. J.. School House, Booleroo Centre. S.A.

Horwrz, R. C. H., D.Se., 19 Kinninmont Ayenne, Nedlands, W.A.

*Hossrevp, P. S.. Ph.D., Department of Geology, University of Adelaide, Noetlh

Terrace. Adelaide, §.A,

*Hurron, J, T., B.Se., AS.AS.M., C.S.LBR.0. Division of Soils, Private Bag No, 1,

Glen Osmond P.0.. S.A.—Cownail, 1957-61, 1965+ ; Vice President, 1961-62.

1963-64; President, 1962-63.

Ivoutn, P., 14 Wyatt Road, Burnside, §.A-

*Jackman, Miss M. E., B.Sc.. Department of Botany, University of Adelaide, North

Terrace, Adelaide, S.A,

James, C. 'T.. M.B.. B,S,, 134 Fullarton Road, Rose Park. S.A.

“Inssup, R, W., M.Se., 6 North Penno Parade, Belair. S.A—Couneil, 1961-65.

Jorms, R. K... M.Sc., Department of Mines, Boy 38. Rundle Street P.O., Adelaide, S.A.

Jonxson, J, E.. Department of Mines, Bux 38, Rundle Street, P.O,. Adelaide, S.A,

*Tounson, W.. B.Sc, (Hons,), 5 Horn Court, Walkerville, S.A.

Jones, J. B., PA.D., Department of Geology. University of Adelaide, North Terrace,

Adelaide, S.A.

Ragin, A. J. de. ing,, Delhi Australian Petroleum Ltd,, Box I837P, G.P.0,, Adelaide,

ath,

Kenny, Mrs. M.. S.A. Musenm, North Terrace, Adelaide, S,A.

Krraxran, H, M., Ph,D.. MLB,, F.R.G.S.,. Khakhar Building, C.P. Tank Road. Bombuy,

India.

Krxe, D.. M.Se,. Mines Administration Pty. Ltd., C.P.O. Box 880L. Brisbane, Old.

Kine, Miss M. J. E., Mus. Bac., A.U.A,, “Mirrabuoka”, Wilpena St. Eden Hills, S.A,

*kiresan, A, W., Ph.D., Department of Geology. University of Adelaide. North

Terrace, Adelaide, S.A Secretary, 1945-48: Vice President, 1948-49, 1940-51;

President, 1949-50.

Kugsir, A. H., B.Sc. (Hons.). R\D, Oen,, Botanic Garden, North Tce. Adelaide, S.A.

“Lance, B, T,, B.Sc. (Hons.), Ph.D., Department of Botany, University of Adelaide.

North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A.

*Lancroap-SmiTH, T., B,A., M.Sc, Ph.D., Department of Geography, University of

Sydney, Sydney, N,S.W,

Lee, D. C., B.Sc., $.A. Museum, North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A,

Lennon, G. A., M.D., B.S., F.R.G.P., €/- Elders ‘Trustee Executor Cu, Ltd,, 837 Currie

St, Adelaide, S.A.

Linpsay, J. M., B.Se., Department of Mines. Rex 38, Rundle St. P.O., Adelaide, S.A.

Lotutan, T. R. N., O.B.E., N.D.I., (.N.Z.). Botanic Garden, North Terrace, Adelaide,

S.A—Treasurer, 1952-53; Council, 1953-57; Vice-President, 1957-58, 1960-61,

President, 1958-60.

*Lupsrooxn, Mrs, N, H., M.A., Ph.D., D.LC.. F.G.S., Department of Mines, Box 38,

Rundle St. P.O,, Adelaide, S,A.—Council, 1958-60, 1964-, Vice-President, 1960-61,

1962-63; President, 1961-62.

Maconocm, J. R., B.Sv. (Hons.), Department of Botany, University of Adelaide,

North Terrace, Adelaide, $.A,

Méeuzer, D: A.. Ph.D,, Waite Institnte, Private Bag No. 1, Clen Osmond Ph, S.A.

Date of

Election

1986.

1965.

1939,

1966,

1959.

19664.

1950,

1990.

1964.

1963.

1985.

1948.

1966.

1945.

1962.

1952.

1939.

1956.

1951.

1959.

1933.

Lp64.

1936,

1957.

1965.

1944,

1962,

1945,

1930,

1956,

1963,

1963.

1937.

1949,

1926.

LIST OF FELLOWS 187

Major, R. B., B.Sc. (Hons.), Department of Mines, Box 88, Rundle St. P.O.,

Adelaide, S.A.

Marcus, Miss J., 13 High St., Unley Park, S.A.

Mansuauy, T. J., M.Agr.Se., Ph.D,, C.S.1.R.0. Division of Soils, Private Bag No, 1,

Glen Osmond. S.A,

MABISR, CG. A., M.Sc., Delhi Australian Petroleum Ltd., Box 1837P, G.P.O., Adelaide,

°MAnTIN, Miss H. A,, School of Biological Sciences, University of N.S-W., Box 1, P.O.

Kensington, N,S.W,

Mason, M. G,, B.Sc. (Hons.), Department of Mines, Box 38, Rundle St. P.O.,

Adelaide, S.A.

Mayo, G, M. E., B.Ag.So., Ph.D., Departinent of Genetics, University of Adelaide,

North ‘Terrace, Adelaide, S.A.

Mayo, Sin HeRBentT, LL.B,, O.C,, 90 Northpate 5t,, Unley Park, S.A.

McAnruur, A. J,, B.E,. Box 129, Millicent, S.A.

McBrran, Miss E. M., M.Se., Department of Geology, University of Adelgide, North

Terrace, Advluide, S.A.

McCo tt, D. H., B.Sc... Department of Geology, University of Adelaide, North Terrace,

Adelaide, S.A.

McCutiogn, BR, N., M.B.E., B.Se., B.Agr.Se., Cattle Tick Research Station, Wollong-

bar, N.S.W.

McFarcanp, A, N., B.A., M.S., S.A. Musxenm, North Terrace, Adelaide, §_A.

¢Mires, K; R., D.Se., F.G.S., 11 Church Rd,, Mitcham, S.A,—Council, 1963-.

Mitrs, K. J., B.Se., 17 Denis St., St. Marys, S.A.

Miune, K, L., F\C.A., 14 Burlington St, Walkerville, S.A.

Mincyam, Y. H,, S.A. Museum, North Terrace, Adelaide, $.A,

°Minams, R. G,, B.Sc,, 5 Myrtle Rd,, Seacliff, S.A,

*Mircuern, F. J.. $.A, Museum. North Terrace, Adelaide, 5.A.—Treasurer, 1959-..

Mrrcuett, Mrs. ¥. J,, MSe., Department of Botany, University of Adelside, North

Terrace, Adelaide, 5.A,

Mircuect, Pror. Sim Manx, L,, M.Se., C/- Elder's Trnstee & Executor Co. Letd.,

37 Currie St, Adelaide, S.A.

Morcan. F, D., M.Sc., Ph.D., Waite Institute, Private Bay No. 1, Glen Osmond, S.A.

*Mountronp, C. P.. M.A., 25 First Ave. St. Peters. S.A,

“Muse, I. A., B.Sc. (Hons.), Australian Atomic Energy Commission, Private Bag,

Sutherland, N.S.W,

Nesnitr, R. W., B.Sc. (Hons. ), Ph.D., Department of Geology, Universily of Adelaide,

North Terrace, Adeluide, $.A-

Ninnss, A, R,, B.A., B.D.A., 62 Sheffield St., Malvern, 5.4,

Nixon, L.G.B.. B.Sc., 3 Sweetwater St, Seacombe Gardens, S.A,

*Nontucore, K. H., B.AgrSe.. ATAS., C.S,.LR/0., Division of Soils, Private Bag

No. 1, Glen Osmond, S.A.

Ocxennen, G. P., B.A., 65 Holbrooks Rd., Flinders Park, S.A.

O'Druscour, E. 5., M.Se., Ph.D., F.G.S., Department of Economic Geology, University

of Adelaide. Adelaide, S.A.

*Orrier, R,, B.Sc. (Huns.), Department of Geology, University of Adelaide, North

Terrace, Adelaide, S.A.

Ourver, R. L., Ph.D., Department of Geology, University of Adelaide, North Terrace,

Adelaide, S.A.

Parken, F. 5,, G/- Department of District Administration, Konedobn, T.P.N,C.

*Farxin, L. W., M.Se,, A.S.T.C.. Department of Mines, Box 38, Rundle St. P.O,

Adelaide, S.A—Secretary, 1953-58; Vive-President, 1956-57, 1958-59; President,

1957-58,

Passinson, K, J., B.Sc., 10 Porter Terrace, Rostrevor, S.A.

*Prprn, C, §,, DiSe.. 4 Fowlers Road. Glemunga, $.A.—Veren Medal, 1957: Cauncil,

1941-43; Vive-President, 1943-45, 1946-47; President, 1945-46.

188

Date of

Eluetion

1963,

1965.

1548.

1964,

1961.

1957,

1945.

1950,

1644.

1963,

1947,

1963.

1943.

1965,

1950.

1951.

1963,

1933,

1959,

1951.

1966.

1963,

1966,

1965,

1025,

1954,

1961,

1954,

1962,

1925,

1O47,

1947.

1936.

1949,

1951.

1935,

LIST OF FELLOWS

Piraan,, M. G., M.A,, Pb,D., 12 Francis Ave., Fullarton, §.A.

Possincnam, |. V,, B.AgSe, (Hons,), MSe, D, Phil, C.5..8,0,, Horticultural

Research Section, Private Bay Nu. 1. Glen Osmond, $.A.

Pown, J. E., B.Sc., Waite Listitute, Private Bag No. 1, Glen Osmand, S.A.

Preiss, K. A,, 27 Goyder St,, Erindale, S.A.

Puerty, G. L.. B.A. Dip. Ed,, $.A. Museum, North ‘Terrace, Adelaide, S.A.

*Princie, Miss L. A. B., Box 876G, G.P.0, Adelaide. S.A,

4Payor, L. D., M.be., Dip. For., 32 La Perouse ‘St., Criffith, Canberra, A.C.T,

“Karna, J. EL, M.Se., Newcustle University College, Tigh’s Hill. Newcastle 2N.,

Riceman, D. S., D:Sc., B.Ag.Se,, R,D.A. (Hons.), C.S.1.R,O,, Division of Nutritional

Biochemistry, Adelaide, S.A.

Rimtnes, A. J., 27 Northgate St, Unley Park, 8.4,

+Rimer, W. B., B.Sc., Scripps Institition of Oceanography, Department of Palacont-

ology, University of California, La Jolla, Calif., U.S.A.

Rouenrson, Prof, R, N, F,AS, FAA. PhD. D.Sc. Department of Botray,

University of Adelaide, North Terrace, Adelaide, 8.4.

Rocers, Prof. W. P.. Ph.D. D.Se.. FAA, M.1.Biol, Waite Research Institute. Clen

Osmond, S.A,

Roars, KR. W., B.Sc, (Hons.), Department of Botany, University of Adelaide, North

‘Terrace, Adelaide. 5.A.

Rupp, Prof. E. A., B.Se. A.M. Depariment of Econamic Geology, University of

Adelaide, North Terrace, Adelaide. S.A,

Russein, L, D,, Adeluide Boys’ Tigh School, West Terrace, Adelaide, S.A,

Russia, BR, F.. M.B,, B.S. M-R.A.G.P., 267 Portrush Rd. Glenunga, $.A.

Scaneinen, M., M.B., B.8.. 175 North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A.

ScaonN, R,.. Division of Land Research and Regional Survey, C.$.1.1.0., Caubeera,

*Scort, T, D,. M.Sc, Western Teachers” College, Taylors Rd., Thebarton, S.A —

Programme. Secretary, 1933-54, 1956-57; Secretury, 1957-64.

Sernwaicoun, Miss J. M., S.A. Museum. North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A.

Sernsaraw, K. R., B.Se., Australian Exploration Consultants Pty. Ltd, 411 Angel

Tfouse, Ash Street, Sydney, N.S, W.

Seton, G. Di. S.A. Museum, North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A.

*hraw, Miss FE, A, Ph.D., S.A. State Derbarium, Botanie Garden, North ‘Terrace,

Adelaide, S.A.

*Surann, H., Part Elliott, §.A:

SuepHesn, R. G., B:Sc., Department of Mines, Box 38, Rundle St. P.O,, Adelaide, S.A,

Suepuran, $. A., B.A.. LL.B. 210 Seaview Rd., Henley South, S.A,

SHinkriewp, R. C., 57 Canterbury Ave., Trinity Gardens. S.A.

Smave, D., M.Sc, Australian Mineral Development Laboratories, Conyngharm St.,

Parkside, $.A,

tsmrnu, Sm Tow Bann, Kt, B.A., 25 Currie St., Adelaide. S.A.

*Sounmuorr, R. V., M.D., D\Se,, B-S., D-T.M. & TT, 18 Jasper St., Hyde Park, S.A —

Verra Medal, 1965; Council, 1949-51, 1952-53, 1957-60, 1965-; Treasurer, 1951-52;

Vice-President, 1953-54, 1955-56, 1061-62; President, 1954-55, 1960-61.

*Specrr, Prof. R. L., Ph.D, Department of Botany, University of Qneensland, St,

Lucia, Qld.—Vereo Medal, 1961: Council, 1951-52, 1958-60: Programme Secretary,

1952-53; Vice-President, 1961.

F*Spricc, R. C,, M.Sc, 5 Baker St. Somerton Park, S.A.

*Spay, A. IL, M.Sc. Ph.D., F.G.S., Geology Department, University of Tasmania,

Box 252C, Wobart. Tas.

Steavaran, Rey. W. H., 8 Blairgowrie Rd., St. Georges, $.A.

Osmond P.O., $.A.—Verco Medal, 1959; Council, 1959-54; Vice-President, 1954-55,

1956-57; President, 1955-56.

LIST OF FELLOWS 189

Date of

Election

1966. Surron, K- J., P.O, Box 324, Millicent, 5A.

1955. Swarr, C, D,, M.B,, B.S,, 729 Port Road, Woodville, S.A.

1962. Swinsourne, R. F. G., P.O, Box 210, Alice Springs, N.T.

1962. *Symon, D. E., B.Ag.Sc., Waite Institute, Private Bag No. 1, Glen Osmond P,O,, S.A.

1934. Symons, I G., 35 Murray St. Lower Mitcham. $.A.—Editor, 1947-55; Council,

1955-58.

1963. °Tarsor, J. L,, M.A,, Ph.D,, Department of Geology, University of Adelaide, North

Terrace. Adelaide. S.A,

1959. Tayior, D, J.. 23 Westhoume St, Prahran East, Vic.

1929, *Tayzton, J. K., B.A, M.Se., BiSc.Agr 11 Cheltenham St, Rosefield, $.A.—Coyncil,

1940-48, 1947-50; Librarian, 1951-52; Vice-President, 1952-53, 1954-55; President,

1953-54; Editor, 1962-,

1961. Teacue, F, A. C/- P.O,, Hawker, §.A,

1962. Trusnen, R. E.. LL.B.; G/- P.O. Tanunda, §,A.

1948. *Tnomas, I. M,, M.Se, ML. Biol., Department of Zoology. University of Adelaide,

North Terrace, Adelaide, $.A.—Secretury, 1948-50; Council, 1950-53; Vice-President,

1955-56, 1957-58: President, 1956-57; Assistant Editor, 1958-.

1938. *THostay, Mrs. I. M. (nee P.M. Mawson), M.Sc., Depactment of Zoology, University

of Adelaide, North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A,

1957. THonrAs, J., B.Sc., Woodleigh Rd., Blackwood, S.A.

1959. THomson, B. P., M.Sc. 41 Mills St,, Clarence Park, S.A.

1940, °Tuomson, Capt. J. M., M. Inst. T., 135 Military Rd., Semaphore South, §.A,

1965. Tirrtne R, M.. M.B., B.S., D.D.M,, 16 Wellington Square, North Adelaide, S.A.

1955. *Tucker, B. M., B.A., B.Sc, C.S:LR.O. Division of Soils, Private Bag No. 1, Glen

Osmond, 5,A,

1959. Twipae, C. KR, Ph.D. MSc., Department of Geography, University of Adelaide,

North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A.

1959, °Tynier, M. J., Department of Human Physiology and Pharmacology, University of

Adelaide, North Terrace, Adelaide, $.A.—Programme Secretary, 1962-64; Secretary,

1964..

1960. Tysxan, A, E., C/- Materials & Research Laboratories, Highways Department, Wright

Rd., Pooraka,, S.A,

1950, Verren, J. T., P.O. Box 93, Port Lincoln, S.A,

1953, Warenstan, R, A., B.A. M.A., Ph.D., Wayne State University. Detroit 2, Michigan,

U.S.A.

1954. Wess, B. P., M,Sc., Newmont Pty. Ltd,, 440 Collins St. Melbourne, Vie.

1966. Wepiiwe. D. D'A., B.Se., M.B, BS., Ph.D, D.T.M. & H., C/- Dr. M. Taeseliler,

Sandoz Ltd,, Basle, Switzerland,

1954. ¢*Wenrs, C, B.. E.D., M.Ag.Se., C.S.LR.0. Division of Soils, Private Bag No. 1, Glen

Osmond. &.4.—Caunmnil, 1965-.

1962. Wurrten, G, F... B.Sc., Department of Mines. Box 38, Rundle St, P,O,, Adelaide, S.A

1950. Wrists, L. D., “Dumosa,” Meningie, S.A.

1046. *Winson, Prof. A. F,. D.Sc... Department af Geology: and Mineralogy, University of

Queensland, St. Lueta. Ole.

196]. °Wisun, P. G., B.Se., Western Australian Herbaritim, Department pf Agricultiize,

Jarrah Hd., South Perth, W.A.

1944. *Wommusiex, H. B, $.. D.Se,, Department of Botuny, University of Adelaide, North

Terrace, Adelaide, $.A.—Council, 1960-65; Vice-President, 1965-.

1D44. Womersnev, J. $., B.Sc. Department of Forests, Lac, T.P.N.G,

1947. Woops, BR, V.. B.Sc, Mt. Gambier Forest Reserve. P.O. Bag 7. Mt. Gaubier. S.A,

1960, *Worenen, Ti. PhD, Dept. of Mmes, Box 38, Rundle St. 2.0.. Adelaide, S.A,

1849. Yeates, Y, N., A.M.LMLE., Highways & Local Government Department, Box 1430T

G.P.OW Adelaide, §.A.

1944, Zen, W. J., Dip. For., F.L.S. (Lond.), Eastern THll, Creswick, Vic.

LIST OF LECTURES GIVEN AT MEETINGS DURING

THE YEAR 1965-66

Summary

190

LIST OF LECTURES GIVEN AT MEETINGS DURING

THE YEAR 1965-66

July, 1965 Dr. S. J. Epmonns: “Oysters in South Australia”.

Sept., 1965 Mr, C. R. Darcarno: “Some Aspects of Late Precambrian Strati-

graphy of Southern Australia”.

Oct, 1965 Mr, A. Newsome: “The Red Kangaroo in Central Australia”.

Nov., 1965 Dr. H. B. S. Womenrstey: “The Royal Socicty of London Expedi-

tion to the Solomon Islands—Work of the Marine Party”.

April, 1966 Prorrssor B. Herzec: “The University of Papua and New Guinea,

and Mcdical Research in New Guinea”.

June, 1966 Dr. J. R. Casery-Smiru; “The Ultrastructure, Permeability and

Functions of the Lymphatic Systein — Contributions from Electron

Microscopy”.

TXHIBITS

During the year the following members and guests exhibited material at

ordinary meetings:

Mr, J. B. Firman: A Sub-fossil Tree Trunk from Murray River Sediments,

Chowilla Damsite.

Mx. H. Mincuam: A Large Freshwater Crustacean.

Mn. B. P. Tuoxson: Some Recent Maps Issued by the Geological Survey of

South Australia.

Dn. N. U1. Lepsroox: Eocene Molluscan Faunas from South Australia.

Mr, G. L. Pretry: Archaeological Stone Implements from Maitland, Yorke

Peninsula.

Mr. N. McFarranp; Life Ilistory Studies of South Australian Moths.

Dr. B. Datzy: Fossils from the North-west of South Australia.

Mr. M. J, Tyner: An Albino Frog Found in South Australia.

Dr. P. Crowcrorr: A Slaughter of Wombats.

Mr, J. Grover: South Australia’s Unique Sea Dragon.

Mr. Kk, Eywarns: Comparison of Rock Engravings Between South and Central

Australia.

Mr. G. L. Prerry: Stone Artefacts from New Britain.

Mr, J. B. Fmman: Stratigraphy of Surficial Deposits of South Australia.

Dr. E. A. SHaw: Two New Species from the South Australian Flora.

AWARDS OF THE SIR JOSEPH VERCO MEDAL

Summary

191

AWARDS OF THE SIR JOSEPH VERCO MEDAL

1929

1930

1931

1933

1935

1938

1943

1944

1945

1946

1955

1956

1957

1959

1960

1961

1962

1963

1964

1965

Pror, Watrer Howcntn, F.G.S.

Joun McC. Buack, A.L.S.

Pror, Sir Dovcias Mawson, O.B,E., D.Se., B.E., FBS.

Pror. J. Bunton Ciewanp, M.D.

Pror. T, Harvey Jonnston, M.A., D.Sc.

Pror. J. A. Prescorr, D.Sc., F.A.C.L

Ilrmperr Womerscey, A.1..5., F.B.E.S.

Pror. J. G. Woon, D.Sc., Ph.D.

Crecu. T. Mapican, M.A., B.F., D.Sc.. F.G.S,

Hersert M. Hate. O.B.E.

L, Kerm Warp, LS,0., B.A., B.E., D.Se,

N. B. Tinnare, B.Sc.

C. S. Preer. D.Sc.

C, G. StepHEns, D,Sc,

H. H. Finuayson.

R. L. Sprout. Ph.D,

H. G. Anprewartua, M.Ag.Sc., D.Se., FAA.

N. H. Lupsproox, M,A., Ph.D.. D1.C.. F.G.S.

R. V. Sovurucorr, D.Sc., M.D., B.S., D.T.M. & H.

Pror. A. R. Atperwan, D.Sc., Ph.D., F.G.S.

For contributions to science in the fields of petrology, ceramics, meleo-

ritics and sedimentology, Notable are Alderman’s researches on the

Henbury Meteorite craters, eclogites, and his significant contributions

towards the understanding of the chemistry, mineralogy and deposition

of carbonate sediments.

CONTENTS

PAGE

C. R. Twipate: Chronology of Denudation in the Southern Flinders

Ranges, South Australia - - - BEB rts aie - 3

R. Epwanrps: Comparative Study of Rock Engravings in South and

Central Australia - - - - - - - - - - 33

R. L. Corres and R. T. Lance: Some Aspects of the Dynamics of meee

tation in the Port Augusta-Iron Knob Area, South Australia — - Al

B. G. Forses: Features of Palaeozoic Tectonism in South Australia = - 45

R. T. Lance: Vegetation in the Musgrave Ranges, South Australia - - or

D. J. Surron and R. E. Wuire: ie pour pis eaten Pareniriake at

August 28th, 1965 -~ - 67

D. E. Symon: Revision of the Genus Cassia L. Caesalpiniaceae in Australia 73

D. Smate: The Petrology and Age Re toushins of mocks in oe, BeonnAb IS

Range, South Australia = - 153

D. H. McCotx: A Hepantkapty Reoveryed Suen se Port “Campbell

Victoria - - * - - - 169

T. D. Campse tt and P. §. Hossre.p: Australian Aboriginal Stone Arrange-

ments in Northwest South Australia - Reet ee dS el wakes ou bY

Obituary: B. C. Corron - - - - - - - - - - 179

General Account, Library Account - - - - - - - - 180

Research Account - - - - - - - - - - - 181

List of Followers we oa er OS page ie a ee ae

List of Lectures and Exhibits, 1965-66 - : : : - : - 190

Awards of the Sir Joseph Vereo Medal - - - ~-- - = - J91